diff options
| author | Indrajith K L | 2022-12-03 17:00:20 +0530 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Indrajith K L | 2022-12-03 17:00:20 +0530 |
| commit | f5c4671bfbad96bf346bd7e9a21fc4317b4959df (patch) | |
| tree | 2764fc62da58f2ba8da7ed341643fc359873142f /coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man | |
| download | cli-tools-windows-f5c4671bfbad96bf346bd7e9a21fc4317b4959df.tar.gz cli-tools-windows-f5c4671bfbad96bf346bd7e9a21fc4317b4959df.tar.bz2 cli-tools-windows-f5c4671bfbad96bf346bd7e9a21fc4317b4959df.zip | |
Diffstat (limited to 'coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man')
155 files changed, 30575 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/basename.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/basename.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..036ef43 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/basename.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +BASENAME(1) User Commands BASENAME(1) + + + + + +NAME + basename - strip directory and suffix from filenames + +SYNOPSIS + basename NAME [SUFFIX] + basename OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Print NAME with any leading directory components + removed. If specified, also remove a trailing SUFFIX. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by FIXME unknown. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for basename is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and basename programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info basename + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +basename 5.3.0 November 2004 BASENAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cat.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cat.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3672f0f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cat.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +CAT(1) User Commands CAT(1) + + + + + +NAME + cat - concatenate files and print on the standard output + +SYNOPSIS + cat [OPTION] [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Concatenate FILE(s), or standard input, to standard out- + put. + + -A, --show-all + equivalent to -vET + + -b, --number-nonblank + number nonblank output lines + + -e equivalent to -vE + + -E, --show-ends + display $ at end of each line + + -n, --number + number all output lines + + -s, --squeeze-blank + never more than one single blank line + + -t equivalent to -vT + + -T, --show-tabs + display TAB characters as ^I + + -u (ignored) + + -v, --show-nonprinting + use ^ and M- notation, except for LFD and TAB + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR + Written by Torbjorn Granlund and Richard M. Stallman. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for cat is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and cat programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info cat + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chgrp.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chgrp.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ba4c4a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chgrp.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +CHGRP(1) User Commands CHGRP(1) + + + + + +NAME + chgrp - change group ownership + +SYNOPSIS + chgrp [OPTION]... GROUP FILE... + chgrp [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE... + +DESCRIPTION + Change the group of each FILE to GROUP. With --refer- + ence, change the group of each FILE to that of RFILE. + + -c, --changes + like verbose but report only when a change is + made + + --dereference + affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather + than the symbolic link itself (this is the + default) + + -h, --no-dereference + affect each symbolic link instead of any refer- + enced file (useful only on systems that can + change the ownership of a symlink) + + --no-preserve-root do not treat `/' specially (the + default) + + --preserve-root + fail to operate recursively on `/' + + -f, --silent, --quiet + suppress most error messages + + --reference=RFILE + use RFILE's group rather than the specifying + GROUP value + + -R, --recursive + operate on files and directories recursively + + -v, --verbose + output a diagnostic for every file processed + + The following options modify how a hierarchy is tra- + versed when the -R option is also specified. If more + than one is specified, only the final one takes effect. + + -H if a command line argument is a symbolic link to + a directory, traverse it + + -L traverse every symbolic link to a directory + encountered + + -P do not traverse any symbolic links (default) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for chgrp is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and chgrp programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info chgrp + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chgrp 5.3.0 November 2004 CHGRP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chmod.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chmod.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..273bb40 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chmod.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +CHMOD(1) User Commands CHMOD(1) + + + + + +NAME + chmod - change file access permissions + +SYNOPSIS + chmod [OPTION]... MODE[,MODE]... FILE... + chmod [OPTION]... OCTAL-MODE FILE... + chmod [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE... + +DESCRIPTION + This manual page documents the GNU version of chmod. + chmod changes the permissions of each given file accord- + ing to mode, which can be either a symbolic representa- + tion of changes to make, or an octal number representing + the bit pattern for the new permissions. + + The format of a symbolic mode is `[ugoa...][[+-=][rwxXs- + tugo...]...][,...]'. Multiple symbolic operations can + be given, separated by commas. + + A combination of the letters `ugoa' controls which + users' access to the file will be changed: the user who + owns it (u), other users in the file's group (g), other + users not in the file's group (o), or all users (a). If + none of these are given, the effect is as if `a' were + given, but bits that are set in the umask are not + affected. + + The operator `+' causes the permissions selected to be + added to the existing permissions of each file; `-' + causes them to be removed; and `=' causes them to be the + only permissions that the file has. + + The letters `rwxXstugo' select the new permissions for + the affected users: read (r), write (w), execute (or + access for directories) (x), execute only if the file is + a directory or already has execute permission for some + user (X), set user or group ID on execution (s), sticky + (t), the permissions granted to the user who owns the + file (u), the permissions granted to other users who are + members of the file's group (g), and the permissions + granted to users that are in neither of the two preced- + ing categories (o). + + A numeric mode is from one to four octal digits (0-7), + derived by adding up the bits with values 4, 2, and 1. + Any omitted digits are assumed to be leading zeros. The + first digit selects the set user ID (4) and set group ID + (2) and sticky (1) attributes. The second digit selects + permissions for the user who owns the file: read (4), + write (2), and execute (1); the third selects permis- + sions for other users in the file's group, with the same + values; and the fourth for other users not in the file's + group, with the same values. + + chmod never changes the permissions of symbolic links; + the chmod system call cannot change their permissions. + This is not a problem since the permissions of symbolic + links are never used. However, for each symbolic link + listed on the command line, chmod changes the permis- + sions of the pointed-to file. In contrast, chmod + ignores symbolic links encountered during recursive + directory traversals. + +STICKY FILES + On older Unix systems, the sticky bit caused executable + files to be hoarded in swap space. This feature is not + useful on modern VM systems, and the Linux kernel + ignores the sticky bit on files. Other kernels may use + the sticky bit on files for system-defined purposes. On + some systems, only the superuser can set the sticky bit + on files. + +STICKY DIRECTORIES + When the sticky bit is set on a directory, files in that + directory may be unlinked or renamed only by root or + their owner. Without the sticky bit, anyone able to + write to the directory can delete or rename files. The + sticky bit is commonly found on directories, such as + /tmp, that are world-writable. + +OPTIONS + Change the mode of each FILE to MODE. + + -c, --changes + like verbose but report only when a change is + made + + --no-preserve-root + do not treat `/' specially (the default) + + --preserve-root + fail to operate recursively on `/' + + -f, --silent, --quiet + suppress most error messages + + -v, --verbose + output a diagnostic for every file processed + + --reference=RFILE + use RFILE's mode instead of MODE values + + -R, --recursive + change files and directories recursively + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Each MODE is one or more of the letters ugoa, one of the + symbols +-= and one or more of the letters rwxXstugo. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for chmod is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and chmod programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info chmod + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chmod 5.3.0 November 2004 CHMOD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chown.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chown.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9daec34 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chown.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +CHOWN(1) User Commands CHOWN(1) + + + + + +NAME + chown - change file owner and group + +SYNOPSIS + chown [OPTION]... [OWNER][:[GROUP]] FILE... + chown [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE... + +DESCRIPTION + This manual page documents the GNU version of chown. + chown changes the user and/or group ownership of each + given file, according to its first non-option argument, + which is interpreted as follows. If only a user name + (or numeric user ID) is given, that user is made the + owner of each given file, and the files' group is not + changed. If the user name is followed by a colon or dot + and a group name (or numeric group ID), with no spaces + between them, the group ownership of the files is + changed as well. If a colon or dot but no group name + follows the user name, that user is made the owner of + the files and the group of the files is changed to that + user's login group. If the colon or dot and group are + given, but the user name is omitted, only the group of + the files is changed; in this case, chown performs the + same function as chgrp. + +OPTIONS + Change the owner and/or group of each FILE to OWNER + and/or GROUP. With --reference, change the owner and + group of each FILE to those of RFILE. + + -c, --changes + like verbose but report only when a change is + made + + --dereference + affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather + than the symbolic link itself (this is the + default) + + -h, --no-dereference + affect each symbolic link instead of any refer- + enced file (useful only on systems that can + change the ownership of a symlink) + + --from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP + change the owner and/or group of each file only + if its current owner and/or group match those + specified here. Either may be omitted, in which + case a match is not required for the omitted + attribute. + + --no-preserve-root do not treat `/' specially (the + default) + + --preserve-root + fail to operate recursively on `/' + + -f, --silent, --quiet + suppress most error messages + + --reference=RFILE + use RFILE's owner and group rather than the spec- + ifying OWNER:GROUP values + + -R, --recursive + operate on files and directories recursively + + -v, --verbose + output a diagnostic for every file processed + + The following options modify how a hierarchy is tra- + versed when the -R option is also specified. If more + than one is specified, only the final one takes effect. + + -H if a command line argument is a symbolic link to + a directory, traverse it + + -L traverse every symbolic link to a directory + encountered + + -P do not traverse any symbolic links (default) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Owner is unchanged if missing. Group is unchanged if + missing, but changed to login group if implied by a `:' + following a symbolic OWNER. OWNER and GROUP may be + numeric as well as symbolic. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for chown is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and chown programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info chown + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chown 5.3.0 November 2004 CHOWN(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chroot.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chroot.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9a639f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chroot.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +CHROOT(1) User Commands CHROOT(1) + + + + + +NAME + chroot - run command or interactive shell with special + root directory + +SYNOPSIS + chroot NEWROOT [COMMAND...] + chroot OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Run COMMAND with root directory set to NEWROOT. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If no command is given, run ``${SHELL} -i'' (default: + /bin/sh). + +AUTHOR + Written by Roland McGrath. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for chroot is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and chroot programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info chroot + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chroot 5.3.0 November 2004 CHROOT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cksum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cksum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b21f41f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cksum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +CKSUM(1) User Commands CKSUM(1) + + + + + +NAME + cksum - checksum and count the bytes in a file + +SYNOPSIS + cksum [FILE]... + cksum [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION + Print CRC checksum and byte counts of each FILE. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Q. Frank Xia. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for cksum is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and cksum programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info cksum + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +cksum (coreutils) 5.3.0 November 2004 CKSUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/comm.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/comm.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2ac7f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/comm.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +COMM(1) User Commands COMM(1) + + + + + +NAME + comm - compare two sorted files line by line + +SYNOPSIS + comm [OPTION]... FILE1 FILE2 + +DESCRIPTION + Compare sorted files FILE1 and FILE2 line by line. + + With no options, produce three-column output. Column + one contains lines unique to FILE1, column two contains + lines unique to FILE2, and column three contains lines + common to both files. + + -1 suppress lines unique to FILE1 + + -2 suppress lines unique to FILE2 + + -3 suppress lines that appear in both files + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for comm is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and comm programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info comm + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +comm 5.3.0 December 2004 COMM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cp.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cp.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c30a403 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cp.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +CP(1) User Commands CP(1) + + + + + +NAME + cp - copy files and directories + +SYNOPSIS + cp [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST + cp [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY + cp [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE... + +DESCRIPTION + Copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --archive + same as -dpR + + --backup[=CONTROL] + make a backup of each existing destination file + + -b like --backup but does not accept an argument + + --copy-contents + copy contents of special files when recursive + + -d same as --no-dereference --preserve=link + + --no-dereference + never follow symbolic links + + -f, --force + if an existing destination file cannot be opened, + remove it and try again + + -i, --interactive + prompt before overwrite + + -H follow command-line symbolic links + + -l, --link + link files instead of copying + + -L, --dereference + always follow symbolic links + + -p same as --preserve=mode,ownership,timestamps + + --preserve[=ATTR_LIST] + preserve the specified attributes (default: + mode,ownership,timestamps), if possible addi- + tional attributes: links, all + + --no-preserve=ATTR_LIST + don't preserve the specified attributes + + --parents + append source path to DIRECTORY + + -P same as `--no-dereference' + + -R, -r, --recursive + copy directories recursively + + --remove-destination + remove each existing destination file before + attempting to open it (contrast with --force) + + --reply={yes,no,query} + specify how to handle the prompt about an exist- + ing destination file + + --sparse=WHEN + control creation of sparse files + + --strip-trailing-slashes remove any trailing slashes + from each SOURCE + argument + + -s, --symbolic-link + make symbolic links instead of copying + + -S, --suffix=SUFFIX + override the usual backup suffix + + -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY + copy all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY + + -T, --no-target-directory + treat DEST as a normal file + + -u, --update + copy only when the SOURCE file is newer than the + destination file or when the destination file is + missing + + -v, --verbose + explain what is being done + + -x, --one-file-system + stay on this file system + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + By default, sparse SOURCE files are detected by a crude + heuristic and the corresponding DEST file is made sparse + as well. That is the behavior selected by + --sparse=auto. Specify --sparse=always to create a + sparse DEST file whenever the SOURCE file contains a + long enough sequence of zero bytes. Use --sparse=never + to inhibit creation of sparse files. + + The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or + SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be + selected via the --backup option or through the VER- + SION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values: + + none, off + never make backups (even if --backup is given) + + numbered, t + make numbered backups + + existing, nil + numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- + wise + + simple, never + always make simple backups + + As a special case, cp makes a backup of SOURCE when the + force and backup options are given and SOURCE and DEST + are the same name for an existing, regular file. + +AUTHOR + Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, and Jim + Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for cp is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and cp programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info cp + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +cp 5.3.0 November 2004 CP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/csplit.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/csplit.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0061fc --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/csplit.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +CSPLIT(1) User Commands CSPLIT(1) + + + + + +NAME + csplit - split a file into sections determined by con- + text lines + +SYNOPSIS + csplit [OPTION]... FILE PATTERN... + +DESCRIPTION + Output pieces of FILE separated by PATTERN(s) to files + `xx01', `xx02', ..., and output byte counts of each + piece to standard output. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -b, --suffix-format=FORMAT use sprintf FORMAT instead of + %02d + + -f, --prefix=PREFIX + use PREFIX instead of `xx' + + -k, --keep-files + do not remove output files on errors + + -n, --digits=DIGITS + use specified number of digits instead of 2 + + -s, --quiet, --silent + do not print counts of output file sizes + + -z, --elide-empty-files + remove empty output files + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Read standard input if FILE is -. Each PATTERN may be: + + INTEGER + copy up to but not including specified line num- + ber + + /REGEXP/[OFFSET] + copy up to but not including a matching line + + %REGEXP%[OFFSET] + skip to, but not including a matching line + + {INTEGER} + repeat the previous pattern specified number of + times + + {*} repeat the previous pattern as many times as pos- + sible + + A line OFFSET is a required `+' or `-' followed by a + positive integer. + +AUTHOR + Written by Stuart Kemp and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for csplit is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and csplit programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info csplit + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +csplit 5.3.0 December 2004 CSPLIT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cut.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cut.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c706e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cut.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +CUT(1) User Commands CUT(1) + + + + + +NAME + cut - remove sections from each line of files + +SYNOPSIS + cut [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print selected parts of lines from each FILE to standard + output. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -b, --bytes=LIST + select only these bytes + + -c, --characters=LIST + select only these characters + + -d, --delimiter=DELIM + use DELIM instead of TAB for field delimiter + + -f, --fields=LIST + select only these fields; also print any line + that contains no delimiter character, unless the + -s option is specified + + -n (ignored) + + --complement + complement the set of selected bytes, characters + or fields. + + -s, --only-delimited + do not print lines not containing delimiters + + --output-delimiter=STRING + use STRING as the output delimiter the default is + to use the input delimiter + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Use one, and only one of -b, -c or -f. Each LIST is + made up of one range, or many ranges separated by com- + mas. Selected input is written in the same order that + it is read, and is written exactly once. Each range is + one of: + + N N'th byte, character or field, counted from 1 + + N- from N'th byte, character or field, to end of + line + + N-M from N'th to M'th (included) byte, character or + field + + -M from first to M'th (included) byte, character or + field + + With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR + Written by David Ihnat, David MacKenzie, and Jim Meyer- + ing. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for cut is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and cut programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info cut + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +cut 5.3.0 December 2004 CUT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/date.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/date.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e98235 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/date.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +DATE(1) User Commands DATE(1) + + + + + +NAME + date - print or set the system date and time + +SYNOPSIS + date [OPTION]... [+FORMAT] + date [-u|--utc|--universal] [MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]] + +DESCRIPTION + Display the current time in the given FORMAT, or set the + system date. + + -d, --date=STRING + display time described by STRING, not `now' + + -f, --file=DATEFILE + like --date once for each line of DATEFILE + + --iso-8601[=TIMESPEC] output date/time in ISO 8601 for- + mat. + TIMESPEC=`date' for date only (the default), + `hours', `minutes', `seconds', or `ns' for date + and time to the indicated precision. + + -r, --reference=FILE + display the last modification time of FILE + + -R, --rfc-2822 + output RFC-2822 compliant date string + + -s, --set=STRING + set time described by STRING + + -u, --utc, --universal + print or set Coordinated Universal Time + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + FORMAT controls the output. The only valid option for + the second form specifies Coordinated Universal Time. + Interpreted sequences are: + + %% a literal % + + %a locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat) + + %A locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sun- + day..Saturday) + + %b locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec) + + %B locale's full month name, variable length (Jan- + uary..December) + + %c locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST + 1989) + + %C century (year divided by 100 and truncated to an + integer) [00-99] + + %d day of month (01..31) + + %D date (mm/dd/yy) + + %e day of month, blank padded ( 1..31) + + %F same as %Y-%m-%d + + %g the 2-digit year corresponding to the %V week + number + + %G the 4-digit year corresponding to the %V week + number + + %h same as %b + + %H hour (00..23) + + %I hour (01..12) + + %j day of year (001..366) + + %k hour ( 0..23) + + %l hour ( 1..12) + + %m month (01..12) + + %M minute (00..59) + + %n a newline + + %N nanoseconds (000000000..999999999) + + %p locale's upper case AM or PM indicator (blank in + many locales) + + %P locale's lower case am or pm indicator (blank in + many locales) + + %r time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M) + + %R time, 24-hour (hh:mm) + + %s seconds since `00:00:00 1970-01-01 UTC' (a GNU + extension) + + %S second (00..60); the 60 is necessary to accommo- + date a leap second + + %t a horizontal tab + + %T time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss) + + %u day of week (1..7); 1 represents Monday + + %U week number of year with Sunday as first day of + week (00..53) + + %V week number of year with Monday as first day of + week (01..53) + + %w day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday + + %W week number of year with Monday as first day of + week (00..53) + + %x locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy) + + %X locale's time representation (%H:%M:%S) + + %y last two digits of year (00..99) + + %Y year (1970...) + + %z RFC-2822 style numeric timezone (-0500) (a non- + standard extension) + + %Z time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone + is determinable + + By default, date pads numeric fields with zeroes. GNU + date recognizes the following modifiers between `%' and + a numeric directive. + + `-' (hyphen) do not pad the field `_' (under- + score) pad the field with spaces + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for date is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and date programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info date + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +date 5.3.0 November 2004 DATE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dd.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dd.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a89f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dd.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +DD(1) User Commands DD(1) + + + + + +NAME + dd - convert and copy a file + +SYNOPSIS + dd [OPERAND]... + dd OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Copy a file, converting and formatting according to the + operands. + + bs=BYTES + force ibs=BYTES and obs=BYTES + + cbs=BYTES + convert BYTES bytes at a time + + conv=CONVS + convert the file as per the comma separated sym- + bol list + + count=BLOCKS + copy only BLOCKS input blocks + + ibs=BYTES + read BYTES bytes at a time + + if=FILE + read from FILE instead of stdin + + iflag=FLAGS + read as per the comma separated symbol list + + obs=BYTES + write BYTES bytes at a time + + of=FILE + write to FILE instead of stdout + + oflag=FLAGS + write as per the comma separated symbol list + + seek=BLOCKS + skip BLOCKS obs-sized blocks at start of output + + skip=BLOCKS + skip BLOCKS ibs-sized blocks at start of input + + status=noxfer + suppress transfer statistics + + BLOCKS and BYTES may be followed by the following multi- + plicative suffixes: xM M, c 1, w 2, b 512, kB 1000, K + 1024, MB 1000*1000, M 1024*1024, GB 1000*1000*1000, G + 1024*1024*1024, and so on for T, P, E, Z, Y. + + Each CONV symbol may be: + + ascii from EBCDIC to ASCII + + ebcdic from ASCII to EBCDIC + + ibm from ASCII to alternate EBCDIC + + block pad newline-terminated records with spaces to + cbs-size + + unblock + replace trailing spaces in cbs-size records with + newline + + lcase change upper case to lower case + + nocreat + do not create the output file + + excl fail if the output file already exists + + notrunc + do not truncate the output file + + ucase change lower case to upper case + + swab swap every pair of input bytes + + noerror + continue after read errors + + sync pad every input block with NULs to ibs-size; when + used + + with block or unblock, pad with spaces rather + than NULs + + fdatasync physically write output file data + before finishing fsync likewise, but also + write metadata + + Each FLAG symbol may be: + + append append mode (makes sense only for output) + + direct use direct I/O for data + + dsync use synchronized I/O for data + + sync likewise, but also for metadata + + nonblock + use non-blocking I/O + + nofollow + do not follow symlinks + + noctty do not assign controlling terminal from file + + Sending a SIGUSR1 signal to a running `dd' process makes + it print I/O statistics to standard error, then to + resume copying. + + $ dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/null& pid=$! + $ kill -USR1 $pid; sleep 1; kill $pid + + 18335302+0 records in 18335302+0 records out + 9387674624 bytes (9.4 GB) copied, 34.6279 sec- + onds, 271 MB/s + + Options are: + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, and Stuart Kemp. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for dd is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and dd programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info dd + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dd (coreutils) 5.3.0 November 2004 DD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/df.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/df.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2b42a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/df.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +DF(1) User Commands DF(1) + + + + + +NAME + df - report file system disk space usage + +SYNOPSIS + df [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + This manual page documents the GNU version of df. df + displays the amount of disk space available on the file + system containing each file name argument. If no file + name is given, the space available on all currently + mounted file systems is shown. Disk space is shown in + 1K blocks by default, unless the environment variable + POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, in which case 512-byte blocks + are used. + + If an argument is the absolute file name of a disk + device node containing a mounted file system, df shows + the space available on that file system rather than on + the file system containing the device node (which is + always the root file system). This version of df cannot + show the space available on unmounted file systems, + because on most kinds of systems doing so requires very + nonportable intimate knowledge of file system struc- + tures. + +OPTIONS + Show information about the file system on which each + FILE resides, or all file systems by default. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --all + include file systems having 0 blocks + + -B, --block-size=SIZE use SIZE-byte blocks + + -h, --human-readable + print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K + 234M 2G) + + -H, --si + likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + + -i, --inodes + list inode information instead of block usage + + -k like --block-size=1K + + -l, --local + limit listing to local file systems + + --no-sync + do not invoke sync before getting usage info + (default) + + -P, --portability + use the POSIX output format + + --sync invoke sync before getting usage info + + -t, --type=TYPE + limit listing to file systems of type TYPE + + -T, --print-type + print file system type + + -x, --exclude-type=TYPE + limit listing to file systems not of type TYPE + + -v (ignored) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed + by) one of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M + 1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +AUTHOR + Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, and Paul + Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for df is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and df programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info df + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +df 5.3.0 November 2004 DF(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64b3972 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +DIR(1) User Commands DIR(1) + + + + + +NAME + dir - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS + dir [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + List information about the FILEs (the current directory + by default). Sort entries alphabetically if none of + -cftuSUX nor --sort. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --all + do not ignore entries starting with . + + -A, --almost-all + do not list implied . and .. + + --author + with -l, print the author of each file + + -b, --escape + print octal escapes for nongraphic characters + + --block-size=SIZE + use SIZE-byte blocks + + -B, --ignore-backups + do not list implied entries ending with ~ + + -c with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of last + modification of file status information) with -l: + show ctime and sort by name otherwise: sort by + ctime + + -C list entries by columns + + --color[=WHEN] + control whether color is used to distinguish file + types. WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto' + + -d, --directory + list directory entries instead of contents, and + do not dereference symbolic links + + -D, --dired + generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode + + -f do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst + + -F, --classify + append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries + + --format=WORD + across -x, commas -m, horizontal -x, long -l, + single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C + + --full-time + like -l --time-style=full-iso + + -g like -l, but do not list owner + + -G, --no-group + like -l, but do not list group + + -h, --human-readable + with -l, print sizes in human readable format + (e.g., 1K 234M 2G) + + --si likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + + -H, --dereference-command-line + follow symbolic links listed on the command line + + --dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir + follow each command line symbolic link that + points to a directory + + --hide=PATTERN + do not list implied entries matching shell PAT- + TERN (overridden by -a or -A) + + --indicator-style=WORD append indicator with style WORD + to entry names: + none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p) + + -i, --inode + with -l, print the index number of each file + + -I, --ignore=PATTERN + do not list implied entries matching shell PAT- + TERN + + -k like --block-size=1K + + -l use a long listing format + + -L, --dereference + when showing file information for a symbolic + link, show information for the file the link ref- + erences rather than for the link itself + + -m fill width with a comma separated list of entries + + -n, --numeric-uid-gid + like -l, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs + + -N, --literal + print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control + characters specially) + + -o like -l, but do not list group information + + -p, --file-type + append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries + + -q, --hide-control-chars + print ? instead of non graphic characters + + --show-control-chars + show non graphic characters as-is (default unless + program is `ls' and output is a terminal) + + -Q, --quote-name + enclose entry names in double quotes + + --quoting-style=WORD + use quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, + locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape + + -r, --reverse + reverse order while sorting + + -R, --recursive + list subdirectories recursively + + -s, --size + with -l, print size of each file, in blocks + + -S sort by file size + + --sort=WORD + extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t, version + -v, status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use + -u + + --time=WORD + with -l, show time as WORD instead of modifica- + tion time: atime, access, use, ctime or status; + use specified time as sort key if --sort=time + + --time-style=STYLE + with -l, show times using style STYLE: full-iso, + long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT. FORMAT is inter- + preted like `date'; if FORMAT is FORMAT1<new- + line>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to non-recent files + and FORMAT2 to recent files; if STYLE is prefixed + with `posix-', STYLE takes effect only outside + the POSIX locale + + -t sort by modification time + + -T, --tabsize=COLS + assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8 + + -u with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: + show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort + by access time + + -U do not sort; list entries in directory order + + -v sort by version + + -w, --width=COLS + assume screen width instead of current value + + -x list entries by lines instead of by columns + + -X sort alphabetically by entry extension + + -1 list one file per line + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed + by) one of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M + 1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + + By default, color is not used to distinguish types of + files. That is equivalent to using --color=none. Using + the --color option without the optional WHEN argument is + equivalent to using --color=always. With --color=auto, + color codes are output only if standard output is con- + nected to a terminal (tty). + + Exit status is 0 if OK, 1 if minor problems, 2 if seri- + ous trouble. + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for dir is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and dir programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info dir + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dir 5.3.0 December 2004 DIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dircolors.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dircolors.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab466c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dircolors.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +DIRCOLORS(1) User Commands DIRCOLORS(1) + + + + + +NAME + dircolors - color setup for ls + +SYNOPSIS + dircolors [OPTION]... [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION + Output commands to set the LS_COLORS environment vari- + able. + + Determine format of output: + -b, --sh, --bourne-shell + output Bourne shell code to set LS_COLORS + + -c, --csh, --c-shell + output C shell code to set LS_COLORS + + -p, --print-database + output defaults + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If FILE is specified, read it to determine which colors + to use for which file types and extensions. Otherwise, + a precompiled database is used. For details on the for- + mat of these files, run `dircolors --print-database'. + +AUTHOR + Written by H. Peter Anvin. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for dircolors is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and dircolors programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info dircolors + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dircolors 5.3.0 November 2004 DIRCOLORS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dirname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dirname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a0e0a5a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dirname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +DIRNAME(1) User Commands DIRNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME + dirname - strip non-directory suffix from file name + +SYNOPSIS + dirname NAME + dirname OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Print NAME with its trailing /component removed; if NAME + contains no /'s, output `.' (meaning the current direc- + tory). + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for dirname is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and dirname programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info dirname + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dirname 5.3.0 November 2004 DIRNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/du.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/du.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ede7f2b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/du.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +DU(1) User Commands DU(1) + + + + + +NAME + du - estimate file space usage + +SYNOPSIS + du [OPTION]... [FILE]... + du [OPTION]... --files0-from=F + +DESCRIPTION + Summarize disk usage of each FILE, recursively for + directories. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --all + write counts for all files, not just directories + + --apparent-size + print apparent sizes, rather than disk usage; + although the apparent size is usually smaller, it + may be larger due to holes in (`sparse') files, + internal fragmentation, indirect blocks, and the + like + + -B, --block-size=SIZE use SIZE-byte blocks + + -b, --bytes + equivalent to `--apparent-size --block-size=1' + + -c, --total + produce a grand total + + -D, --dereference-args + dereference FILEs that are symbolic links + + --files0-from=F + summarize disk usage of the NUL-terminated file + names specified in file F + + -H like --si, but also evokes a warning; will soon + change to be equivalent to --dereference-args + (-D) + + -h, --human-readable + print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K + 234M 2G) + + --si like -h, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + + -k like --block-size=1K + + -l, --count-links + count sizes many times if hard linked + + -L, --dereference + dereference all symbolic links + + -P, --no-dereference + don't follow any symbolic links (this is the + default) + + -0, --null + end each output line with 0 byte rather than new- + line + + -S, --separate-dirs + do not include size of subdirectories + + -s, --summarize + display only a total for each argument + + -x, --one-file-system + skip directories on different file systems + + -X FILE, --exclude-from=FILE + Exclude files that match any pattern in FILE. + + --exclude=PATTERN Exclude files that match PATTERN. + + --max-depth=N + print the total for a directory (or file, with + --all) only if it is N or fewer levels below the + command line argument; --max-depth=0 is the same + as --summarize + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed + by) one of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M + 1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +PATTERNS + PATTERN is a shell pattern (not a regular expression). + The pattern ? matches any one character, whereas * + matches any string (composed of zero, one or multiple + characters). For example, *.o will match any files + whose names end in .o. Therefore, the command + + du --exclude='*.o' + + will skip all files and subdirectories ending in .o + (including the file .o itself). + +AUTHOR + Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, Paul + Eggert, and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for du is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and du programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info du + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +du 5.3.0 January 2005 DU(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/echo.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/echo.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..472d132 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/echo.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +ECHO(1) User Commands ECHO(1) + + + + + +NAME + echo - display a line of text + +SYNOPSIS + echo [OPTION]... [STRING]... + +DESCRIPTION + NOTE: your shell may have its own version of echo which + will supersede the version described here. Please refer + to your shell's documentation for details about the + options it supports. + + Echo the STRING(s) to standard output. + + -n do not output the trailing newline + + -e enable interpretation of backslash escapes + + -E disable interpretation of backslash escapes + (default) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If -e is in effect, the following sequences are recog- + nized: + + \0NNN the character whose ASCII code is NNN (octal) + + \\ backslash + + \a alert (BEL) + + \b backspace + + \c suppress trailing newline + + \f form feed + + \n new line + + \r carriage return + + \t horizontal tab + + \v vertical tab + +AUTHOR + Written by FIXME unknown. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for echo is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and echo programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info echo + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +echo 5.3.0 November 2004 ECHO(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/env.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/env.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c70d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/env.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +ENV(1) User Commands ENV(1) + + + + + +NAME + env - run a program in a modified environment + +SYNOPSIS + env [OPTION]... [-] [NAME=VALUE]... [COMMAND [ARG]...] + +DESCRIPTION + Set each NAME to VALUE in the environment and run COM- + MAND. + + -i, --ignore-environment + start with an empty environment + + -u, --unset=NAME + remove variable from the environment + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + A mere - implies -i. If no COMMAND, print the resulting + environment. + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Mlynarik and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for env is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and env programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info env + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +env 5.3.0 November 2004 ENV(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expand.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expand.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..721fb19 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expand.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +EXPAND(1) User Commands EXPAND(1) + + + + + +NAME + expand - convert tabs to spaces + +SYNOPSIS + expand [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Convert tabs in each FILE to spaces, writing to standard + output. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard + input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -i, --initial + do not convert tabs after non blanks + + -t, --tabs=NUMBER + have tabs NUMBER characters apart, not 8 + + -t, --tabs=LIST + use comma separated list of explicit tab posi- + tions + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + unexpand(1) + + The full documentation for expand is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and expand programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info expand + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +expand 5.3.0 November 2004 EXPAND(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expr.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expr.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71d0e8d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expr.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +EXPR(1) User Commands EXPR(1) + + + + + +NAME + expr - evaluate expressions + +SYNOPSIS + expr EXPRESSION + expr OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Print the value of EXPRESSION to standard output. A + blank line below separates increasing precedence groups. + EXPRESSION may be: + + ARG1 | ARG2 + ARG1 if it is neither null nor 0, otherwise ARG2 + + ARG1 & ARG2 + ARG1 if neither argument is null or 0, otherwise + 0 + + ARG1 < ARG2 + ARG1 is less than ARG2 + + ARG1 <= ARG2 + ARG1 is less than or equal to ARG2 + + ARG1 = ARG2 + ARG1 is equal to ARG2 + + ARG1 != ARG2 + ARG1 is unequal to ARG2 + + ARG1 >= ARG2 + ARG1 is greater than or equal to ARG2 + + ARG1 > ARG2 + ARG1 is greater than ARG2 + + ARG1 + ARG2 + arithmetic sum of ARG1 and ARG2 + + ARG1 - ARG2 + arithmetic difference of ARG1 and ARG2 + + ARG1 * ARG2 + arithmetic product of ARG1 and ARG2 + + ARG1 / ARG2 + arithmetic quotient of ARG1 divided by ARG2 + + ARG1 % ARG2 + arithmetic remainder of ARG1 divided by ARG2 + + STRING : REGEXP + anchored pattern match of REGEXP in STRING + + match STRING REGEXP + same as STRING : REGEXP + + substr STRING POS LENGTH + substring of STRING, POS counted from 1 + + index STRING CHARS + index in STRING where any CHARS is found, or 0 + + length STRING + length of STRING + + + TOKEN + interpret TOKEN as a string, even if it is a + + keyword like `match' or an operator like `/' + + ( EXPRESSION ) + value of EXPRESSION + + Beware that many operators need to be escaped or quoted + for shells. Comparisons are arithmetic if both ARGs are + numbers, else lexicographical. Pattern matches return + the string matched between \( and \) or null; if \( and + \) are not used, they return the number of characters + matched or 0. + + Exit status is 0 if EXPRESSION is neither null nor 0, 1 + if EXPRESSION is null or 0, 2 if EXPRESSION is syntacti- + cally invalid, and 3 if an error occurred. + +AUTHOR + Written by Mike Parker. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for expr is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and expr programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info expr + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +expr 5.3.0 November 2004 EXPR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/factor.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/factor.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93cc432 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/factor.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +FACTOR(1) User Commands FACTOR(1) + + + + + +NAME + factor - factor numbers + +SYNOPSIS + factor [NUMBER]... + factor OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Print the prime factors of each NUMBER. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Print the prime factors of all specified integer NUM- + BERs. + If no arguments + + are specified on the command line, they are read + from standard input. + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Rubin. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for factor is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and factor programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info factor + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +factor 5.3.0 December 2004 FACTOR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/false.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/false.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f12187 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/false.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +FALSE(1) User Commands FALSE(1) + + + + + +NAME + false - do nothing, unsuccessfully + +SYNOPSIS + false [ignored command line arguments] + false OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Exit with a status code indicating failure. + + These option names may not be abbreviated. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for false is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and false programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info false + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +false 5.3.0 November 2004 FALSE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fmt.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fmt.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9be5e44 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fmt.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +FMT(1) User Commands FMT(1) + + + + + +NAME + fmt - simple optimal text formatter + +SYNOPSIS + fmt [-DIGITS] [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Reformat each paragraph in the FILE(s), writing to stan- + dard output. If no FILE or if FILE is `-', read stan- + dard input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -c, --crown-margin + preserve indentation of first two lines + + -p, --prefix=STRING + reformat only lines beginning with STRING, reat- + taching the prefix to reformatted lines + + -s, --split-only + split long lines, but do not refill + + -t, --tagged-paragraph + indentation of first line different from second + + -u, --uniform-spacing + one space between words, two after sentences + + -w, --width=WIDTH + maximum line width (default of 75 columns) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR + Written by Ross Paterson. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for fmt is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and fmt programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info fmt + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +fmt 5.3.0 November 2004 FMT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fold.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fold.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17fc668 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fold.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +FOLD(1) User Commands FOLD(1) + + + + + +NAME + fold - wrap each input line to fit in specified width + +SYNOPSIS + fold [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Wrap input lines in each FILE (standard input by + default), writing to standard output. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -b, --bytes + count bytes rather than columns + + -s, --spaces + break at spaces + + -w, --width=WIDTH + use WIDTH columns instead of 80 + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for fold is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and fold programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info fold + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +fold 5.3.0 November 2004 FOLD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/gawk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/gawk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a431e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/gawk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1972 @@ +GAWK(1) Utility Commands GAWK(1) + + + +NAME + gawk - pattern scanning and processing language + +SYNOPSIS + gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ -- + ] file ... + gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text + file ... + + pgawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ + -- ] file ... + pgawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text + file ... + +DESCRIPTION + Gawk is the GNU Project's implementation of the AWK pro- + gramming language. It conforms to the definition of the + language in the POSIX 1003.1 Standard. This version in + turn is based on the description in The AWK Programming + Language, by Aho, Kernighan, and Weinberger, with the + additional features found in the System V Release 4 ver- + sion of UNIX awk. Gawk also provides more recent Bell + Laboratories awk extensions, and a number of GNU-spe- + cific extensions. + + Pgawk is the profiling version of gawk. It is identical + in every way to gawk, except that programs run more + slowly, and it automatically produces an execution pro- + file in the file awkprof.out when done. See the --pro- + file option, below. + + The command line consists of options to gawk itself, the + AWK program text (if not supplied via the -f or --file + options), and values to be made available in the ARGC + and ARGV pre-defined AWK variables. + +OPTION FORMAT + Gawk options may be either traditional POSIX one letter + options, or GNU-style long options. POSIX options start + with a single "-", while long options start with "--". + Long options are provided for both GNU-specific features + and for POSIX-mandated features. + + Following the POSIX standard, gawk-specific options are + supplied via arguments to the -W option. Multiple -W + options may be supplied Each -W option has a correspond- + ing long option, as detailed below. Arguments to long + options are either joined with the option by an = sign, + with no intervening spaces, or they may be provided in + the next command line argument. Long options may be + abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation remains unique. + +OPTIONS + Gawk accepts the following options, listed by frequency. + + -F fs + --field-separator fs + Use fs for the input field separator (the value + of the FS predefined variable). + + -v var=val + --assign var=val + Assign the value val to the variable var, before + execution of the program begins. Such variable + values are available to the BEGIN block of an AWK + program. + + -f program-file + --file program-file + Read the AWK program source from the file pro- + gram-file, instead of from the first command line + argument. Multiple -f (or --file) options may be + used. + + -mf NNN + -mr NNN + Set various memory limits to the value NNN. The + f flag sets the maximum number of fields, and the + r flag sets the maximum record size. These two + flags and the -m option are from an earlier ver- + sion of the Bell Laboratories research version of + UNIX awk. They are ignored by gawk, since gawk + has no pre-defined limits. + + -W compat + -W traditional + --compat + --traditional + Run in compatibility mode. In compatibility + mode, gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none + of the GNU-specific extensions are recognized. + The use of --traditional is preferred over the + other forms of this option. See GNU EXTENSIONS, + below, for more information. + + -W copyleft + -W copyright + --copyleft + --copyright + Print the short version of the GNU copyright + information message on the standard output and + exit successfully. + + -W dump-variables[=file] + --dump-variables[=file] + Print a sorted list of global variables, their + types and final values to file. If no file is + provided, gawk uses a file named awkvars.out in + the current directory. + Having a list of all the global variables is a + good way to look for typographical errors in your + programs. You would also use this option if you + have a large program with a lot of functions, and + you want to be sure that your functions don't + inadvertently use global variables that you meant + to be local. (This is a particularly easy mis- + take to make with simple variable names like i, + j, and so on.) + + -W exec file + --exec file + Similar to -f, however, this is option is the + last one processed. This should be used with #! + scripts, particularly for CGI applications, to + avoid passing in options or source code (!) on + the command line from a URL. This option dis- + ables command-line variable assignments. + + -W gen-po + --gen-po + Scan and parse the AWK program, and generate a + GNU .po format file on standard output with + entries for all localizable strings in the pro- + gram. The program itself is not executed. See + the GNU gettext distribution for more information + on .po files. + + -W help + -W usage + --help + --usage + Print a relatively short summary of the available + options on the standard output. (Per the GNU + Coding Standards, these options cause an immedi- + ate, successful exit.) + + -W lint[=value] + --lint[=value] + Provide warnings about constructs that are dubi- + ous or non-portable to other AWK implementations. + With an optional argument of fatal, lint warnings + become fatal errors. This may be drastic, but + its use will certainly encourage the development + of cleaner AWK programs. With an optional argu- + ment of invalid, only warnings about things that + are actually invalid are issued. (This is not + fully implemented yet.) + + -W lint-old + --lint-old + Provide warnings about constructs that are not + portable to the original version of Unix awk. + + -W non-decimal-data + --non-decimal-data + Recognize octal and hexadecimal values in input + data. Use this option with great caution! + + -W posix + --posix + This turns on compatibility mode, with the fol- + lowing additional restrictions: + + · \x escape sequences are not recognized. + + · Only space and tab act as field separators when + FS is set to a single space, newline does not. + + · You cannot continue lines after ? and :. + + · The synonym func for the keyword function is + not recognized. + + · The operators ** and **= cannot be used in + place of ^ and ^=. + + · The fflush() function is not available. + + -W profile[=prof_file] + --profile[=prof_file] + Send profiling data to prof_file. The default is + awkprof.out. When run with gawk, the profile is + just a "pretty printed" version of the program. + When run with pgawk, the profile contains execu- + tion counts of each statement in the program in + the left margin and function call counts for each + user-defined function. + + -W re-interval + --re-interval + Enable the use of interval expressions in regular + expression matching (see Regular Expressions, + below). Interval expressions were not tradition- + ally available in the AWK language. The POSIX + standard added them, to make awk and egrep con- + sistent with each other. However, their use is + likely to break old AWK programs, so gawk only + provides them if they are requested with this + option, or when --posix is specified. + + -W source program-text + --source program-text + Use program-text as AWK program source code. + This option allows the easy intermixing of + library functions (used via the -f and --file + options) with source code entered on the command + line. It is intended primarily for medium to + large AWK programs used in shell scripts. + + -W use-lc-numeric + --use-lc-numeric + This forces gawk to use the locale's decimal + point character when parsing input data. + Although the POSIX standard requires this behav- + ior, and gawk does so when --posix is in effect, + the default is to follow traditional behavior and + use a period as the decimal point, even in + locales where the period is not the decimal point + character. This option overrides the default + behavior, without the full draconian strictness + of the --posix option. + + -W version + --version + Print version information for this particular + copy of gawk on the standard output. This is + useful mainly for knowing if the current copy of + gawk on your system is up to date with respect to + whatever the Free Software Foundation is dis- + tributing. This is also useful when reporting + bugs. (Per the GNU Coding Standards, these + options cause an immediate, successful exit.) + + -- Signal the end of options. This is useful to + allow further arguments to the AWK program itself + to start with a "-". This provides consistency + with the argument parsing convention used by most + other POSIX programs. + In compatibility mode, any other options are flagged as + invalid, but are otherwise ignored. In normal opera- + tion, as long as program text has been supplied, unknown + options are passed on to the AWK program in the ARGV + array for processing. This is particularly useful for + running AWK programs via the "#!" executable interpreter + mechanism. +AWK PROGRAM EXECUTION + An AWK program consists of a sequence of pattern-action + statements and optional function definitions. + pattern { action statements } + function name(parameter list) { statements } + Gawk first reads the program source from the program- + file(s) if specified, from arguments to --source, or + from the first non-option argument on the command line. + The -f and --source options may be used multiple times + on the command line. Gawk reads the program text as if + all the program-files and command line source texts had + been concatenated together. This is useful for building + libraries of AWK functions, without having to include + them in each new AWK program that uses them. It also + provides the ability to mix library functions with com- + mand line programs. + The environment variable AWKPATH specifies a search path + to use when finding source files named with the -f + option. If this variable does not exist, the default + path is ".:/usr/local/share/awk". (The actual directory + may vary, depending upon how gawk was built and + installed.) If a file name given to the -f option con- + tains a "/" character, no path search is performed. + Gawk executes AWK programs in the following order. + First, all variable assignments specified via the -v + option are performed. Next, gawk compiles the program + into an internal form. Then, gawk executes the code in + the BEGIN block(s) (if any), and then proceeds to read + each file named in the ARGV array. If there are no + files named on the command line, gawk reads the standard + input. + If a filename on the command line has the form var=val + it is treated as a variable assignment. The variable + var will be assigned the value val. (This happens after + any BEGIN block(s) have been run.) Command line vari- + able assignment is most useful for dynamically assigning + values to the variables AWK uses to control how input is + broken into fields and records. It is also useful for + controlling state if multiple passes are needed over a + single data file. + If the value of a particular element of ARGV is empty + (""), gawk skips over it. + For each record in the input, gawk tests to see if it + matches any pattern in the AWK program. For each pat- + tern that the record matches, the associated action is + executed. The patterns are tested in the order they + occur in the program. + Finally, after all the input is exhausted, gawk executes + the code in the END block(s) (if any). +VARIABLES, RECORDS AND FIELDS + AWK variables are dynamic; they come into existence when + they are first used. Their values are either floating- + point numbers or strings, or both, depending upon how + they are used. AWK also has one dimensional arrays; + arrays with multiple dimensions may be simulated. Sev- + eral pre-defined variables are set as a program runs; + these are described as needed and summarized below. + Records + Normally, records are separated by newline characters. + You can control how records are separated by assigning + values to the built-in variable RS. If RS is any single + character, that character separates records. Otherwise, + RS is a regular expression. Text in the input that + matches this regular expression separates the record. + However, in compatibility mode, only the first character + of its string value is used for separating records. If + RS is set to the null string, then records are separated + by blank lines. When RS is set to the null string, the + newline character always acts as a field separator, in + addition to whatever value FS may have. + Fields + As each input record is read, gawk splits the record + into fields, using the value of the FS variable as the + field separator. If FS is a single character, fields + are separated by that character. If FS is the null + string, then each individual character becomes a sepa- + rate field. Otherwise, FS is expected to be a full reg- + ular expression. In the special case that FS is a sin- + gle space, fields are separated by runs of spaces and/or + tabs and/or newlines. (But see the section POSIX COM- + PATIBILITY, below). NOTE: The value of IGNORECASE (see + below) also affects how fields are split when FS is a + regular expression, and how records are separated when + RS is a regular expression. + If the FIELDWIDTHS variable is set to a space separated + list of numbers, each field is expected to have fixed + width, and gawk splits up the record using the specified + widths. The value of FS is ignored. Assigning a new + value to FS overrides the use of FIELDWIDTHS, and + restores the default behavior. + Each field in the input record may be referenced by its + position, $1, $2, and so on. $0 is the whole record. + Fields need not be referenced by constants: + n = 5 + print $n + prints the fifth field in the input record. + The variable NF is set to the total number of fields in + the input record. + References to non-existent fields (i.e. fields after + $NF) produce the null-string. However, assigning to a + non-existent field (e.g., $(NF+2) = 5) increases the + value of NF, creates any intervening fields with the + null string as their value, and causes the value of $0 + to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by the + value of OFS. References to negative numbered fields + cause a fatal error. Decrementing NF causes the values + of fields past the new value to be lost, and the value + of $0 to be recomputed, with the fields being separated + by the value of OFS. + Assigning a value to an existing field causes the whole + record to be rebuilt when $0 is referenced. Similarly, + assigning a value to $0 causes the record to be resplit, + creating new values for the fields. + Built-in Variables + Gawk's built-in variables are: + ARGC The number of command line arguments (does + not include options to gawk, or the program + source). + ARGIND The index in ARGV of the current file being + processed. + ARGV Array of command line arguments. The array + is indexed from 0 to ARGC - 1. Dynamically + changing the contents of ARGV can control + the files used for data. + BINMODE On non-POSIX systems, specifies use of + "binary" mode for all file I/O. Numeric + values of 1, 2, or 3, specify that input + files, output files, or all files, respec- + tively, should use binary I/O. String val- + ues of "r", or "w" specify that input files, + or output files, respectively, should use + binary I/O. String values of "rw" or "wr" + specify that all files should use binary + I/O. Any other string value is treated as + "rw", but generates a warning message. + CONVFMT The conversion format for numbers, "%.6g", + by default. + ENVIRON An array containing the values of the cur- + rent environment. The array is indexed by + the environment variables, each element + being the value of that variable (e.g., ENV- + IRON["HOME"] might be /home/arnold). Chang- + ing this array does not affect the environ- + ment seen by programs which gawk spawns via + redirection or the system() function. + ERRNO If a system error occurs either doing a + redirection for getline, during a read for + getline, or during a close(), then ERRNO + will contain a string describing the error. + The value is subject to translation in non- + English locales. + FIELDWIDTHS A white-space separated list of fieldwidths. + When set, gawk parses the input into fields + of fixed width, instead of using the value + of the FS variable as the field separator. + FILENAME The name of the current input file. If no + files are specified on the command line, the + value of FILENAME is "-". However, FILENAME + is undefined inside the BEGIN block (unless + set by getline). + FNR The input record number in the current input + file. + FS The input field separator, a space by + default. See Fields, above. + IGNORECASE Controls the case-sensitivity of all regular + expression and string operations. If + IGNORECASE has a non-zero value, then string + comparisons and pattern matching in rules, + field splitting with FS, record separating + with RS, regular expression matching with ~ + and !~, and the gensub(), gsub(), index(), + match(), split(), and sub() built-in func- + tions all ignore case when doing regular + expression operations. NOTE: Array sub- + scripting is not affected. However, the + asort() and asorti() functions are affected. + Thus, if IGNORECASE is not equal to zero, + /aB/ matches all of the strings "ab", "aB", + "Ab", and "AB". As with all AWK variables, + the initial value of IGNORECASE is zero, so + all regular expression and string operations + are normally case-sensitive. Under Unix, + the full ISO 8859-1 Latin-1 character set is + used when ignoring case. As of gawk 3.1.4, + the case equivalencies are fully locale- + aware, based on the C <ctype.h> facilities + such as isalpha(), and toupper(). + LINT Provides dynamic control of the --lint + option from within an AWK program. When + true, gawk prints lint warnings. When false, + it does not. When assigned the string value + "fatal", lint warnings become fatal errors, + exactly like --lint=fatal. Any other true + value just prints warnings. + NF The number of fields in the current input + record. + NR The total number of input records seen so + far. + OFMT The output format for numbers, "%.6g", by + default. + OFS The output field separator, a space by + default. + ORS The output record separator, by default a + newline. + PROCINFO The elements of this array provide access to + information about the running AWK program. + On some systems, there may be elements in + the array, "group1" through "groupn" for + some n, which is the number of supplementary + groups that the process has. Use the in + operator to test for these elements. The + following elements are guaranteed to be + available: + PROCINFO["egid"] the value of the gete- + gid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["euid"] the value of the + geteuid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["FS"] "FS" if field splitting + with FS is in effect, or + "FIELDWIDTHS" if field + splitting with FIELD- + WIDTHS is in effect. + PROCINFO["gid"] the value of the get- + gid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["pgrpid"] the process group ID of + the current process. + PROCINFO["pid"] the process ID of the + current process. + PROCINFO["ppid"] the parent process ID of + the current process. + PROCINFO["uid"] the value of the + getuid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["version"] + The version of gawk. + This is available from + version 3.1.4 and later. + RS The input record separator, by default a + newline. + RT The record terminator. Gawk sets RT to the + input text that matched the character or + regular expression specified by RS. + RSTART The index of the first character matched by + match(); 0 if no match. (This implies that + character indices start at one.) + RLENGTH The length of the string matched by match(); + -1 if no match. + SUBSEP The character used to separate multiple sub- + scripts in array elements, by default + "\034". + TEXTDOMAIN The text domain of the AWK program; used to + find the localized translations for the pro- + gram's strings. + Arrays + Arrays are subscripted with an expression between square + brackets ([ and ]). If the expression is an expression + list (expr, expr ...) then the array subscript is a + string consisting of the concatenation of the (string) + value of each expression, separated by the value of the + SUBSEP variable. This facility is used to simulate mul- + tiply dimensioned arrays. For example: + i = "A"; j = "B"; k = "C" + x[i, j, k] = "hello, world\n" + assigns the string "hello, world\n" to the element of + the array x which is indexed by the string + "A\034B\034C". All arrays in AWK are associative, i.e. + indexed by string values. + The special operator in may be used to test if an array + has an index consisting of a particular value. + if (val in array) + print array[val] + If the array has multiple subscripts, use (i, j) in + array. + The in construct may also be used in a for loop to iter- + ate over all the elements of an array. + An element may be deleted from an array using the delete + statement. The delete statement may also be used to + delete the entire contents of an array, just by specify- + ing the array name without a subscript. + Variable Typing And Conversion + Variables and fields may be (floating point) numbers, or + strings, or both. How the value of a variable is inter- + preted depends upon its context. If used in a numeric + expression, it will be treated as a number; if used as a + string it will be treated as a string. + To force a variable to be treated as a number, add 0 to + it; to force it to be treated as a string, concatenate + it with the null string. + When a string must be converted to a number, the conver- + sion is accomplished using strtod(3). A number is con- + verted to a string by using the value of CONVFMT as a + format string for sprintf(3), with the numeric value of + the variable as the argument. However, even though all + numbers in AWK are floating-point, integral values are + always converted as integers. Thus, given + CONVFMT = "%2.2f" + a = 12 + b = a "" + the variable b has a string value of "12" and not + "12.00". + When operating in POSIX mode (such as with the --posix + command line option), beware that locale settings may + interfere with the way decimal numbers are treated: the + decimal separator of the numbers you are feeding to gawk + must conform to what your locale would expect, be it a + comma (,) or a period (.). + Gawk performs comparisons as follows: If two variables + are numeric, they are compared numerically. If one + value is numeric and the other has a string value that + is a "numeric string," then comparisons are also done + numerically. Otherwise, the numeric value is converted + to a string and a string comparison is performed. Two + strings are compared, of course, as strings. + Note that string constants, such as "57", are not + numeric strings, they are string constants. The idea of + "numeric string" only applies to fields, getline input, + FILENAME, ARGV elements, ENVIRON elements and the ele- + ments of an array created by split() that are numeric + strings. The basic idea is that user input, and only + user input, that looks numeric, should be treated that + way. + Uninitialized variables have the numeric value 0 and the + string value "" (the null, or empty, string). + Octal and Hexadecimal Constants + Starting with version 3.1 of gawk , you may use C-style + octal and hexadecimal constants in your AWK program + source code. For example, the octal value 011 is equal + to decimal 9, and the hexadecimal value 0x11 is equal to + decimal 17. + String Constants + String constants in AWK are sequences of characters + enclosed between double quotes ("). Within strings, + certain escape sequences are recognized, as in C. These + are: + \\ A literal backslash. + \a The "alert" character; usually the ASCII BEL char- + acter. + \b backspace. + \f form-feed. + \n newline. + \r carriage return. + \t horizontal tab. + \v vertical tab. + \xhex digits + The character represented by the string of hexadec- + imal digits following the \x. As in ANSI C, all + following hexadecimal digits are considered part of + the escape sequence. (This feature should tell us + something about language design by committee.) + E.g., "\x1B" is the ASCII ESC (escape) character. + \ddd The character represented by the 1-, 2-, or 3-digit + sequence of octal digits. E.g., "\033" is the + ASCII ESC (escape) character. + \c The literal character c. + The escape sequences may also be used inside constant + regular expressions (e.g., /[ \t\f\n\r\v]/ matches + whitespace characters). + In compatibility mode, the characters represented by + octal and hexadecimal escape sequences are treated lit- + erally when used in regular expression constants. Thus, + /a\52b/ is equivalent to /a\*b/. +PATTERNS AND ACTIONS + AWK is a line-oriented language. The pattern comes + first, and then the action. Action statements are + enclosed in { and }. Either the pattern may be missing, + or the action may be missing, but, of course, not both. + If the pattern is missing, the action is executed for + every single record of input. A missing action is + equivalent to + { print } + which prints the entire record. + Comments begin with the "#" character, and continue + until the end of the line. Blank lines may be used to + separate statements. Normally, a statement ends with a + newline, however, this is not the case for lines ending + in a ",", {, ?, :, &&, or ||. Lines ending in do or + else also have their statements automatically continued + on the following line. In other cases, a line can be + continued by ending it with a "\", in which case the + newline will be ignored. + Multiple statements may be put on one line by separating + them with a ";". This applies to both the statements + within the action part of a pattern-action pair (the + usual case), and to the pattern-action statements them- + selves. + Patterns + AWK patterns may be one of the following: + BEGIN + END + /regular expression/ + relational expression + pattern && pattern + pattern || pattern + pattern ? pattern : pattern + (pattern) + ! pattern + pattern1, pattern2 + BEGIN and END are two special kinds of patterns which + are not tested against the input. The action parts of + all BEGIN patterns are merged as if all the statements + had been written in a single BEGIN block. They are exe- + cuted before any of the input is read. Similarly, all + the END blocks are merged, and executed when all the + input is exhausted (or when an exit statement is exe- + cuted). BEGIN and END patterns cannot be combined with + other patterns in pattern expressions. BEGIN and END + patterns cannot have missing action parts. + For /regular expression/ patterns, the associated state- + ment is executed for each input record that matches the + regular expression. Regular expressions are the same as + those in egrep(1), and are summarized below. + A relational expression may use any of the operators + defined below in the section on actions. These gener- + ally test whether certain fields match certain regular + expressions. + The &&, ||, and ! operators are logical AND, logical + OR, and logical NOT, respectively, as in C. They do + short-circuit evaluation, also as in C, and are used for + combining more primitive pattern expressions. As in + most languages, parentheses may be used to change the + order of evaluation. + The ?: operator is like the same operator in C. If the + first pattern is true then the pattern used for testing + is the second pattern, otherwise it is the third. Only + one of the second and third patterns is evaluated. + The pattern1, pattern2 form of an expression is called a + range pattern. It matches all input records starting + with a record that matches pattern1, and continuing + until a record that matches pattern2, inclusive. It + does not combine with any other sort of pattern expres- + sion. + Regular Expressions + Regular expressions are the extended kind found in + egrep. They are composed of characters as follows: + c matches the non-metacharacter c. + \c matches the literal character c. + . matches any character including newline. + ^ matches the beginning of a string. + $ matches the end of a string. + [abc...] character list, matches any of the characters + abc.... + [^abc...] negated character list, matches any character + except abc.... + r1|r2 alternation: matches either r1 or r2. + r1r2 concatenation: matches r1, and then r2. + r+ matches one or more r's. + r* matches zero or more r's. + r? matches zero or one r's. + (r) grouping: matches r. + r{n} + r{n,} + r{n,m} One or two numbers inside braces denote an + interval expression. If there is one number + in the braces, the preceding regular expres- + sion r is repeated n times. If there are two + numbers separated by a comma, r is repeated n + to m times. If there is one number followed + by a comma, then r is repeated at least n + times. + Interval expressions are only available if + either --posix or --re-interval is specified + on the command line. + + \y matches the empty string at either the begin- + ning or the end of a word. + + \B matches the empty string within a word. + + \< matches the empty string at the beginning of + a word. + + \> matches the empty string at the end of a + word. + + \w matches any word-constituent character (let- + ter, digit, or underscore). + + \W matches any character that is not word-con- + stituent. + + \` matches the empty string at the beginning of + a buffer (string). + + \' matches the empty string at the end of a + buffer. + + The escape sequences that are valid in string constants + (see below) are also valid in regular expressions. + + Character classes are a feature introduced in the POSIX + standard. A character class is a special notation for + describing lists of characters that have a specific + attribute, but where the actual characters themselves + can vary from country to country and/or from character + set to character set. For example, the notion of what + is an alphabetic character differs in the USA and in + France. + + A character class is only valid in a regular expression + inside the brackets of a character list. Character + classes consist of [:, a keyword denoting the class, and + :]. The character classes defined by the POSIX standard + are: + + [:alnum:] Alphanumeric characters. + + [:alpha:] Alphabetic characters. + + [:blank:] Space or tab characters. + + [:cntrl:] Control characters. + + [:digit:] Numeric characters. + + [:graph:] Characters that are both printable and visi- + ble. (A space is printable, but not visible, + while an a is both.) + + [:lower:] Lower-case alphabetic characters. + + [:print:] Printable characters (characters that are not + control characters.) + + [:punct:] Punctuation characters (characters that are + not letter, digits, control characters, or + space characters). + + [:space:] Space characters (such as space, tab, and + formfeed, to name a few). + + [:upper:] Upper-case alphabetic characters. + + [:xdigit:] Characters that are hexadecimal digits. + + For example, before the POSIX standard, to match + alphanumeric characters, you would have had to write + /[A-Za-z0-9]/. If your character set had other alpha- + betic characters in it, this would not match them, and + if your character set collated differently from ASCII, + this might not even match the ASCII alphanumeric charac- + ters. With the POSIX character classes, you can write + /[[:alnum:]]/, and this matches the alphabetic and + numeric characters in your character set, no matter what + it is. + + Two additional special sequences can appear in character + lists. These apply to non-ASCII character sets, which + can have single symbols (called collating elements) that + are represented with more than one character, as well as + several characters that are equivalent for collating, or + sorting, purposes. (E.g., in French, a plain "e" and a + grave-accented "`" are equivalent.) + + Collating Symbols + A collating symbol is a multi-character collating + element enclosed in [. and .]. For example, if + ch is a collating element, then [[.ch.]] is a + regular expression that matches this collating + element, while [ch] is a regular expression that + matches either c or h. + + Equivalence Classes + An equivalence class is a locale-specific name + for a list of characters that are equivalent. + The name is enclosed in [= and =]. For example, + the name e might be used to represent all of "e," + "´," and "`." In this case, [[=e=]] is a regular + expression that matches any of e, ´, or `. + + These features are very valuable in non-English speaking + locales. The library functions that gawk uses for regu- + lar expression matching currently only recognize POSIX + character classes; they do not recognize collating sym- + bols or equivalence classes. + + The \y, \B, \<, \>, \w, \W, \`, and \' operators are + specific to gawk; they are extensions based on facili- + ties in the GNU regular expression libraries. + + The various command line options control how gawk inter- + prets characters in regular expressions. + + No options + In the default case, gawk provide all the facili- + ties of POSIX regular expressions and the GNU + regular expression operators described above. + However, interval expressions are not supported. + + --posix + Only POSIX regular expressions are supported, the + GNU operators are not special. (E.g., \w matches + a literal w). Interval expressions are allowed. + + --traditional + Traditional Unix awk regular expressions are + matched. The GNU operators are not special, + interval expressions are not available, and nei- + ther are the POSIX character classes ([[:alnum:]] + and so on). Characters described by octal and + hexadecimal escape sequences are treated liter- + ally, even if they represent regular expression + metacharacters. + + --re-interval + Allow interval expressions in regular expres- + sions, even if --traditional has been provided. + + Actions + Action statements are enclosed in braces, { and }. + Action statements consist of the usual assignment, con- + ditional, and looping statements found in most lan- + guages. The operators, control statements, and + input/output statements available are patterned after + those in C. + + Operators + The operators in AWK, in order of decreasing precedence, + are + + + (...) Grouping + + $ Field reference. + + ++ -- Increment and decrement, both prefix and + postfix. + + ^ Exponentiation (** may also be used, and **= + for the assignment operator). + + + - ! Unary plus, unary minus, and logical nega- + tion. + + * / % Multiplication, division, and modulus. + + + - Addition and subtraction. + + space String concatenation. + + | |& Piped I/O for getline, print, and printf. + + < > + <= >= + != == The regular relational operators. + + ~ !~ Regular expression match, negated match. + NOTE: Do not use a constant regular expres- + sion (/foo/) on the left-hand side of a ~ or + !~. Only use one on the right-hand side. + The expression /foo/ ~ exp has the same + meaning as (($0 ~ /foo/) ~ exp). This is + usually not what was intended. + + in Array membership. + + && Logical AND. + + || Logical OR. + + ?: The C conditional expression. This has the + form expr1 ? expr2 : expr3. If expr1 is + true, the value of the expression is expr2, + otherwise it is expr3. Only one of expr2 + and expr3 is evaluated. + + = += -= + *= /= %= ^= Assignment. Both absolute assignment (var = + value) and operator-assignment (the other + forms) are supported. + + Control Statements + The control statements are as follows: + + if (condition) statement [ else statement ] + while (condition) statement + do statement while (condition) + for (expr1; expr2; expr3) statement + for (var in array) statement + break + continue + delete array[index] + delete array + exit [ expression ] + { statements } + + I/O Statements + The input/output statements are as follows: + + + close(file [, how]) Close file, pipe or co-process. + The optional how should only be + used when closing one end of a + two-way pipe to a co-process. It + must be a string value, either + "to" or "from". + + getline Set $0 from next input record; set + NF, NR, FNR. + + getline <file Set $0 from next record of file; + set NF. + + getline var Set var from next input record; + set NR, FNR. + + getline var <file Set var from next record of file. + + command | getline [var] + Run command piping the output + either into $0 or var, as above. + + command |& getline [var] + Run command as a co-process piping + the output either into $0 or var, + as above. Co-processes are a gawk + extension. (command can also be a + socket. See the subsection Spe- + cial File Names, below.) + + next Stop processing the current input + record. The next input record is + read and processing starts over + with the first pattern in the AWK + program. If the end of the input + data is reached, the END block(s), + if any, are executed. + + nextfile Stop processing the current input + file. The next input record read + comes from the next input file. + FILENAME and ARGIND are updated, + FNR is reset to 1, and processing + starts over with the first pattern + in the AWK program. If the end of + the input data is reached, the END + block(s), if any, are executed. + + print Prints the current record. The + output record is terminated with + the value of the ORS variable. + + print expr-list Prints expressions. Each expres- + sion is separated by the value of + the OFS variable. The output + record is terminated with the + value of the ORS variable. + + print expr-list >file Prints expressions on file. Each + expression is separated by the + value of the OFS variable. The + output record is terminated with + the value of the ORS variable. + + printf fmt, expr-list Format and print. + + printf fmt, expr-list >file + Format and print on file. + + system(cmd-line) Execute the command cmd-line, and + return the exit status. (This may + not be available on non-POSIX sys- + tems.) + + fflush([file]) Flush any buffers associated with + the open output file or pipe file. + If file is missing, then standard + output is flushed. If file is the + null string, then all open output + files and pipes have their buffers + flushed. + + Additional output redirections are allowed for print and + printf. + + print ... >> file + Appends output to the file. + + print ... | command + Writes on a pipe. + + print ... |& command + Sends data to a co-process or socket. (See also + the subsection Special File Names, below.) + + The getline command returns 0 on end of file and -1 on + an error. Upon an error, ERRNO contains a string + describing the problem. + + NOTE: If using a pipe, co-process, or socket to getline, + or from print or printf within a loop, you must use + close() to create new instances of the command or + socket. AWK does not automatically close pipes, sock- + ets, or co-processes when they return EOF. + + The printf Statement + The AWK versions of the printf statement and sprintf() + function (see below) accept the following conversion + specification formats: + + %c An ASCII character. If the argument used for %c + is numeric, it is treated as a character and + printed. Otherwise, the argument is assumed to + be a string, and the only first character of + that string is printed. + + %d, %i A decimal number (the integer part). + + %e, %E A floating point number of the form + [-]d.dddddde[+-]dd. The %E format uses E + instead of e. + + %f, %F A floating point number of the form + [-]ddd.dddddd. If the system library supports + it, %F is available as well. This is like %f, + but uses capital letters for special "not a num- + ber" and "infinity" values. If %F is not avail- + able, gawk uses %f. + + %g, %G Use %e or %f conversion, whichever is shorter, + with nonsignificant zeros suppressed. The %G + format uses %E instead of %e. + + %o An unsigned octal number (also an integer). + + %u An unsigned decimal number (again, an integer). + + %s A character string. + + %x, %X An unsigned hexadecimal number (an integer). + The %X format uses ABCDEF instead of abcdef. + + %% A single % character; no argument is converted. + + NOTE: When using the integer format-control letters for + values that are outside the range of a C long integer, + gawk switches to the %0f format specifier. If --lint is + provided on the command line gawk warns about this. + Other versions of awk may print invalid values or do + something else entirely. + + Optional, additional parameters may lie between the % + and the control letter: + + count$ Use the count'th argument at this point in the + formatting. This is called a positional speci- + fier and is intended primarily for use in trans- + lated versions of format strings, not in the + original text of an AWK program. It is a gawk + extension. + + - The expression should be left-justified within + its field. + + space For numeric conversions, prefix positive values + with a space, and negative values with a minus + sign. + + + The plus sign, used before the width modifier + (see below), says to always supply a sign for + numeric conversions, even if the data to be for- + matted is positive. The + overrides the space + modifier. + + # Use an "alternate form" for certain control let- + ters. For %o, supply a leading zero. For %x, + and %X, supply a leading 0x or 0X for a nonzero + result. For %e, %E, %f and %F, the result always + contains a decimal point. For %g, and %G, trail- + ing zeros are not removed from the result. + + 0 A leading 0 (zero) acts as a flag, that indicates + output should be padded with zeroes instead of + spaces. This applies even to non-numeric output + formats. This flag only has an effect when the + field width is wider than the value to be + printed. + + width The field should be padded to this width. The + field is normally padded with spaces. If the 0 + flag has been used, it is padded with zeroes. + + .prec A number that specifies the precision to use when + printing. For the %e, %E, %f and %F, formats, + this specifies the number of digits you want + printed to the right of the decimal point. For + the %g, and %G formats, it specifies the maximum + number of significant digits. For the %d, %o, + %i, %u, %x, and %X formats, it specifies the min- + imum number of digits to print. For %s, it spec- + ifies the maximum number of characters from the + string that should be printed. + + The dynamic width and prec capabilities of the ANSI C + printf() routines are supported. A * in place of either + the width or prec specifications causes their values to + be taken from the argument list to printf or sprintf(). + To use a positional specifier with a dynamic width or + precision, supply the count$ after the * in the format + string. For example, "%3$*2$.*1$s". + + Special File Names + When doing I/O redirection from either print or printf + into a file, or via getline from a file, gawk recognizes + certain special filenames internally. These filenames + allow access to open file descriptors inherited from + gawk's parent process (usually the shell). These file + names may also be used on the command line to name data + files. The filenames are: + + /dev/stdin The standard input. + + /dev/stdout The standard output. + + /dev/stderr The standard error output. + + /dev/fd/n The file associated with the open file + descriptor n. + + These are particularly useful for error messages. For + example: + + print "You blew it!" > "/dev/stderr" + + whereas you would otherwise have to use + + print "You blew it!" | "cat 1>&2" + + The following special filenames may be used with the |& + co-process operator for creating TCP/IP network connec- + tions. + + /inet/tcp/lport/rhost/rport File for TCP/IP connection + on local port lport to + remote host rhost on remote + port rport. Use a port of + 0 to have the system pick a + port. + + /inet/udp/lport/rhost/rport Similar, but use UDP/IP + instead of TCP/IP. + + /inet/raw/lport/rhost/rport Reserved for future use. + + Other special filenames provide access to information + about the running gawk process. These filenames are now + obsolete. Use the PROCINFO array to obtain the informa- + tion they provide. The filenames are: + + /dev/pid Reading this file returns the process ID of + the current process, in decimal, terminated + with a newline. + + /dev/ppid Reading this file returns the parent process + ID of the current process, in decimal, ter- + minated with a newline. + + /dev/pgrpid Reading this file returns the process group + ID of the current process, in decimal, ter- + minated with a newline. + + /dev/user Reading this file returns a single record + terminated with a newline. The fields are + separated with spaces. $1 is the value of + the getuid(2) system call, $2 is the value + of the geteuid(2) system call, $3 is the + value of the getgid(2) system call, and $4 + is the value of the getegid(2) system call. + If there are any additional fields, they are + the group IDs returned by getgroups(2). + Multiple groups may not be supported on all + systems. + + Numeric Functions + AWK has the following built-in arithmetic functions: + + + atan2(y, x) Returns the arctangent of y/x in radians. + + cos(expr) Returns the cosine of expr, which is in + radians. + + exp(expr) The exponential function. + + int(expr) Truncates to integer. + + log(expr) The natural logarithm function. + + rand() Returns a random number N, between 0 and + 1, such that 0 <= N < 1. + + sin(expr) Returns the sine of expr, which is in + radians. + + sqrt(expr) The square root function. + + srand([expr]) Uses expr as a new seed for the random + number generator. If no expr is provided, + the time of day is used. The return value + is the previous seed for the random number + generator. + + String Functions + Gawk has the following built-in string functions: + + + asort(s [, d]) Returns the number of elements + in the source array s. The con- + tents of s are sorted using + gawk's normal rules for compar- + ing values, and the indices of + the sorted values of s are + replaced with sequential inte- + gers starting with 1. If the + optional destination array d is + specified, then s is first + duplicated into d, and then d is + sorted, leaving the indices of + the source array s unchanged. + + asorti(s [, d]) Returns the number of elements + in the source array s. The + behavior is the same as that of + asort(), except that the array + indices are used for sorting, + not the array values. When + done, the array is indexed + numerically, and the values are + those of the original indices. + The original values are lost; + thus provide a second array if + you wish to preserve the origi- + nal. + + gensub(r, s, h [, t]) Search the target string t for + matches of the regular expres- + sion r. If h is a string begin- + ning with g or G, then replace + all matches of r with s. Other- + wise, h is a number indicating + which match of r to replace. If + t is not supplied, $0 is used + instead. Within the replacement + text s, the sequence \n, where n + is a digit from 1 to 9, may be + used to indicate just the text + that matched the n'th parenthe- + sized subexpression. The + sequence \0 represents the + entire matched text, as does the + character &. Unlike sub() and + gsub(), the modified string is + returned as the result of the + function, and the original tar- + get string is not changed. + + gsub(r, s [, t]) For each substring matching the + regular expression r in the + string t, substitute the string + s, and return the number of sub- + stitutions. If t is not sup- + plied, use $0. An & in the + replacement text is replaced + with the text that was actually + matched. Use \& to get a lit- + eral &. (This must be typed as + "\\&"; see GAWK: Effective AWK + Programming for a fuller discus- + sion of the rules for &'s and + backslashes in the replacement + text of sub(), gsub(), and gen- + sub().) + + index(s, t) Returns the index of the string + t in the string s, or 0 if t is + not present. (This implies that + character indices start at one.) + + length([s]) Returns the length of the string + s, or the length of $0 if s is + not supplied. Starting with + version 3.1.5, as a non-standard + extension, with an array argu- + ment, length() returns the num- + ber of elements in the array. + + match(s, r [, a]) Returns the position in s where + the regular expression r occurs, + or 0 if r is not present, and + sets the values of RSTART and + RLENGTH. Note that the argument + order is the same as for the ~ + operator: str ~ re. If array a + is provided, a is cleared and + then elements 1 through n are + filled with the portions of s + that match the corresponding + parenthesized subexpression in + r. The 0'th element of a con- + tains the portion of s matched + by the entire regular expression + r. Subscripts a[n, "start"], + and a[n, "length"] provide the + starting index in the string and + length respectively, of each + matching substring. + + split(s, a [, r]) Splits the string s into the + array a on the regular expres- + sion r, and returns the number + of fields. If r is omitted, FS + is used instead. The array a is + cleared first. Splitting + behaves identically to field + splitting, described above. + + sprintf(fmt, expr-list) Prints expr-list according to + fmt, and returns the resulting + string. + + strtonum(str) Examines str, and returns its + numeric value. If str begins + with a leading 0, strtonum() + assumes that str is an octal + number. If str begins with a + leading 0x or 0X, strtonum() + assumes that str is a hexadeci- + mal number. + + sub(r, s [, t]) Just like gsub(), but only the + first matching substring is + replaced. + + substr(s, i [, n]) Returns the at most n-character + substring of s starting at i. + If n is omitted, the rest of s + is used. + + tolower(str) Returns a copy of the string + str, with all the upper-case + characters in str translated to + their corresponding lower-case + counterparts. Non-alphabetic + characters are left unchanged. + + toupper(str) Returns a copy of the string + str, with all the lower-case + characters in str translated to + their corresponding upper-case + counterparts. Non-alphabetic + characters are left unchanged. + + As of version 3.1.5, gawk is multibyte aware. This + means that index(), length(), substr() and match() all + work in terms of characters, not bytes. + + Time Functions + Since one of the primary uses of AWK programs is pro- + cessing log files that contain time stamp information, + gawk provides the following functions for obtaining time + stamps and formatting them. + + + mktime(datespec) + Turns datespec into a time stamp of the same + form as returned by systime(). The datespec + is a string of the form YYYY MM DD HH MM SS[ + DST]. The contents of the string are six or + seven numbers representing respectively the + full year including century, the month from 1 + to 12, the day of the month from 1 to 31, the + hour of the day from 0 to 23, the minute from + 0 to 59, and the second from 0 to 60, and an + optional daylight saving flag. The values of + these numbers need not be within the ranges + specified; for example, an hour of -1 means 1 + hour before midnight. The origin-zero Grego- + rian calendar is assumed, with year 0 preced- + ing year 1 and year -1 preceding year 0. The + time is assumed to be in the local timezone. + If the daylight saving flag is positive, the + time is assumed to be daylight saving time; if + zero, the time is assumed to be standard time; + and if negative (the default), mktime() + attempts to determine whether daylight saving + time is in effect for the specified time. If + datespec does not contain enough elements or + if the resulting time is out of range, + mktime() returns -1. + + strftime([format [, timestamp[, utc-flag]]]) + Formats timestamp according to the specifica- + tion in format. If utc-flag is present and is + non-zero or non-null, the result is in UTC, + otherwise the result is in local time. The + timestamp should be of the same form as + returned by systime(). If timestamp is miss- + ing, the current time of day is used. If for- + mat is missing, a default format equivalent to + the output of date(1) is used. See the speci- + fication for the strftime() function in ANSI C + for the format conversions that are guaranteed + to be available. + + systime() Returns the current time of day as the number + of seconds since the Epoch (1970-01-01 + 00:00:00 UTC on POSIX systems). + + Bit Manipulations Functions + Starting with version 3.1 of gawk, the following bit + manipulation functions are available. They work by con- + verting double-precision floating point values to + uintmax_t integers, doing the operation, and then con- + verting the result back to floating point. The func- + tions are: + + and(v1, v2) Return the bitwise AND of the values + provided by v1 and v2. + + compl(val) Return the bitwise complement of + val. + + lshift(val, count) Return the value of val, shifted + left by count bits. + + or(v1, v2) Return the bitwise OR of the values + provided by v1 and v2. + + rshift(val, count) Return the value of val, shifted + right by count bits. + + xor(v1, v2) Return the bitwise XOR of the values + provided by v1 and v2. + + + Internationalization Functions + Starting with version 3.1 of gawk, the following func- + tions may be used from within your AWK program for + translating strings at run-time. For full details, see + GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + + bindtextdomain(directory [, domain]) + Specifies the directory where gawk looks for the + .mo files, in case they will not or cannot be + placed in the ``standard'' locations (e.g., dur- + ing testing). It returns the directory where + domain is ``bound.'' + The default domain is the value of TEXTDOMAIN. + If directory is the null string (""), then bind- + textdomain() returns the current binding for the + given domain. + + dcgettext(string [, domain [, category]]) + Returns the translation of string in text domain + domain for locale category category. The default + value for domain is the current value of TEXTDO- + MAIN. The default value for category is "LC_MES- + SAGES". + If you supply a value for category, it must be a + string equal to one of the known locale cate- + gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK Program- + ming. You must also supply a text domain. Use + TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + + dcngettext(string1 , string2 , number [, domain [, cate- + gory]]) + Returns the plural form used for number of the + translation of string1 and string2 in text domain + domain for locale category category. The default + value for domain is the current value of TEXTDO- + MAIN. The default value for category is "LC_MES- + SAGES". + If you supply a value for category, it must be a + string equal to one of the known locale cate- + gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK Program- + ming. You must also supply a text domain. Use + TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + +USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS + Functions in AWK are defined as follows: + + function name(parameter list) { statements } + + Functions are executed when they are called from within + expressions in either patterns or actions. Actual + parameters supplied in the function call are used to + instantiate the formal parameters declared in the func- + tion. Arrays are passed by reference, other variables + are passed by value. + + Since functions were not originally part of the AWK lan- + guage, the provision for local variables is rather + clumsy: They are declared as extra parameters in the + parameter list. The convention is to separate local + variables from real parameters by extra spaces in the + parameter list. For example: + + function f(p, q, a, b) # a and b are local + { + ... + } + + /abc/ { ... ; f(1, 2) ; ... } + + The left parenthesis in a function call is required to + immediately follow the function name, without any inter- + vening white space. This avoids a syntactic ambiguity + with the concatenation operator. This restriction does + not apply to the built-in functions listed above. + + Functions may call each other and may be recursive. + Function parameters used as local variables are initial- + ized to the null string and the number zero upon func- + tion invocation. + + Use return expr to return a value from a function. The + return value is undefined if no value is provided, or if + the function returns by "falling off" the end. + + If --lint has been provided, gawk warns about calls to + undefined functions at parse time, instead of at run + time. Calling an undefined function at run time is a + fatal error. + + The word func may be used in place of function. + +DYNAMICALLY LOADING NEW FUNCTIONS + Beginning with version 3.1 of gawk, you can dynamically + add new built-in functions to the running gawk inter- + preter. The full details are beyond the scope of this + manual page; see GAWK: Effective AWK Programming for the + details. + + + extension(object, function) + Dynamically link the shared object file named by + object, and invoke function in that object, to + perform initialization. These should both be + provided as strings. Returns the value returned + by function. + + This function is provided and documented in GAWK: Effec- + tive AWK Programming, but everything about this feature + is likely to change eventually. We STRONGLY recommend + that you do not use this feature for anything that you + aren't willing to redo. + +SIGNALS + pgawk accepts two signals. SIGUSR1 causes it to dump a + profile and function call stack to the profile file, + which is either awkprof.out, or whatever file was named + with the --profile option. It then continues to run. + SIGHUP causes pgawk to dump the profile and function + call stack and then exit. + +EXAMPLES + Print and sort the login names of all users: + + BEGIN { FS = ":" } + { print $1 | "sort" } + + Count lines in a file: + + { nlines++ } + END { print nlines } + + Precede each line by its number in the file: + + { print FNR, $0 } + + Concatenate and line number (a variation on a theme): + + { print NR, $0 } + Run an external command for particular lines of data: + + tail -f access_log | + awk '/myhome.html/ { system("nmap " $1 ">> logdir/myhome.html") }' + +INTERNATIONALIZATION + String constants are sequences of characters enclosed in + double quotes. In non-English speaking environments, it + is possible to mark strings in the AWK program as + requiring translation to the native natural language. + Such strings are marked in the AWK program with a lead- + ing underscore ("_"). For example, + + gawk 'BEGIN { print "hello, world" }' + + always prints hello, world. But, + + gawk 'BEGIN { print _"hello, world" }' + + might print bonjour, monde in France. + + There are several steps involved in producing and run- + ning a localizable AWK program. + + 1. Add a BEGIN action to assign a value to the TEXTDO- + MAIN variable to set the text domain to a name asso- + ciated with your program. + + BEGIN { TEXTDOMAIN = "myprog" } + + This allows gawk to find the .mo file associated with + your program. Without this step, gawk uses the messages + text domain, which likely does not contain translations + for your program. + + 2. Mark all strings that should be translated with + leading underscores. + + 3. If necessary, use the dcgettext() and/or bindtextdo- + main() functions in your program, as appropriate. + + 4. Run gawk --gen-po -f myprog.awk > myprog.po to gen- + erate a .po file for your program. + + 5. Provide appropriate translations, and build and + install the corresponding .mo files. + + The internationalization features are described in full + detail in GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + +POSIX COMPATIBILITY + A primary goal for gawk is compatibility with the POSIX + standard, as well as with the latest version of UNIX + awk. To this end, gawk incorporates the following user + visible features which are not described in the AWK + book, but are part of the Bell Laboratories version of + awk, and are in the POSIX standard. + + The book indicates that command line variable assignment + happens when awk would otherwise open the argument as a + file, which is after the BEGIN block is executed. How- + ever, in earlier implementations, when such an assign- + ment appeared before any file names, the assignment + would happen before the BEGIN block was run. Applica- + tions came to depend on this "feature." When awk was + changed to match its documentation, the -v option for + assigning variables before program execution was added + to accommodate applications that depended upon the old + behavior. (This feature was agreed upon by both the + Bell Laboratories and the GNU developers.) + + The -W option for implementation specific features is + from the POSIX standard. + + When processing arguments, gawk uses the special option + "--" to signal the end of arguments. In compatibility + mode, it warns about but otherwise ignores undefined + options. In normal operation, such arguments are passed + on to the AWK program for it to process. + + The AWK book does not define the return value of + srand(). The POSIX standard has it return the seed it + was using, to allow keeping track of random number + sequences. Therefore srand() in gawk also returns its + current seed. + + Other new features are: The use of multiple -f options + (from MKS awk); the ENVIRON array; the \a, and \v escape + sequences (done originally in gawk and fed back into the + Bell Laboratories version); the tolower() and toupper() + built-in functions (from the Bell Laboratories version); + and the ANSI C conversion specifications in printf (done + first in the Bell Laboratories version). + +HISTORICAL FEATURES + There are two features of historical AWK implementations + that gawk supports. First, it is possible to call the + length() built-in function not only with no argument, + but even without parentheses! Thus, + + a = length # Holy Algol 60, Batman! + + is the same as either of + + a = length() + a = length($0) + + This feature is marked as "deprecated" in the POSIX + standard, and gawk issues a warning about its use if + --lint is specified on the command line. + + The other feature is the use of either the continue or + the break statements outside the body of a while, for, + or do loop. Traditional AWK implementations have + treated such usage as equivalent to the next statement. + Gawk supports this usage if --traditional has been spec- + ified. + +GNU EXTENSIONS + Gawk has a number of extensions to POSIX awk. They are + described in this section. All the extensions described + here can be disabled by invoking gawk with the --tradi- + tional or --posix options. + + The following features of gawk are not available in + POSIX awk. + + · No path search is performed for files named via the -f + option. Therefore the AWKPATH environment variable is + not special. + + · The \x escape sequence. (Disabled with --posix.) + + · The fflush() function. (Disabled with --posix.) + + · The ability to continue lines after ? and :. (Dis- + abled with --posix.) + + · Octal and hexadecimal constants in AWK programs. + + · The ARGIND, BINMODE, ERRNO, LINT, RT and TEXTDOMAIN + variables are not special. + + · The IGNORECASE variable and its side-effects are not + available. + + · The FIELDWIDTHS variable and fixed-width field split- + ting. + + · The PROCINFO array is not available. + + · The use of RS as a regular expression. + + · The special file names available for I/O redirection + are not recognized. + + · The |& operator for creating co-processes. + + · The ability to split out individual characters using + the null string as the value of FS, and as the third + argument to split(). + + · The optional second argument to the close() function. + + · The optional third argument to the match() function. + + · The ability to use positional specifiers with printf + and sprintf(). + + · The ability to pass an array to length(). + + · The use of delete array to delete the entire contents + of an array. + + · The use of nextfile to abandon processing of the cur- + rent input file. + + · The and(), asort(), asorti(), bindtextdomain(), + compl(), dcgettext(), dcngettext(), gensub(), + lshift(), mktime(), or(), rshift(), strftime(), str- + tonum(), systime() and xor() functions. + + · Localizable strings. + + · Adding new built-in functions dynamically with the + extension() function. + + The AWK book does not define the return value of the + close() function. Gawk's close() returns the value from + fclose(3), or pclose(3), when closing an output file or + pipe, respectively. It returns the process's exit sta- + tus when closing an input pipe. The return value is -1 + if the named file, pipe or co-process was not opened + with a redirection. + + When gawk is invoked with the --traditional option, if + the fs argument to the -F option is "t", then FS is set + to the tab character. Note that typing gawk -F\t ... + simply causes the shell to quote the "t," and does not + pass "\t" to the -F option. Since this is a rather ugly + special case, it is not the default behavior. This + behavior also does not occur if --posix has been speci- + fied. To really get a tab character as the field sepa- + rator, it is best to use single quotes: gawk -F'\t' .... + + If gawk is configured with the --enable-switch option to + the configure command, then it accepts an additional + control-flow statement: + switch (expression) { + case value|regex : statement + ... + [ default: statement ] + } + + If gawk is configured with the --disable-directories- + fatal option, then it will silently skip directories + named on the command line. Otherwise, it will do so + only if invoked with the --traditional option. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The AWKPATH environment variable can be used to provide + a list of directories that gawk searches when looking + for files named via the -f and --file options. + + If POSIXLY_CORRECT exists in the environment, then gawk + behaves exactly as if --posix had been specified on the + command line. If --lint has been specified, gawk issues + a warning message to this effect. + +SEE ALSO + egrep(1), getpid(2), getppid(2), getpgrp(2), getuid(2), + geteuid(2), getgid(2), getegid(2), getgroups(2) + + The AWK Programming Language, Alfred V. Aho, Brian W. + Kernighan, Peter J. Weinberger, Addison-Wesley, 1988. + ISBN 0-201-07981-X. + + GAWK: Effective AWK Programming, Edition 3.0, published + by the Free Software Foundation, 2001. The current ver- + sion of this document is available online at + http://www.gnu.org/software/gawk/manual. + +BUGS + The -F option is not necessary given the command line + variable assignment feature; it remains only for back- + wards compatibility. + + Syntactically invalid single character programs tend to + overflow the parse stack, generating a rather unhelpful + message. Such programs are surprisingly difficult to + diagnose in the completely general case, and the effort + to do so really is not worth it. + +AUTHORS + The original version of UNIX awk was designed and imple- + mented by Alfred Aho, Peter Weinberger, and Brian + Kernighan of Bell Laboratories. Brian Kernighan contin- + ues to maintain and enhance it. + + Paul Rubin and Jay Fenlason, of the Free Software Foun- + dation, wrote gawk, to be compatible with the original + version of awk distributed in Seventh Edition UNIX. + John Woods contributed a number of bug fixes. David + Trueman, with contributions from Arnold Robbins, made + gawk compatible with the new version of UNIX awk. + Arnold Robbins is the current maintainer. + + The initial DOS port was done by Conrad Kwok and Scott + Garfinkle. Scott Deifik is the current DOS maintainer. + Pat Rankin did the port to VMS, and Michal Jaegermann + did the port to the Atari ST. The port to OS/2 was done + by Kai Uwe Rommel, with contributions and help from Dar- + rel Hankerson. Juan M. Guerrero now maintains the OS/2 + port. Fred Fish supplied support for the Amiga, and + Martin Brown provided the BeOS port. Stephen Davies + provided the original Tandem port, and Matthew Woehlke + provided changes for Tandem's POSIX-compliant systems. + +VERSION INFORMATION + This man page documents gawk, version 3.1.6. + +BUG REPORTS + If you find a bug in gawk, please send electronic mail + to bug-gawk@gnu.org. Please include your operating sys- + tem and its revision, the version of gawk (from gawk + --version), what C compiler you used to compile it, and + a test program and data that are as small as possible + for reproducing the problem. + + Before sending a bug report, please do the following + things. First, verify that you have the latest version + of gawk. Many bugs (usually subtle ones) are fixed at + each release, and if yours is out of date, the problem + may already have been solved. Second, please see if + setting the environment variable LC_ALL to LC_ALL=C + causes things to behave as you expect. If so, it's a + locale issue, and may or may not really be a bug. + Finally, please read this man page and the reference + manual carefully to be sure that what you think is a bug + really is, instead of just a quirk in the language. + + Whatever you do, do NOT post a bug report in + comp.lang.awk. While the gawk developers occasionally + read this newsgroup, posting bug reports there is an + unreliable way to report bugs. Instead, please use the + electronic mail addresses given above. + + If you're using a GNU/Linux system or BSD-based system, + you may wish to submit a bug report to the vendor of + your distribution. That's fine, but please send a copy + to the official email address as well, since there's no + guarantee that the bug will be forwarded to the gawk + maintainer. + +ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS + Brian Kernighan of Bell Laboratories provided valuable + assistance during testing and debugging. We thank him. + +COPYING PERMISSIONS + Copyright © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, + 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007 + Free Software Foundation, Inc. + + Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim + copies of this manual page provided the copyright notice + and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. + + Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified + versions of this manual page under the conditions for + verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting + derived work is distributed under the terms of a permis- + sion notice identical to this one. + + Permission is granted to copy and distribute transla- + tions of this manual page into another language, under + the above conditions for modified versions, except that + this permission notice may be stated in a translation + approved by the Foundation. + + + +Free Software Foundation Oct 19 2007 GAWK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/groups.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/groups.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f08bc6d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/groups.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +GROUPS(1) User Commands GROUPS(1) + + + + + +NAME + groups - print the groups a user is in + +SYNOPSIS + groups [OPTION]... [USERNAME]... + +DESCRIPTION + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Same as id -Gn. If no USERNAME, use current process. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for groups is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and groups programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info groups + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +groups 5.3.0 November 2004 GROUPS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/head.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/head.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..851f555 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/head.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +HEAD(1) User Commands HEAD(1) + + + + + +NAME + head - output the first part of files + +SYNOPSIS + head [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print the first 10 lines of each FILE to standard out- + put. With more than one FILE, precede each with a + header giving the file name. With no FILE, or when FILE + is -, read standard input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -c, --bytes=[-]N + print the first N bytes of each file; with the + leading `-', print all but the last N bytes of + each file + + -n, --lines=[-]N + print the first N lines instead of the first 10; + with the leading `-', print all but the last N + lines of each file + + -q, --quiet, --silent + never print headers giving file names + + -v, --verbose + always print headers giving file names + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + N may have a multiplier suffix: b 512, k 1024, m + 1024*1024. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for head is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and head programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info head + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +head 5.3.0 November 2004 HEAD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostid.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostid.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57f4b2c --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostid.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +HOSTID(1) User Commands HOSTID(1) + + + + + +NAME + hostid - print the numeric identifier for the current + host + +SYNOPSIS + hostid + + hostid OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Print the numeric identifier (in hexadecimal) for the + current host. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for hostid is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and hostid programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info hostid + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +hostid 5.3.0 November 2004 HOSTID(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e774633 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +HOSTNAME(1) User Commands HOSTNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME + hostname - set or print the name of the current host + system + +SYNOPSIS + hostname [NAME] + hostname OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Print or set the hostname of the current system. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for hostname is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and hostname programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info hostname + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +hostname 5.3.0 November 2004 HOSTNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/id.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/id.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f2d40f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/id.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +ID(1) User Commands ID(1) + + + + + +NAME + id - print real and effective UIDs and GIDs + +SYNOPSIS + id [OPTION]... [USERNAME] + +DESCRIPTION + Print information for USERNAME, or the current user. + + -a ignore, for compatibility with other versions + + -g, --group + print only the effective group ID + + -G, --groups + print all group IDs + + -n, --name + print a name instead of a number, for -ugG + + -r, --real + print the real ID instead of the effective ID, + with -ugG + + -u, --user + print only the effective user ID + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Without any OPTION, print some useful set of identified + information. + +AUTHOR + Written by Arnold Robbins and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for id is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and id programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info id + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +id 5.3.0 November 2004 ID(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/igawk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/igawk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3d142c --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/igawk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +IGAWK(1) Utility Commands IGAWK(1) + + + +NAME + igawk - gawk with include files + +SYNOPSIS + igawk [ all gawk options ] -f program-file [ -- ] file + ... + igawk [ all gawk options ] [ -- ] program-text file ... + +DESCRIPTION + Igawk is a simple shell script that adds the ability to + have ``include files'' to gawk(1). + + AWK programs for igawk are the same as for gawk, except + that, in addition, you may have lines like + + @include getopt.awk + + in your program to include the file getopt.awk from + either the current directory or one of the other direc- + tories in the search path. + +OPTIONS + See gawk(1) for a full description of the AWK language + and the options that gawk supports. + +EXAMPLES + cat << EOF > test.awk + @include getopt.awk + + BEGIN { + while (getopt(ARGC, ARGV, "am:q") != -1) + ... + } + EOF + + igawk -f test.awk + +SEE ALSO + gawk(1) + + Effective AWK Programming, Edition 1.0, published by the + Free Software Foundation, 1995. + +AUTHOR + Arnold Robbins (arnold@skeeve.com). + + + +Free Software Foundation Nov 3 1999 IGAWK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/install.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/install.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..369116e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/install.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +INSTALL(1) User Commands INSTALL(1) + + + + + +NAME + install - copy files and set attributes + +SYNOPSIS + install [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST + install [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY + install [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE... + install [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORY... + +DESCRIPTION + In the first three forms, copy SOURCE to DEST or multi- + ple SOURCE(s) to the existing DIRECTORY, while setting + permission modes and owner/group. In the 4th form, cre- + ate all components of the given DIRECTORY(ies). + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + --backup[=CONTROL] make a backup of each existing desti- + nation file + + -b like --backup but does not accept an argument + + -c (ignored) + + -d, --directory + treat all arguments as directory names; create + all components of the specified directories + + -D create all leading components of DEST except the + last, then copy SOURCE to DEST + + -g, --group=GROUP + set group ownership, instead of process' current + group + + -m, --mode=MODE + set permission mode (as in chmod), instead of + rwxr-xr-x + + -o, --owner=OWNER + set ownership (super-user only) + + -p, --preserve-timestamps + apply access/modification times of SOURCE files + to corresponding destination files + + -s, --strip + strip symbol tables + + -S, --suffix=SUFFIX override the usual backup suffix + + -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY + copy all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY + + -T, --no-target-directory + treat DEST as a normal file + + -v, --verbose + print the name of each directory as it is created + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or + SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be + selected via the --backup option or through the VER- + SION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values: + + none, off + never make backups (even if --backup is given) + + numbered, t + make numbered backups + + existing, nil + numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- + wise + + simple, never + always make simple backups + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for install is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and install programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info install + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +install 5.3.0 November 2004 INSTALL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/join.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/join.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32597ba --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/join.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +JOIN(1) User Commands JOIN(1) + + + + + +NAME + join - join lines of two files on a common field + +SYNOPSIS + join [OPTION]... FILE1 FILE2 + +DESCRIPTION + For each pair of input lines with identical join fields, + write a line to standard output. The default join field + is the first, delimited by whitespace. When FILE1 or + FILE2 (not both) is -, read standard input. + + -a FILENUM + print unpairable lines coming from file FILENUM, + where FILENUM is 1 or 2, corresponding to FILE1 + or FILE2 + + -e EMPTY + replace missing input fields with EMPTY + + -i, --ignore-case ignore differences in case when com- + paring fields + + -j FIELD + equivalent to `-1 FIELD -2 FIELD' + + -o FORMAT + obey FORMAT while constructing output line + + -t CHAR + use CHAR as input and output field separator + + -v FILENUM + like -a FILENUM, but suppress joined output lines + + -1 FIELD + join on this FIELD of file 1 + + -2 FIELD + join on this FIELD of file 2 + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Unless -t CHAR is given, leading blanks separate fields + and are ignored, else fields are separated by CHAR. Any + FIELD is a field number counted from 1. FORMAT is one + or more comma or blank separated specifications, each + being `FILENUM.FIELD' or `0'. Default FORMAT outputs + the join field, the remaining fields from FILE1, the + remaining fields from FILE2, all separated by CHAR. + + Important: FILE1 and FILE2 must be sorted on the join + fields. + +AUTHOR + Written by Mike Haertel. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for join is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and join programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info join + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +join 5.3.0 December 2004 JOIN(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/kill.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/kill.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c7f87b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/kill.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +KILL(1) User Commands KILL(1) + + + + + +NAME + kill - send signals to processes, or list signals + +SYNOPSIS + kill [-s SIGNAL | -SIGNAL] PID... + kill -l [SIGNAL]... + kill -t [SIGNAL]... + +DESCRIPTION + Send signals to processes, or list signals. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -s, --signal=SIGNAL, -SIGNAL + + specify the name or number of the signal to be + sent + + -l, --list + list signal names, or convert signal names + to/from numbers + + -t, --table + print a table of signal information + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIGNAL may be a signal name like `HUP', or a signal num- + ber like `1', or an exit status of a process terminated + by a signal. PID is an integer; if negative it identi- + fies a process group. + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for kill is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and kill programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info kill + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +kill 5.3.0 November 2004 KILL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/link.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/link.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13e16f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/link.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +LINK(1) User Commands LINK(1) + + + + + +NAME + link - call the link function to create a link to a file + +SYNOPSIS + link FILE1 FILE2 + link OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Call the link function to create a link named FILE2 to + an existing FILE1. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Michael Stone. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for link is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and link programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info link + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +link 5.3.0 November 2004 LINK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ln.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ln.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b83cfff --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ln.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +LN(1) User Commands LN(1) + + + + + +NAME + ln - make links between files + +SYNOPSIS + ln [OPTION]... [-T] TARGET LINK_NAME (1st form) + ln [OPTION]... TARGET (2nd form) + ln [OPTION]... TARGET... DIRECTORY (3rd form) + ln [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY TARGET... (4th form) + +DESCRIPTION + In the 1st form, create a link to TARGET with the name + LINK_NAME. In the 2nd form, create a link to TARGET in + the current directory. In the 3rd and 4th forms, create + links to each TARGET in DIRECTORY. Create hard links by + default, symbolic links with --symbolic. When creating + hard links, each TARGET must exist. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + --backup[=CONTROL] + make a backup of each existing destination file + + -b like --backup but does not accept an argument + + -d, -F, --directory + allow the superuser to attempt to hard link + directories (note: will probably fail due to sys- + tem restrictions, even for the superuser) + + -f, --force + remove existing destination files + + -n, --no-dereference + treat destination that is a symlink to a direc- + tory as if it were a normal file + + -i, --interactive + prompt whether to remove destinations + + -s, --symbolic + make symbolic links instead of hard links + + -S, --suffix=SUFFIX + override the usual backup suffix + + -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY + specify the DIRECTORY in which to create the + links + + -T, --no-target-directory + treat LINK_NAME as a normal file + + -v, --verbose + print name of each file before linking + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or + SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be + selected via the --backup option or through the + VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the val- + ues: + + none, off + never make backups (even if --backup is given) + + numbered, t + make numbered backups + + existing, nil + numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- + wise + + simple, never + always make simple backups + +AUTHOR + Written by Mike Parker and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for ln is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and ln programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info ln + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +ln 5.3.0 November 2004 LN(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/logname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/logname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f75c71 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/logname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +LOGNAME(1) User Commands LOGNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME + logname - print user's login name + +SYNOPSIS + logname [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION + Print the name of the current user. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by FIXME: unknown. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for logname is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and logname programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info logname + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +logname 5.3.0 November 2004 LOGNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ls.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ls.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0240658 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ls.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +LS(1) User Commands LS(1) + + + + + +NAME + ls - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS + ls [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + List information about the FILEs (the current directory + by default). Sort entries alphabetically if none of + -cftuSUX nor --sort. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --all + do not ignore entries starting with . + + -A, --almost-all + do not list implied . and .. + + --author + with -l, print the author of each file + + -b, --escape + print octal escapes for nongraphic characters + + --block-size=SIZE + use SIZE-byte blocks + + -B, --ignore-backups + do not list implied entries ending with ~ + + -c with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of last + modification of file status information) with -l: + show ctime and sort by name otherwise: sort by + ctime + + -C list entries by columns + + --color[=WHEN] + control whether color is used to distinguish file + types. WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto' + + -d, --directory + list directory entries instead of contents, and + do not dereference symbolic links + + -D, --dired + generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode + + -f do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst + + -F, --classify + append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries + + --format=WORD + across -x, commas -m, horizontal -x, long -l, + single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C + + --full-time + like -l --time-style=full-iso + + -g like -l, but do not list owner + + -G, --no-group + like -l, but do not list group + + -h, --human-readable + with -l, print sizes in human readable format + (e.g., 1K 234M 2G) + + --si likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + + -H, --dereference-command-line + follow symbolic links listed on the command line + + --dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir + follow each command line symbolic link that + points to a directory + + --hide=PATTERN + do not list implied entries matching shell PAT- + TERN (overridden by -a or -A) + + --indicator-style=WORD append indicator with style WORD + to entry names: + none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p) + + -i, --inode + with -l, print the index number of each file + + -I, --ignore=PATTERN + do not list implied entries matching shell PAT- + TERN + + -k like --block-size=1K + + -l use a long listing format + + -L, --dereference + when showing file information for a symbolic + link, show information for the file the link ref- + erences rather than for the link itself + + -m fill width with a comma separated list of entries + + -n, --numeric-uid-gid + like -l, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs + + -N, --literal + print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control + characters specially) + + -o like -l, but do not list group information + + -p, --file-type + append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries + + -q, --hide-control-chars + print ? instead of non graphic characters + + --show-control-chars + show non graphic characters as-is (default unless + program is `ls' and output is a terminal) + + -Q, --quote-name + enclose entry names in double quotes + + --quoting-style=WORD + use quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, + locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape + + -r, --reverse + reverse order while sorting + + -R, --recursive + list subdirectories recursively + + -s, --size + with -l, print size of each file, in blocks + + -S sort by file size + + --sort=WORD + extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t, version + -v, status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use + -u + + --time=WORD + with -l, show time as WORD instead of modifica- + tion time: atime, access, use, ctime or status; + use specified time as sort key if --sort=time + + --time-style=STYLE + with -l, show times using style STYLE: full-iso, + long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT. FORMAT is inter- + preted like `date'; if FORMAT is FORMAT1<new- + line>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to non-recent files + and FORMAT2 to recent files; if STYLE is prefixed + with `posix-', STYLE takes effect only outside + the POSIX locale + + -t sort by modification time + + -T, --tabsize=COLS + assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8 + + -u with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: + show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort + by access time + + -U do not sort; list entries in directory order + + -v sort by version + + -w, --width=COLS + assume screen width instead of current value + + -x list entries by lines instead of by columns + + -X sort alphabetically by entry extension + + -1 list one file per line + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed + by) one of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M + 1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + + By default, color is not used to distinguish types of + files. That is equivalent to using --color=none. Using + the --color option without the optional WHEN argument is + equivalent to using --color=always. With --color=auto, + color codes are output only if standard output is con- + nected to a terminal (tty). + + Exit status is 0 if OK, 1 if minor problems, 2 if seri- + ous trouble. + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for ls is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and ls programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info ls + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +ls 5.3.0 December 2004 LS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/md5sum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/md5sum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ecd8d68 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/md5sum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +MD5SUM(1) User Commands MD5SUM(1) + + + + + +NAME + md5sum - compute and check MD5 message digest + +SYNOPSIS + md5sum [OPTION] [FILE]... + md5sum [OPTION] --check [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION + Print or check MD5 (128-bit) checksums. With no FILE, + or when FILE is -, read standard input. + + -b, --binary + read files in binary mode (default on DOS/Win- + dows) + + -c, --check + check MD5 sums against given list + + -t, --text + read files in text mode (default) + + The following two options are useful only when verifying + checksums: + --status + don't output anything, status code shows success + + -w, --warn + warn about improperly formated checksum lines + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + The sums are computed as described in RFC 1321. When + checking, the input should be a former output of this + program. The default mode is to print a line with + checksum, a character indicating type (`*' for binary, ` + ' for text), and name for each FILE. + +AUTHOR + Written by Ulrich Drepper and Scott Miller. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for md5sum is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and md5sum programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info md5sum + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +md5sum 5.3.0 November 2004 MD5SUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkdir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkdir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb87537 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkdir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +MKDIR(1) User Commands MKDIR(1) + + + + + +NAME + mkdir - make directories + +SYNOPSIS + mkdir [OPTION] DIRECTORY... + +DESCRIPTION + Create the DIRECTORY(ies), if they do not already exist. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -m, --mode=MODE + set permission mode (as in chmod), not rwxrwxrwx + - umask + + -p, --parents + no error if existing, make parent directories as + needed + + -v, --verbose + print a message for each created directory + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for mkdir is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and mkdir programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info mkdir + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mkdir 5.3.0 November 2004 MKDIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkfifo.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkfifo.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec00be3 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkfifo.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +MKFIFO(1) User Commands MKFIFO(1) + + + + + +NAME + mkfifo - make FIFOs (named pipes) + +SYNOPSIS + mkfifo [OPTION] NAME... + +DESCRIPTION + Create named pipes (FIFOs) with the given NAMEs. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -m, --mode=MODE + set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - + umask + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for mkfifo is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and mkfifo programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info mkfifo + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mkfifo 5.3.0 November 2004 MKFIFO(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mknod.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mknod.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f494bbf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mknod.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +MKNOD(1) User Commands MKNOD(1) + + + + + +NAME + mknod - make block or character special files + +SYNOPSIS + mknod [OPTION]... NAME TYPE [MAJOR MINOR] + +DESCRIPTION + Create the special file NAME of the given TYPE. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -m, --mode=MODE + set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - + umask + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Both MAJOR and MINOR must be specified when TYPE is b, + c, or u, and they must be omitted when TYPE is p. If + MAJOR or MINOR begins with 0x or 0X, it is interpreted + as hexadecimal; otherwise, if it begins with 0, as + octal; otherwise, as decimal. TYPE may be: + + b create a block (buffered) special file + + c, u create a character (unbuffered) special file + + p create a FIFO + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for mknod is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and mknod programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info mknod + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mknod 5.3.0 November 2004 MKNOD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mv.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mv.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05c0293 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mv.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +MV(1) User Commands MV(1) + + + + + +NAME + mv - move (rename) files + +SYNOPSIS + mv [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST + mv [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY + mv [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE... + +DESCRIPTION + Rename SOURCE to DEST, or move SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + --backup[=CONTROL] + make a backup of each existing destination file + + -b like --backup but does not accept an argument + + -f, --force + do not prompt before overwriting (equivalent to + --reply=yes) + + -i, --interactive + prompt before overwrite (equivalent to + --reply=query) + + --reply={yes,no,query} + specify how to handle the prompt about an exist- + ing destination file + + --strip-trailing-slashes remove any trailing slashes + from each SOURCE + argument + + -S, --suffix=SUFFIX + override the usual backup suffix + + -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY + move all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY + + -T, --no-target-directory + treat DEST as a normal file + + -u, --update + move only when the SOURCE file is newer than the + destination file or when the destination file is + missing + + -v, --verbose + explain what is being done + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or + SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be + selected via the --backup option or through the VER- + SION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values: + + none, off + never make backups (even if --backup is given) + + numbered, t + make numbered backups + + existing, nil + numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- + wise + + simple, never + always make simple backups + +AUTHOR + Written by Mike Parker, David MacKenzie, and Jim Meyer- + ing. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for mv is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and mv programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info mv + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mv 5.3.0 November 2004 MV(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nice.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nice.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d41ac21 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nice.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +NICE(1) User Commands NICE(1) + + + + + +NAME + nice - run a program with modified scheduling priority + +SYNOPSIS + nice [OPTION] [COMMAND [ARG]...] + +DESCRIPTION + Run COMMAND with an adjusted nice value, which affects + the scheduling priority. With no COMMAND, print the + current nice value. Nice values range from -20 (most + favorable scheduling) to 19 (least favorable). + + -n, --adjustment=N + add integer N to the nice value (default 10) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for nice is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and nice programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info nice + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +nice 5.3.0 November 2004 NICE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nl.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nl.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2baa72b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nl.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +NL(1) User Commands NL(1) + + + + + +NAME + nl - number lines of files + +SYNOPSIS + nl [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Write each FILE to standard output, with line numbers + added. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard + input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -b, --body-numbering=STYLE + use STYLE for numbering body lines + + -d, --section-delimiter=CC + use CC for separating logical pages + + -f, --footer-numbering=STYLE + use STYLE for numbering footer lines + + -h, --header-numbering=STYLE + use STYLE for numbering header lines + + -i, --page-increment=NUMBER + line number increment at each line + + -l, --join-blank-lines=NUMBER + group of NUMBER empty lines counted as one + + -n, --number-format=FORMAT + insert line numbers according to FORMAT + + -p, --no-renumber + do not reset line numbers at logical pages + + -s, --number-separator=STRING + add STRING after (possible) line number + + -v, --first-page=NUMBER + first line number on each logical page + + -w, --number-width=NUMBER + use NUMBER columns for line numbers + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + By default, selects -v1 -i1 -l1 -sTAB -w6 -nrn -hn -bt + -fn. CC are two delimiter characters for separating + logical pages, a missing second character implies :. + Type \\ for \. STYLE is one of: + + a number all lines + + t number only nonempty lines + + n number no lines + + pBRE number only lines that contain a match for the + basic regular + + expression, BRE + + FORMAT is one of: + + ln left justified, no leading zeros + + rn right justified, no leading zeros + + rz right justified, leading zeros + +AUTHOR + Written by Scott Bartram and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for nl is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and nl programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info nl + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +nl 5.3.0 November 2004 NL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nohup.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nohup.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a28728 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nohup.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +NOHUP(1) User Commands NOHUP(1) + + + + + +NAME + nohup - run a command immune to hangups, with output to + a non-tty + +SYNOPSIS + nohup COMMAND [ARG]... + nohup OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Run COMMAND, ignoring hangup signals. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for nohup is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and nohup programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info nohup + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +nohup 5.3.0 November 2004 NOHUP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/od.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/od.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e73270 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/od.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +OD(1) User Commands OD(1) + + + + + +NAME + od - dump files in octal and other formats + +SYNOPSIS + od [OPTION]... [FILE]... + od [-abcdfilosx]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b]] + od --traditional [OPTION]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b] + [+][LABEL][.][b]] + +DESCRIPTION + Write an unambiguous representation, octal bytes by + default, of FILE to standard output. With more than one + FILE argument, concatenate them in the listed order to + form the input. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read + standard input. + + All arguments to long options are mandatory for short + options. + + -A, --address-radix=RADIX + decide how file offsets are printed + + -j, --skip-bytes=BYTES + skip BYTES input bytes first + + -N, --read-bytes=BYTES + limit dump to BYTES input bytes + + -S, --strings[=BYTES] + output strings of at least BYTES graphic chars + + -t, --format=TYPE + select output format or formats + + -v, --output-duplicates + do not use * to mark line suppression + + -w, --width[=BYTES] + output BYTES bytes per output line + + --traditional + accept arguments in traditional form + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Traditional format specifications may be intermixed; they + accumulate: + -a same as -t a, select named characters + + -b same as -t o1, select octal bytes + + -c same as -t c, select ASCII characters or back- + slash escapes + + -d same as -t u2, select unsigned decimal 2-byte + units + + -f same as -t fF, select floats + + -i same as -t dI, select decimal ints + + -l same as -t dL, select decimal longs + + -o same as -t o2, select octal 2-byte units + + -s same as -t d2, select decimal 2-byte units + + -x same as -t x2, select hexadecimal 2-byte units + + If first and second call formats both apply, the second + format is assumed if the last operand begins with + or + (if there are 2 operands) a digit. An OFFSET operand + means -j OFFSET. LABEL is the pseudo-address at first + byte printed, incremented when dump is progressing. For + OFFSET and LABEL, a 0x or 0X prefix indicates hexadeci- + mal; suffixes may be . for octal and b for multiply by + 512. + + TYPE is made up of one or more of these specifications: + + a named character + + c ASCII character or backslash escape + + d[SIZE] + signed decimal, SIZE bytes per integer + + f[SIZE] + floating point, SIZE bytes per integer + + o[SIZE] + octal, SIZE bytes per integer + + u[SIZE] + unsigned decimal, SIZE bytes per integer + + x[SIZE] + hexadecimal, SIZE bytes per integer + + SIZE is a number. For TYPE in doux, SIZE may also be C + for sizeof(char), S for sizeof(short), I for sizeof(int) + or L for sizeof(long). If TYPE is f, SIZE may also be F + for sizeof(float), D for sizeof(double) or L for + sizeof(long double). + + RADIX is d for decimal, o for octal, x for hexadecimal + or n for none. BYTES is hexadecimal with 0x or 0X pre- + fix, it is multiplied by 512 with b suffix, by 1024 with + k and by 1048576 with m. Adding a z suffix to any type + adds a display of printable characters to the end of + each line of output. --string without a number implies + 3. --width without a number implies 32. By default, od + uses -A o -t d2 -w 16. + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for od is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and od programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info od + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +od 5.3.0 November 2004 OD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/paste.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/paste.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..deb8194 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/paste.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +PASTE(1) User Commands PASTE(1) + + + + + +NAME + paste - merge lines of files + +SYNOPSIS + paste [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Write lines consisting of the sequentially corresponding + lines from each FILE, separated by TABs, to standard + output. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard + input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -d, --delimiters=LIST + reuse characters from LIST instead of TABs + + -s, --serial + paste one file at a time instead of in parallel + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David M. Ihnat and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for paste is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and paste programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info paste + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +paste 5.3.0 November 2004 PASTE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pathchk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pathchk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b023561 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pathchk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +PATHCHK(1) User Commands PATHCHK(1) + + + + + +NAME + pathchk - check whether file names are valid or portable + +SYNOPSIS + pathchk [OPTION]... NAME... + +DESCRIPTION + Diagnose unportable constructs in NAME. + + -p, --portability + check for all POSIX systems, not only this one + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Eggert, David MacKenzie, and Jim Meyer- + ing. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for pathchk is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and pathchk programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info pathchk + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pathchk 5.3.0 November 2004 PATHCHK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pgawk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pgawk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a431e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pgawk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1972 @@ +GAWK(1) Utility Commands GAWK(1) + + + +NAME + gawk - pattern scanning and processing language + +SYNOPSIS + gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ -- + ] file ... + gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text + file ... + + pgawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ + -- ] file ... + pgawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text + file ... + +DESCRIPTION + Gawk is the GNU Project's implementation of the AWK pro- + gramming language. It conforms to the definition of the + language in the POSIX 1003.1 Standard. This version in + turn is based on the description in The AWK Programming + Language, by Aho, Kernighan, and Weinberger, with the + additional features found in the System V Release 4 ver- + sion of UNIX awk. Gawk also provides more recent Bell + Laboratories awk extensions, and a number of GNU-spe- + cific extensions. + + Pgawk is the profiling version of gawk. It is identical + in every way to gawk, except that programs run more + slowly, and it automatically produces an execution pro- + file in the file awkprof.out when done. See the --pro- + file option, below. + + The command line consists of options to gawk itself, the + AWK program text (if not supplied via the -f or --file + options), and values to be made available in the ARGC + and ARGV pre-defined AWK variables. + +OPTION FORMAT + Gawk options may be either traditional POSIX one letter + options, or GNU-style long options. POSIX options start + with a single "-", while long options start with "--". + Long options are provided for both GNU-specific features + and for POSIX-mandated features. + + Following the POSIX standard, gawk-specific options are + supplied via arguments to the -W option. Multiple -W + options may be supplied Each -W option has a correspond- + ing long option, as detailed below. Arguments to long + options are either joined with the option by an = sign, + with no intervening spaces, or they may be provided in + the next command line argument. Long options may be + abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation remains unique. + +OPTIONS + Gawk accepts the following options, listed by frequency. + + -F fs + --field-separator fs + Use fs for the input field separator (the value + of the FS predefined variable). + + -v var=val + --assign var=val + Assign the value val to the variable var, before + execution of the program begins. Such variable + values are available to the BEGIN block of an AWK + program. + + -f program-file + --file program-file + Read the AWK program source from the file pro- + gram-file, instead of from the first command line + argument. Multiple -f (or --file) options may be + used. + + -mf NNN + -mr NNN + Set various memory limits to the value NNN. The + f flag sets the maximum number of fields, and the + r flag sets the maximum record size. These two + flags and the -m option are from an earlier ver- + sion of the Bell Laboratories research version of + UNIX awk. They are ignored by gawk, since gawk + has no pre-defined limits. + + -W compat + -W traditional + --compat + --traditional + Run in compatibility mode. In compatibility + mode, gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none + of the GNU-specific extensions are recognized. + The use of --traditional is preferred over the + other forms of this option. See GNU EXTENSIONS, + below, for more information. + + -W copyleft + -W copyright + --copyleft + --copyright + Print the short version of the GNU copyright + information message on the standard output and + exit successfully. + + -W dump-variables[=file] + --dump-variables[=file] + Print a sorted list of global variables, their + types and final values to file. If no file is + provided, gawk uses a file named awkvars.out in + the current directory. + Having a list of all the global variables is a + good way to look for typographical errors in your + programs. You would also use this option if you + have a large program with a lot of functions, and + you want to be sure that your functions don't + inadvertently use global variables that you meant + to be local. (This is a particularly easy mis- + take to make with simple variable names like i, + j, and so on.) + + -W exec file + --exec file + Similar to -f, however, this is option is the + last one processed. This should be used with #! + scripts, particularly for CGI applications, to + avoid passing in options or source code (!) on + the command line from a URL. This option dis- + ables command-line variable assignments. + + -W gen-po + --gen-po + Scan and parse the AWK program, and generate a + GNU .po format file on standard output with + entries for all localizable strings in the pro- + gram. The program itself is not executed. See + the GNU gettext distribution for more information + on .po files. + + -W help + -W usage + --help + --usage + Print a relatively short summary of the available + options on the standard output. (Per the GNU + Coding Standards, these options cause an immedi- + ate, successful exit.) + + -W lint[=value] + --lint[=value] + Provide warnings about constructs that are dubi- + ous or non-portable to other AWK implementations. + With an optional argument of fatal, lint warnings + become fatal errors. This may be drastic, but + its use will certainly encourage the development + of cleaner AWK programs. With an optional argu- + ment of invalid, only warnings about things that + are actually invalid are issued. (This is not + fully implemented yet.) + + -W lint-old + --lint-old + Provide warnings about constructs that are not + portable to the original version of Unix awk. + + -W non-decimal-data + --non-decimal-data + Recognize octal and hexadecimal values in input + data. Use this option with great caution! + + -W posix + --posix + This turns on compatibility mode, with the fol- + lowing additional restrictions: + + · \x escape sequences are not recognized. + + · Only space and tab act as field separators when + FS is set to a single space, newline does not. + + · You cannot continue lines after ? and :. + + · The synonym func for the keyword function is + not recognized. + + · The operators ** and **= cannot be used in + place of ^ and ^=. + + · The fflush() function is not available. + + -W profile[=prof_file] + --profile[=prof_file] + Send profiling data to prof_file. The default is + awkprof.out. When run with gawk, the profile is + just a "pretty printed" version of the program. + When run with pgawk, the profile contains execu- + tion counts of each statement in the program in + the left margin and function call counts for each + user-defined function. + + -W re-interval + --re-interval + Enable the use of interval expressions in regular + expression matching (see Regular Expressions, + below). Interval expressions were not tradition- + ally available in the AWK language. The POSIX + standard added them, to make awk and egrep con- + sistent with each other. However, their use is + likely to break old AWK programs, so gawk only + provides them if they are requested with this + option, or when --posix is specified. + + -W source program-text + --source program-text + Use program-text as AWK program source code. + This option allows the easy intermixing of + library functions (used via the -f and --file + options) with source code entered on the command + line. It is intended primarily for medium to + large AWK programs used in shell scripts. + + -W use-lc-numeric + --use-lc-numeric + This forces gawk to use the locale's decimal + point character when parsing input data. + Although the POSIX standard requires this behav- + ior, and gawk does so when --posix is in effect, + the default is to follow traditional behavior and + use a period as the decimal point, even in + locales where the period is not the decimal point + character. This option overrides the default + behavior, without the full draconian strictness + of the --posix option. + + -W version + --version + Print version information for this particular + copy of gawk on the standard output. This is + useful mainly for knowing if the current copy of + gawk on your system is up to date with respect to + whatever the Free Software Foundation is dis- + tributing. This is also useful when reporting + bugs. (Per the GNU Coding Standards, these + options cause an immediate, successful exit.) + + -- Signal the end of options. This is useful to + allow further arguments to the AWK program itself + to start with a "-". This provides consistency + with the argument parsing convention used by most + other POSIX programs. + In compatibility mode, any other options are flagged as + invalid, but are otherwise ignored. In normal opera- + tion, as long as program text has been supplied, unknown + options are passed on to the AWK program in the ARGV + array for processing. This is particularly useful for + running AWK programs via the "#!" executable interpreter + mechanism. +AWK PROGRAM EXECUTION + An AWK program consists of a sequence of pattern-action + statements and optional function definitions. + pattern { action statements } + function name(parameter list) { statements } + Gawk first reads the program source from the program- + file(s) if specified, from arguments to --source, or + from the first non-option argument on the command line. + The -f and --source options may be used multiple times + on the command line. Gawk reads the program text as if + all the program-files and command line source texts had + been concatenated together. This is useful for building + libraries of AWK functions, without having to include + them in each new AWK program that uses them. It also + provides the ability to mix library functions with com- + mand line programs. + The environment variable AWKPATH specifies a search path + to use when finding source files named with the -f + option. If this variable does not exist, the default + path is ".:/usr/local/share/awk". (The actual directory + may vary, depending upon how gawk was built and + installed.) If a file name given to the -f option con- + tains a "/" character, no path search is performed. + Gawk executes AWK programs in the following order. + First, all variable assignments specified via the -v + option are performed. Next, gawk compiles the program + into an internal form. Then, gawk executes the code in + the BEGIN block(s) (if any), and then proceeds to read + each file named in the ARGV array. If there are no + files named on the command line, gawk reads the standard + input. + If a filename on the command line has the form var=val + it is treated as a variable assignment. The variable + var will be assigned the value val. (This happens after + any BEGIN block(s) have been run.) Command line vari- + able assignment is most useful for dynamically assigning + values to the variables AWK uses to control how input is + broken into fields and records. It is also useful for + controlling state if multiple passes are needed over a + single data file. + If the value of a particular element of ARGV is empty + (""), gawk skips over it. + For each record in the input, gawk tests to see if it + matches any pattern in the AWK program. For each pat- + tern that the record matches, the associated action is + executed. The patterns are tested in the order they + occur in the program. + Finally, after all the input is exhausted, gawk executes + the code in the END block(s) (if any). +VARIABLES, RECORDS AND FIELDS + AWK variables are dynamic; they come into existence when + they are first used. Their values are either floating- + point numbers or strings, or both, depending upon how + they are used. AWK also has one dimensional arrays; + arrays with multiple dimensions may be simulated. Sev- + eral pre-defined variables are set as a program runs; + these are described as needed and summarized below. + Records + Normally, records are separated by newline characters. + You can control how records are separated by assigning + values to the built-in variable RS. If RS is any single + character, that character separates records. Otherwise, + RS is a regular expression. Text in the input that + matches this regular expression separates the record. + However, in compatibility mode, only the first character + of its string value is used for separating records. If + RS is set to the null string, then records are separated + by blank lines. When RS is set to the null string, the + newline character always acts as a field separator, in + addition to whatever value FS may have. + Fields + As each input record is read, gawk splits the record + into fields, using the value of the FS variable as the + field separator. If FS is a single character, fields + are separated by that character. If FS is the null + string, then each individual character becomes a sepa- + rate field. Otherwise, FS is expected to be a full reg- + ular expression. In the special case that FS is a sin- + gle space, fields are separated by runs of spaces and/or + tabs and/or newlines. (But see the section POSIX COM- + PATIBILITY, below). NOTE: The value of IGNORECASE (see + below) also affects how fields are split when FS is a + regular expression, and how records are separated when + RS is a regular expression. + If the FIELDWIDTHS variable is set to a space separated + list of numbers, each field is expected to have fixed + width, and gawk splits up the record using the specified + widths. The value of FS is ignored. Assigning a new + value to FS overrides the use of FIELDWIDTHS, and + restores the default behavior. + Each field in the input record may be referenced by its + position, $1, $2, and so on. $0 is the whole record. + Fields need not be referenced by constants: + n = 5 + print $n + prints the fifth field in the input record. + The variable NF is set to the total number of fields in + the input record. + References to non-existent fields (i.e. fields after + $NF) produce the null-string. However, assigning to a + non-existent field (e.g., $(NF+2) = 5) increases the + value of NF, creates any intervening fields with the + null string as their value, and causes the value of $0 + to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by the + value of OFS. References to negative numbered fields + cause a fatal error. Decrementing NF causes the values + of fields past the new value to be lost, and the value + of $0 to be recomputed, with the fields being separated + by the value of OFS. + Assigning a value to an existing field causes the whole + record to be rebuilt when $0 is referenced. Similarly, + assigning a value to $0 causes the record to be resplit, + creating new values for the fields. + Built-in Variables + Gawk's built-in variables are: + ARGC The number of command line arguments (does + not include options to gawk, or the program + source). + ARGIND The index in ARGV of the current file being + processed. + ARGV Array of command line arguments. The array + is indexed from 0 to ARGC - 1. Dynamically + changing the contents of ARGV can control + the files used for data. + BINMODE On non-POSIX systems, specifies use of + "binary" mode for all file I/O. Numeric + values of 1, 2, or 3, specify that input + files, output files, or all files, respec- + tively, should use binary I/O. String val- + ues of "r", or "w" specify that input files, + or output files, respectively, should use + binary I/O. String values of "rw" or "wr" + specify that all files should use binary + I/O. Any other string value is treated as + "rw", but generates a warning message. + CONVFMT The conversion format for numbers, "%.6g", + by default. + ENVIRON An array containing the values of the cur- + rent environment. The array is indexed by + the environment variables, each element + being the value of that variable (e.g., ENV- + IRON["HOME"] might be /home/arnold). Chang- + ing this array does not affect the environ- + ment seen by programs which gawk spawns via + redirection or the system() function. + ERRNO If a system error occurs either doing a + redirection for getline, during a read for + getline, or during a close(), then ERRNO + will contain a string describing the error. + The value is subject to translation in non- + English locales. + FIELDWIDTHS A white-space separated list of fieldwidths. + When set, gawk parses the input into fields + of fixed width, instead of using the value + of the FS variable as the field separator. + FILENAME The name of the current input file. If no + files are specified on the command line, the + value of FILENAME is "-". However, FILENAME + is undefined inside the BEGIN block (unless + set by getline). + FNR The input record number in the current input + file. + FS The input field separator, a space by + default. See Fields, above. + IGNORECASE Controls the case-sensitivity of all regular + expression and string operations. If + IGNORECASE has a non-zero value, then string + comparisons and pattern matching in rules, + field splitting with FS, record separating + with RS, regular expression matching with ~ + and !~, and the gensub(), gsub(), index(), + match(), split(), and sub() built-in func- + tions all ignore case when doing regular + expression operations. NOTE: Array sub- + scripting is not affected. However, the + asort() and asorti() functions are affected. + Thus, if IGNORECASE is not equal to zero, + /aB/ matches all of the strings "ab", "aB", + "Ab", and "AB". As with all AWK variables, + the initial value of IGNORECASE is zero, so + all regular expression and string operations + are normally case-sensitive. Under Unix, + the full ISO 8859-1 Latin-1 character set is + used when ignoring case. As of gawk 3.1.4, + the case equivalencies are fully locale- + aware, based on the C <ctype.h> facilities + such as isalpha(), and toupper(). + LINT Provides dynamic control of the --lint + option from within an AWK program. When + true, gawk prints lint warnings. When false, + it does not. When assigned the string value + "fatal", lint warnings become fatal errors, + exactly like --lint=fatal. Any other true + value just prints warnings. + NF The number of fields in the current input + record. + NR The total number of input records seen so + far. + OFMT The output format for numbers, "%.6g", by + default. + OFS The output field separator, a space by + default. + ORS The output record separator, by default a + newline. + PROCINFO The elements of this array provide access to + information about the running AWK program. + On some systems, there may be elements in + the array, "group1" through "groupn" for + some n, which is the number of supplementary + groups that the process has. Use the in + operator to test for these elements. The + following elements are guaranteed to be + available: + PROCINFO["egid"] the value of the gete- + gid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["euid"] the value of the + geteuid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["FS"] "FS" if field splitting + with FS is in effect, or + "FIELDWIDTHS" if field + splitting with FIELD- + WIDTHS is in effect. + PROCINFO["gid"] the value of the get- + gid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["pgrpid"] the process group ID of + the current process. + PROCINFO["pid"] the process ID of the + current process. + PROCINFO["ppid"] the parent process ID of + the current process. + PROCINFO["uid"] the value of the + getuid(2) system call. + PROCINFO["version"] + The version of gawk. + This is available from + version 3.1.4 and later. + RS The input record separator, by default a + newline. + RT The record terminator. Gawk sets RT to the + input text that matched the character or + regular expression specified by RS. + RSTART The index of the first character matched by + match(); 0 if no match. (This implies that + character indices start at one.) + RLENGTH The length of the string matched by match(); + -1 if no match. + SUBSEP The character used to separate multiple sub- + scripts in array elements, by default + "\034". + TEXTDOMAIN The text domain of the AWK program; used to + find the localized translations for the pro- + gram's strings. + Arrays + Arrays are subscripted with an expression between square + brackets ([ and ]). If the expression is an expression + list (expr, expr ...) then the array subscript is a + string consisting of the concatenation of the (string) + value of each expression, separated by the value of the + SUBSEP variable. This facility is used to simulate mul- + tiply dimensioned arrays. For example: + i = "A"; j = "B"; k = "C" + x[i, j, k] = "hello, world\n" + assigns the string "hello, world\n" to the element of + the array x which is indexed by the string + "A\034B\034C". All arrays in AWK are associative, i.e. + indexed by string values. + The special operator in may be used to test if an array + has an index consisting of a particular value. + if (val in array) + print array[val] + If the array has multiple subscripts, use (i, j) in + array. + The in construct may also be used in a for loop to iter- + ate over all the elements of an array. + An element may be deleted from an array using the delete + statement. The delete statement may also be used to + delete the entire contents of an array, just by specify- + ing the array name without a subscript. + Variable Typing And Conversion + Variables and fields may be (floating point) numbers, or + strings, or both. How the value of a variable is inter- + preted depends upon its context. If used in a numeric + expression, it will be treated as a number; if used as a + string it will be treated as a string. + To force a variable to be treated as a number, add 0 to + it; to force it to be treated as a string, concatenate + it with the null string. + When a string must be converted to a number, the conver- + sion is accomplished using strtod(3). A number is con- + verted to a string by using the value of CONVFMT as a + format string for sprintf(3), with the numeric value of + the variable as the argument. However, even though all + numbers in AWK are floating-point, integral values are + always converted as integers. Thus, given + CONVFMT = "%2.2f" + a = 12 + b = a "" + the variable b has a string value of "12" and not + "12.00". + When operating in POSIX mode (such as with the --posix + command line option), beware that locale settings may + interfere with the way decimal numbers are treated: the + decimal separator of the numbers you are feeding to gawk + must conform to what your locale would expect, be it a + comma (,) or a period (.). + Gawk performs comparisons as follows: If two variables + are numeric, they are compared numerically. If one + value is numeric and the other has a string value that + is a "numeric string," then comparisons are also done + numerically. Otherwise, the numeric value is converted + to a string and a string comparison is performed. Two + strings are compared, of course, as strings. + Note that string constants, such as "57", are not + numeric strings, they are string constants. The idea of + "numeric string" only applies to fields, getline input, + FILENAME, ARGV elements, ENVIRON elements and the ele- + ments of an array created by split() that are numeric + strings. The basic idea is that user input, and only + user input, that looks numeric, should be treated that + way. + Uninitialized variables have the numeric value 0 and the + string value "" (the null, or empty, string). + Octal and Hexadecimal Constants + Starting with version 3.1 of gawk , you may use C-style + octal and hexadecimal constants in your AWK program + source code. For example, the octal value 011 is equal + to decimal 9, and the hexadecimal value 0x11 is equal to + decimal 17. + String Constants + String constants in AWK are sequences of characters + enclosed between double quotes ("). Within strings, + certain escape sequences are recognized, as in C. These + are: + \\ A literal backslash. + \a The "alert" character; usually the ASCII BEL char- + acter. + \b backspace. + \f form-feed. + \n newline. + \r carriage return. + \t horizontal tab. + \v vertical tab. + \xhex digits + The character represented by the string of hexadec- + imal digits following the \x. As in ANSI C, all + following hexadecimal digits are considered part of + the escape sequence. (This feature should tell us + something about language design by committee.) + E.g., "\x1B" is the ASCII ESC (escape) character. + \ddd The character represented by the 1-, 2-, or 3-digit + sequence of octal digits. E.g., "\033" is the + ASCII ESC (escape) character. + \c The literal character c. + The escape sequences may also be used inside constant + regular expressions (e.g., /[ \t\f\n\r\v]/ matches + whitespace characters). + In compatibility mode, the characters represented by + octal and hexadecimal escape sequences are treated lit- + erally when used in regular expression constants. Thus, + /a\52b/ is equivalent to /a\*b/. +PATTERNS AND ACTIONS + AWK is a line-oriented language. The pattern comes + first, and then the action. Action statements are + enclosed in { and }. Either the pattern may be missing, + or the action may be missing, but, of course, not both. + If the pattern is missing, the action is executed for + every single record of input. A missing action is + equivalent to + { print } + which prints the entire record. + Comments begin with the "#" character, and continue + until the end of the line. Blank lines may be used to + separate statements. Normally, a statement ends with a + newline, however, this is not the case for lines ending + in a ",", {, ?, :, &&, or ||. Lines ending in do or + else also have their statements automatically continued + on the following line. In other cases, a line can be + continued by ending it with a "\", in which case the + newline will be ignored. + Multiple statements may be put on one line by separating + them with a ";". This applies to both the statements + within the action part of a pattern-action pair (the + usual case), and to the pattern-action statements them- + selves. + Patterns + AWK patterns may be one of the following: + BEGIN + END + /regular expression/ + relational expression + pattern && pattern + pattern || pattern + pattern ? pattern : pattern + (pattern) + ! pattern + pattern1, pattern2 + BEGIN and END are two special kinds of patterns which + are not tested against the input. The action parts of + all BEGIN patterns are merged as if all the statements + had been written in a single BEGIN block. They are exe- + cuted before any of the input is read. Similarly, all + the END blocks are merged, and executed when all the + input is exhausted (or when an exit statement is exe- + cuted). BEGIN and END patterns cannot be combined with + other patterns in pattern expressions. BEGIN and END + patterns cannot have missing action parts. + For /regular expression/ patterns, the associated state- + ment is executed for each input record that matches the + regular expression. Regular expressions are the same as + those in egrep(1), and are summarized below. + A relational expression may use any of the operators + defined below in the section on actions. These gener- + ally test whether certain fields match certain regular + expressions. + The &&, ||, and ! operators are logical AND, logical + OR, and logical NOT, respectively, as in C. They do + short-circuit evaluation, also as in C, and are used for + combining more primitive pattern expressions. As in + most languages, parentheses may be used to change the + order of evaluation. + The ?: operator is like the same operator in C. If the + first pattern is true then the pattern used for testing + is the second pattern, otherwise it is the third. Only + one of the second and third patterns is evaluated. + The pattern1, pattern2 form of an expression is called a + range pattern. It matches all input records starting + with a record that matches pattern1, and continuing + until a record that matches pattern2, inclusive. It + does not combine with any other sort of pattern expres- + sion. + Regular Expressions + Regular expressions are the extended kind found in + egrep. They are composed of characters as follows: + c matches the non-metacharacter c. + \c matches the literal character c. + . matches any character including newline. + ^ matches the beginning of a string. + $ matches the end of a string. + [abc...] character list, matches any of the characters + abc.... + [^abc...] negated character list, matches any character + except abc.... + r1|r2 alternation: matches either r1 or r2. + r1r2 concatenation: matches r1, and then r2. + r+ matches one or more r's. + r* matches zero or more r's. + r? matches zero or one r's. + (r) grouping: matches r. + r{n} + r{n,} + r{n,m} One or two numbers inside braces denote an + interval expression. If there is one number + in the braces, the preceding regular expres- + sion r is repeated n times. If there are two + numbers separated by a comma, r is repeated n + to m times. If there is one number followed + by a comma, then r is repeated at least n + times. + Interval expressions are only available if + either --posix or --re-interval is specified + on the command line. + + \y matches the empty string at either the begin- + ning or the end of a word. + + \B matches the empty string within a word. + + \< matches the empty string at the beginning of + a word. + + \> matches the empty string at the end of a + word. + + \w matches any word-constituent character (let- + ter, digit, or underscore). + + \W matches any character that is not word-con- + stituent. + + \` matches the empty string at the beginning of + a buffer (string). + + \' matches the empty string at the end of a + buffer. + + The escape sequences that are valid in string constants + (see below) are also valid in regular expressions. + + Character classes are a feature introduced in the POSIX + standard. A character class is a special notation for + describing lists of characters that have a specific + attribute, but where the actual characters themselves + can vary from country to country and/or from character + set to character set. For example, the notion of what + is an alphabetic character differs in the USA and in + France. + + A character class is only valid in a regular expression + inside the brackets of a character list. Character + classes consist of [:, a keyword denoting the class, and + :]. The character classes defined by the POSIX standard + are: + + [:alnum:] Alphanumeric characters. + + [:alpha:] Alphabetic characters. + + [:blank:] Space or tab characters. + + [:cntrl:] Control characters. + + [:digit:] Numeric characters. + + [:graph:] Characters that are both printable and visi- + ble. (A space is printable, but not visible, + while an a is both.) + + [:lower:] Lower-case alphabetic characters. + + [:print:] Printable characters (characters that are not + control characters.) + + [:punct:] Punctuation characters (characters that are + not letter, digits, control characters, or + space characters). + + [:space:] Space characters (such as space, tab, and + formfeed, to name a few). + + [:upper:] Upper-case alphabetic characters. + + [:xdigit:] Characters that are hexadecimal digits. + + For example, before the POSIX standard, to match + alphanumeric characters, you would have had to write + /[A-Za-z0-9]/. If your character set had other alpha- + betic characters in it, this would not match them, and + if your character set collated differently from ASCII, + this might not even match the ASCII alphanumeric charac- + ters. With the POSIX character classes, you can write + /[[:alnum:]]/, and this matches the alphabetic and + numeric characters in your character set, no matter what + it is. + + Two additional special sequences can appear in character + lists. These apply to non-ASCII character sets, which + can have single symbols (called collating elements) that + are represented with more than one character, as well as + several characters that are equivalent for collating, or + sorting, purposes. (E.g., in French, a plain "e" and a + grave-accented "`" are equivalent.) + + Collating Symbols + A collating symbol is a multi-character collating + element enclosed in [. and .]. For example, if + ch is a collating element, then [[.ch.]] is a + regular expression that matches this collating + element, while [ch] is a regular expression that + matches either c or h. + + Equivalence Classes + An equivalence class is a locale-specific name + for a list of characters that are equivalent. + The name is enclosed in [= and =]. For example, + the name e might be used to represent all of "e," + "´," and "`." In this case, [[=e=]] is a regular + expression that matches any of e, ´, or `. + + These features are very valuable in non-English speaking + locales. The library functions that gawk uses for regu- + lar expression matching currently only recognize POSIX + character classes; they do not recognize collating sym- + bols or equivalence classes. + + The \y, \B, \<, \>, \w, \W, \`, and \' operators are + specific to gawk; they are extensions based on facili- + ties in the GNU regular expression libraries. + + The various command line options control how gawk inter- + prets characters in regular expressions. + + No options + In the default case, gawk provide all the facili- + ties of POSIX regular expressions and the GNU + regular expression operators described above. + However, interval expressions are not supported. + + --posix + Only POSIX regular expressions are supported, the + GNU operators are not special. (E.g., \w matches + a literal w). Interval expressions are allowed. + + --traditional + Traditional Unix awk regular expressions are + matched. The GNU operators are not special, + interval expressions are not available, and nei- + ther are the POSIX character classes ([[:alnum:]] + and so on). Characters described by octal and + hexadecimal escape sequences are treated liter- + ally, even if they represent regular expression + metacharacters. + + --re-interval + Allow interval expressions in regular expres- + sions, even if --traditional has been provided. + + Actions + Action statements are enclosed in braces, { and }. + Action statements consist of the usual assignment, con- + ditional, and looping statements found in most lan- + guages. The operators, control statements, and + input/output statements available are patterned after + those in C. + + Operators + The operators in AWK, in order of decreasing precedence, + are + + + (...) Grouping + + $ Field reference. + + ++ -- Increment and decrement, both prefix and + postfix. + + ^ Exponentiation (** may also be used, and **= + for the assignment operator). + + + - ! Unary plus, unary minus, and logical nega- + tion. + + * / % Multiplication, division, and modulus. + + + - Addition and subtraction. + + space String concatenation. + + | |& Piped I/O for getline, print, and printf. + + < > + <= >= + != == The regular relational operators. + + ~ !~ Regular expression match, negated match. + NOTE: Do not use a constant regular expres- + sion (/foo/) on the left-hand side of a ~ or + !~. Only use one on the right-hand side. + The expression /foo/ ~ exp has the same + meaning as (($0 ~ /foo/) ~ exp). This is + usually not what was intended. + + in Array membership. + + && Logical AND. + + || Logical OR. + + ?: The C conditional expression. This has the + form expr1 ? expr2 : expr3. If expr1 is + true, the value of the expression is expr2, + otherwise it is expr3. Only one of expr2 + and expr3 is evaluated. + + = += -= + *= /= %= ^= Assignment. Both absolute assignment (var = + value) and operator-assignment (the other + forms) are supported. + + Control Statements + The control statements are as follows: + + if (condition) statement [ else statement ] + while (condition) statement + do statement while (condition) + for (expr1; expr2; expr3) statement + for (var in array) statement + break + continue + delete array[index] + delete array + exit [ expression ] + { statements } + + I/O Statements + The input/output statements are as follows: + + + close(file [, how]) Close file, pipe or co-process. + The optional how should only be + used when closing one end of a + two-way pipe to a co-process. It + must be a string value, either + "to" or "from". + + getline Set $0 from next input record; set + NF, NR, FNR. + + getline <file Set $0 from next record of file; + set NF. + + getline var Set var from next input record; + set NR, FNR. + + getline var <file Set var from next record of file. + + command | getline [var] + Run command piping the output + either into $0 or var, as above. + + command |& getline [var] + Run command as a co-process piping + the output either into $0 or var, + as above. Co-processes are a gawk + extension. (command can also be a + socket. See the subsection Spe- + cial File Names, below.) + + next Stop processing the current input + record. The next input record is + read and processing starts over + with the first pattern in the AWK + program. If the end of the input + data is reached, the END block(s), + if any, are executed. + + nextfile Stop processing the current input + file. The next input record read + comes from the next input file. + FILENAME and ARGIND are updated, + FNR is reset to 1, and processing + starts over with the first pattern + in the AWK program. If the end of + the input data is reached, the END + block(s), if any, are executed. + + print Prints the current record. The + output record is terminated with + the value of the ORS variable. + + print expr-list Prints expressions. Each expres- + sion is separated by the value of + the OFS variable. The output + record is terminated with the + value of the ORS variable. + + print expr-list >file Prints expressions on file. Each + expression is separated by the + value of the OFS variable. The + output record is terminated with + the value of the ORS variable. + + printf fmt, expr-list Format and print. + + printf fmt, expr-list >file + Format and print on file. + + system(cmd-line) Execute the command cmd-line, and + return the exit status. (This may + not be available on non-POSIX sys- + tems.) + + fflush([file]) Flush any buffers associated with + the open output file or pipe file. + If file is missing, then standard + output is flushed. If file is the + null string, then all open output + files and pipes have their buffers + flushed. + + Additional output redirections are allowed for print and + printf. + + print ... >> file + Appends output to the file. + + print ... | command + Writes on a pipe. + + print ... |& command + Sends data to a co-process or socket. (See also + the subsection Special File Names, below.) + + The getline command returns 0 on end of file and -1 on + an error. Upon an error, ERRNO contains a string + describing the problem. + + NOTE: If using a pipe, co-process, or socket to getline, + or from print or printf within a loop, you must use + close() to create new instances of the command or + socket. AWK does not automatically close pipes, sock- + ets, or co-processes when they return EOF. + + The printf Statement + The AWK versions of the printf statement and sprintf() + function (see below) accept the following conversion + specification formats: + + %c An ASCII character. If the argument used for %c + is numeric, it is treated as a character and + printed. Otherwise, the argument is assumed to + be a string, and the only first character of + that string is printed. + + %d, %i A decimal number (the integer part). + + %e, %E A floating point number of the form + [-]d.dddddde[+-]dd. The %E format uses E + instead of e. + + %f, %F A floating point number of the form + [-]ddd.dddddd. If the system library supports + it, %F is available as well. This is like %f, + but uses capital letters for special "not a num- + ber" and "infinity" values. If %F is not avail- + able, gawk uses %f. + + %g, %G Use %e or %f conversion, whichever is shorter, + with nonsignificant zeros suppressed. The %G + format uses %E instead of %e. + + %o An unsigned octal number (also an integer). + + %u An unsigned decimal number (again, an integer). + + %s A character string. + + %x, %X An unsigned hexadecimal number (an integer). + The %X format uses ABCDEF instead of abcdef. + + %% A single % character; no argument is converted. + + NOTE: When using the integer format-control letters for + values that are outside the range of a C long integer, + gawk switches to the %0f format specifier. If --lint is + provided on the command line gawk warns about this. + Other versions of awk may print invalid values or do + something else entirely. + + Optional, additional parameters may lie between the % + and the control letter: + + count$ Use the count'th argument at this point in the + formatting. This is called a positional speci- + fier and is intended primarily for use in trans- + lated versions of format strings, not in the + original text of an AWK program. It is a gawk + extension. + + - The expression should be left-justified within + its field. + + space For numeric conversions, prefix positive values + with a space, and negative values with a minus + sign. + + + The plus sign, used before the width modifier + (see below), says to always supply a sign for + numeric conversions, even if the data to be for- + matted is positive. The + overrides the space + modifier. + + # Use an "alternate form" for certain control let- + ters. For %o, supply a leading zero. For %x, + and %X, supply a leading 0x or 0X for a nonzero + result. For %e, %E, %f and %F, the result always + contains a decimal point. For %g, and %G, trail- + ing zeros are not removed from the result. + + 0 A leading 0 (zero) acts as a flag, that indicates + output should be padded with zeroes instead of + spaces. This applies even to non-numeric output + formats. This flag only has an effect when the + field width is wider than the value to be + printed. + + width The field should be padded to this width. The + field is normally padded with spaces. If the 0 + flag has been used, it is padded with zeroes. + + .prec A number that specifies the precision to use when + printing. For the %e, %E, %f and %F, formats, + this specifies the number of digits you want + printed to the right of the decimal point. For + the %g, and %G formats, it specifies the maximum + number of significant digits. For the %d, %o, + %i, %u, %x, and %X formats, it specifies the min- + imum number of digits to print. For %s, it spec- + ifies the maximum number of characters from the + string that should be printed. + + The dynamic width and prec capabilities of the ANSI C + printf() routines are supported. A * in place of either + the width or prec specifications causes their values to + be taken from the argument list to printf or sprintf(). + To use a positional specifier with a dynamic width or + precision, supply the count$ after the * in the format + string. For example, "%3$*2$.*1$s". + + Special File Names + When doing I/O redirection from either print or printf + into a file, or via getline from a file, gawk recognizes + certain special filenames internally. These filenames + allow access to open file descriptors inherited from + gawk's parent process (usually the shell). These file + names may also be used on the command line to name data + files. The filenames are: + + /dev/stdin The standard input. + + /dev/stdout The standard output. + + /dev/stderr The standard error output. + + /dev/fd/n The file associated with the open file + descriptor n. + + These are particularly useful for error messages. For + example: + + print "You blew it!" > "/dev/stderr" + + whereas you would otherwise have to use + + print "You blew it!" | "cat 1>&2" + + The following special filenames may be used with the |& + co-process operator for creating TCP/IP network connec- + tions. + + /inet/tcp/lport/rhost/rport File for TCP/IP connection + on local port lport to + remote host rhost on remote + port rport. Use a port of + 0 to have the system pick a + port. + + /inet/udp/lport/rhost/rport Similar, but use UDP/IP + instead of TCP/IP. + + /inet/raw/lport/rhost/rport Reserved for future use. + + Other special filenames provide access to information + about the running gawk process. These filenames are now + obsolete. Use the PROCINFO array to obtain the informa- + tion they provide. The filenames are: + + /dev/pid Reading this file returns the process ID of + the current process, in decimal, terminated + with a newline. + + /dev/ppid Reading this file returns the parent process + ID of the current process, in decimal, ter- + minated with a newline. + + /dev/pgrpid Reading this file returns the process group + ID of the current process, in decimal, ter- + minated with a newline. + + /dev/user Reading this file returns a single record + terminated with a newline. The fields are + separated with spaces. $1 is the value of + the getuid(2) system call, $2 is the value + of the geteuid(2) system call, $3 is the + value of the getgid(2) system call, and $4 + is the value of the getegid(2) system call. + If there are any additional fields, they are + the group IDs returned by getgroups(2). + Multiple groups may not be supported on all + systems. + + Numeric Functions + AWK has the following built-in arithmetic functions: + + + atan2(y, x) Returns the arctangent of y/x in radians. + + cos(expr) Returns the cosine of expr, which is in + radians. + + exp(expr) The exponential function. + + int(expr) Truncates to integer. + + log(expr) The natural logarithm function. + + rand() Returns a random number N, between 0 and + 1, such that 0 <= N < 1. + + sin(expr) Returns the sine of expr, which is in + radians. + + sqrt(expr) The square root function. + + srand([expr]) Uses expr as a new seed for the random + number generator. If no expr is provided, + the time of day is used. The return value + is the previous seed for the random number + generator. + + String Functions + Gawk has the following built-in string functions: + + + asort(s [, d]) Returns the number of elements + in the source array s. The con- + tents of s are sorted using + gawk's normal rules for compar- + ing values, and the indices of + the sorted values of s are + replaced with sequential inte- + gers starting with 1. If the + optional destination array d is + specified, then s is first + duplicated into d, and then d is + sorted, leaving the indices of + the source array s unchanged. + + asorti(s [, d]) Returns the number of elements + in the source array s. The + behavior is the same as that of + asort(), except that the array + indices are used for sorting, + not the array values. When + done, the array is indexed + numerically, and the values are + those of the original indices. + The original values are lost; + thus provide a second array if + you wish to preserve the origi- + nal. + + gensub(r, s, h [, t]) Search the target string t for + matches of the regular expres- + sion r. If h is a string begin- + ning with g or G, then replace + all matches of r with s. Other- + wise, h is a number indicating + which match of r to replace. If + t is not supplied, $0 is used + instead. Within the replacement + text s, the sequence \n, where n + is a digit from 1 to 9, may be + used to indicate just the text + that matched the n'th parenthe- + sized subexpression. The + sequence \0 represents the + entire matched text, as does the + character &. Unlike sub() and + gsub(), the modified string is + returned as the result of the + function, and the original tar- + get string is not changed. + + gsub(r, s [, t]) For each substring matching the + regular expression r in the + string t, substitute the string + s, and return the number of sub- + stitutions. If t is not sup- + plied, use $0. An & in the + replacement text is replaced + with the text that was actually + matched. Use \& to get a lit- + eral &. (This must be typed as + "\\&"; see GAWK: Effective AWK + Programming for a fuller discus- + sion of the rules for &'s and + backslashes in the replacement + text of sub(), gsub(), and gen- + sub().) + + index(s, t) Returns the index of the string + t in the string s, or 0 if t is + not present. (This implies that + character indices start at one.) + + length([s]) Returns the length of the string + s, or the length of $0 if s is + not supplied. Starting with + version 3.1.5, as a non-standard + extension, with an array argu- + ment, length() returns the num- + ber of elements in the array. + + match(s, r [, a]) Returns the position in s where + the regular expression r occurs, + or 0 if r is not present, and + sets the values of RSTART and + RLENGTH. Note that the argument + order is the same as for the ~ + operator: str ~ re. If array a + is provided, a is cleared and + then elements 1 through n are + filled with the portions of s + that match the corresponding + parenthesized subexpression in + r. The 0'th element of a con- + tains the portion of s matched + by the entire regular expression + r. Subscripts a[n, "start"], + and a[n, "length"] provide the + starting index in the string and + length respectively, of each + matching substring. + + split(s, a [, r]) Splits the string s into the + array a on the regular expres- + sion r, and returns the number + of fields. If r is omitted, FS + is used instead. The array a is + cleared first. Splitting + behaves identically to field + splitting, described above. + + sprintf(fmt, expr-list) Prints expr-list according to + fmt, and returns the resulting + string. + + strtonum(str) Examines str, and returns its + numeric value. If str begins + with a leading 0, strtonum() + assumes that str is an octal + number. If str begins with a + leading 0x or 0X, strtonum() + assumes that str is a hexadeci- + mal number. + + sub(r, s [, t]) Just like gsub(), but only the + first matching substring is + replaced. + + substr(s, i [, n]) Returns the at most n-character + substring of s starting at i. + If n is omitted, the rest of s + is used. + + tolower(str) Returns a copy of the string + str, with all the upper-case + characters in str translated to + their corresponding lower-case + counterparts. Non-alphabetic + characters are left unchanged. + + toupper(str) Returns a copy of the string + str, with all the lower-case + characters in str translated to + their corresponding upper-case + counterparts. Non-alphabetic + characters are left unchanged. + + As of version 3.1.5, gawk is multibyte aware. This + means that index(), length(), substr() and match() all + work in terms of characters, not bytes. + + Time Functions + Since one of the primary uses of AWK programs is pro- + cessing log files that contain time stamp information, + gawk provides the following functions for obtaining time + stamps and formatting them. + + + mktime(datespec) + Turns datespec into a time stamp of the same + form as returned by systime(). The datespec + is a string of the form YYYY MM DD HH MM SS[ + DST]. The contents of the string are six or + seven numbers representing respectively the + full year including century, the month from 1 + to 12, the day of the month from 1 to 31, the + hour of the day from 0 to 23, the minute from + 0 to 59, and the second from 0 to 60, and an + optional daylight saving flag. The values of + these numbers need not be within the ranges + specified; for example, an hour of -1 means 1 + hour before midnight. The origin-zero Grego- + rian calendar is assumed, with year 0 preced- + ing year 1 and year -1 preceding year 0. The + time is assumed to be in the local timezone. + If the daylight saving flag is positive, the + time is assumed to be daylight saving time; if + zero, the time is assumed to be standard time; + and if negative (the default), mktime() + attempts to determine whether daylight saving + time is in effect for the specified time. If + datespec does not contain enough elements or + if the resulting time is out of range, + mktime() returns -1. + + strftime([format [, timestamp[, utc-flag]]]) + Formats timestamp according to the specifica- + tion in format. If utc-flag is present and is + non-zero or non-null, the result is in UTC, + otherwise the result is in local time. The + timestamp should be of the same form as + returned by systime(). If timestamp is miss- + ing, the current time of day is used. If for- + mat is missing, a default format equivalent to + the output of date(1) is used. See the speci- + fication for the strftime() function in ANSI C + for the format conversions that are guaranteed + to be available. + + systime() Returns the current time of day as the number + of seconds since the Epoch (1970-01-01 + 00:00:00 UTC on POSIX systems). + + Bit Manipulations Functions + Starting with version 3.1 of gawk, the following bit + manipulation functions are available. They work by con- + verting double-precision floating point values to + uintmax_t integers, doing the operation, and then con- + verting the result back to floating point. The func- + tions are: + + and(v1, v2) Return the bitwise AND of the values + provided by v1 and v2. + + compl(val) Return the bitwise complement of + val. + + lshift(val, count) Return the value of val, shifted + left by count bits. + + or(v1, v2) Return the bitwise OR of the values + provided by v1 and v2. + + rshift(val, count) Return the value of val, shifted + right by count bits. + + xor(v1, v2) Return the bitwise XOR of the values + provided by v1 and v2. + + + Internationalization Functions + Starting with version 3.1 of gawk, the following func- + tions may be used from within your AWK program for + translating strings at run-time. For full details, see + GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + + bindtextdomain(directory [, domain]) + Specifies the directory where gawk looks for the + .mo files, in case they will not or cannot be + placed in the ``standard'' locations (e.g., dur- + ing testing). It returns the directory where + domain is ``bound.'' + The default domain is the value of TEXTDOMAIN. + If directory is the null string (""), then bind- + textdomain() returns the current binding for the + given domain. + + dcgettext(string [, domain [, category]]) + Returns the translation of string in text domain + domain for locale category category. The default + value for domain is the current value of TEXTDO- + MAIN. The default value for category is "LC_MES- + SAGES". + If you supply a value for category, it must be a + string equal to one of the known locale cate- + gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK Program- + ming. You must also supply a text domain. Use + TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + + dcngettext(string1 , string2 , number [, domain [, cate- + gory]]) + Returns the plural form used for number of the + translation of string1 and string2 in text domain + domain for locale category category. The default + value for domain is the current value of TEXTDO- + MAIN. The default value for category is "LC_MES- + SAGES". + If you supply a value for category, it must be a + string equal to one of the known locale cate- + gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK Program- + ming. You must also supply a text domain. Use + TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + +USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS + Functions in AWK are defined as follows: + + function name(parameter list) { statements } + + Functions are executed when they are called from within + expressions in either patterns or actions. Actual + parameters supplied in the function call are used to + instantiate the formal parameters declared in the func- + tion. Arrays are passed by reference, other variables + are passed by value. + + Since functions were not originally part of the AWK lan- + guage, the provision for local variables is rather + clumsy: They are declared as extra parameters in the + parameter list. The convention is to separate local + variables from real parameters by extra spaces in the + parameter list. For example: + + function f(p, q, a, b) # a and b are local + { + ... + } + + /abc/ { ... ; f(1, 2) ; ... } + + The left parenthesis in a function call is required to + immediately follow the function name, without any inter- + vening white space. This avoids a syntactic ambiguity + with the concatenation operator. This restriction does + not apply to the built-in functions listed above. + + Functions may call each other and may be recursive. + Function parameters used as local variables are initial- + ized to the null string and the number zero upon func- + tion invocation. + + Use return expr to return a value from a function. The + return value is undefined if no value is provided, or if + the function returns by "falling off" the end. + + If --lint has been provided, gawk warns about calls to + undefined functions at parse time, instead of at run + time. Calling an undefined function at run time is a + fatal error. + + The word func may be used in place of function. + +DYNAMICALLY LOADING NEW FUNCTIONS + Beginning with version 3.1 of gawk, you can dynamically + add new built-in functions to the running gawk inter- + preter. The full details are beyond the scope of this + manual page; see GAWK: Effective AWK Programming for the + details. + + + extension(object, function) + Dynamically link the shared object file named by + object, and invoke function in that object, to + perform initialization. These should both be + provided as strings. Returns the value returned + by function. + + This function is provided and documented in GAWK: Effec- + tive AWK Programming, but everything about this feature + is likely to change eventually. We STRONGLY recommend + that you do not use this feature for anything that you + aren't willing to redo. + +SIGNALS + pgawk accepts two signals. SIGUSR1 causes it to dump a + profile and function call stack to the profile file, + which is either awkprof.out, or whatever file was named + with the --profile option. It then continues to run. + SIGHUP causes pgawk to dump the profile and function + call stack and then exit. + +EXAMPLES + Print and sort the login names of all users: + + BEGIN { FS = ":" } + { print $1 | "sort" } + + Count lines in a file: + + { nlines++ } + END { print nlines } + + Precede each line by its number in the file: + + { print FNR, $0 } + + Concatenate and line number (a variation on a theme): + + { print NR, $0 } + Run an external command for particular lines of data: + + tail -f access_log | + awk '/myhome.html/ { system("nmap " $1 ">> logdir/myhome.html") }' + +INTERNATIONALIZATION + String constants are sequences of characters enclosed in + double quotes. In non-English speaking environments, it + is possible to mark strings in the AWK program as + requiring translation to the native natural language. + Such strings are marked in the AWK program with a lead- + ing underscore ("_"). For example, + + gawk 'BEGIN { print "hello, world" }' + + always prints hello, world. But, + + gawk 'BEGIN { print _"hello, world" }' + + might print bonjour, monde in France. + + There are several steps involved in producing and run- + ning a localizable AWK program. + + 1. Add a BEGIN action to assign a value to the TEXTDO- + MAIN variable to set the text domain to a name asso- + ciated with your program. + + BEGIN { TEXTDOMAIN = "myprog" } + + This allows gawk to find the .mo file associated with + your program. Without this step, gawk uses the messages + text domain, which likely does not contain translations + for your program. + + 2. Mark all strings that should be translated with + leading underscores. + + 3. If necessary, use the dcgettext() and/or bindtextdo- + main() functions in your program, as appropriate. + + 4. Run gawk --gen-po -f myprog.awk > myprog.po to gen- + erate a .po file for your program. + + 5. Provide appropriate translations, and build and + install the corresponding .mo files. + + The internationalization features are described in full + detail in GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + +POSIX COMPATIBILITY + A primary goal for gawk is compatibility with the POSIX + standard, as well as with the latest version of UNIX + awk. To this end, gawk incorporates the following user + visible features which are not described in the AWK + book, but are part of the Bell Laboratories version of + awk, and are in the POSIX standard. + + The book indicates that command line variable assignment + happens when awk would otherwise open the argument as a + file, which is after the BEGIN block is executed. How- + ever, in earlier implementations, when such an assign- + ment appeared before any file names, the assignment + would happen before the BEGIN block was run. Applica- + tions came to depend on this "feature." When awk was + changed to match its documentation, the -v option for + assigning variables before program execution was added + to accommodate applications that depended upon the old + behavior. (This feature was agreed upon by both the + Bell Laboratories and the GNU developers.) + + The -W option for implementation specific features is + from the POSIX standard. + + When processing arguments, gawk uses the special option + "--" to signal the end of arguments. In compatibility + mode, it warns about but otherwise ignores undefined + options. In normal operation, such arguments are passed + on to the AWK program for it to process. + + The AWK book does not define the return value of + srand(). The POSIX standard has it return the seed it + was using, to allow keeping track of random number + sequences. Therefore srand() in gawk also returns its + current seed. + + Other new features are: The use of multiple -f options + (from MKS awk); the ENVIRON array; the \a, and \v escape + sequences (done originally in gawk and fed back into the + Bell Laboratories version); the tolower() and toupper() + built-in functions (from the Bell Laboratories version); + and the ANSI C conversion specifications in printf (done + first in the Bell Laboratories version). + +HISTORICAL FEATURES + There are two features of historical AWK implementations + that gawk supports. First, it is possible to call the + length() built-in function not only with no argument, + but even without parentheses! Thus, + + a = length # Holy Algol 60, Batman! + + is the same as either of + + a = length() + a = length($0) + + This feature is marked as "deprecated" in the POSIX + standard, and gawk issues a warning about its use if + --lint is specified on the command line. + + The other feature is the use of either the continue or + the break statements outside the body of a while, for, + or do loop. Traditional AWK implementations have + treated such usage as equivalent to the next statement. + Gawk supports this usage if --traditional has been spec- + ified. + +GNU EXTENSIONS + Gawk has a number of extensions to POSIX awk. They are + described in this section. All the extensions described + here can be disabled by invoking gawk with the --tradi- + tional or --posix options. + + The following features of gawk are not available in + POSIX awk. + + · No path search is performed for files named via the -f + option. Therefore the AWKPATH environment variable is + not special. + + · The \x escape sequence. (Disabled with --posix.) + + · The fflush() function. (Disabled with --posix.) + + · The ability to continue lines after ? and :. (Dis- + abled with --posix.) + + · Octal and hexadecimal constants in AWK programs. + + · The ARGIND, BINMODE, ERRNO, LINT, RT and TEXTDOMAIN + variables are not special. + + · The IGNORECASE variable and its side-effects are not + available. + + · The FIELDWIDTHS variable and fixed-width field split- + ting. + + · The PROCINFO array is not available. + + · The use of RS as a regular expression. + + · The special file names available for I/O redirection + are not recognized. + + · The |& operator for creating co-processes. + + · The ability to split out individual characters using + the null string as the value of FS, and as the third + argument to split(). + + · The optional second argument to the close() function. + + · The optional third argument to the match() function. + + · The ability to use positional specifiers with printf + and sprintf(). + + · The ability to pass an array to length(). + + · The use of delete array to delete the entire contents + of an array. + + · The use of nextfile to abandon processing of the cur- + rent input file. + + · The and(), asort(), asorti(), bindtextdomain(), + compl(), dcgettext(), dcngettext(), gensub(), + lshift(), mktime(), or(), rshift(), strftime(), str- + tonum(), systime() and xor() functions. + + · Localizable strings. + + · Adding new built-in functions dynamically with the + extension() function. + + The AWK book does not define the return value of the + close() function. Gawk's close() returns the value from + fclose(3), or pclose(3), when closing an output file or + pipe, respectively. It returns the process's exit sta- + tus when closing an input pipe. The return value is -1 + if the named file, pipe or co-process was not opened + with a redirection. + + When gawk is invoked with the --traditional option, if + the fs argument to the -F option is "t", then FS is set + to the tab character. Note that typing gawk -F\t ... + simply causes the shell to quote the "t," and does not + pass "\t" to the -F option. Since this is a rather ugly + special case, it is not the default behavior. This + behavior also does not occur if --posix has been speci- + fied. To really get a tab character as the field sepa- + rator, it is best to use single quotes: gawk -F'\t' .... + + If gawk is configured with the --enable-switch option to + the configure command, then it accepts an additional + control-flow statement: + switch (expression) { + case value|regex : statement + ... + [ default: statement ] + } + + If gawk is configured with the --disable-directories- + fatal option, then it will silently skip directories + named on the command line. Otherwise, it will do so + only if invoked with the --traditional option. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The AWKPATH environment variable can be used to provide + a list of directories that gawk searches when looking + for files named via the -f and --file options. + + If POSIXLY_CORRECT exists in the environment, then gawk + behaves exactly as if --posix had been specified on the + command line. If --lint has been specified, gawk issues + a warning message to this effect. + +SEE ALSO + egrep(1), getpid(2), getppid(2), getpgrp(2), getuid(2), + geteuid(2), getgid(2), getegid(2), getgroups(2) + + The AWK Programming Language, Alfred V. Aho, Brian W. + Kernighan, Peter J. Weinberger, Addison-Wesley, 1988. + ISBN 0-201-07981-X. + + GAWK: Effective AWK Programming, Edition 3.0, published + by the Free Software Foundation, 2001. The current ver- + sion of this document is available online at + http://www.gnu.org/software/gawk/manual. + +BUGS + The -F option is not necessary given the command line + variable assignment feature; it remains only for back- + wards compatibility. + + Syntactically invalid single character programs tend to + overflow the parse stack, generating a rather unhelpful + message. Such programs are surprisingly difficult to + diagnose in the completely general case, and the effort + to do so really is not worth it. + +AUTHORS + The original version of UNIX awk was designed and imple- + mented by Alfred Aho, Peter Weinberger, and Brian + Kernighan of Bell Laboratories. Brian Kernighan contin- + ues to maintain and enhance it. + + Paul Rubin and Jay Fenlason, of the Free Software Foun- + dation, wrote gawk, to be compatible with the original + version of awk distributed in Seventh Edition UNIX. + John Woods contributed a number of bug fixes. David + Trueman, with contributions from Arnold Robbins, made + gawk compatible with the new version of UNIX awk. + Arnold Robbins is the current maintainer. + + The initial DOS port was done by Conrad Kwok and Scott + Garfinkle. Scott Deifik is the current DOS maintainer. + Pat Rankin did the port to VMS, and Michal Jaegermann + did the port to the Atari ST. The port to OS/2 was done + by Kai Uwe Rommel, with contributions and help from Dar- + rel Hankerson. Juan M. Guerrero now maintains the OS/2 + port. Fred Fish supplied support for the Amiga, and + Martin Brown provided the BeOS port. Stephen Davies + provided the original Tandem port, and Matthew Woehlke + provided changes for Tandem's POSIX-compliant systems. + +VERSION INFORMATION + This man page documents gawk, version 3.1.6. + +BUG REPORTS + If you find a bug in gawk, please send electronic mail + to bug-gawk@gnu.org. Please include your operating sys- + tem and its revision, the version of gawk (from gawk + --version), what C compiler you used to compile it, and + a test program and data that are as small as possible + for reproducing the problem. + + Before sending a bug report, please do the following + things. First, verify that you have the latest version + of gawk. Many bugs (usually subtle ones) are fixed at + each release, and if yours is out of date, the problem + may already have been solved. Second, please see if + setting the environment variable LC_ALL to LC_ALL=C + causes things to behave as you expect. If so, it's a + locale issue, and may or may not really be a bug. + Finally, please read this man page and the reference + manual carefully to be sure that what you think is a bug + really is, instead of just a quirk in the language. + + Whatever you do, do NOT post a bug report in + comp.lang.awk. While the gawk developers occasionally + read this newsgroup, posting bug reports there is an + unreliable way to report bugs. Instead, please use the + electronic mail addresses given above. + + If you're using a GNU/Linux system or BSD-based system, + you may wish to submit a bug report to the vendor of + your distribution. That's fine, but please send a copy + to the official email address as well, since there's no + guarantee that the bug will be forwarded to the gawk + maintainer. + +ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS + Brian Kernighan of Bell Laboratories provided valuable + assistance during testing and debugging. We thank him. + +COPYING PERMISSIONS + Copyright © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, + 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007 + Free Software Foundation, Inc. + + Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim + copies of this manual page provided the copyright notice + and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. + + Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified + versions of this manual page under the conditions for + verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting + derived work is distributed under the terms of a permis- + sion notice identical to this one. + + Permission is granted to copy and distribute transla- + tions of this manual page into another language, under + the above conditions for modified versions, except that + this permission notice may be stated in a translation + approved by the Foundation. + + + +Free Software Foundation Oct 19 2007 GAWK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pinky.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pinky.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..637be84 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pinky.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +PINKY(1) User Commands PINKY(1) + + + + + +NAME + pinky - lightweight finger + +SYNOPSIS + pinky [OPTION]... [USER]... + +DESCRIPTION + -l produce long format output for the specified + USERs + + -b omit the user's home directory and shell in long + format + + -h omit the user's project file in long format + + -p omit the user's plan file in long format + + -s do short format output, this is the default + + -f omit the line of column headings in short format + + -w omit the user's full name in short format + + -i omit the user's full name and remote host in + short format + + -q omit the user's full name, remote host and idle + time in short format + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + A lightweight `finger' program; print user information. + The utmp file will be /var/run/utmp. + +AUTHOR + Written by Joseph Arceneaux, David MacKenzie, and Kaveh + Ghazi. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for pinky is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and pinky programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info pinky + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pinky 5.3.0 November 2004 PINKY(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pr.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pr.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed02e0b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pr.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +PR(1) User Commands PR(1) + + + + + +NAME + pr - convert text files for printing + +SYNOPSIS + pr [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Paginate or columnate FILE(s) for printing. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + +FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE], --pages=FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE] + begin [stop] printing with page FIRST_[LAST_]PAGE + + -COLUMN, --columns=COLUMN + output COLUMN columns and print columns down, + unless -a is used. Balance number of lines in the + columns on each page. + + -a, --across + print columns across rather than down, used + together with -COLUMN + + -c, --show-control-chars + use hat notation (^G) and octal backslash nota- + tion + + -d, --double-space + double space the output + + -D, --date-format=FORMAT + use FORMAT for the header date + + -e[CHAR[WIDTH]], --expand-tabs[=CHAR[WIDTH]] + expand input CHARs (TABs) to tab WIDTH (8) + + -F, -f, --form-feed + use form feeds instead of newlines to separate + pages (by a 3-line page header with -F or a + 5-line header and trailer without -F) + + -h HEADER, --header=HEADER + use a centered HEADER instead of filename in page + header, -h "" prints a blank line, don't use -h"" + + -i[CHAR[WIDTH]], --output-tabs[=CHAR[WIDTH]] + replace spaces with CHARs (TABs) to tab WIDTH (8) + + -J, --join-lines + merge full lines, turns off -W line truncation, + no column alignment, --sep-string[=STRING] sets + separators + + -l PAGE_LENGTH, --length=PAGE_LENGTH + set the page length to PAGE_LENGTH (66) lines + (default number of lines of text 56, and with -F + 63) + + -m, --merge + print all files in parallel, one in each column, + truncate lines, but join lines of full length + with -J + + -n[SEP[DIGITS]], --number-lines[=SEP[DIGITS]] + number lines, use DIGITS (5) digits, then SEP + (TAB), default counting starts with 1st line of + input file + + -N NUMBER, --first-line-number=NUMBER + start counting with NUMBER at 1st line of first + page printed (see +FIRST_PAGE) + + -o MARGIN, --indent=MARGIN + offset each line with MARGIN (zero) spaces, do + not affect -w or -W, MARGIN will be added to + PAGE_WIDTH + + -r, --no-file-warnings + omit warning when a file cannot be opened + + -s[CHAR],--separator[=CHAR] + separate columns by a single character, default + for CHAR is the <TAB> character without -w and + 'no char' with -w -s[CHAR] turns off line trunca- + tion of all 3 column options (-COLUMN|-a -COL- + UMN|-m) except -w is set + + -SSTRING, --sep-string[=STRING] + separate columns by STRING, without -S: Default + separator <TAB> with -J and <space> otherwise + (same as -S" "), no effect on column options + + -t, --omit-header omit page headers and trailers + + -T, --omit-pagination + omit page headers and trailers, eliminate any + pagination by form feeds set in input files + + -v, --show-nonprinting + use octal backslash notation + + -w PAGE_WIDTH, --width=PAGE_WIDTH + set page width to PAGE_WIDTH (72) characters for + multiple text-column output only, -s[char] turns + off (72) + + -W PAGE_WIDTH, --page-width=PAGE_WIDTH + set page width to PAGE_WIDTH (72) characters + always, truncate lines, except -J option is set, + no interference with -S or -s + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + -T implied by -l nn when nn <= 10 or <= 3 with -F. With + no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR + Written by Pete TerMaat and Roland Huebner. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for pr is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and pr programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info pr + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pr 5.3.0 January 2005 PR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printenv.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printenv.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec917ed --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printenv.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +PRINTENV(1) User Commands PRINTENV(1) + + + + + +NAME + printenv - print all or part of environment + +SYNOPSIS + printenv [VARIABLE]... + printenv OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + If no environment VARIABLE specified, print them all. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie and Richard Mlynarik. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for printenv is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and printenv programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info printenv + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +printenv 5.3.0 November 2004 PRINTENV(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printf.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printf.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6a7719 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printf.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +PRINTF(1) User Commands PRINTF(1) + + + + + +NAME + printf - format and print data + +SYNOPSIS + printf FORMAT [ARGUMENT]... + printf OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + NOTE: your shell may have its own version of printf + which will supersede the version described here. Please + refer to your shell's documentation for details about + the options it supports. + + Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + FORMAT controls the output as in C printf. Interpreted + sequences are: + + \" double quote + + \NNN character with octal value NNN (1 to 3 digits) + + \\ backslash + + \a alert (BEL) + + \b backspace + + \c produce no further output + + \f form feed + + \n new line + + \r carriage return + + \t horizontal tab + + \v vertical tab + + \xHH byte with hexadecimal value HH (1 to 2 digits) + + \uHHHH Unicode (ISO/IEC 10646) character with hex value + HHHH (4 digits) + + \UHHHHHHHH + Unicode character with hex value HHHHHHHH (8 dig- + its) + + %% a single % + + %b ARGUMENT as a string with `\' escapes inter- + preted, + + except that octal escapes are of the form \0 or + \0NNN + + and all C format specifications ending with one of + diouxXfeEgGcs, with ARGUMENTs converted to proper type + first. Variable widths are handled. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for printf is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and printf programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info printf + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +printf 5.3.0 November 2004 PRINTF(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ptx.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ptx.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74c4538 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ptx.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +PTX(1) User Commands PTX(1) + + + + + +NAME + ptx - produce a permuted index of file contents + +SYNOPSIS + ptx [OPTION]... [INPUT]... (without -G) + ptx -G [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]] + +DESCRIPTION + Output a permuted index, including context, of the words + in the input files. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -A, --auto-reference + output automatically generated references + + -C, --copyright + display Copyright and copying conditions + + -G, --traditional + behave more like System V `ptx' + + -F, --flag-truncation=STRING + use STRING for flagging line truncations + + -M, --macro-name=STRING + macro name to use instead of `xx' + + -O, --format=roff + generate output as roff directives + + -R, --right-side-refs + put references at right, not counted in -w + + -S, --sentence-regexp=REGEXP + for end of lines or end of sentences + + -T, --format=tex + generate output as TeX directives + + -W, --word-regexp=REGEXP + use REGEXP to match each keyword + + -b, --break-file=FILE + word break characters in this FILE + + -f, --ignore-case + fold lower case to upper case for sorting + + -g, --gap-size=NUMBER + gap size in columns between output fields + + -i, --ignore-file=FILE + read ignore word list from FILE + + -o, --only-file=FILE + read only word list from this FILE + + -r, --references + first field of each line is a reference + + -t, --typeset-mode - not implemented - + + -w, --width=NUMBER + output width in columns, reference excluded + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + With no FILE or if FILE is -, read Standard Input. `-F + /' by default. + +AUTHOR + Written by F. Pinard. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for ptx is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and ptx programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info ptx + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +ptx 5.3.0 November 2004 PTX(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pwd.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pwd.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0458a8a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pwd.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +PWD(1) User Commands PWD(1) + + + + + +NAME + pwd - print name of current/working directory + +SYNOPSIS + pwd [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION + NOTE: your shell may have its own version of pwd which + will supersede the version described here. Please refer + to your shell's documentation for details about the + options it supports. + + Print the full filename of the current working direc- + tory. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for pwd is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and pwd programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info pwd + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pwd 5.3.0 November 2004 PWD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/readlink.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/readlink.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..830accf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/readlink.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +READLINK(1) User Commands READLINK(1) + + + + + +NAME + readlink - display value of a symbolic link + +SYNOPSIS + readlink [OPTION]... FILE + +DESCRIPTION + Display value of a symbolic link on standard output. + + -f, --canonicalize + canonicalize by following every symlink in every + component of the given path recursively; all but + the last path component must exist + + -e, --canonicalize-existing + canonicalize by following every symlink in every + component of the given path recursively, all path + components must exist + + -m, --canonicalize-missing + canonicalize by following every symlink in every + component of the given path recursively, without + requirements on components existence + + -n, --no-newline + do not output the trailing newline + + -q, --quiet, + + -s, --silent + suppress most error messages + + -v, --verbose + report error messages + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Dmitry V. Levin. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for readlink is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and readlink programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info readlink + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +readlink 5.3.0 November 2004 READLINK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rm.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rm.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bc315f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rm.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +RM(1) User Commands RM(1) + + + + + +NAME + rm - remove files or directories + +SYNOPSIS + rm [OPTION]... FILE... + +DESCRIPTION + This manual page documents the GNU version of rm. rm + removes each specified file. By default, it does not + remove directories. + + If a file is unwritable, the standard input is a tty, + and the -f or --force option is not given, rm prompts + the user for whether to remove the file. If the + response is not affirmative, the file is skipped. + +OPTIONS + Remove (unlink) the FILE(s). + + -d, --directory + unlink FILE, even if it is a non-empty directory + (super-user only; this works only if your system + + supports `unlink' for nonempty directories) + + -f, --force + ignore nonexistent files, never prompt + + -i, --interactive + prompt before any removal + + --no-preserve-root do not treat `/' specially (the + default) + + --preserve-root + fail to operate recursively on `/' + + -r, -R, --recursive + remove the contents of directories recursively + + -v, --verbose + explain what is being done + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + To remove a file whose name starts with a `-', for exam- + ple `-foo', use one of these commands: + + rm -- -foo + + rm ./-foo + + Note that if you use rm to remove a file, it is usually + possible to recover the contents of that file. If you + want more assurance that the contents are truly unrecov- + erable, consider using shred. + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, Richard Stall- + man, and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + chattr(1), shred(1) + + The full documentation for rm is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and rm programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info rm + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +rm 5.3.0 November 2004 RM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rmdir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rmdir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87821e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rmdir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +RMDIR(1) User Commands RMDIR(1) + + + + + +NAME + rmdir - remove empty directories + +SYNOPSIS + rmdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY... + +DESCRIPTION + Remove the DIRECTORY(ies), if they are empty. + + --ignore-fail-on-non-empty + + ignore each failure that is solely because a + directory is non-empty + + -p, --parents + remove DIRECTORY, then try to remove each direc- + tory component of that path name. E.g., `rmdir + -p a/b/c' is similar to `rmdir a/b/c a/b a'. + + -v, --verbose + output a diagnostic for every directory processed + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for rmdir is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and rmdir programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info rmdir + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +rmdir 5.3.0 November 2004 RMDIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sed.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sed.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f1153f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sed.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,321 @@ +SED(1) User Commands SED(1) + + + +NAME + sed - stream editor for filtering and transforming text + +SYNOPSIS + sed.exe [OPTION]... {script-only-if-no-other-script} + [input-file]... + +DESCRIPTION + Sed is a stream editor. A stream editor is used to per- + form basic text transformations on an input stream (a + file or input from a pipeline). While in some ways sim- + ilar to an editor which permits scripted edits (such as + ed), sed works by making only one pass over the + input(s), and is consequently more efficient. But it is + sed's ability to filter text in a pipeline which partic- + ularly distinguishes it from other types of editors. + + -n, --quiet, --silent + + suppress automatic printing of pattern space + + -e script, --expression=script + + add the script to the commands to be executed + + -f script-file, --file=script-file + + add the contents of script-file to the commands + to be executed + + -i[SUFFIX], --in-place[=SUFFIX] + + edit files in place (makes backup if extension + supplied) + + -b, --binary + + open files in binary mode (CR+LFs are not pro- + cessed specially) + + -c, --copy + + use copy instead of rename when shuffling files + in -i mode (avoids change of input file owner- + ship) + + -l N, --line-length=N + + specify the desired line-wrap length for the `l' + command + + --posix + + disable all GNU extensions. + + -r, --regexp-extended + + use extended regular expressions in the script. + + -s, --separate + + consider files as separate rather than as a sin- + gle continuous long stream. + + -u, --unbuffered + + load minimal amounts of data from the input files + and flush the output buffers more often + + --help + display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If no -e, --expression, -f, or --file option is given, + then the first non-option argument is taken as the sed + script to interpret. All remaining arguments are names + of input files; if no input files are specified, then + the standard input is read. + + GNU sed home page: <http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/>. + General help using GNU software: + <http://www.gnu.org/gethelp/>. E-mail bug reports to: + <bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>. Be sure to include the word + ``sed'' somewhere in the ``Subject:'' field. + +COMMAND SYNOPSIS + This is just a brief synopsis of sed commands to serve + as a reminder to those who already know sed; other docu- + mentation (such as the texinfo document) must be con- + sulted for fuller descriptions. + + Zero-address ``commands'' + : label + Label for b and t commands. + + #comment + The comment extends until the next newline (or + the end of a -e script fragment). + + } The closing bracket of a { } block. + + Zero- or One- address commands + = Print the current line number. + + a \ + + text Append text, which has each embedded newline pre- + ceded by a backslash. + + i \ + + text Insert text, which has each embedded newline pre- + ceded by a backslash. + + q [exit-code] + Immediately quit the sed script without process- + ing any more input, except that if auto-print is + not disabled the current pattern space will be + printed. The exit code argument is a GNU exten- + sion. + + Q [exit-code] + Immediately quit the sed script without process- + ing any more input. This is a GNU extension. + + r filename + Append text read from filename. + + R filename + Append a line read from filename. Each invoca- + tion of the command reads a line from the file. + This is a GNU extension. + + Commands which accept address ranges + { Begin a block of commands (end with a }). + + b label + Branch to label; if label is omitted, branch to + end of script. + + t label + If a s/// has done a successful substitution + since the last input line was read and since the + last t or T command, then branch to label; if + label is omitted, branch to end of script. + + T label + If no s/// has done a successful substitution + since the last input line was read and since the + last t or T command, then branch to label; if + label is omitted, branch to end of script. This + is a GNU extension. + + c \ + + text Replace the selected lines with text, which has + each embedded newline preceded by a backslash. + + d Delete pattern space. Start next cycle. + + D Delete up to the first embedded newline in the + pattern space. Start next cycle, but skip read- + ing from the input if there is still data in the + pattern space. + + h H Copy/append pattern space to hold space. + + g G Copy/append hold space to pattern space. + + x Exchange the contents of the hold and pattern + spaces. + + l List out the current line in a ``visually unam- + biguous'' form. + + l width + List out the current line in a ``visually unam- + biguous'' form, breaking it at width characters. + This is a GNU extension. + + n N Read/append the next line of input into the pat- + tern space. + + p Print the current pattern space. + + P Print up to the first embedded newline of the + current pattern space. + + s/regexp/replacement/ + Attempt to match regexp against the pattern + space. If successful, replace that portion + matched with replacement. The replacement may + contain the special character & to refer to that + portion of the pattern space which matched, and + the special escapes \1 through \9 to refer to the + corresponding matching sub-expressions in the + regexp. + + w filename + Write the current pattern space to filename. + + W filename + Write the first line of the current pattern space + to filename. This is a GNU extension. + + y/source/dest/ + Transliterate the characters in the pattern space + which appear in source to the corresponding char- + acter in dest. + +Addresses + Sed commands can be given with no addresses, in which + case the command will be executed for all input lines; + with one address, in which case the command will only be + executed for input lines which match that address; or + with two addresses, in which case the command will be + executed for all input lines which match the inclusive + range of lines starting from the first address and con- + tinuing to the second address. Three things to note + about address ranges: the syntax is addr1,addr2 (i.e., + the addresses are separated by a comma); the line which + addr1 matched will always be accepted, even if addr2 + selects an earlier line; and if addr2 is a regexp, it + will not be tested against the line that addr1 matched. + + After the address (or address-range), and before the + command, a ! may be inserted, which specifies that the + command shall only be executed if the address (or + address-range) does not match. + + The following address types are supported: + + number Match only the specified line number. + + first~step + Match every step'th line starting with line + first. For example, ``sed -n 1~2p'' will print + all the odd-numbered lines in the input stream, + and the address 2~5 will match every fifth line, + starting with the second. first can be zero; in + this case, sed operates as if it were equal to + step. (This is an extension.) + + $ Match the last line. + + /regexp/ + Match lines matching the regular expression reg- + exp. + + \cregexpc + Match lines matching the regular expression reg- + exp. The c may be any character. + + GNU sed also supports some special 2-address forms: + + 0,addr2 + Start out in "matched first address" state, until + addr2 is found. This is similar to 1,addr2, + except that if addr2 matches the very first line + of input the 0,addr2 form will be at the end of + its range, whereas the 1,addr2 form will still be + at the beginning of its range. This works only + when addr2 is a regular expression. + + addr1,+N + Will match addr1 and the N lines following addr1. + + addr1,~N + Will match addr1 and the lines following addr1 + until the next line whose input line number is a + multiple of N. + +REGULAR EXPRESSIONS + POSIX.2 BREs should be supported, but they aren't com- + pletely because of performance problems. The \n + sequence in a regular expression matches the newline + character, and similarly for \a, \t, and other + sequences. + +BUGS + E-mail bug reports to bonzini@gnu.org. Be sure to + include the word ``sed'' somewhere in the ``Subject:'' + field. Also, please include the output of ``sed --ver- + sion'' in the body of your report if at all possible. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright © 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, to the extent + permitted by law. + + GNU sed home page: <http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/>. + General help using GNU software: + <http://www.gnu.org/gethelp/>. E-mail bug reports to: + <bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>. Be sure to include the word + ``sed'' somewhere in the ``Subject:'' field. + +SEE ALSO + awk(1), ed(1), grep(1), tr(1), perlre(1), sed.info, any + of various books on sed, the sed FAQ + (http://sed.sf.net/grabbag/tutorials/sedfaq.txt), + http://sed.sf.net/grabbag/. + + The full documentation for sed is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and sed programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info sed + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sed version 4.2.1 June 2009 SED(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/seq.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/seq.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb0419e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/seq.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +SEQ(1) User Commands SEQ(1) + + + + + +NAME + seq - print a sequence of numbers + +SYNOPSIS + seq [OPTION]... LAST + seq [OPTION]... FIRST LAST + seq [OPTION]... FIRST INCREMENT LAST + +DESCRIPTION + Print numbers from FIRST to LAST, in steps of INCREMENT. + + -f, --format=FORMAT + use printf style floating-point FORMAT (default: + %g) + + -s, --separator=STRING + use STRING to separate numbers (default: \n) + + -w, --equal-width + equalize width by padding with leading zeroes + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If FIRST or INCREMENT is omitted, it defaults to 1. + That is, an omitted INCREMENT defaults to 1 even when + LAST is smaller than FIRST. FIRST, INCREMENT, and LAST + are interpreted as floating point values. INCREMENT is + usually positive if FIRST is smaller than LAST, and + INCREMENT is usually negative if FIRST is greater than + LAST. When given, the FORMAT argument must contain + exactly one of the printf-style, floating point output + formats %e, %f, %g + +AUTHOR + Written by Ulrich Drepper. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for seq is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and seq programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info seq + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +seq 5.3.0 December 2004 SEQ(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sha1sum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sha1sum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a249897 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sha1sum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +SHA1SUM(1) User Commands SHA1SUM(1) + + + + + +NAME + sha1sum - compute and check SHA1 message digest + +SYNOPSIS + sha1sum [OPTION] [FILE]... + sha1sum [OPTION] --check [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION + Print or check SHA1 (160-bit) checksums. With no FILE, + or when FILE is -, read standard input. + + -b, --binary + read files in binary mode (default on DOS/Win- + dows) + + -c, --check + check SHA1 sums against given list + + -t, --text + read files in text mode (default) + + The following two options are useful only when verifying + checksums: + --status + don't output anything, status code shows success + + -w, --warn + warn about improperly formated checksum lines + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + The sums are computed as described in FIPS-180-1. When + checking, the input should be a former output of this + program. The default mode is to print a line with + checksum, a character indicating type (`*' for binary, ` + ' for text), and name for each FILE. + +AUTHOR + Written by Ulrich Drepper and Scott Miller. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for sha1sum is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and sha1sum programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info sha1sum + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sha1sum 5.3.0 November 2004 SHA1SUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/shred.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/shred.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3748041 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/shred.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +SHRED(1) User Commands SHRED(1) + + + + + +NAME + shred - overwrite a file to hide its contents, and + optionally delete it + +SYNOPSIS + shred [OPTIONS] FILE [...] + +DESCRIPTION + Overwrite the specified FILE(s) repeatedly, in order to + make it harder for even very expensive hardware probing + to recover the data. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -f, --force + change permissions to allow writing if necessary + + -n, --iterations=N + Overwrite N times instead of the default (25) + + -s, --size=N + shred this many bytes (suffixes like K, M, G + accepted) + + -u, --remove + truncate and remove file after overwriting + + -v, --verbose + show progress + + -x, --exact + do not round file sizes up to the next full + block; + + this is the default for non-regular files + + -z, --zero + add a final overwrite with zeros to hide shred- + ding + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If FILE is -, shred standard output. + + Delete FILE(s) if --remove (-u) is specified. The + default is not to remove the files because it is common + to operate on device files like /dev/hda, and those + files usually should not be removed. When operating on + regular files, most people use the --remove option. + + CAUTION: Note that shred relies on a very important + assumption: that the file system overwrites data in + place. This is the traditional way to do things, but + many modern file system designs do not satisfy this + assumption. The following are examples of file systems + on which shred is not effective: + + * log-structured or journaled file systems, such as + those supplied with + + AIX and Solaris (and JFS, ReiserFS, XFS, Ext3, + etc.) + + * file systems that write redundant data and carry on + even if some writes + + fail, such as RAID-based file systems + + * file systems that make snapshots, such as Network + Appliance's NFS server + + * file systems that cache in temporary locations, such + as NFS + + version 3 clients + + * compressed file systems + + In addition, file system backups and remote mirrors may + contain copies of the file that cannot be removed, and + that will allow a shredded file to be recovered later. + +AUTHOR + Written by Colin Plumb. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for shred is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and shred programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info shred + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +shred 5.3.0 January 2005 SHRED(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sleep.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sleep.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ed8ec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sleep.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +SLEEP(1) User Commands SLEEP(1) + + + + + +NAME + sleep - delay for a specified amount of time + +SYNOPSIS + sleep NUMBER[SUFFIX]... + sleep OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Pause for NUMBER seconds. SUFFIX may be `s' for seconds + (the default), `m' for minutes, `h' for hours or `d' for + days. Unlike most implementations that require NUMBER + be an integer, here NUMBER may be an arbitrary floating + point number. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering and Paul Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for sleep is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and sleep programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info sleep + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sleep 5.3.0 November 2004 SLEEP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sort.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sort.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87be6a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sort.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +SORT(1) User Commands SORT(1) + + + + + +NAME + sort - sort lines of text files + +SYNOPSIS + sort [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Write sorted concatenation of all FILE(s) to standard + output. + + Ordering options: + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -b, --ignore-leading-blanks ignore leading blanks + + -d, --dictionary-order + consider only blanks and alphanumeric characters + + -f, --ignore-case + fold lower case to upper case characters + + -g, --general-numeric-sort + compare according to general numerical value + + -i, --ignore-nonprinting + consider only printable characters + + -M, --month-sort + compare (unknown) < `JAN' < ... < `DEC' + + -n, --numeric-sort + compare according to string numerical value + + -r, --reverse + reverse the result of comparisons + + Other options: + + -c, --check + check whether input is sorted; do not sort + + -k, --key=POS1[,POS2] + start a key at POS1, end it at POS 2 (origin 1) + + -m, --merge + merge already sorted files; do not sort + + -o, --output=FILE + write result to FILE instead of standard output + + -s, --stable + stabilize sort by disabling last-resort compari- + son + + -S, --buffer-size=SIZE + use SIZE for main memory buffer + + -t, --field-separator=SEP use SEP instead of non-blank + to blank transition + + -T, --temporary-directory=DIR + use DIR for temporaries, not $TMPDIR or /tmp; + multiple options specify multiple directories + + -u, --unique + with -c, check for strict ordering; without -c, + output only the first of an equal run + + -z, --zero-terminated + end lines with 0 byte, not newline + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + POS is F[.C][OPTS], where F is the field number and C + the character position in the field. OPTS is one or + more single-letter ordering options, which override + global ordering options for that key. If no key is + given, use the entire line as the key. + + SIZE may be followed by the following multiplicative + suffixes: % 1% of memory, b 1, K 1024 (default), and so + on for M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + + With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + + *** WARNING *** The locale specified by the environment + affects sort order. Set LC_ALL=C to get the traditional + sort order that uses native byte values. + +AUTHOR + Written by Mike Haertel and Paul Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for sort is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and sort programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info sort + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sort 5.3.0 December 2004 SORT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/split.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/split.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..732a758 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/split.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +SPLIT(1) User Commands SPLIT(1) + + + + + +NAME + split - split a file into pieces + +SYNOPSIS + split [OPTION] [INPUT [PREFIX]] + +DESCRIPTION + Output fixed-size pieces of INPUT to PREFIXaa, PREFIXab, + ...; default PREFIX is `x'. With no INPUT, or when + INPUT is -, read standard input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --suffix-length=N + use suffixes of length N (default 2) + + -b, --bytes=SIZE + put SIZE bytes per output file + + -C, --line-bytes=SIZE + put at most SIZE bytes of lines per output file + + -d, --numeric-suffixes + use numeric suffixes instead of alphabetic + + -l, --lines=NUMBER + put NUMBER lines per output file + + --verbose + print a diagnostic to standard error just before + each output file is opened + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIZE may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1K, + m for 1 Meg. + +AUTHOR + Written by Torbjorn Granlund and Richard M. Stallman. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for split is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and split programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info split + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +split 5.3.0 December 2004 SPLIT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stat.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stat.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddb9d58 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stat.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +STAT(1) User Commands STAT(1) + + + + + +NAME + stat - display file or file system status + +SYNOPSIS + stat [OPTION] FILE... + +DESCRIPTION + Display file or file system status. + + -f, --file-system + display file system status instead of file status + + -c --format=FORMAT + use the specified FORMAT instead of the default + + -L, --dereference + follow links + + -t, --terse + print the information in terse form + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + The valid format sequences for files (without + --file-system): + + %A Access rights in human readable form + + %a Access rights in octal + + %B The size in bytes of each block reported by `%b' + + %b Number of blocks allocated (see %B) + + %D Device number in hex + + %d Device number in decimal + + %F File type + + %f Raw mode in hex + + %G Group name of owner + + %g Group ID of owner + + %h Number of hard links + + %i Inode number + + %N Quoted File name with dereference if symbolic + link + + %n File name + + %o IO block size + + %s Total size, in bytes + + %T Minor device type in hex + + %t Major device type in hex + + %U User name of owner + + %u User ID of owner + + %X Time of last access as seconds since Epoch + + %x Time of last access + + %Y Time of last modification as seconds since Epoch + + %y Time of last modification + + %Z Time of last change as seconds since Epoch + + %z Time of last change + + Valid format sequences for file systems: + + %a Free blocks available to non-superuser + + %b Total data blocks in file system + + %c Total file nodes in file system + + %d Free file nodes in file system + + %f Free blocks in file system + + %i File System id in hex + + %l Maximum length of filenames + + %n File name + + %s Optimal transfer block size + + %T Type in human readable form + + %t Type in hex + +AUTHOR + Written by Michael Meskes. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for stat is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and stat programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info stat + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +stat 5.3.0 November 2004 STAT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stty.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stty.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d1cebf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stty.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,403 @@ +STTY(1) User Commands STTY(1) + + + + + +NAME + stty - change and print terminal line settings + +SYNOPSIS + stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [SETTING]... + stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [-a|--all] + stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [-g|--save] + +DESCRIPTION + Print or change terminal characteristics. + + -a, --all + print all current settings in human-readable form + + -g, --save + print all current settings in a stty-readable + form + + -F, --file=DEVICE + open and use the specified DEVICE instead of + stdin + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Optional - before SETTING indicates negation. An * + marks non-POSIX settings. The underlying system defines + which settings are available. + + Special characters: + * dsusp CHAR + CHAR will send a terminal stop signal once input + flushed + + eof CHAR + CHAR will send an end of file (terminate the + input) + + eol CHAR + CHAR will end the line + + * eol2 CHAR + alternate CHAR for ending the line + + erase CHAR + CHAR will erase the last character typed + + intr CHAR + CHAR will send an interrupt signal + + kill CHAR + CHAR will erase the current line + + * lnext CHAR + CHAR will enter the next character quoted + + quit CHAR + CHAR will send a quit signal + + * rprnt CHAR + CHAR will redraw the current line + + start CHAR + CHAR will restart the output after stopping it + + stop CHAR + CHAR will stop the output + + susp CHAR + CHAR will send a terminal stop signal + + * swtch CHAR + CHAR will switch to a different shell layer + + * werase CHAR + CHAR will erase the last word typed + + Special settings: + N set the input and output speeds to N bauds + + * cols N + tell the kernel that the terminal has N columns + + * columns N + same as cols N + + ispeed N + set the input speed to N + + * line N + use line discipline N + + min N with -icanon, set N characters minimum for a com- + pleted read + + ospeed N + set the output speed to N + + * rows N + tell the kernel that the terminal has N rows + + * size print the number of rows and columns according to + the kernel + + speed print the terminal speed + + time N with -icanon, set read timeout of N tenths of a + second + + Control settings: + [-]clocal + disable modem control signals + + [-]cread + allow input to be received + + * [-]crtscts + enable RTS/CTS handshaking + + csN set character size to N bits, N in [5..8] + + [-]cstopb + use two stop bits per character (one with `-') + + [-]hup send a hangup signal when the last process closes + the tty + + [-]hupcl + same as [-]hup + + [-]parenb + generate parity bit in output and expect parity + bit in input + + [-]parodd + set odd parity (even with `-') + + Input settings: + [-]brkint + breaks cause an interrupt signal + + [-]icrnl + translate carriage return to newline + + [-]ignbrk + ignore break characters + + [-]igncr + ignore carriage return + + [-]ignpar + ignore characters with parity errors + + * [-]imaxbel + beep and do not flush a full input buffer on a + character + + [-]inlcr + translate newline to carriage return + + [-]inpck + enable input parity checking + + [-]istrip + clear high (8th) bit of input characters + + * [-]iutf8 + assume input characters are UTF-8 encoded + + * [-]iuclc + translate uppercase characters to lowercase + + * [-]ixany + let any character restart output, not only start + character + + [-]ixoff + enable sending of start/stop characters + + [-]ixon + enable XON/XOFF flow control + + [-]parmrk + mark parity errors (with a 255-0-character + sequence) + + [-]tandem + same as [-]ixoff + + Output settings: + * bsN backspace delay style, N in [0..1] + + * crN carriage return delay style, N in [0..3] + + * ffN form feed delay style, N in [0..1] + + * nlN newline delay style, N in [0..1] + + * [-]ocrnl + translate carriage return to newline + + * [-]ofdel + use delete characters for fill instead of null + characters + + * [-]ofill + use fill (padding) characters instead of timing + for delays + + * [-]olcuc + translate lowercase characters to uppercase + + * [-]onlcr + translate newline to carriage return-newline + + * [-]onlret + newline performs a carriage return + + * [-]onocr + do not print carriage returns in the first column + + [-]opost + postprocess output + + * tabN horizontal tab delay style, N in [0..3] + + * tabs same as tab0 + + * -tabs + same as tab3 + + * vtN vertical tab delay style, N in [0..1] + + Local settings: + [-]crterase + echo erase characters as + backspace-space-backspace + + * crtkill + kill all line by obeying the echoprt and echoe + settings + + * -crtkill + kill all line by obeying the echoctl and echok + settings + + * [-]ctlecho + echo control characters in hat notation (`^c') + + [-]echo + echo input characters + + * [-]echoctl + same as [-]ctlecho + + [-]echoe + same as [-]crterase + + [-]echok + echo a newline after a kill character + + * [-]echoke + same as [-]crtkill + + [-]echonl + echo newline even if not echoing other characters + + * [-]echoprt + echo erased characters backward, between `\' and + '/' + + [-]icanon + enable erase, kill, werase, and rprnt special + characters + + [-]iexten + enable non-POSIX special characters + + [-]isig + enable interrupt, quit, and suspend special char- + acters + + [-]noflsh + disable flushing after interrupt and quit special + characters + + * [-]prterase + same as [-]echoprt + + * [-]tostop + stop background jobs that try to write to the + terminal + + * [-]xcase + with icanon, escape with `\' for uppercase char- + acters + + Combination settings: + * [-]LCASE + same as [-]lcase + + cbreak same as -icanon + + -cbreak + same as icanon + + cooked same as brkint ignpar istrip icrnl ixon opost + isig icanon, eof and eol characters to their + default values + + -cooked + same as raw + + crt same as echoe echoctl echoke + + dec same as echoe echoctl echoke -ixany intr ^c erase + 0177 kill ^u + + * [-]decctlq + same as [-]ixany + + ek erase and kill characters to their default values + + evenp same as parenb -parodd cs7 + + -evenp same as -parenb cs8 + + * [-]lcase + same as xcase iuclc olcuc + + litout same as -parenb -istrip -opost cs8 + + -litout + same as parenb istrip opost cs7 + + nl same as -icrnl -onlcr + + -nl same as icrnl -inlcr -igncr onlcr -ocrnl -onlret + + oddp same as parenb parodd cs7 + + -oddp same as -parenb cs8 + + [-]parity + same as [-]evenp + + pass8 same as -parenb -istrip cs8 + + -pass8 same as parenb istrip cs7 + + raw same as -ignbrk -brkint -ignpar -parmrk -inpck + -istrip -inlcr -igncr -icrnl -ixon -ixoff + -iuclc -ixany -imaxbel -opost -isig -icanon + -xcase min 1 time 0 + + -raw same as cooked + + sane same as cread -ignbrk brkint -inlcr -igncr icrnl + -iutf8 -ixoff -iuclc -ixany imaxbel opost -olcuc + -ocrnl onlcr -onocr -onlret -ofill -ofdel nl0 cr0 + tab0 bs0 vt0 ff0 isig icanon iexten echo echoe + echok -echonl -noflsh -xcase -tostop -echoprt + echoctl echoke, all special characters to their + default values. + + Handle the tty line connected to standard input. With- + out arguments, prints baud rate, line discipline, and + deviations from stty sane. In settings, CHAR is taken + literally, or coded as in ^c, 0x37, 0177 or 127; special + values ^- or undef used to disable special characters. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for stty is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and stty programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info stty + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +stty 5.3.0 November 2004 STTY(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/su.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/su.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..641c0ff --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/su.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +SU(1) User Commands SU(1) + + + + + +NAME + su - run a shell with substitute user and group IDs + +SYNOPSIS + su [OPTION]... [-] [USER [ARG]...] + +DESCRIPTION + Change the effective user id and group id to that of + USER. + + -, -l, --login + make the shell a login shell + + -c, --commmand=COMMAND + pass a single COMMAND to the shell with -c + + -f, --fast + pass -f to the shell (for csh or tcsh) + + -m, --preserve-environment + do not reset environment variables + + -p same as -m + + -s, --shell=SHELL + run SHELL if /etc/shells allows it + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + A mere - implies -l. If USER not given, assume root. + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for su is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and su programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info su + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +su 5.3.0 November 2004 SU(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b646973 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +SUM(1) User Commands SUM(1) + + + + + +NAME + sum - checksum and count the blocks in a file + +SYNOPSIS + sum [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print checksum and block counts for each FILE. + + -r defeat -s, use BSD sum algorithm, use 1K blocks + + -s, --sysv + use System V sum algorithm, use 512 bytes blocks + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR + Written by Kayvan Aghaiepour and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for sum is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and sum programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info sum + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sum 5.3.0 November 2004 SUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sync.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sync.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0e5b8a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sync.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +SYNC(1) User Commands SYNC(1) + + + + + +NAME + sync - flush file system buffers + +SYNOPSIS + sync [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION + Force changed blocks to disk, update the super block. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for sync is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and sync programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info sync + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sync (coreutils) 5.3.0 November 2004 SYNC(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tac.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tac.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10828c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tac.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +TAC(1) User Commands TAC(1) + + + + + +NAME + tac - concatenate and print files in reverse + +SYNOPSIS + tac [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Write each FILE to standard output, last line first. + With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -b, --before + attach the separator before instead of after + + -r, --regex + interpret the separator as a regular expression + + -s, --separator=STRING + use STRING as the separator instead of newline + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jay Lepreau and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for tac is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and tac programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info tac + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tac 5.3.0 December 2004 TAC(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tail.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tail.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc9401f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tail.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +TAIL(1) User Commands TAIL(1) + + + + + +NAME + tail - output the last part of files + +SYNOPSIS + tail [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print the last 10 lines of each FILE to standard output. + With more than one FILE, precede each with a header giv- + ing the file name. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, + read standard input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + --retry + keep trying to open a file even if it is inacces- + sible when tail starts or if it becomes inacces- + sible later; useful when following by name, i.e., + with --follow=name + + -c, --bytes=N + output the last N bytes + + -f, --follow[={name|descriptor}] + output appended data as the file grows; -f, + --follow, and --follow=descriptor are equivalent + + -F same as --follow=name --retry + + -n, --lines=N + output the last N lines, instead of the last 10 + + --max-unchanged-stats=N + with --follow=name, reopen a FILE which has not + changed size after N (default 5) iterations to + see if it has been unlinked or renamed (this is + the usual case of rotated log files) + + --pid=PID + with -f, terminate after process ID, PID dies + + -q, --quiet, --silent + never output headers giving file names + + -s, --sleep-interval=S + with -f, sleep for approximately S seconds + (default 1.0) between iterations. + + -v, --verbose + always output headers giving file names + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If the first character of N (the number of bytes or + lines) is a `+', print beginning with the Nth item from + the start of each file, otherwise, print the last N + items in the file. N may have a multiplier suffix: b + 512, k 1024, m 1024*1024. + + With --follow (-f), tail defaults to following the file + descriptor, which means that even if a tail'ed file is + renamed, tail will continue to track its end. This + default behavior is not desirable when you really want + to track the actual name of the file, not the file + descriptor (e.g., log rotation). Use --follow=name in + that case. That causes tail to track the named file by + reopening it periodically to see if it has been removed + and recreated by some other program. + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, Ian Lance Tay- + lor, and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for tail is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and tail programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info tail + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tail 5.3.0 December 2004 TAIL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tee.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tee.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..631c857 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tee.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +TEE(1) User Commands TEE(1) + + + + + +NAME + tee - read from standard input and write to standard + output and files + +SYNOPSIS + tee [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Copy standard input to each FILE, and also to standard + output. + + -a, --append + append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite + + -i, --ignore-interrupts + ignore interrupt signals + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If a FILE is -, copy again to standard output. + +AUTHOR + Written by Mike Parker, Richard M. Stallman, and David + MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for tee is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and tee programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info tee + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tee 5.3.0 November 2004 TEE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/test.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/test.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84d18d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/test.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +TEST(1) User Commands TEST(1) + + + + + +NAME + test - check file types and compare values + +SYNOPSIS + test EXPRESSION + test + + [ EXPRESSION ] + [ ] + [ OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Exit with the status determined by EXPRESSION. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + An omitted EXPRESSION defaults to false. Otherwise, + EXPRESSION is true or false and sets exit status. It is + one of: + + ( EXPRESSION ) + EXPRESSION is true + + ! EXPRESSION + EXPRESSION is false + + EXPRESSION1 -a EXPRESSION2 + both EXPRESSION1 and EXPRESSION2 are true + + EXPRESSION1 -o EXPRESSION2 + either EXPRESSION1 or EXPRESSION2 is true + + -n STRING + the length of STRING is nonzero + + STRING equivalent to -n STRING + + -z STRING + the length of STRING is zero + + STRING1 = STRING2 + the strings are equal + + STRING1 != STRING2 + the strings are not equal + + INTEGER1 -eq INTEGER2 + INTEGER1 is equal to INTEGER2 + + INTEGER1 -ge INTEGER2 + INTEGER1 is greater than or equal to INTEGER2 + + INTEGER1 -gt INTEGER2 + INTEGER1 is greater than INTEGER2 + + INTEGER1 -le INTEGER2 + INTEGER1 is less than or equal to INTEGER2 + + INTEGER1 -lt INTEGER2 + INTEGER1 is less than INTEGER2 + + INTEGER1 -ne INTEGER2 + INTEGER1 is not equal to INTEGER2 + + FILE1 -ef FILE2 + FILE1 and FILE2 have the same device and inode + numbers + + FILE1 -nt FILE2 + FILE1 is newer (modification date) than FILE2 + + FILE1 -ot FILE2 + FILE1 is older than FILE2 + + -b FILE + FILE exists and is block special + + -c FILE + FILE exists and is character special + + -d FILE + FILE exists and is a directory + + -e FILE + FILE exists + + -f FILE + FILE exists and is a regular file + + -g FILE + FILE exists and is set-group-ID + + -G FILE + FILE exists and is owned by the effective group + ID + + -h FILE + FILE exists and is a symbolic link (same as -L) + + -k FILE + FILE exists and has its sticky bit set + + -L FILE + FILE exists and is a symbolic link (same as -h) + + -O FILE + FILE exists and is owned by the effective user ID + + -p FILE + FILE exists and is a named pipe + + -r FILE + FILE exists and read permission is granted + + -s FILE + FILE exists and has a size greater than zero + + -S FILE + FILE exists and is a socket + + -t FD file descriptor FD is opened on a terminal + + -u FILE + FILE exists and its set-user-ID bit is set + + -w FILE + FILE exists and write permission is granted + + -x FILE + FILE exists and execute (or search) permission is + granted + + Except for -h and -L, all FILE-related tests dereference + symbolic links. Beware that parentheses need to be + escaped (e.g., by backslashes) for shells. INTEGER may + also be -l STRING, which evaluates to the length of + STRING. + +AUTHOR + Written by Kevin Braunsdorf and Matthew Bradburn. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for test is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and test programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info test + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +test 5.3.0 November 2004 TEST(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/touch.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/touch.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b7513e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/touch.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +TOUCH(1) User Commands TOUCH(1) + + + + + +NAME + touch - change file timestamps + +SYNOPSIS + touch [OPTION]... FILE... + +DESCRIPTION + Update the access and modification times of each FILE to + the current time. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a change only the access time + + -c, --no-create + do not create any files + + -d, --date=STRING + parse STRING and use it instead of current time + + -f (ignored) + + -m change only the modification time + + -r, --reference=FILE + use this file's times instead of current time + + -t STAMP + use [[CC]YY]MMDDhhmm[.ss] instead of current time + + --time=WORD + change the specified time: WORD is access, atime, + or use: equivalent to -a WORD is modify or mtime: + equivalent to -m + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + Note that the -d and -t options accept different + time-date formats. + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Rubin, Arnold Robbins, Jim Kingdon, + David MacKenzie, and Randy Smith. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for touch is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and touch programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info touch + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +touch 5.3.0 November 2004 TOUCH(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tr.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tr.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57bc3e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tr.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +TR(1) User Commands TR(1) + + + + + +NAME + tr - translate or delete characters + +SYNOPSIS + tr [OPTION]... SET1 [SET2] + +DESCRIPTION + Translate, squeeze, and/or delete characters from stan- + dard input, writing to standard output. + + -c, -C, --complement + first complement SET1 + + -d, --delete + delete characters in SET1, do not translate + + -s, --squeeze-repeats + replace each input sequence of a repeated charac- + ter that is listed in SET1 with a single occur- + rence of that character + + -t, --truncate-set1 + first truncate SET1 to length of SET2 + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SETs are specified as strings of characters. Most rep- + resent themselves. Interpreted sequences are: + + \NNN character with octal value NNN (1 to 3 octal dig- + its) + + \\ backslash + + \a audible BEL + + \b backspace + + \f form feed + + \n new line + + \r return + + \t horizontal tab + + \v vertical tab + + CHAR1-CHAR2 + all characters from CHAR1 to CHAR2 in ascending + order + + [CHAR*] + in SET2, copies of CHAR until length of SET1 + + [CHAR*REPEAT] + REPEAT copies of CHAR, REPEAT octal if starting + with 0 + + [:alnum:] + all letters and digits + + [:alpha:] + all letters + + [:blank:] + all horizontal whitespace + + [:cntrl:] + all control characters + + [:digit:] + all digits + + [:graph:] + all printable characters, not including space + + [:lower:] + all lower case letters + + [:print:] + all printable characters, including space + + [:punct:] + all punctuation characters + + [:space:] + all horizontal or vertical whitespace + + [:upper:] + all upper case letters + + [:xdigit:] + all hexadecimal digits + + [=CHAR=] + all characters which are equivalent to CHAR + + Translation occurs if -d is not given and both SET1 and + SET2 appear. -t may be used only when translating. + SET2 is extended to length of SET1 by repeating its last + character as necessary. Excess characters of SET2 are + ignored. Only [:lower:] and [:upper:] are guaranteed to + expand in ascending order; used in SET2 while translat- + ing, they may only be used in pairs to specify case con- + version. -s uses SET1 if not translating nor deleting; + else squeezing uses SET2 and occurs after translation or + deletion. + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for tr is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and tr programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info tr + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tr 5.3.0 November 2004 TR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/true.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/true.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8931d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/true.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +TRUE(1) User Commands TRUE(1) + + + + + +NAME + true - do nothing, successfully + +SYNOPSIS + true [ignored command line arguments] + true OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Exit with a status code indicating success. + + These option names may not be abbreviated. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for true is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and true programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info true + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +true 5.3.0 November 2004 TRUE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tsort.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tsort.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..724d404 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tsort.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +TSORT(1) User Commands TSORT(1) + + + + + +NAME + tsort - perform topological sort + +SYNOPSIS + tsort [OPTION] [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION + Write totally ordered list consistent with the partial + ordering in FILE. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read + standard input. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Mark Kettenis. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for tsort is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and tsort programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info tsort + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tsort (coreutils) 5.3.0 November 2004 TSORT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tty.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tty.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb23ff3 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tty.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +TTY(1) User Commands TTY(1) + + + + + +NAME + tty - print the file name of the terminal connected to + standard input + +SYNOPSIS + tty [OPTION]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print the file name of the terminal connected to stan- + dard input. + + -s, --silent, --quiet + print nothing, only return an exit status + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for tty is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and tty programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info tty + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tty 5.3.0 November 2004 TTY(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..43c2a1f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +UNAME(1) User Commands UNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME + uname - print system information + +SYNOPSIS + uname [OPTION]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print certain system information. With no OPTION, same + as -s. + + -a, --all + print all information, in the following order: + + -s, --kernel-name + print the kernel name + + -n, --nodename + print the network node hostname + + -r, --kernel-release + print the kernel release + + -v, --kernel-version + print the kernel version + + -m, --machine + print the machine hardware name + + -p, --processor + print the processor type + + -i, --hardware-platform + print the hardware platform + + -o, --operating-system + print the operating system + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for uname is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and uname programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info uname + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +uname 5.3.0 November 2004 UNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unexpand.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unexpand.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d2c73b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unexpand.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +UNEXPAND(1) User Commands UNEXPAND(1) + + + + + +NAME + unexpand - convert spaces to tabs + +SYNOPSIS + unexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Convert blanks in each FILE to tabs, writing to standard + output. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard + input. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --all + convert all blanks, instead of just initial + blanks + + --first-only convert only leading sequences of blanks + (overrides -a) + + -t, --tabs=N + have tabs N characters apart instead of 8 + (enables -a) + + -t, --tabs=LIST + use comma separated LIST of tab positions + (enables -a) + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + expand(1) + + The full documentation for unexpand is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and unexpand programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info unexpand + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +unexpand 5.3.0 November 2004 UNEXPAND(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uniq.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uniq.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4988db --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uniq.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +UNIQ(1) User Commands UNIQ(1) + + + + + +NAME + uniq - report or omit repeated lines + +SYNOPSIS + uniq [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]] + +DESCRIPTION + Discard all but one of successive identical lines from + INPUT (or standard input), writing to OUTPUT (or stan- + dard output). + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -c, --count + prefix lines by the number of occurrences + + -d, --repeated + only print duplicate lines + + -D, --all-repeated[=delimit-method] print all duplicate + lines + delimit-method={none(default),prepend,separate} + Delimiting is done with blank lines. + + -f, --skip-fields=N + avoid comparing the first N fields + + -i, --ignore-case + ignore differences in case when comparing + + -s, --skip-chars=N + avoid comparing the first N characters + + -u, --unique + only print unique lines + + -w, --check-chars=N + compare no more than N characters in lines + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + A field is a run of whitespace, then non-whitespace + characters. Fields are skipped before chars. + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for uniq is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and uniq programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info uniq + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +uniq 5.3.0 December 2004 UNIQ(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unlink.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unlink.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3267e2b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unlink.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +UNLINK(1) User Commands UNLINK(1) + + + + + +NAME + unlink - call the unlink function to remove the speci- + fied file + +SYNOPSIS + unlink FILE + unlink OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Call the unlink function to remove the specified FILE. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Michael Stone. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for unlink is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and unlink programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info unlink + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +unlink 5.3.0 November 2004 UNLINK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uptime.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uptime.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16ddbbf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uptime.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +UPTIME(1) User Commands UPTIME(1) + + + + + +NAME + uptime - tell how long the system has been running + +SYNOPSIS + uptime [OPTION]... [ FILE ] + +DESCRIPTION + Print the current time, the length of time the system + has been up, the number of users on the system, and the + average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, + 5 and 15 minutes. If FILE is not specified, use + /var/run/utmp. /var/log/wtmp as FILE is common. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Joseph Arceneaux, David MacKenzie, and Kaveh + Ghazi. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for uptime is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and uptime programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info uptime + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +uptime 5.3.0 November 2004 UPTIME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/users.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/users.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9146363 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/users.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +USERS(1) User Commands USERS(1) + + + + + +NAME + users - print the user names of users currently logged + in to the current host + +SYNOPSIS + users [OPTION]... [ FILE ] + +DESCRIPTION + Output who is currently logged in according to FILE. If + FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp. /var/log/wtmp + as FILE is common. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Joseph Arceneaux and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for users is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and users programs are prop- + erly installed at your site, the command + + info users + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +users 5.3.0 November 2004 USERS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/vdir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/vdir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aaae259 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/vdir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +VDIR(1) User Commands VDIR(1) + + + + + +NAME + vdir - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS + vdir [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + List information about the FILEs (the current directory + by default). Sort entries alphabetically if none of + -cftuSUX nor --sort. + + Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for + short options too. + + -a, --all + do not ignore entries starting with . + + -A, --almost-all + do not list implied . and .. + + --author + with -l, print the author of each file + + -b, --escape + print octal escapes for nongraphic characters + + --block-size=SIZE + use SIZE-byte blocks + + -B, --ignore-backups + do not list implied entries ending with ~ + + -c with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of last + modification of file status information) with -l: + show ctime and sort by name otherwise: sort by + ctime + + -C list entries by columns + + --color[=WHEN] + control whether color is used to distinguish file + types. WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto' + + -d, --directory + list directory entries instead of contents, and + do not dereference symbolic links + + -D, --dired + generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode + + -f do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst + + -F, --classify + append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries + + --format=WORD + across -x, commas -m, horizontal -x, long -l, + single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C + + --full-time + like -l --time-style=full-iso + + -g like -l, but do not list owner + + -G, --no-group + like -l, but do not list group + + -h, --human-readable + with -l, print sizes in human readable format + (e.g., 1K 234M 2G) + + --si likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + + -H, --dereference-command-line + follow symbolic links listed on the command line + + --dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir + follow each command line symbolic link that + points to a directory + + --hide=PATTERN + do not list implied entries matching shell PAT- + TERN (overridden by -a or -A) + + --indicator-style=WORD append indicator with style WORD + to entry names: + none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p) + + -i, --inode + with -l, print the index number of each file + + -I, --ignore=PATTERN + do not list implied entries matching shell PAT- + TERN + + -k like --block-size=1K + + -l use a long listing format + + -L, --dereference + when showing file information for a symbolic + link, show information for the file the link ref- + erences rather than for the link itself + + -m fill width with a comma separated list of entries + + -n, --numeric-uid-gid + like -l, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs + + -N, --literal + print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control + characters specially) + + -o like -l, but do not list group information + + -p, --file-type + append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries + + -q, --hide-control-chars + print ? instead of non graphic characters + + --show-control-chars + show non graphic characters as-is (default unless + program is `ls' and output is a terminal) + + -Q, --quote-name + enclose entry names in double quotes + + --quoting-style=WORD + use quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, + locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape + + -r, --reverse + reverse order while sorting + + -R, --recursive + list subdirectories recursively + + -s, --size + with -l, print size of each file, in blocks + + -S sort by file size + + --sort=WORD + extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t, version + -v, status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use + -u + + --time=WORD + with -l, show time as WORD instead of modifica- + tion time: atime, access, use, ctime or status; + use specified time as sort key if --sort=time + + --time-style=STYLE + with -l, show times using style STYLE: full-iso, + long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT. FORMAT is inter- + preted like `date'; if FORMAT is FORMAT1<new- + line>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to non-recent files + and FORMAT2 to recent files; if STYLE is prefixed + with `posix-', STYLE takes effect only outside + the POSIX locale + + -t sort by modification time + + -T, --tabsize=COLS + assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8 + + -u with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: + show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort + by access time + + -U do not sort; list entries in directory order + + -v sort by version + + -w, --width=COLS + assume screen width instead of current value + + -x list entries by lines instead of by columns + + -X sort alphabetically by entry extension + + -1 list one file per line + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed + by) one of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M + 1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + + By default, color is not used to distinguish types of + files. That is equivalent to using --color=none. Using + the --color option without the optional WHEN argument is + equivalent to using --color=always. With --color=auto, + color codes are output only if standard output is con- + nected to a terminal (tty). + + Exit status is 0 if OK, 1 if minor problems, 2 if seri- + ous trouble. + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for vdir is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and vdir programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info vdir + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +vdir 5.3.0 December 2004 VDIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/wc.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/wc.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2038c23 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/wc.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +WC(1) User Commands WC(1) + + + + + +NAME + wc - print the number of newlines, words, and bytes in + files + +SYNOPSIS + wc [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print newline, word, and byte counts for each FILE, and + a total line if more than one FILE is specified. With + no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + + -c, --bytes + print the byte counts + + -m, --chars + print the character counts + + -l, --lines + print the newline counts + + -L, --max-line-length + print the length of the longest line + + -w, --words + print the word counts + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Paul Rubin and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for wc is maintained as a Texinfo + manual. If the info and wc programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info wc + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +wc 5.3.0 November 2004 WC(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/who.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/who.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1520566 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/who.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +WHO(1) User Commands WHO(1) + + + + + +NAME + who - show who is logged on + +SYNOPSIS + who [OPTION]... [ FILE | ARG1 ARG2 ] + +DESCRIPTION + -a, --all + same as -b -d --login -p -r -t -T -u + + -b, --boot + time of last system boot + + -d, --dead + print dead processes + + -H, --heading + print line of column headings + + -i, --idle + add idle time as HOURS:MINUTES, . or old (depre- + cated, use -u) + + -l, --login + print system login processes + + --lookup + attempt to canonicalize hostnames via DNS + + -m only hostname and user associated with stdin + + -p, --process + print active processes spawned by init + + -q, --count + all login names and number of users logged on + + -r, --runlevel + print current runlevel + + -s, --short + print only name, line, and time (default) + + -t, --time + print last system clock change + + -T, -w, --mesg + add user's message status as +, - or ? + + -u, --users + list users logged in + + --message + same as -T + + --writable + same as -T + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + + If FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp. + /var/log/wtmp as FILE is common. If ARG1 ARG2 given, -m + presumed: `am i' or `mom likes' are usual. + +AUTHOR + Written by Joseph Arceneaux, David MacKenzie, and + Michael Stone. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for who is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and who programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info who + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +who 5.3.0 November 2004 WHO(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/whoami.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/whoami.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..042e606 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/whoami.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +WHOAMI(1) User Commands WHOAMI(1) + + + + + +NAME + whoami - print effective userid + +SYNOPSIS + whoami [OPTION]... + +DESCRIPTION + Print the user name associated with the current effec- + tive user id. Same as id -un. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by Richard Mlynarik. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for whoami is maintained as a + Texinfo manual. If the info and whoami programs are + properly installed at your site, the command + + info whoami + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +whoami 5.3.0 November 2004 WHOAMI(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/yes.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/yes.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14757bf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/yes.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +YES(1) User Commands YES(1) + + + + + +NAME + yes - output a string repeatedly until killed + +SYNOPSIS + yes [STRING]... + yes OPTION + +DESCRIPTION + Repeatedly output a line with all specified STRING(s), + or `y'. + + --help display this help and exit + + --version + output version information and exit + +AUTHOR + Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS + Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT + Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + This is free software; see the source for copying condi- + tions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- + ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO + The full documentation for yes is maintained as a Tex- + info manual. If the info and yes programs are properly + installed at your site, the command + + info yes + + should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +yes 5.3.0 December 2004 YES(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/awk.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/awk.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a173621 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/awk.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,301 @@ +AWK(1P) POSIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1P) + + + +PROLOG + This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Man- + ual. The Linux implementation of this interface may + differ (consult the corresponding Linux manual page for + details of Linux behavior), or the interface may not be + implemented on Linux. + +NAME + awk - pattern scanning and processing language + +SYNOPSIS + awk [-F ERE][-v assignment] ... program [argument ...] + + awk [-F ERE] -f progfile ... [-v assignment] ...[argu- + ment ...] + + +DESCRIPTION + The awk utility shall execute programs written in the + awk programming language, which is specialized for tex- + tual data manipulation. An awk program is a sequence of + patterns and corresponding actions. When input is read + that matches a pattern, the action associated with that + pattern is carried out. + + Input shall be interpreted as a sequence of records. By + default, a record is a line, less its terminating <new- + line>, but this can be changed by using the RS built-in + variable. Each record of input shall be matched in turn + against each pattern in the program. For each pattern + matched, the associated action shall be executed. + + The awk utility shall interpret each input record as a + sequence of fields where, by default, a field is a + string of non- <blank>s. This default white-space field + delimiter can be changed by using the FS built-in vari- + able or -F ERE. The awk utility shall denote the first + field in a record $1, the second $2, and so on. The sym- + bol $0 shall refer to the entire record; setting any + other field causes the re-evaluation of $0. Assigning to + $0 shall reset the values of all other fields and the NF + built-in variable. + +OPTIONS + The awk utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -F ERE + Define the input field separator to be the + extended regular expression ERE, before any input + is read; see Regular Expressions . + + -f progfile + Specify the pathname of the file progfile con- + taining an awk program. If multiple instances of + this option are specified, the concatenation of + the files specified as progfile in the order + specified shall be the awk program. The awk pro- + gram can alternatively be specified in the com- + mand line as a single argument. + + -v assignment + The application shall ensure that the assignment + argument is in the same form as an assignment + operand. The specified variable assignment shall + occur prior to executing the awk program, includ- + ing the actions associated with BEGIN patterns + (if any). Multiple occurrences of this option can + be specified. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + program + If no -f option is specified, the first operand + to awk shall be the text of the awk program. The + application shall supply the program operand as a + single argument to awk. If the text does not end + in a <newline>, awk shall interpret the text as + if it did. + + argument + Either of the following two types of argument can + be intermixed: + + file + A pathname of a file that contains the input to + be read, which is matched against the set of pat- + terns in the program. If no file operands are + specified, or if a file operand is '-', the stan- + dard input shall be used. + + assignment + An operand that begins with an underscore or + alphabetic character from the portable character + set (see the table in the Base Definitions volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 6.1, Portable + Character Set), followed by a sequence of under- + scores, digits, and alphabetics from the portable + character set, followed by the '=' character, + shall specify a variable assignment rather than a + pathname. The characters before the '=' represent + the name of an awk variable; if that name is an + awk reserved word (see Grammar ) the behavior is + undefined. The characters following the equal + sign shall be interpreted as if they appeared in + the awk program preceded and followed by a dou- + ble-quote ( ' )' character, as a STRING token + (see Grammar ), except that if the last character + is an unescaped backslash, it shall be inter- + preted as a literal backslash rather than as the + first character of the sequence "\"" . The vari- + able shall be assigned the value of that STRING + token and, if appropriate, shall be considered a + numeric string (see Expressions in awk ), the + variable shall also be assigned its numeric + value. Each such variable assignment shall occur + just prior to the processing of the following + file, if any. Thus, an assignment before the + first file argument shall be executed after the + BEGIN actions (if any), while an assignment after + the last file argument shall occur before the END + actions (if any). If there are no file arguments, + assignments shall be executed before processing + the standard input. + + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file + operands are specified, or if a file operand is '-' ; + see the INPUT FILES section. If the awk program contains + no actions and no patterns, but is otherwise a valid awk + program, standard input and any file operands shall not + be read and awk shall exit with a return status of zero. + +INPUT FILES + Input files to the awk program from any of the following + sources shall be text files: + + * Any file operands or their equivalents, achieved by + modifying the awk variables ARGV and ARGC + + + * Standard input in the absence of any file operands + + + * Arguments to the getline function + + + Whether the variable RS is set to a value other than a + <newline> or not, for these files, implementations shall + support records terminated with the specified separator + up to {LINE_MAX} bytes and may support longer records. + + If -f progfile is specified, the application shall + ensure that the files named by each of the progfile + option-arguments are text files and their concatenation, + in the same order as they appear in the arguments, is an + awk program. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of awk: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements within regular expressions and in + comparisons of string values. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + the behavior of character classes within regular + expressions, the identification of characters as + letters, and the mapping of uppercase and lower- + case characters for the toupper and tolower func- + tions. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_NUMERIC + Determine the radix character used when inter- + preting numeric input, performing conversions + between numeric and string values, and formatting + numeric output. Regardless of locale, the period + character (the decimal-point character of the + POSIX locale) is the decimal-point character rec- + ognized in processing awk programs (including + assignments in command line arguments). + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + PATH Determine the search path when looking for com- + mands executed by system(expr), or input and out- + put pipes; see the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 8, Environment + Variables. + + + In addition, all environment variables shall be visible + via the awk variable ENVIRON. + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The nature of the output files depends on the awk pro- + gram. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + The nature of the output files depends on the awk pro- + gram. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + Overall Program Structure + An awk program is composed of pairs of the form: + + + pattern { action } + + Either the pattern or the action (including the enclos- + ing brace characters) can be omitted. + + A missing pattern shall match any record of input, and a + missing action shall be equivalent to: + + + { print } + + Execution of the awk program shall start by first exe- + cuting the actions associated with all BEGIN patterns in + the order they occur in the program. Then each file + operand (or standard input if no files were specified) + shall be processed in turn by reading data from the file + until a record separator is seen ( <newline> by + default). Before the first reference to a field in the + record is evaluated, the record shall be split into + fields, according to the rules in Regular Expressions, + using the value of FS that was current at the time the + record was read. Each pattern in the program then shall + be evaluated in the order of occurrence, and the action + associated with each pattern that matches the current + record executed. The action for a matching pattern shall + be executed before evaluating subsequent patterns. + Finally, the actions associated with all END patterns + shall be executed in the order they occur in the pro- + gram. + + Expressions in awk + Expressions describe computations used in patterns and + actions. In the following table, valid expression + operations are given in groups from highest precedence + first to lowest precedence last, with equal-precedence + operators grouped between horizontal lines. In expres- + sion evaluation, where the grammar is formally ambigu- + ous, higher precedence operators shall be evaluated + before lower precedence operators. In this table expr, + expr1, expr2, and expr3 represent any expression, while + lvalue represents any entity that can be assigned to + (that is, on the left side of an assignment operator). + The precise syntax of expressions is given in Grammar . + + Table: Expressions in Decreasing Precedence in awk + + + + +IEEE/The Open Group 2003 AWK(1P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/basename.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/basename.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a28bfac --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/basename.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +basename(P) basename(P) + + + + + +NAME + basename - return non-directory portion of a pathname + +SYNOPSIS + basename string [suffix] + +DESCRIPTION + The string operand shall be treated as a pathname, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 3.266, Pathname. The + string string shall be converted to the filename corre- + sponding to the last pathname component in string and + then the suffix string suffix, if present, shall be + removed. This shall be done by performing actions equiv- + alent to the following steps in order: + + If string is a null string, it is unspecified whether + the resulting string is '.' or a null string. In either + case, skip steps 2 through 6. + + If string is "//" , it is implementation-defined whether + steps 3 to 6 are skipped or processed. + + If string consists entirely of slash characters, string + shall be set to a single slash character. In this case, + skip steps 4 to 6. + + If there are any trailing slash characters in string, + they shall be removed. + + If there are any slash characters remaining in string, + the prefix of string up to and including the last slash + character in string shall be removed. + + If the suffix operand is present, is not identical to + the characters remaining in string, and is identical to + a suffix of the characters remaining in string, the suf- + fix suffix shall be removed from string. Otherwise, + string is not modified by this step. It shall not be + considered an error if suffix is not found in string. + + The resulting string shall be written to standard out- + put. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + string A string. + + suffix A string. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of basename: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The basename utility shall write a line to the standard + output in the following format: + + + "%s\n", <resulting string> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The definition of pathname specifies implementation- + defined behavior for pathnames starting with two slash + characters. Therefore, applications shall not arbitrar- + ily add slashes to the beginning of a pathname unless + they can ensure that there are more or less than two or + are prepared to deal with the implementation-defined + consequences. + +EXAMPLES + If the string string is a valid pathname: + + + $(basename "string") + + produces a filename that could be used to open the file + named by string in the directory returned by: + + + $(dirname "string") + + If the string string is not a valid pathname, the same + algorithm is used, but the result need not be a valid + filename. The basename utility is not expected to make + any judgements about the validity of string as a path- + name; it just follows the specified algorithm to produce + a result string. + + The following shell script compiles /usr/src/cmd/cat.c + and moves the output to a file named cat in the current + directory when invoked with the argument + /usr/src/cmd/cat or with the argument + /usr/src/cmd/cat.c: + + + c99 $(dirname "$1")/$(basename "$1" .c).c + mv a.out $(basename "$1" .c) + +RATIONALE + The behaviors of basename and dirname have been coordi- + nated so that when string is a valid pathname: + + + $(basename "string") + + would be a valid filename for the file in the directory: + + + $(dirname "string") + + This would not work for the early proposal versions of + these utilities due to the way it specified handling of + trailing slashes. + + Since the definition of pathname specifies implementa- + tion-defined behavior for pathnames starting with two + slash characters, this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + specifies similar implementation-defined behavior for + the basename and dirname utilities. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Parameters and Variables , dirname() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at + http://www.opengroup.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 basename(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cat.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cat.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f71aef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cat.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ +cat(P) cat(P) + + + + + +NAME + cat - concatenate and print files + +SYNOPSIS + cat [-u][file ...] + +DESCRIPTION + The cat utility shall read files in sequence and shall + write their contents to the standard output in the same + sequence. + +OPTIONS + The cat utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -u Write bytes from the input file to the standard + output without delay as each is read. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an input file. If no file operands + are specified, the standard input shall be used. + If a file is '-' , the cat utility shall read + from the standard input at that point in the + sequence. The cat utility shall not close and + reopen standard input when it is referenced in + this way, but shall accept multiple occurrences + of '-' as a file operand. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified, or if a file operand is '-' . See + the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files can be any file type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of cat: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall contain the sequence of bytes + read from the input files. Nothing else shall be written + to the standard output. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were output successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The -u option has value in prototyping non-blocking + reads from FIFOs. The intent is to support the following + sequence: + + + mkfifo foo + cat -u foo > /dev/tty13 & + cat -u > foo + + It is unspecified whether standard output is or is not + buffered in the default case. This is sometimes of + interest when standard output is associated with a ter- + minal, since buffering may delay the output. The pres- + ence of the -u option guarantees that unbuffered I/O is + available. It is implementation-defined whether the cat + utility buffers output if the -u option is not speci- + fied. Traditionally, the -u option is implemented using + the equivalent of the setvbuf() function defined in the + System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +EXAMPLES + The following command: + + + cat myfile + + writes the contents of the file myfile to standard + output. + + The following command: + + + cat doc1 doc2 > doc.all + + concatenates the files doc1 and doc2 and writes the + result to doc.all. + + Because of the shell language mechanism used to perform + output redirection, a command such as this: + + + cat doc doc.end > doc + + causes the original data in doc to be lost. + + The command: + + + cat start - middle - end > file + + when standard input is a terminal, gets two arbitrary + pieces of input from the terminal with a single invoca- + tion of cat. Note, however, that if standard input is a + regular file, this would be equivalent to the command: + + + cat start - middle /dev/null end > file + + because the entire contents of the file would be con- + sumed by cat the first time '-' was used as a file oper- + and and an end-of-file condition would be detected imme- + diately when '-' was referenced the second time. + +RATIONALE + Historical versions of the cat utility include the + options -e, -t, and -v, which permit the ends of lines, + <tab>s, and invisible characters, respectively, to be + rendered visible in the output. The standard developers + omitted these options because they provide too fine a + degree of control over what is made visible, and similar + output can be obtained using a command such as: + + + sed -n -e 's/$/$/' -e l pathname + + The -s option was omitted because it corresponds to dif- + ferent functions in BSD and System V-based systems. The + BSD -s option to squeeze blank lines can be accomplished + by the shell script shown in the following example: + + + sed -n ' + # Write non-empty lines. + /./ { + p + d + } + # Write a single empty line, then look for more empty lines. + /^$/ p + # Get next line, discard the held <newline> (empty line), + # and look for more empty lines. + :Empty + /^$/ { + N + s/.// + b Empty + } + # Write the non-empty line before going back to search + # for the first in a set of empty lines. + p + + The System V -s option to silence error messages can be + accomplished by redirecting the standard error. Note + that the BSD documentation for cat uses the term "blank + line" to mean the same as the POSIX "empty line'': a + line consisting only of a <newline>. + + The BSD -n option was omitted because similar function- + ality can be obtained from the -n option of the pr util- + ity. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + more , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, setvbuf() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 cat(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chgrp.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chgrp.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a7950c --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chgrp.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +chgrp(P) chgrp(P) + + + + + +NAME + chgrp - change the file group ownership + +SYNOPSIS + chgrp [-hR] group file ... + + chgrp -R [-H | -L | -P ] group file ... + + +DESCRIPTION + The chgrp utility shall set the group ID of the file + named by each file operand to the group ID specified by + the group operand. + + For each file operand, or, if the -R option is used, + each file encountered while walking the directory trees + specified by the file operands, the chgrp utility shall + perform actions equivalent to the chown() function + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, called with the following argu- + ments: + + The file operand shall be used as the path argu- + ment. + + The user ID of the file shall be used as the + owner argument. + + The specified group ID shall be used as the group + argument. + + Unless chgrp is invoked by a process with appropriate + privileges, the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of a + regular file shall be cleared upon successful comple- + tion; the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of other + file types may be cleared. + +OPTIONS + The chgrp utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported by the imple- + mentation: + + -h If the system supports group IDs for symbolic + links, for each file operand that names a file of + type symbolic link, chgrp shall attempt to set + the group ID of the symbolic link instead of the + file referenced by the symbolic link. If the sys- + tem does not support group IDs for symbolic + links, for each file operand that names a file of + type symbolic link, chgrp shall do nothing more + with the current file and shall go on to any + remaining files. + + -H If the -R option is specified and a symbolic link + referencing a file of type directory is specified + on the command line, chgrp shall change the group + of the directory referenced by the symbolic link + and all files in the file hierarchy below it. + + -L If the -R option is specified and a symbolic link + referencing a file of type directory is specified + on the command line or encountered during the + traversal of a file hierarchy, chgrp shall change + the group of the directory referenced by the sym- + bolic link and all files in the file hierarchy + below it. + + -P If the -R option is specified and a symbolic link + is specified on the command line or encountered + during the traversal of a file hierarchy, chgrp + shall change the group ID of the symbolic link if + the system supports this operation. The chgrp + utility shall not follow the symbolic link to any + other part of the file hierarchy. + + -R Recursively change file group IDs. For each file + operand that names a directory, chgrp shall + change the group of the directory and all files + in the file hierarchy below it. Unless a -H, -L, + or -P option is specified, it is unspecified + which of these options will be used as the + default. + + + Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive + options -H, -L, and -P shall not be considered an error. + The last option specified shall determine the behavior + of the utility. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + group A group name from the group database or a numeric + group ID. Either specifies a group ID to be given + to each file named by one of the file operands. + If a numeric group operand exists in the group + database as a group name, the group ID number + associated with that group name is used as the + group ID. + + file A pathname of a file whose group ID is to be mod- + ified. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of chgrp: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The utility executed successfully and all + requested changes were made. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Only the owner of a file or the user with appropriate + privileges may change the owner or group of a file. + + Some implementations restrict the use of chgrp to a user + with appropriate privileges when the group specified is + not the effective group ID or one of the supplementary + group IDs of the calling process. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The System V and BSD versions use different exit status + codes. Some implementations used the exit status as a + count of the number of errors that occurred; this prac- + tice is unworkable since it can overflow the range of + valid exit status values. The standard developers chose + to mask these by specifying only 0 and >0 as exit val- + ues. + + The functionality of chgrp is described substantially + through references to chown(). In this way, there is no + duplication of effort required for describing the inter- + actions of permissions, multiple groups, and so on. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + chmod() , chown() , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, chown() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 chgrp(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chmod.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chmod.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fcc36ee --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chmod.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,462 @@ +chmod(P) chmod(P) + + + + + +NAME + chmod - change the file modes + +SYNOPSIS + chmod [-R] mode file ... + +DESCRIPTION + The chmod utility shall change any or all of the file + mode bits of the file named by each file operand in the + way specified by the mode operand. + + It is implementation-defined whether and how the chmod + utility affects any alternate or additional file access + control mechanism (see the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 4.4, File Access Permis- + sions) being used for the specified file. + + Only a process whose effective user ID matches the user + ID of the file, or a process with the appropriate privi- + leges, shall be permitted to change the file mode bits + of a file. + +OPTIONS + The chmod utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -R Recursively change file mode bits. For each file + operand that names a directory, chmod shall + change the file mode bits of the directory and + all files in the file hierarchy below it. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + mode Represents the change to be made to the file mode + bits of each file named by one of the file oper- + ands; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. + + file A pathname of a file whose file mode bits shall + be modified. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of chmod: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + The mode operand shall be either a symbolic_mode expres- + sion or a non-negative octal integer. The symbolic_mode + form is described by the grammar later in this section. + + Each clause shall specify an operation to be performed + on the current file mode bits of each file. The opera- + tions shall be performed on each file in the order in + which the clauses are specified. + + The who symbols u, g, and o shall specify the user, + group, and other parts of the file mode bits, respec- + tively. A who consisting of the symbol a shall be equiv- + alent to ugo. + + The perm symbols r, w, and x represent the read, write, + and execute/ search portions of file mode bits, respec- + tively. The perm symbol s shall represent the set-user- + ID-on-execution (when who contains or implies u) and + set-group-ID-on-execution (when who contains or implies + g) bits. + + The perm symbol X shall represent the execute/search + portion of the file mode bits if the file is a directory + or if the current (unmodified) file mode bits have at + least one of the execute bits (S_IXUSR, S_IXGRP, or + S_IXOTH) set. It shall be ignored if the file is not a + directory and none of the execute bits are set in the + current file mode bits. + + The permcopy symbols u, g, and o shall represent the + current permissions associated with the user, group, and + other parts of the file mode bits, respectively. For the + remainder of this section, perm refers to the non-termi- + nals perm and permcopy in the grammar. + + If multiple actionlists are grouped with a single + wholist in the grammar, each actionlist shall be applied + in the order specified with that wholist. The op symbols + shall represent the operation performed, as follows: + + + If perm is not specified, the '+' operation shall + not change the file mode bits. + + If who is not specified, the file mode bits represented + by perm for the owner, group, and other permissions, + except for those with corresponding bits in the file + mode creation mask of the invoking process, shall be + set. + + Otherwise, the file mode bits represented by the speci- + fied who and perm values shall be set. + + - If perm is not specified, the '-' operation shall + not change the file mode bits. + + If who is not specified, the file mode bits represented + by perm for the owner, group, and other permissions, + except for those with corresponding bits in the file + mode creation mask of the invoking process, shall be + cleared. + + Otherwise, the file mode bits represented by the speci- + fied who and perm values shall be cleared. + + = Clear the file mode bits specified by the who + value, or, if no who value is specified, all of + the file mode bits specified in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + If perm is not specified, the '=' operation shall make + no further modifications to the file mode bits. + + If who is not specified, the file mode bits represented + by perm for the owner, group, and other permissions, + except for those with corresponding bits in the file + mode creation mask of the invoking process, shall be + set. + + Otherwise, the file mode bits represented by the speci- + fied who and perm values shall be set. + + + When using the symbolic mode form on a regular file, it + is implementation-defined whether or not: + + Requests to set the set-user-ID-on-execution or + set-group-ID-on-execution bit when all execute + bits are currently clear and none are being set + are ignored. + + Requests to clear all execute bits also clear the + set-user-ID-on-execution and set-group-ID-on-exe- + cution bits. + + Requests to clear the set-user-ID-on-execution or + set-group-ID-on-execution bits when all execute + bits are currently clear are ignored. However, if + the command ls -l file writes an s in the posi- + tion indicating that the set-user-ID-on-execution + or set-group-ID-on-execution is set, the commands + chmod u-s file or chmod g-s file, respectively, + shall not be ignored. + + When using the symbolic mode form on other file types, + it is implementation-defined whether or not requests to + set or clear the set-user-ID-on-execution or set-group- + ID-on-execution bits are honored. + + If the who symbol o is used in conjunction with the perm + symbol s with no other who symbols being specified, the + set-user-ID-on-execution and set-group-ID-on-execution + bits shall not be modified. It shall not be an error to + specify the who symbol o in conjunction with the perm + symbol s. + + The perm symbol t shall specify the S_ISVTX bit. When + used with a file of type directory, it can be used with + the who symbol a, or with no who symbol. It shall not be + an error to specify a who symbol of u, g, or o in con- + junction with the perm symbol t, but the meaning of + these combinations is unspecified. The effect when + using the perm symbol t with any file type other than + directory is unspecified. + + For an octal integer mode operand, the file mode bits + shall be set absolutely. + + For each bit set in the octal number, the corresponding + file permission bit shown in the following table shall + be set; all other file permission bits shall be cleared. + For regular files, for each bit set in the octal number + corresponding to the set-user-ID-on-execution or the + set-group-ID-on-execution, bits shown in the following + table shall be set; if these bits are not set in the + octal number, they are cleared. For other file types, it + is implementation-defined whether or not requests to set + or clear the set-user-ID-on-execution or set-group-ID- + on-execution bits are honored. +Octal Mode Bit Octal Mode Bit Octal Mode Bit Octal Mode Bit +4000 S_ISUID 0400 S_IRUSR 0040 S_IRGRP 0004 S_IROTH +2000 S_ISGID 0200 S_IWUSR 0020 S_IWGRP 0002 S_IWOTH +1000 S_ISVTX 0100 S_IXUSR 0010 S_IXGRP 0001 S_IXOTH + + When bits are set in the octal number other than those + listed in the table above, the behavior is unspecified. + + Grammar for chmod + The grammar and lexical conventions in this section + describe the syntax for the symbolic_mode operand. The + general conventions for this style of grammar are + described in Grammar Conventions . A valid symbolic_mode + can be represented as the non-terminal symbol sym- + bolic_mode in the grammar. This formal syntax shall take + precedence over the preceding text syntax description. + + The lexical processing is based entirely on single char- + acters. Implementations need not allow <blank>s within + the single argument being processed. + + + %start symbolic_mode + %% + + + symbolic_mode : clause + | symbolic_mode ',' clause + ; + + + clause : actionlist + | wholist actionlist + ; + + + wholist : who + | wholist who + ; + + + who : 'u' | 'g' | 'o' | 'a' + ; + + + actionlist : action + | actionlist action + ; + + + action : op + | op permlist + | op permcopy + ; + + + permcopy : 'u' | 'g' | 'o' + ; + + + op : '+' | '-' | '=' + ; + + + permlist : perm + | perm permlist + ; + + + + perm : 'r' | 'w' | 'x' | 'X' | 's' | 't' + ; + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The utility executed successfully and all + requested changes were made. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Some implementations of the chmod utility change the + mode of a directory before the files in the directory + when performing a recursive ( -R option) change; others + change the directory mode after the files in the direc- + tory. If an application tries to remove read or search + permission for a file hierarchy, the removal attempt + fails if the directory is changed first; on the other + hand, trying to re-enable permissions to a restricted + hierarchy fails if directories are changed last. Users + should not try to make a hierarchy inaccessible to them- + selves. + + Some implementations of chmod never used the process' + umask when changing modes; systems conformant with this + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 do so when who is not + specified. Note the difference between: + + + chmod a-w file + + which removes all write permissions, and: + + + chmod -- -w file + + which removes write permissions that would be allowed if + file was created with the same umask. + + Conforming applications should never assume that they + know how the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits on direc- + tories are interpreted. + +EXAMPLES +Mode Results +a+= Equivalent to a+, a=; clears all file mode bits. +go+-w Equivalent to go+, go- w; clears group and other write bits. +g=o-w Equivalent to g= o, g- w; sets group bit to match other bits and then clears group write bit. +g-r+w Equivalent to g- r, g+ w; clears group read bit and sets group write bit. +uo=g Sets owner bits to match group bits and sets other bits to match group bits. + +RATIONALE + The functionality of chmod is described substantially + through references to concepts defined in the System + Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. In this way, + there is less duplication of effort required for + describing the interactions of permissions. However, the + behavior of this utility is not described in terms of + the chmod() function from the System Interfaces volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 because that specification + requires certain side effects upon alternate file access + control mechanisms that might not be appropriate, + depending on the implementation. + + Implementations that support mandatory file and record + locking as specified by the 1984 /usr/group standard + historically used the combination of set-group-ID bit + set and group execute bit clear to indicate mandatory + locking. This condition is usually set or cleared with + the symbolic mode perm symbol l instead of the perm sym- + bols s and x so that the mandatory locking mode is not + changed without explicit indication that that was what + the user intended. Therefore, the details on how the + implementation treats these conditions must be defined + in the documentation. This volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does not require mandatory locking + (nor does the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001), but does allow it as an exten- + sion. However, this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does + require that the ls and chmod utilities work consis- + tently in this area. If ls -l file indicates that the + set-group-ID bit is set, chmod g-s file must clear it + (assuming appropriate privileges exist to change modes). + + The System V and BSD versions use different exit status + codes. Some implementations used the exit status as a + count of the number of errors that occurred; this prac- + tice is unworkable since it can overflow the range of + valid exit status values. This problem is avoided here + by specifying only 0 and >0 as exit values. + + The System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + indicates that implementation-defined restrictions may + cause the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits to be ignored. This + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 allows the chmod utility + to choose to modify these bits before calling chmod() + (or some function providing equivalent capabilities) for + non-regular files. Among other things, this allows + implementations that use the set-user-ID and set-group- + ID bits on directories to enable extended features to + handle these extensions in an intelligent manner. + + The X perm symbol was adopted from BSD-based systems + because it provides commonly desired functionality when + doing recursive ( -R option) modifications. Similar + functionality is not provided by the find utility. His- + torical BSD versions of chmod, however, only supported X + with op+; it has been extended in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 because it is also useful with op=. + (It has also been added for op- even though it dupli- + cates x, in this case, because it is intuitive and eas- + ier to explain.) + + The grammar was extended with the permcopy non-terminal + to allow historical-practice forms of symbolic modes + like o= u -g (that is, set the "other" permissions to + the permissions of "owner" minus the permissions of + "group"). + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + ls , umask , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, chmod() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 chmod(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chown.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chown.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..53c377d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/chown.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +chown(P) chown(P) + + + + + +NAME + chown - change the file ownership + +SYNOPSIS + chown [-hR] owner[:group] file ... + + chown -R [-H | -L | -P ] owner[:group] file ... + + +DESCRIPTION + The chown utility shall set the user ID of the file + named by each file operand to the user ID specified by + the owner operand. + + For each file operand, or, if the -R option is used, + each file encountered while walking the directory trees + specified by the file operands, the chown utility shall + perform actions equivalent to the chown() function + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, called with the following argu- + ments: + + The file operand shall be used as the path argument. + + The user ID indicated by the owner portion of the first + operand shall be used as the owner argument. + + If the group portion of the first operand is given, the + group ID indicated by it shall be used as the group + argument; otherwise, the group ownership shall not be + changed. + + Unless chown is invoked by a process with appropriate + privileges, the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of a + regular file shall be cleared upon successful comple- + tion; the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of other + file types may be cleared. + +OPTIONS + The chown utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported by the imple- + mentation: + + -h If the system supports user IDs for symbolic + links, for each file operand that names a file of + type symbolic link, chown shall attempt to set + the user ID of the symbolic link. If the system + supports group IDs for symbolic links, and a + group ID was specified, for each file operand + that names a file of type symbolic link, chown + shall attempt to set the group ID of the symbolic + link. If the system does not support user or + group IDs for symbolic links, for each file oper- + and that names a file of type symbolic link, + chown shall do nothing more with the current file + and shall go on to any remaining files. + + -H If the -R option is specified and a symbolic link + referencing a file of type directory is specified + on the command line, chown shall change the user + ID (and group ID, if specified) of the directory + referenced by the symbolic link and all files in + the file hierarchy below it. + + -L If the -R option is specified and a symbolic link + referencing a file of type directory is specified + on the command line or encountered during the + traversal of a file hierarchy, chown shall change + the user ID (and group ID, if specified) of the + directory referenced by the symbolic link and all + files in the file hierarchy below it. + + -P If the -R option is specified and a symbolic link + is specified on the command line or encountered + during the traversal of a file hierarchy, chown + shall change the owner ID (and group ID, if spec- + ified) of the symbolic link if the system sup- + ports this operation. The chown utility shall not + follow the symbolic link to any other part of the + file hierarchy. + + -R Recursively change file user and group IDs. For + each file operand that names a directory, chown + shall change the user ID (and group ID, if speci- + fied) of the directory and all files in the file + hierarchy below it. Unless a -H, -L, or -P option + is specified, it is unspecified which of these + options will be used as the default. + + + Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive + options -H, -L, and -P shall not be considered an error. + The last option specified shall determine the behavior + of the utility. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + owner[:group] + A user ID and optional group ID to be assigned to + file. The owner portion of this operand shall be + a user name from the user database or a numeric + user ID. Either specifies a user ID which shall + be given to each file named by one of the file + operands. If a numeric owner operand exists in + the user database as a user name, the user ID + number associated with that user name shall be + used as the user ID. Similarly, if the group por- + tion of this operand is present, it shall be a + group name from the group database or a numeric + group ID. Either specifies a group ID which shall + be given to each file. If a numeric group operand + exists in the group database as a group name, the + group ID number associated with that group name + shall be used as the group ID. + + file A pathname of a file whose user ID is to be modi- + fied. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of chown: + + LANG Provide a default value for the + internationalization variables that are unset or + null. (See the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 8.2, International- + ization Variables for the precedence of interna- + tionalization variables used to determine the + values of locale categories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The utility executed successfully and all + requested changes were made. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Only the owner of a file or the user with appropriate + privileges may change the owner or group of a file. + + Some implementations restrict the use of chown to a user + with appropriate privileges. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The System V and BSD versions use different exit status + codes. Some implementations used the exit status as a + count of the number of errors that occurred; this prac- + tice is unworkable since it can overflow the range of + valid exit status values. These are masked by specifying + only 0 and >0 as exit values. + + The functionality of chown is described substantially + through references to functions in the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. In this way, there is no + duplication of effort required for describing the inter- + actions of permissions, multiple groups, and so on. + + The 4.3 BSD method of specifying both owner and group + was included in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + because: + + There are cases where the desired end condition + could not be achieved using the chgrp and chown + (that only changed the user ID) utilities. (If + the current owner is not a member of the desired + group and the desired owner is not a member of + the current group, the chown() function could + fail unless both owner and group are changed at + the same time.) + + Even if they could be changed independently, in + cases where both are being changed, there is a + 100% performance penalty caused by being forced + to invoke both utilities. + + The BSD syntax user[. group] was changed to user[: + group] in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 because + the period is a valid character in login names (as spec- + ified by the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, login names consist of characters + in the portable filename character set). The colon char- + acter was chosen as the replacement for the period char- + acter because it would never be allowed as a character + in a user name or group name on historical implementa- + tions. + + The -R option is considered by some observers as an + undesirable departure from the historical UNIX system + tools approach; since a tool, find, already exists to + recurse over directories, there seemed to be no good + reason to require other tools to have to duplicate that + functionality. However, the -R option was deemed an + important user convenience, is far more efficient than + forking a separate process for each element of the + directory hierarchy, and is in widespread historical + use. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + chmod , chgrp , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, chown() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at + http://www.opengroup.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 chown(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cksum.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cksum.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd4634d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cksum.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +cksum(P) cksum(P) + + + + + +NAME + cksum - write file checksums and sizes + +SYNOPSIS + cksum [file ...] + +DESCRIPTION + The cksum utility shall calculate and write to standard + output a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for each input + file, and also write to standard output the number of + octets in each file. The CRC used is based on the poly- + nomial used for CRC error checking in the + ISO/IEC 8802-3:1996 standard (Ethernet). + + The encoding for the CRC checksum is defined by the gen- + erating polynomial: + + + G(x)=x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+x+1 + + Mathematically, the CRC value corresponding to a given + file shall be defined by the following procedure: + + The n bits to be evaluated are considered to be the + coefficients of a mod 2 polynomial M( x) of degree n-1. + These n bits are the bits from the file, with the most + significant bit being the most significant bit of the + first octet of the file and the last bit being the least + significant bit of the last octet, padded with zero bits + (if necessary) to achieve an integral number of octets, + followed by one or more octets representing the length + of the file as a binary value, least significant octet + first. The smallest number of octets capable of repre- + senting this integer shall be used. + + M( x) is multiplied by x (that is, shifted left 32 bits) + and divided by G( x) using mod 2 division, producing a + remainder R( x) of degree <= 31. + + The coefficients of R( x) are considered to be a 32-bit + sequence. + + The bit sequence is complemented and the result is the + CRC. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file to be checked. If no file + operands are specified, the standard input shall + be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files can be any file type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of cksum: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + For each file processed successfully, the cksum utility + shall write in the following format: + + + "%u %d %s\n", <checksum>, <# of octets>, <pathname> + + If no file operand was specified, the pathname and its + leading <space> shall be omitted. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All files were processed successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The cksum utility is typically used to quickly compare a + suspect file against a trusted version of the same, such + as to ensure that files transmitted over noisy media + arrive intact. However, this comparison cannot be con- + sidered cryptographically secure. The chances of a dam- + aged file producing the same CRC as the original are + small; deliberate deception is difficult, but probably + not impossible. + + Although input files to cksum can be any type, the + results need not be what would be expected on character + special device files or on file types not described by + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + Since this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does not spec- + ify the block size used when doing input, checksums of + character special files need not process all of the data + in those files. + + The algorithm is expressed in terms of a bitstream + divided into octets. If a file is transmitted between + two systems and undergoes any data transformation (such + as changing little-endian byte ordering to big-endian), + identical CRC values cannot be expected. Implementations + performing such transformations may extend cksum to han- + dle such situations. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The following C-language program can be used as a model + to describe the algorithm. It assumes that a char is one + octet. It also assumes that the entire file is avail- + able for one pass through the function. This was done + for simplicity in demonstrating the algorithm, rather + than as an implementation model. + + + static unsigned long crctab[] = { + 0x00000000, + 0x04c11db7, 0x09823b6e, 0x0d4326d9, 0x130476dc, 0x17c56b6b, + 0x1a864db2, 0x1e475005, 0x2608edb8, 0x22c9f00f, 0x2f8ad6d6, + 0x2b4bcb61, 0x350c9b64, 0x31cd86d3, 0x3c8ea00a, 0x384fbdbd, + 0x4c11db70, 0x48d0c6c7, 0x4593e01e, 0x4152fda9, 0x5f15adac, + 0x5bd4b01b, 0x569796c2, 0x52568b75, 0x6a1936c8, 0x6ed82b7f, + 0x639b0da6, 0x675a1011, 0x791d4014, 0x7ddc5da3, 0x709f7b7a, + 0x745e66cd, 0x9823b6e0, 0x9ce2ab57, 0x91a18d8e, 0x95609039, + 0x8b27c03c, 0x8fe6dd8b, 0x82a5fb52, 0x8664e6e5, 0xbe2b5b58, + 0xbaea46ef, 0xb7a96036, 0xb3687d81, 0xad2f2d84, 0xa9ee3033, + 0xa4ad16ea, 0xa06c0b5d, 0xd4326d90, 0xd0f37027, 0xddb056fe, + 0xd9714b49, 0xc7361b4c, 0xc3f706fb, 0xceb42022, 0xca753d95, + 0xf23a8028, 0xf6fb9d9f, 0xfbb8bb46, 0xff79a6f1, 0xe13ef6f4, + 0xe5ffeb43, 0xe8bccd9a, 0xec7dd02d, 0x34867077, 0x30476dc0, + 0x3d044b19, 0x39c556ae, 0x278206ab, 0x23431b1c, 0x2e003dc5, + 0x2ac12072, 0x128e9dcf, 0x164f8078, 0x1b0ca6a1, 0x1fcdbb16, + 0x018aeb13, 0x054bf6a4, 0x0808d07d, 0x0cc9cdca, 0x7897ab07, + 0x7c56b6b0, 0x71159069, 0x75d48dde, 0x6b93dddb, 0x6f52c06c, + 0x6211e6b5, 0x66d0fb02, 0x5e9f46bf, 0x5a5e5b08, 0x571d7dd1, + 0x53dc6066, 0x4d9b3063, 0x495a2dd4, 0x44190b0d, 0x40d816ba, + 0xaca5c697, 0xa864db20, 0xa527fdf9, 0xa1e6e04e, 0xbfa1b04b, + 0xbb60adfc, 0xb6238b25, 0xb2e29692, 0x8aad2b2f, 0x8e6c3698, + 0x832f1041, 0x87ee0df6, 0x99a95df3, 0x9d684044, 0x902b669d, + 0x94ea7b2a, 0xe0b41de7, 0xe4750050, 0xe9362689, 0xedf73b3e, + 0xf3b06b3b, 0xf771768c, 0xfa325055, 0xfef34de2, 0xc6bcf05f, + 0xc27dede8, 0xcf3ecb31, 0xcbffd686, 0xd5b88683, 0xd1799b34, + 0xdc3abded, 0xd8fba05a, 0x690ce0ee, 0x6dcdfd59, 0x608edb80, + 0x644fc637, 0x7a089632, 0x7ec98b85, 0x738aad5c, 0x774bb0eb, + 0x4f040d56, 0x4bc510e1, 0x46863638, 0x42472b8f, 0x5c007b8a, + 0x58c1663d, 0x558240e4, 0x51435d53, 0x251d3b9e, 0x21dc2629, + 0x2c9f00f0, 0x285e1d47, 0x36194d42, 0x32d850f5, 0x3f9b762c, + 0x3b5a6b9b, 0x0315d626, 0x07d4cb91, 0x0a97ed48, 0x0e56f0ff, + 0x1011a0fa, 0x14d0bd4d, 0x19939b94, 0x1d528623, 0xf12f560e, + 0xf5ee4bb9, 0xf8ad6d60, 0xfc6c70d7, 0xe22b20d2, 0xe6ea3d65, + 0xeba91bbc, 0xef68060b, 0xd727bbb6, 0xd3e6a601, 0xdea580d8, + 0xda649d6f, 0xc423cd6a, 0xc0e2d0dd, 0xcda1f604, 0xc960ebb3, + 0xbd3e8d7e, 0xb9ff90c9, 0xb4bcb610, 0xb07daba7, 0xae3afba2, + 0xaafbe615, 0xa7b8c0cc, 0xa379dd7b, 0x9b3660c6, 0x9ff77d71, + 0x92b45ba8, 0x9675461f, 0x8832161a, 0x8cf30bad, 0x81b02d74, + 0x857130c3, 0x5d8a9099, 0x594b8d2e, 0x5408abf7, 0x50c9b640, + 0x4e8ee645, 0x4a4ffbf2, 0x470cdd2b, 0x43cdc09c, 0x7b827d21, + 0x7f436096, 0x7200464f, 0x76c15bf8, 0x68860bfd, 0x6c47164a, + 0x61043093, 0x65c52d24, 0x119b4be9, 0x155a565e, 0x18197087, + 0x1cd86d30, 0x029f3d35, 0x065e2082, 0x0b1d065b, 0x0fdc1bec, + 0x3793a651, 0x3352bbe6, 0x3e119d3f, 0x3ad08088, 0x2497d08d, + 0x2056cd3a, 0x2d15ebe3, 0x29d4f654, 0xc5a92679, 0xc1683bce, + 0xcc2b1d17, 0xc8ea00a0, 0xd6ad50a5, 0xd26c4d12, 0xdf2f6bcb, + 0xdbee767c, 0xe3a1cbc1, 0xe760d676, 0xea23f0af, 0xeee2ed18, + 0xf0a5bd1d, 0xf464a0aa, 0xf9278673, 0xfde69bc4, 0x89b8fd09, + 0x8d79e0be, 0x803ac667, 0x84fbdbd0, 0x9abc8bd5, 0x9e7d9662, + 0x933eb0bb, 0x97ffad0c, 0xafb010b1, 0xab710d06, 0xa6322bdf, + 0xa2f33668, 0xbcb4666d, 0xb8757bda, 0xb5365d03, 0xb1f740b4 + }; + + + unsigned long memcrc(const unsigned char *b, size_t n) + { + /* Input arguments: + * const char* b == byte sequence to checksum + * size_t n == length of sequence + */ + + + register unsigned i, c, s = 0; + + + for (i = n; i > 0; --i) { + c = (unsigned)(*b++); + s = (s << 8) ^ crctab[(s >> 24) ^ c]; + } + + + /* Extend with the length of the string. */ + while (n != 0) { + c = n & 0377; + n >>= 8; + s = (s << 8) ^ crctab[(s >> 24) ^ c]; + } + + + return ~s; + } + + The historical practice of writing the number of + "blocks" has been changed to writing the number of + octets, since the latter is not only more useful, but + also since historical implementations have not been con- + sistent in defining what a "block" meant. Octets are + used instead of bytes because bytes can differ in size + between systems. + + The algorithm used was selected to increase the opera- + tional robustness of cksum. Neither the System V nor BSD + sum algorithm was selected. Since each of these was dif- + ferent and each was the default behavior on those sys- + tems, no realistic compromise was available if either + were selected-some set of historical applications would + break. Therefore, the name was changed to cksum. + Although the historical sum commands will probably con- + tinue to be provided for many years, programs designed + for portability across systems should use the new name. + + The algorithm selected is based on that used by the + ISO/IEC 8802-3:1996 standard (Ethernet) for the frame + check sequence field. The algorithm used does not match + the technical definition of a checksum; the term is used + for historical reasons. The length of the file is + included in the CRC calculation because this parallels + inclusion of a length field by Ethernet in its CRC, but + also because it guards against inadvertent collisions + between files that begin with different series of zero + octets. The chance that two different files produce + identical CRCs is much greater when their lengths are + not considered. Keeping the length and the checksum of + the file itself separate would yield a slightly more + robust algorithm, but historical usage has always been + that a single number (the checksum as printed) repre- + sents the signature of the file. It was decided that + historical usage was the more important consideration. + + Early proposals contained modifications to the Ethernet + algorithm that involved extracting table values whenever + an intermediate result became zero. This was demon- + strated to be less robust than the current method and + mathematically difficult to describe or justify. + + The calculation used is identical to that given in + pseudo-code in the referenced Sarwate article. The + pseudo-code rendition is: + + + X <- 0; Y <- 0; + for i <- m -1 step -1 until 0 do + begin + T <- X(1) ^ A[i]; + X(1) <- X(0); X(0) <- Y(1); Y(1) <- Y(0); Y(0) <- 0; + comment: f[T] and f'[T] denote the T-th words in the + table f and f' ; + X <- X ^ f[T]; Y <- Y ^ f'[T]; + end + + The pseudo-code is reproduced exactly as given; however, + note that in the case of cksum, A[i] represents a byte + of the file, the words X and Y are treated as a single + 32-bit value, and the tables f and f' are a single table + containing 32-bit values. + + The referenced Sarwate article also discusses generating + the table. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + None. + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 cksum(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/comm.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/comm.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..816e0b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/comm.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +comm(P) comm(P) + + + + + +NAME + comm - select or reject lines common to two files + +SYNOPSIS + comm [-123] file1 file2 + +DESCRIPTION + The comm utility shall read file1 and file2, which + should be ordered in the current collating sequence, and + produce three text columns as output: lines only in + file1, lines only in file2, and lines in both files. + + If the lines in both files are not ordered according to + the collating sequence of the current locale, the + results are unspecified. + +OPTIONS + The comm utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -1 Suppress the output column of lines unique to + file1. + + -2 Suppress the output column of lines unique to + file2. + + -3 Suppress the output column of lines duplicated in + file1 and file2. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file1 A pathname of the first file to be compared. If + file1 is '-' , the standard input shall be used. + + file2 A pathname of the second file to be compared. If + file2 is '-' , the standard input shall be used. + + + If both file1 and file2 refer to standard input or to + the same FIFO special, block special, or character spe- + cial file, the results are undefined. + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if one of the + file1 or file2 operands refers to standard input. See + the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of comm: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the collating sequence + comm expects to have been used when the input + files were sorted. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The comm utility shall produce output depending on the + options selected. If the -1, -2, and -3 options are all + selected, comm shall write nothing to standard output. + + If the -1 option is not selected, lines contained only + in file1 shall be written using the format: + + + "%s\n", <line in file1> + + If the -2 option is not selected, lines contained only + in file2 are written using the format: + + + "%s%s\n", <lead>, <line in file2> + + where the string <lead> is as follows: + + <tab> The -1 option is not selected. + + null string + The -1 option is selected. + + + If the -3 option is not selected, lines contained in + both files shall be written using the format: + + + "%s%s\n", <lead>, <line in both> + + where the string <lead> is as follows: + + <tab><tab> + Neither the -1 nor the -2 option is selected. + + <tab> Exactly one of the -1 and -2 options is selected. + + null string + Both the -1 and -2 options are selected. + + + If the input files were ordered according to the collat- + ing sequence of the current locale, the lines written + shall be in the collating sequence of the original + lines. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were successfully output as spec- + ified. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + If the input files are not properly presorted, the out- + put of comm might not be useful. + +EXAMPLES + If a file named xcu contains a sorted list of the utili- + ties in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, a file + named xpg3 contains a sorted list of the utilities spec- + ified in the X/Open Portability Guide, Issue 3, and a + file named svid89 contains a sorted list of the utili- + ties in the System V Interface Definition Third Edition: + + + comm -23 xcu xpg3 | comm -23 - svid89 + + would print a list of utilities in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 not specified by either of the + other documents: + + + comm -12 xcu xpg3 | comm -12 - svid89 + + would print a list of utilities specified by all three + documents, and: + + + comm -12 xpg3 svid89 | comm -23 - xcu + + would print a list of utilities specified by both XPG3 + and the SVID, but not specified in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + cmp , diff , sort , uniq + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 comm(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cp.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cp.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0114b35 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cp.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,625 @@ +cp(P) cp(P) + + + + + +NAME + cp - copy files + +SYNOPSIS + cp [-fip] source_file target_file + + cp [-fip] source_file ... target + + cp -R [-H | -L | -P][-fip] source_file ... target + + cp -r [-H | -L | -P][-fip] source_file ... target + + +DESCRIPTION + The first synopsis form is denoted by two operands, nei- + ther of which are existing files of type directory. The + cp utility shall copy the contents of source_file (or, + if source_file is a file of type symbolic link, the con- + tents of the file referenced by source_file) to the des- + tination path named by target_file. + + The second synopsis form is denoted by two or more oper- + ands where the -R or -r options are not specified and + the first synopsis form is not applicable. It shall be + an error if any source_file is a file of type directory, + if target does not exist, or if target is a file of a + type defined by the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, but is not a file of type direc- + tory. The cp utility shall copy the contents of each + source_file (or, if source_file is a file of type sym- + bolic link, the contents of the file referenced by + source_file) to the destination path named by the con- + catenation of target, a slash character, and the last + component of source_file. + + The third and fourth synopsis forms are denoted by two + or more operands where the -R or -r options are speci- + fied. The cp utility shall copy each file in the file + hierarchy rooted in each source_file to a destination + path named as follows: + + If target exists and is a file of type directory, + the name of the corresponding destination path + for each file in the file hierarchy shall be the + concatenation of target, a slash character, and + the pathname of the file relative to the direc- + tory containing source_file. + + If target does not exist and two operands are + specified, the name of the corresponding destina- + tion path for source_file shall be target; the + name of the corresponding destination path for + all other files in the file hierarchy shall be + the concatenation of target, a slash character, + and the pathname of the file relative to + source_file. + + It shall be an error if target does not exist and more + than two operands are specified, or if target exists and + is a file of a type defined by the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, but is not a file of + type directory. + + In the following description, the term dest_file refers + to the file named by the destination path. The term + source_file refers to the file that is being copied, + whether specified as an operand or a file in a file + hierarchy rooted in a source_file operand. If + source_file is a file of type symbolic link: + + If neither the -R nor -r options were specified, + cp shall take actions based on the type and con- + tents of the file referenced by the symbolic + link, and not by the symbolic link itself. + + If the -R option was specified: + + If none of the options -H, -L, nor -P were + specified, it is unspecified which of -H, + -L, or -P will be used as a default. + + If the -H option was specified, cp shall + take actions based on the type and con- + tents of the file referenced by any sym- + bolic link specified as a source_file op- + erand. + + If the -L option was specified, cp shall + take actions based on the type and con- + tents of the file referenced by any sym- + bolic link specified as a source_file op- + erand or any symbolic links encountered + during traversal of a file hierarchy. + + If the -P option was specified, cp shall + copy any symbolic link specified as a + source_file operand and any symbolic links + encountered during traversal of a file + hierarchy, and shall not follow any sym- + bolic links. + + If the -r option was specified, the behavior is + implementation-defined. + + For each source_file, the following steps shall be + taken: + + If source_file references the same file as dest_file, cp + may write a diagnostic message to standard error; it + shall do nothing more with source_file and shall go on + to any remaining files. + + If source_file is of type directory, the following steps + shall be taken: <ol type="a"> + + If neither the -R or -r options were specified, cp shall + write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing + more with source_file, and go on to any remaining files. + + If source_file was not specified as an operand and + source_file is dot or dot-dot, cp shall do nothing more + with source_file and go on to any remaining files. + + If dest_file exists and it is a file type not specified + by the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + the behavior is implementation-defined. + + If dest_file exists and it is not of type directory, cp + shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do + nothing more with source_file or any files below + source_file in the file hierarchy, and go on to any + remaining files. + + If the directory dest_file does not exist, it shall be + created with file permission bits set to the same value + as those of source_file, modified by the file creation + mask of the user if the -p option was not specified, and + then bitwise-inclusively OR'ed with S_IRWXU. If + dest_file cannot be created, cp shall write a diagnostic + message to standard error, do nothing more with + source_file, and go on to any remaining files. It is + unspecified if cp attempts to copy files in the file + hierarchy rooted in source_file. + + The files in the directory source_file shall be copied + to the directory dest_file, taking the four steps (1 to + 4) listed here with the files as source_files. + + If dest_file was created, its file permission bits shall + be changed (if necessary) to be the same as those of + source_file, modified by the file creation mask of the + user if the -p option was not specified. + + The cp utility shall do nothing more with source_file + and go on to any remaining files. + + If source_file is of type regular file, the following + steps shall be taken: <ol type="a"> + + If dest_file exists, the following steps shall be taken: + <ol type="i"> + + If the -i option is in effect, the cp utility shall + write a prompt to the standard error and read a line + from the standard input. If the response is not affirma- + tive, cp shall do nothing more with source_file and go + on to any remaining files. + + A file descriptor for dest_file shall be obtained by + performing actions equivalent to the open() function + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 called using dest_file as the path + argument, and the bitwise-inclusive OR of O_WRONLY and + O_TRUNC as the oflag argument. + + If the attempt to obtain a file descriptor fails and the + -f option is in effect, cp shall attempt to remove the + file by performing actions equivalent to the unlink() + function defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 called using dest_file as the path + argument. If this attempt succeeds, cp shall continue + with step 3b. + + If dest_file does not exist, a file descriptor shall be + obtained by performing actions equivalent to the open() + function defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 called using dest_file as the path + argument, and the bitwise-inclusive OR of O_WRONLY and + O_CREAT as the oflag argument. The file permission bits + of source_file shall be the mode argument. + + If the attempt to obtain a file descriptor fails, cp + shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do + nothing more with source_file, and go on to any remain- + ing files. + + The contents of source_file shall be written to the file + descriptor. Any write errors shall cause cp to write a + diagnostic message to standard error and continue to + step 3e. + + The file descriptor shall be closed. + + The cp utility shall do nothing more with source_file. + If a write error occurred in step 3d, it is unspecified + if cp continues with any remaining files. If no write + error occurred in step 3d, cp shall go on to any remain- + ing files. + + Otherwise, the following steps shall be taken: <ol + type="a"> + + If the -r option was specified, the behavior is imple- + mentation-defined. + + If the -R option was specified, the following steps + shall be taken: <ol type="i"> + + The dest_file shall be created with the same file type + as source_file. + + If source_file is a file of type FIFO, the file permis- + sion bits shall be the same as those of source_file, + modified by the file creation mask of the user if the -p + option was not specified. Otherwise, the permissions, + owner ID, and group ID of dest_file are implementation- + defined. + + If this creation fails for any reason, cp shall write a + diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more + with source_file, and go on to any remaining files. + + If source_file is a file of type symbolic link, the + pathname contained in dest_file shall be the same as the + pathname contained in source_file. + + If this fails for any reason, cp shall write a diagnos- + tic message to standard error, do nothing more with + source_file, and go on to any remaining files. + + If the implementation provides additional or alternate + access control mechanisms (see the Base Definitions vol- + ume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 4.4, File Access + Permissions), their effect on copies of files is imple- + mentation-defined. + +OPTIONS + The cp utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -f If a file descriptor for a destination file can- + not be obtained, as described in step 3.a.ii., + attempt to unlink the destination file and pro- + ceed. + + -H Take actions based on the type and contents of + the file referenced by any symbolic link speci- + fied as a source_file operand. + + -i Write a prompt to standard error before copying + to any existing destination file. If the response + from the standard input is affirmative, the copy + shall be attempted; otherwise, it shall not. + + -L Take actions based on the type and contents of + the file referenced by any symbolic link speci- + fied as a source_file operand or any symbolic + links encountered during traversal of a file + hierarchy. + + -P Take actions on any symbolic link specified as a + source_file operand or any symbolic link encoun- + tered during traversal of a file hierarchy. + + -p Duplicate the following characteristics of each + source file in the corresponding destination + file: + + The time of last data modification and time of last + access. If this duplication fails for any reason, cp + shall write a diagnostic message to standard error. + + The user ID and group ID. If this duplication fails for + any reason, it is unspecified whether cp writes a diag- + nostic message to standard error. + + The file permission bits and the S_ISUID and S_ISGID + bits. Other, implementation-defined, bits may be dupli- + cated as well. If this duplication fails for any reason, + cp shall write a diagnostic message to standard error. + + If the user ID or the group ID cannot be duplicated, the + file permission bits S_ISUID and S_ISGID shall be + cleared. If these bits are present in the source file + but are not duplicated in the destination file, it is + unspecified whether cp writes a diagnostic message to + standard error. + + The order in which the preceding characteristics are + duplicated is unspecified. The dest_file shall not be + deleted if these characteristics cannot be preserved. + + -R Copy file hierarchies. + + -r Copy file hierarchies. The treatment of special + files is implementation-defined. + + + Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive + options -H, -L, and -P shall not be considered an error. + The last option specified shall determine the behavior + of the utility. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + source_file + A pathname of a file to be copied. + + target_file + A pathname of an existing or nonexistent file, + used for the output when a single file is copied. + + target A pathname of a directory to contain the copied + files. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used to read an input line + in response to each prompt specified in the STDERR sec- + tion. Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used. + +INPUT FILES + The input files specified as operands may be of any file + type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of cp: + + LANG Provide a default value for the + internationalization variables that are unset or + null. (See the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 8.2, International- + ization Variables for the precedence of interna- + tionalization variables used to determine the + values of locale categories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements used in the extended regular expres- + sion defined for the yesexpr locale keyword in + the LC_MESSAGES category. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files) and + the behavior of character classes used in the + extended regular expression defined for the + yesexpr locale keyword in the LC_MESSAGES cate- + gory. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale for the processing of affir- + mative responses that should be used to affect + the format and contents of diagnostic messages + written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + A prompt shall be written to standard error under the + conditions specified in the DESCRIPTION section. The + prompt shall contain the destination pathname, but its + format is otherwise unspecified. Otherwise, the stan- + dard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + The output files may be of any type. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All files were copied successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + If cp is prematurely terminated by a signal or error, + files or file hierarchies may be only partially copied + and files and directories may have incorrect permissions + or access and modification times. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The difference between -R and -r is in the treatment by + cp of file types other than regular and directory. The + original -r flag, for historic reasons, does not handle + special files any differently from regular files, but + always reads the file and copies its contents. This has + obvious problems in the presence of special file types; + for example, character devices, FIFOs, and sockets. The + -R option is intended to recreate the file hierarchy and + the -r option supports historical practice. It was + anticipated that a future version of this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 would deprecate the -r option, and + for that reason, there has been no attempt to fix its + behavior with respect to FIFOs or other file types where + copying the file is clearly wrong. However, some imple- + mentations support -r with the same abilities as the -R + defined in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. To + accommodate them as well as systems that do not, the + differences between -r and -R are implementation- + defined. Implementations may make them identical. The -r + option is marked obsolescent. + + The set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits are explicitly + cleared when files are created. This is to prevent users + from creating programs that are set-user-ID or set- + group-ID to them when copying files or to make set-user- + ID or set-group-ID files accessible to new groups of + users. For example, if a file is set-user-ID and the + copy has a different group ID than the source, a new + group of users has execute permission to a set-user-ID + program than did previously. In particular, this is a + problem for superusers copying users' trees. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The -i option exists on BSD systems, giving applications + and users a way to avoid accidentally removing files + when copying. Although the 4.3 BSD version does not + prompt if the standard input is not a terminal, the + standard developers decided that use of -i is a request + for interaction, so when the destination path exists, + the utility takes instructions from whatever responds on + standard input. + + The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspeci- + fied. Only the general nature of the contents of prompts + are specified because implementations may desire more + descriptive prompts than those used on historical imple- + mentations. Therefore, an application using the -i + option relies on the system to provide the most suitable + dialog directly with the user, based on the behavior + specified. + + The -p option is historical practice on BSD systems, + duplicating the time of last data modification and time + of last access. This volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + extends it to preserve the user and group IDs, as well + as the file permissions. This requirement has obvious + problems in that the directories are almost certainly + modified after being copied. This volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 requires that the modification + times be preserved. The statement that the order in + which the characteristics are duplicated is unspecified + is to permit implementations to provide the maximum + amount of security for the user. Implementations should + take into account the obvious security issues involved + in setting the owner, group, and mode in the wrong order + or creating files with an owner, group, or mode differ- + ent from the final value. + + It is unspecified whether cp writes diagnostic messages + when the user and group IDs cannot be set due to the + widespread practice of users using -p to duplicate some + portion of the file characteristics, indifferent to the + duplication of others. Historic implementations only + write diagnostic messages on errors other than [EPERM]. + + The -r option is historical practice on BSD and BSD- + derived systems, copying file hierarchies as opposed to + single files. This functionality is used heavily in + historical applications, and its loss would signifi- + cantly decrease consensus. The -R option was added as a + close synonym to the -r option, selected for consistency + with all other options in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 that do recursive directory + descent. + + When a failure occurs during the copying of a file hier- + archy, cp is required to attempt to copy files that are + on the same level in the hierarchy or above the file + where the failure occurred. It is unspecified if cp + shall attempt to copy files below the file where the + failure occurred (which cannot succeed in any case). + + Permissions, owners, and groups of created special file + types have been deliberately left as implementation- + defined. This is to allow systems to satisfy special + requirements (for example, allowing users to create + character special devices, but requiring them to be + owned by a certain group). In general, it is strongly + suggested that the permissions, owner, and group be the + same as if the user had run the historical mknod, ln, or + other utility to create the file. It is also probable + that additional privileges are required to create block, + character, or other implementation-defined special file + types. + + Additionally, the -p option explicitly requires that all + set-user-ID and set-group-ID permissions be discarded if + any of the owner or group IDs cannot be set. This is to + keep users from unintentionally giving away special + privilege when copying programs. + + When creating regular files, historical versions of cp + use the mode of the source file as modified by the file + mode creation mask. Other choices would have been to use + the mode of the source file unmodified by the creation + mask or to use the same mode as would be given to a new + file created by the user (plus the execution bits of the + source file) and then modify it by the file mode cre- + ation mask. In the absence of any strong reason to + change historic practice, it was in large part retained. + + When creating directories, historical versions of cp use + the mode of the source directory, plus read, write, and + search bits for the owner, as modified by the file mode + creation mask. This is done so that cp can copy trees + where the user has read permission, but the owner does + not. A side effect is that if the file creation mask + denies the owner permissions, cp fails. Also, once the + copy is done, historical versions of cp set the permis- + sions on the created directory to be the same as the + source directory, unmodified by the file creation mask. + + This behavior has been modified so that cp is always + able to create the contents of the directory, regardless + of the file creation mask. After the copy is done, the + permissions are set to be the same as the source direc- + tory, as modified by the file creation mask. This latter + change from historical behavior is to prevent users from + accidentally creating directories with permissions + beyond those they would normally set and for consistency + with the behavior of cp in creating files. + + It is not a requirement that cp detect attempts to copy + a file to itself; however, implementations are strongly + encouraged to do so. Historical implementations have + detected the attempt in most cases. + + There are two methods of copying subtrees in this volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. The other method is described + as part of the pax utility (see pax ). Both methods are + historical practice. The cp utility provides a simpler, + more intuitive interface, while pax offers a finer gran- + ularity of control. Each provides additional functional- + ity to the other; in particular, pax maintains the hard- + link structure of the hierarchy, while cp does not. It + is the intention of the standard developers that the + results be similar (using appropriate option combina- + tions in both utilities). The results are not required + to be identical; there seemed insufficient gain to + applications to balance the difficulty of implementa- + tions having to guarantee that the results would be + exactly identical. + + The wording allowing cp to copy a directory to implemen- + tation-defined file types not specified by the System + Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 is provided so + that implementations supporting symbolic links are not + required to prohibit copying directories to symbolic + links. Other extensions to the System Interfaces volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 file types may need to use this + loophole as well. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + The -r option may be removed; use -R instead. + +SEE ALSO + mv , find , ln , pax , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, open(), unlink() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 cp(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/csplit.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/csplit.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2381d29 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/csplit.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ +csplit(P) csplit(P) + + + + + +NAME + csplit - split files based on context + +SYNOPSIS + csplit [-ks][-f prefix][-n number] file arg1 ...argn + +DESCRIPTION + The csplit utility shall read the file named by the file + operand, write all or part of that file into other files + as directed by the arg operands, and write the sizes of + the files. + +OPTIONS + The csplit utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -f prefix + Name the created files prefix 00, prefix 01, ..., + prefixn. The default is xx00 ... xx n. If the + prefix argument would create a filename exceeding + {NAME_MAX} bytes, an error shall result, csplit + shall exit with a diagnostic message, and no + files shall be created. + + -k Leave previously created files intact. By + default, csplit shall remove created files if an + error occurs. + + -n number + Use number decimal digits to form filenames for + the file pieces. The default shall be 2. + + -s Suppress the output of file size messages. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file The pathname of a text file to be split. If file + is '-' , the standard input shall be used. + + + The operands arg1 ... argn can be a combination of the + following: + + /rexp/[offset] + + A file shall be created using the content of the + lines from the current line up to, but not + including, the line that results from the evalua- + tion of the regular expression with offset, if + any, applied. The regular expression rexp shall + follow the rules for basic regular expressions + described in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 9.3, Basic Regular + Expressions. The application shall use the + sequence "\/" to specify a slash character within + the rexp. The optional offset shall be a positive + or negative integer value representing a number + of lines. A positive integer value can be pre- + ceded by '+' . If the selection of lines from an + offset expression of this type would create a + file with zero lines, or one with greater than + the number of lines left in the input file, the + results are unspecified. After the section is + created, the current line shall be set to the + line that results from the evaluation of the reg- + ular expression with any offset applied. If the + current line is the first line in the file and a + regular expression operation has not yet been + performed, the pattern match of rexp shall be + applied from the current line to the end of the + file. Otherwise, the pattern match of rexp shall + be applied from the line following the current + line to the end of the file. + + %rexp%[offset] + + Equivalent to /rexp/[offset], except that no file + shall be created for the selected section of the + input file. The application shall use the + sequence "\%" to specify a percent-sign character + within the rexp. + + line_no + Create a file from the current line up to (but + not including) the line number line_no. Lines in + the file shall be numbered starting at one. The + current line becomes line_no. + + {num} Repeat operand. This operand can follow any of + the operands described previously. If it follows + a rexp type operand, that operand shall be + applied num more times. If it follows a line_no + operand, the file shall be split every line_no + lines, num times, from that point. + + + An error shall be reported if an operand does not refer- + ence a line between the current position and the end of + the file. + +STDIN + See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input file shall be a text file. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of csplit: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements within regular expressions. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files) and + the behavior of character classes within regular + expressions. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + If the -k option is specified, created files shall be + retained. Otherwise, the default action occurs. + +STDOUT + Unless the -s option is used, the standard output shall + consist of one line per file created, with a format as + follows: + + + "%d\n", <file size in bytes> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + The output files shall contain portions of the original + input file; otherwise, unchanged. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + By default, created files shall be removed if an error + occurs. When the -k option is specified, created files + shall not be removed if an error occurs. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + This example creates four files, cobol00 ... cobol03: + + + csplit -f cobol file '/procedure division/' /par5./ /par16./ + + After editing the split files, they can be recombined as + follows: + + + cat cobol0[0-3] > file + + Note that this example overwrites the original file. + + This example would split the file after the first 99 + lines, and every 100 lines thereafter, up to 9999 lines; + this is because lines in the file are numbered from 1 + rather than zero, for historical reasons: + + + csplit -k file 100 {99} + + Assuming that prog.c follows the C-language coding con- + vention of ending routines with a '}' at the beginning + of the line, this example creates a file containing each + separate C routine (up to 21) in prog.c: + + + csplit -k prog.c '%main(%' '/^}/+1' {20} + +RATIONALE + The -n option was added to extend the range of filenames + that could be handled. + + Consideration was given to adding a -a flag to use the + alphabetic filename generation used by the historical + split utility, but the functionality added by the -n + option was deemed to make alphabetic naming unnecessary. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + sed , split + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 csplit(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cut.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cut.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64525bc --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/cut.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,333 @@ +cut(P) cut(P) + + + + + +NAME + cut - cut out selected fields of each line of a file + +SYNOPSIS + cut -b list [-n] [file ...] + + cut -c list [file ...] + + cut -f list [-d delim][-s][file ...] + + +DESCRIPTION + The cut utility shall cut out bytes ( -b option), char- + acters ( -c option), or character-delimited fields ( -f + option) from each line in one or more files, concatenate + them, and write them to standard output. + +OPTIONS + The cut utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The application shall ensure that the option-argument + list (see options -b, -c, and -f below) is a comma-sepa- + rated list or <blank>-separated list of positive numbers + and ranges. Ranges can be in three forms. The first is + two positive numbers separated by a hyphen ( low- high), + which represents all fields from the first number to the + second number. The second is a positive number preceded + by a hyphen (- high), which represents all fields from + field number 1 to that number. The third is a positive + number followed by a hyphen ( low-), which represents + that number to the last field, inclusive. The elements + in list can be repeated, can overlap, and can be speci- + fied in any order, but the bytes, characters, or fields + selected shall be written in the order of the input + data. If an element appears in the selection list more + than once, it shall be written exactly once. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -b list + Cut based on a list of bytes. Each selected byte + shall be output unless the -n option is also + specified. It shall not be an error to select + bytes not present in the input line. + + -c list + Cut based on a list of characters. Each selected + character shall be output. It shall not be an + error to select characters not present in the + input line. + + -d delim + Set the field delimiter to the character delim. + The default is the <tab>. + + -f list + Cut based on a list of fields, assumed to be sep- + arated in the file by a delimiter character (see + -d). Each selected field shall be output. Output + fields shall be separated by a single occurrence + of the field delimiter character. Lines with no + field delimiters shall be passed through intact, + unless -s is specified. It shall not be an error + to select fields not present in the input line. + + -n Do not split characters. When specified with the + -b option, each element in list of the form low- + high (hyphen-separated numbers) shall be modified + as follows: + + If the byte selected by low is not the first byte + of a character, low shall be decremented to + select the first byte of the character originally + selected by low. If the byte selected by high is + not the last byte of a character, high shall be + decremented to select the last byte of the char- + acter prior to the character originally selected + by high, or zero if there is no prior character. + If the resulting range element has high equal to + zero or low greater than high, the list element + shall be dropped from list for that input line + without causing an error. + + Each element in list of the form low- shall be treated + as above with high set to the number of bytes in the + current line, not including the terminating <newline>. + Each element in list of the form - high shall be treated + as above with low set to 1. Each element in list of the + form num (a single number) shall be treated as above + with low set to num and high set to num. + + -s Suppress lines with no delimiter characters, when + used with the -f option. Unless specified, lines + with no delimiters shall be passed through + untouched. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an input file. If no file operands + are specified, or if a file operand is '-' , the + standard input shall be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified, or if a file operand is '-' . See + the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files, except that line + lengths shall be unlimited. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of cut: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The cut utility output shall be a concatenation of the + selected bytes, characters, or fields (one of the fol- + lowing): + + + "%s\n", <concatenation of bytes> + + + "%s\n", <concatenation of characters> + + + "%s\n", <concatenation of fields and field delimiters> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were output successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Earlier versions of the cut utility worked in an envi- + ronment where bytes and characters were considered + equivalent (modulo <backspace> and <tab> processing in + some implementations). In the extended world of multi- + byte characters, the new -b option has been added. The + -n option (used with -b) allows it to be used to act on + bytes rounded to character boundaries. The algorithm + specified for -n guarantees that: + + + cut -b 1-500 -n file > file1 + cut -b 501- -n file > file2 + + ends up with all the characters in file appearing + exactly once in file1 or file2. (There is, however, a + <newline> in both file1 and file2 for each <newline> in + file.) + +EXAMPLES + Examples of the option qualifier list: + + 1,4,7 Select the first, fourth, and seventh bytes, + characters, or fields and field delimiters. + + 1-3,8 Equivalent to 1,2,3,8. + + -5,10 Equivalent to 1,2,3,4,5,10. + + 3- Equivalent to third to last, inclusive. + + + The low- high forms are not always equivalent when used + with -b and -n and multi-byte characters; see the + description of -n. + + The following command: + + + cut -d : -f 1,6 /etc/passwd + + reads the System V password file (user database) and + produces lines of the form: + + + <user ID>:<home directory> + + Most utilities in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + work on text files. The cut utility can be used to turn + files with arbitrary line lengths into a set of text + files containing the same data. The paste utility can be + used to create (or recreate) files with arbitrary line + lengths. For example, if file contains long lines: + + + cut -b 1-500 -n file > file1 + cut -b 501- -n file > file2 + + creates file1 (a text file) with lines no longer than + 500 bytes (plus the <newline>) and file2 that contains + the remainder of the data from file. (Note that file2 is + not a text file if there are lines in file that are + longer than 500 + {LINE_MAX} bytes.) The original file + can be recreated from file1 and file2 using the command: + + + paste -d "\0" file1 file2 > file + +RATIONALE + Some historical implementations do not count + <backspace>s in determining character counts with the -c + option. This may be useful for using cut for processing + nroff output. It was deliberately decided not to have + the -c option treat either <backspace>s or <tab>s in any + special fashion. The fold utility does treat these char- + acters specially. + + Unlike other utilities, some historical implementations + of cut exit after not finding an input file, rather than + continuing to process the remaining file operands. This + behavior is prohibited by this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, where only the exit status is + affected by this problem. + + The behavior of cut when provided with either mutually- + exclusive options or options that do not work logically + together has been deliberately left unspecified in favor + of global wording in Utility Description Defaults . + + The OPTIONS section was changed in response to IEEE PASC + Interpretation 1003.2 #149. The change represents his- + torical practice on all known systems. The original + standard was ambiguous on the nature of the output. + + The list option-arguments are historically used to + select the portions of the line to be written, but do + not affect the order of the data. For example: + + + echo abcdefghi | cut -c6,2,4-7,1 + + yields "abdefg" . + + A proposal to enhance cut with the following option: + + -o Preserve the selected field order. When this + option is specified, each byte, character, or + field (or ranges of such) shall be written in the + order specified by the list option-argument, even + if this requires multiple outputs of the same + bytes, characters, or fields. + + + was rejected because this type of enhancement is outside + the scope of the IEEE P1003.2b draft standard. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + grep , paste , Parameters and Variables + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 cut(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/date.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/date.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3937154 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/date.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,519 @@ +date(P) date(P) + + + + + +NAME + date - write the date and time + +SYNOPSIS + date [-u] [+format] + + + + date [-u] mmddhhmm[[cc]yy] + + +DESCRIPTION + The date utility shall write the date and time to stan- + dard output or attempt to set the system date and time. + By default, the current date and time shall be written. + If an operand beginning with '+' is specified, the out- + put format of date shall be controlled by the conversion + specifications and other text in the operand. + +OPTIONS + The date utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -u Perform operations as if the TZ environment vari- + able was set to the string "UTC0" , or its equiv- + alent historical value of "GMT0" . Otherwise, + date shall use the timezone indicated by the TZ + environment variable or the system default if + that variable is unset or null. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + +format + When the format is specified, each conversion + specifier shall be replaced in the standard out- + put by its corresponding value. All other char- + acters shall be copied to the output without + change. The output shall always be terminated + with a <newline>. + + + Conversion Specifications + %a Locale's abbreviated weekday name. + + %A Locale's full weekday name. + + %b Locale's abbreviated month name. + + %B Locale's full month name. + + %c Locale's appropriate date and time representa- + tion. + + %C Century (a year divided by 100 and truncated to + an integer) as a decimal number [00,99]. + + %d Day of the month as a decimal number [01,31]. + + %D Date in the format mm/dd/yy. + + %e Day of the month as a decimal number [1,31] in a + two-digit field with leading space character + fill. + + %h A synonym for %b . + + %H Hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number [00,23]. + + %I Hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number [01,12]. + + %j Day of the year as a decimal number [001,366]. + + %m Month as a decimal number [01,12]. + + %M Minute as a decimal number [00,59]. + + %n A <newline>. + + %p Locale's equivalent of either AM or PM. + + %r 12-hour clock time [01,12] using the AM/PM nota- + tion; in the POSIX locale, this shall be equiva- + lent to %I : %M : %S %p . + + %S Seconds as a decimal number [00,60]. + + %t A <tab>. + + %T 24-hour clock time [00,23] in the format + HH:MM:SS. + + %u Weekday as a decimal number [1,7] (1=Monday). + + %U Week of the year (Sunday as the first day of the + week) as a decimal number [00,53]. All days in a + new year preceding the first Sunday shall be con- + sidered to be in week 0. + + %V Week of the year (Monday as the first day of the + week) as a decimal number [01,53]. If the week + containing January 1 has four or more days in the + new year, then it shall be considered week 1; + otherwise, it shall be the last week of the pre- + vious year, and the next week shall be week 1. + + %w Weekday as a decimal number [0,6] (0=Sunday). + + %W Week of the year (Monday as the first day of the + week) as a decimal number [00,53]. All days in a + new year preceding the first Monday shall be con- + sidered to be in week 0. + + %x Locale's appropriate date representation. + + %X Locale's appropriate time representation. + + %y Year within century [00,99]. + + %Y Year with century as a decimal number. + + %Z Timezone name, or no characters if no timezone is + determinable. + + %% A percent sign character. + + + See the Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 7.3.5, LC_TIME for the conversion specifier val- + ues in the POSIX locale. + + Modified Conversion Specifications + Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the E and + O modifier characters to indicate a different format or + specification as specified in the LC_TIME locale + description (see the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 7.3.5, LC_TIME). If the + corresponding keyword (see era, era_year, era_d_fmt, and + alt_digits in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 7.3.5, LC_TIME) is not + specified or not supported for the current locale, the + unmodified conversion specifier value shall be used. + + %Ec Locale's alternative appropriate date and time + representation. + + %EC The name of the base year (period) in the + locale's alternative representation. + + %Ex Locale's alternative date representation. + + %EX Locale's alternative time representation. + + %Ey Offset from %EC (year only) in the locale's + alternative representation. + + %EY Full alternative year representation. + + %Od Day of month using the locale's alternative + numeric symbols. + + %Oe Day of month using the locale's alternative + numeric symbols. + + %OH Hour (24-hour clock) using the locale's alterna- + tive numeric symbols. + + %OI Hour (12-hour clock) using the locale's alterna- + tive numeric symbols. + + %Om Month using the locale's alternative numeric sym- + bols. + + %OM Minutes using the locale's alternative numeric + symbols. + + %OS Seconds using the locale's alternative numeric + symbols. + + %Ou Weekday as a number in the locale's alternative + representation (Monday = 1). + + %OU Week number of the year (Sunday as the first day + of the week) using the locale's alternative + numeric symbols. + + %OV Week number of the year (Monday as the first day + of the week, rules corresponding to %V ), using + the locale's alternative numeric symbols. + + %Ow Weekday as a number in the locale's alternative + representation (Sunday = 0). + + %OW Week number of the year (Monday as the first day + of the week) using the locale's alternative + numeric symbols. + + %Oy Year (offset from %C ) in alternative representa- + tion. + + + + mmddhhmm[[cc]yy] + + Attempt to set the system date and time from the + value given in the operand. This is only possible + if the user has appropriate privileges and the + system permits the setting of the system date and + time. The first mm is the month (number); dd is + the day (number); hh is the hour (number, 24-hour + system); the second mm is the minute (number); cc + is the century and is the first two digits of the + year (this is optional); yy is the last two dig- + its of the year and is optional. If century is + not specified, then values in the range [69,99] + shall refer to years 1969 to 1999 inclusive, and + values in the range [00,68] shall refer to years + 2000 to 2068 inclusive. The current year is the + default if yy is omitted. + + Note: It is expected that in a future version of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 the default century inferred + from a 2-digit year will change. (This would + apply to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as + input.) + + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of date: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_TIME + Determine the format and contents of date and + time strings written by date. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + TZ Determine the timezone in which the time and date + are written, unless the -u option is specified. + If the TZ variable is unset or null and -u is not + specified, an unspecified system default timezone + is used. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + When no formatting operand is specified, the output in + the POSIX locale shall be equivalent to specifying: + + + date "+%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Z %Y" + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The date was written successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Conversion specifiers are of unspecified format when not + in the POSIX locale. Some of them can contain <newline>s + in some locales, so it may be difficult to use the for- + mat shown in standard output for parsing the output of + date in those locales. + + The range of values for %S extends from 0 to 60 seconds + to accommodate the occasional leap second. + + Although certain of the conversion specifiers in the + POSIX locale (such as the name of the month) are shown + with initial capital letters, this need not be the case + in other locales. Programs using these fields may need + to adjust the capitalization if the output is going to + be used at the beginning of a sentence. + + The date string formatting capabilities are intended for + use in Gregorian-style calendars, possibly with a dif- + ferent starting year (or years). The %x and %c conver- + sion specifications, however, are intended for local + representation; these may be based on a different, non- + Gregorian calendar. + + The %C conversion specification was introduced to allow + a fallback for the %EC (alternative year format base + year); it can be viewed as the base of the current sub- + division in the Gregorian calendar. The century number + is calculated as the year divided by 100 and truncated + to an integer; it should not be confused with the use of + ordinal numbers for centuries (for example, "twenty- + first century".) Both the %Ey and %y can then be viewed + as the offset from %EC and %C , respectively. + + The E and O modifiers modify the traditional conversion + specifiers, so that they can always be used, even if the + implementation (or the current locale) does not support + the modifier. + + The E modifier supports alternative date formats, such + as the Japanese Emperor's Era, as long as these are + based on the Gregorian calendar system. Extending the E + modifiers to other date elements may provide an imple- + mentation-defined extension capable of supporting other + calendar systems, especially in combination with the O + modifier. + + The O modifier supports time and date formats using the + locale's alternative numerical symbols, such as Kanji or + Hindi digits or ordinal number representation. + + Non-European locales, whether they use Latin digits in + computational items or not, often have local forms of + the digits for use in date formats. This is not totally + unknown even in Europe; a variant of dates uses Roman + numerals for the months: the third day of September 1991 + would be written as 3.IX.1991. In Japan, Kanji digits + are regularly used for dates; in Arabic-speaking coun- + tries, Hindi digits are used. The %d , %e , %H , %I , %m + , %S , %U , %w , %W , and %y conversion specifications + always return the date and time field in Latin digits + (that is, 0 to 9). The %O modifier was introduced to + support the use for display purposes of non-Latin dig- + its. In the LC_TIME category in localedef, the optional + alt_digits keyword is intended for this purpose. As an + example, assume the following (partial) localedef + source: + + + alt_digits "";"I";"II";"III";"IV";"V";"VI";"VII";"VIII" \ + "IX";"X";"XI";"XII" + d_fmt "%e.%Om.%Y" + + With the above date, the command: + + + date "+%x" + + would yield 3.IX.1991. With the same d_fmt, but without + the alt_digits, the command would yield 3.9.1991. + +EXAMPLES + The following are input/output examples of date used at + arbitrary times in the POSIX locale: + + + $ date + Tue Jun 26 09:58:10 PDT 1990 + + + $ date "+DATE: %m/%d/%y%nTIME: %H:%M:%S" + DATE: 11/02/91 + TIME: 13:36:16 + + + $ date "+TIME: %r" + TIME: 01:36:32 PM + + Examples for Denmark, where the default date and time + format is %a %d %b %Y %T %Z : + + + $ LANG=da_DK.iso_8859-1 date + ons 02 okt 1991 15:03:32 CET + + + $ LANG=da_DK.iso_8859-1 \ + date "+DATO: %A den %e. %B %Y%nKLOKKEN: %H:%M:%S" + DATO: onsdag den 2. oktober 1991 + KLOKKEN: 15:03:56 + + Examples for Germany, where the default date and time + format is %a %d . %h . %Y , %T %Z : + + + $ LANG=De_DE.88591 date + Mi 02.Okt.1991, 15:01:21 MEZ + + + $ LANG=De_DE.88591 date "+DATUM: %A, %d. %B %Y%nZEIT: %H:%M:%S" + DATUM: Mittwoch, 02. Oktober 1991 + ZEIT: 15:02:02 + + Examples for France, where the default date and time + format is %a %d %h %Y %Z %T : + + + $ LANG=Fr_FR.88591 date + Mer 02 oct 1991 MET 15:03:32 + + + $ LANG=Fr_FR.88591 date "+JOUR: %A %d %B %Y%nHEURE: %H:%M:%S" + JOUR: Mercredi 02 octobre 1991 + HEURE: 15:03:56 + +RATIONALE + Some of the new options for formatting are from the + ISO C standard. The -u option was introduced to allow + portable access to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The + string "GMT0" is allowed as an equivalent TZ value to be + compatible with all of the systems using the BSD imple- + mentation, where this option originated. + + The %e format conversion specification (adopted from + System V) was added because the ISO C standard conver- + sion specifications did not provide any way to produce + the historical default date output during the first nine + days of any month. + + There are two varieties of day and week numbering sup- + ported (in addition to any others created with the + locale-dependent %E and %O modifier characters): + + The historical variety in which Sunday is the + first day of the week and the weekdays preceding + the first Sunday of the year are considered week + 0. These are represented by %w and %U . A variant + of this is %W , using Monday as the first day of + the week, but still referring to week 0. This + view of the calendar was retained because so many + historical applications depend on it and the + ISO C standard strftime() function, on which many + date implementations are based, was defined in + this way. + + The international standard, based on the + ISO 8601:2000 standard where Monday is the first + weekday and the algorithm for the first week num- + ber is more complex: If the week (Monday to Sun- + day) containing January 1 has four or more days + in the new year, then it is week 1; otherwise, it + is week 53 of the previous year, and the next + week is week 1. These are represented by the new + conversion specifications %u and %V , added as a + result of international comments. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + The System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + printf(), strftime() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 date(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/dd.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/dd.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d8b0ae --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/dd.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,559 @@ +dd(P) dd(P) + + + + + +NAME + dd - convert and copy a file + +SYNOPSIS + dd [operand ...] + +DESCRIPTION + The dd utility shall copy the specified input file to + the specified output file with possible conversions + using specific input and output block sizes. It shall + read the input one block at a time, using the specified + input block size; it shall then process the block of + data actually returned, which could be smaller than the + requested block size. It shall apply any conversions + that have been specified and write the resulting data to + the output in blocks of the specified output block size. + If the bs= expr operand is specified and no conversions + other than sync, noerror, or notrunc are requested, the + data returned from each input block shall be written as + a separate output block; if the read returns less than a + full block and the sync conversion is not specified, the + resulting output block shall be the same size as the + input block. If the bs= expr operand is not specified, + or a conversion other than sync, noerror, or notrunc is + requested, the input shall be processed and collected + into full-sized output blocks until the end of the input + is reached. + + The processing order shall be as follows: + + An input block is read. + + If the input block is shorter than the specified input + block size and the sync conversion is specified, null + bytes shall be appended to the input data up to the + specified size. (If either block or unblock is also + specified, <space>s shall be appended instead of null + bytes.) The remaining conversions and output shall + include the pad characters as if they had been read from + the input. + + If the bs= expr operand is specified and no conversion + other than sync or noerror is requested, the resulting + data shall be written to the output as a single block, + and the remaining steps are omitted. + + If the swab conversion is specified, each pair of input + data bytes shall be swapped. If there is an odd number + of bytes in the input block, the last byte in the input + record shall not be swapped. + + Any remaining conversions ( block, unblock, lcase, and + ucase) shall be performed. These conversions shall oper- + ate on the input data independently of the input block- + ing; an input or output fixed-length record may span + block boundaries. + + The data resulting from input or conversion or both + shall be aggregated into output blocks of the specified + size. After the end of input is reached, any remaining + output shall be written as a block without padding if + conv= sync is not specified; thus, the final output + block may be shorter than the output block size. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + All of the operands shall be processed before any input + is read. The following operands shall be supported: + + if=file + Specify the input pathname; the default is stan- + dard input. + + of=file + Specify the output pathname; the default is stan- + dard output. If the seek= expr conversion is not + also specified, the output file shall be trun- + cated before the copy begins if an explicit of= + file operand is specified, unless conv= notrunc + is specified. If seek= expr is specified, but + conv= notrunc is not, the effect of the copy + shall be to preserve the blocks in the output + file over which dd seeks, but no other portion of + the output file shall be preserved. (If the size + of the seek plus the size of the input file is + less than the previous size of the output file, + the output file shall be shortened by the copy.) + + ibs=expr + Specify the input block size, in bytes, by expr + (default is 512). + + obs=expr + Specify the output block size, in bytes, by expr + (default is 512). + + bs=expr + Set both input and output block sizes to expr + bytes, superseding ibs= and obs=. If no conver- + sion other than sync, noerror, and notrunc is + specified, each input block shall be copied to + the output as a single block without aggregating + short blocks. + + cbs=expr + Specify the conversion block size for block and + unblock in bytes by expr (default is zero). If + cbs= is omitted or given a value of zero, using + block or unblock produces unspecified results. + + The application shall ensure that this operand is also + specified if the conv= operand is specified with a value + of ascii, ebcdic, or ibm. For a conv= operand with an + ascii value, the input is handled as described for the + unblock value, except that characters are converted to + ASCII before any trailing <space>s are deleted. For + conv= operands with ebcdic or ibm values, the input is + handled as described for the block value except that the + characters are converted to EBCDIC or IBM EBCDIC, + respectively, after any trailing <space>s are added. + + skip=n Skip n input blocks (using the specified input + block size) before starting to copy. On seekable + files, the implementation shall read the blocks + or seek past them; on non-seekable files, the + blocks shall be read and the data shall be dis- + carded. + + seek=n Skip n blocks (using the specified output block + size) from the beginning of the output file + before copying. On non-seekable files, existing + blocks shall be read and space from the current + end-of-file to the specified offset, if any, + filled with null bytes; on seekable files, the + implementation shall seek to the specified offset + or read the blocks as described for non-seekable + files. + + count=n + Copy only n input blocks. + + conv=value[,value ...] + + Where values are comma-separated symbols from the + following list: + + ascii Convert EBCDIC to ASCII; see ASCII to EBCDIC Con- + version . + + ebcdic Convert ASCII to EBCDIC; see ASCII to EBCDIC Con- + version . + + ibm Convert ASCII to a different EBCDIC set; see + ASCII to IBM EBCDIC Conversion . + + + The ascii, ebcdic, and ibm values are mutually-exclu- + sive. + + block Treat the input as a sequence of <newline>-termi- + nated or end-of-file-terminated variable-length + records independent of the input block bound- + aries. Each record shall be converted to a record + with a fixed length specified by the conversion + block size. Any <newline> shall be removed from + the input line; <space>s shall be appended to + lines that are shorter than their conversion + block size to fill the block. Lines that are + longer than the conversion block size shall be + truncated to the largest number of characters + that fit into that size; the number of truncated + lines shall be reported (see the STDERR section). + + The block and unblock values are mutually-exclusive. + + unblock + Convert fixed-length records to variable length. + Read a number of bytes equal to the conversion + block size (or the number of bytes remaining in + the input, if less than the conversion block + size), delete all trailing <space>s, and append a + <newline>. + + lcase Map uppercase characters specified by the + LC_CTYPE keyword tolower to the corresponding + lowercase character. Characters for which no + mapping is specified shall not be modified by + this conversion. + + The lcase and ucase symbols are mutually-exclusive. + + ucase Map lowercase characters specified by the + LC_CTYPE keyword toupper to the corresponding + uppercase character. Characters for which no + mapping is specified shall not be modified by + this conversion. + + swab Swap every pair of input bytes. + + noerror + Do not stop processing on an input error. When an + input error occurs, a diagnostic message shall be + written on standard error, followed by the cur- + rent input and output block counts in the same + format as used at completion (see the STDERR sec- + tion). If the sync conversion is specified, the + missing input shall be replaced with null bytes + and processed normally; otherwise, the input + block shall be omitted from the output. + + notrunc + Do not truncate the output file. Preserve blocks + in the output file not explicitly written by this + invocation of the dd utility. (See also the pre- + ceding of= file operand.) + + sync Pad every input block to the size of the ibs= + buffer, appending null bytes. (If either block or + unblock is also specified, append <space>s, + rather than null bytes.) + + + + The behavior is unspecified if operands other than conv= + are specified more than once. + + For the bs=, cbs=, ibs=, and obs= operands, the applica- + tion shall supply an expression specifying a size in + bytes. The expression, expr, can be: + + A positive decimal number + + A positive decimal number followed by k, specifying mul- + tiplication by 1024 + + A positive decimal number followed by b, specifying mul- + tiplication by 512 + + Two or more positive decimal numbers (with or without k + or b) separated by x, specifying the product of the + indicated values + + All of the operands are processed before any input is + read. + + The following two tables display the octal number char- + acter values used for the ascii and ebcdic conversions + (first table) and for the ibm conversion (second table). + In both tables, the ASCII values are the row and column + headers and the EBCDIC values are found at their inter- + sections. For example, ASCII 0012 (LF) is the second + row, third column, yielding 0045 in EBCDIC. The inverted + tables (for EBCDIC to ASCII conversion) are not shown, + but are in one-to-one correspondence with these tables. + The differences between the two tables are highlighted + by small boxes drawn around five entries. + Table: ASCII to EBCDIC Conversion + + Table: ASCII to IBM EBCDIC Conversion + +STDIN + If no if= operand is specified, the standard input shall + be used. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input file can be any file type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of dd: + + LANG Provide a default value for the + internationalization variables that are unset or + null. (See the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 8.2, International- + ization Variables for the precedence of interna- + tionalization variables used to determine the + values of locale categories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + the classification of characters as uppercase or + lowercase, and the mapping of characters from one + case to the other. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error and informative + messages written to standard output. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + For SIGINT, the dd utility shall interrupt its current + processing, write status information to standard error, + and exit as though terminated by SIGINT. It shall take + the standard action for all other signals; see the ASYN- + CHRONOUS EVENTS section in Utility Description Defaults + . + +STDOUT + If no of= operand is specified, the standard output + shall be used. The nature of the output depends on the + operands selected. + +STDERR + On completion, dd shall write the number of input and + output blocks to standard error. In the POSIX locale the + following formats shall be used: + + + "%u+%u records in\n", <number of whole input blocks>, + <number of partial input blocks> + + + "%u+%u records out\n", <number of whole output blocks>, + <number of partial output blocks> + + A partial input block is one for which read() returned + less than the input block size. A partial output block + is one that was written with fewer bytes than specified + by the output block size. + + In addition, when there is at least one truncated block, + the number of truncated blocks shall be written to stan- + dard error. In the POSIX locale, the format shall be: + + + "%u truncated %s\n", <number of truncated blocks>, "record" (if + <number of truncated blocks> is one) "records" (otherwise) + + Diagnostic messages may also be written to standard + error. + +OUTPUT FILES + If the of= operand is used, the output shall be the same + as described in the STDOUT section. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The input file was copied successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + If an input error is detected and the noerror conversion + has not been specified, any partial output block shall + be written to the output file, a diagnostic message + shall be written, and the copy operation shall be dis- + continued. If some other error is detected, a diagnostic + message shall be written and the copy operation shall be + discontinued. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The input and output block size can be specified to take + advantage of raw physical I/O. + + There are many different versions of the EBCDIC code- + sets. The ASCII and EBCDIC conversions specified for the + dd utility perform conversions for the version specified + by the tables. + +EXAMPLES + The following command: + + + dd if=/dev/rmt0h of=/dev/rmt1h + + copies from tape drive 0 to tape drive 1, using a common + historical device naming convention. + + The following command: + + + dd ibs=10 skip=1 + + strips the first 10 bytes from standard input. + + This example reads an EBCDIC tape blocked ten 80-byte + EBCDIC card images per block into the ASCII file x: + + + dd if=/dev/tape of=x ibs=800 cbs=80 conv=ascii,lcase + +RATIONALE + The OPTIONS section is listed as "None" because there + are no options recognized by historical dd utilities. + Certainly, many of the operands could have been designed + to use the Utility Syntax Guidelines, which would have + resulted in the classic hyphenated option letters. In + this version of this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, dd + retains its curious JCL-like syntax due to the large + number of applications that depend on the historical + implementation. + + A suggested implementation technique for conv= noerror, + sync is to zero (or <space>-fill, if blocking or + unblocking) the input buffer before each read and to + write the contents of the input buffer to the output + even after an error. In this manner, any data trans- + ferred to the input buffer before the error was detected + is preserved. Another point is that a failed read on a + regular file or a disk generally does not increment the + file offset, and dd must then seek past the block on + which the error occurred; otherwise, the input error + occurs repetitively. When the input is a magnetic tape, + however, the tape normally has passed the block contain- + ing the error when the error is reported, and thus no + seek is necessary. + + The default ibs= and obs= sizes are specified as 512 + bytes because there are historical (largely portable) + scripts that assume these values. If they were left + unspecified, unusual results could occur if an implemen- + tation chose an odd block size. + + Historical implementations of dd used creat() when pro- + cessing of= file. This makes the seek= operand unusable + except on special files. The conv= notrunc feature was + added because more recent BSD-based implementations use + open() (without O_TRUNC) instead of creat(), but they + fail to delete output file contents after the data + copied. + + The w multiplier (historically meaning word), is used in + System V to mean 2 and in 4.2 BSD to mean 4. Since word + is inherently non-portable, its use is not supported by + this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + Standard EBCDIC does not have the characters '[' and ']' + . The values used in the table are taken from a common + print train that does contain them. Other than those + characters, the print train values are not filled in, + but appear to provide some of the motivation for the + historical choice of translations reflected here. + + The Standard EBCDIC table provides a 1:1 translation for + all 256 bytes. + + The IBM EBCDIC table does not provide such a transla- + tion. The marked cells in the tables differ in such a + way that: + + EBCDIC 0112 ( 'cent' ) and 0152 (broken pipe) do not + appear in the table. + + EBCDIC 0137 ( 'not' ) translates to/from ASCII 0236 ( + '^' ). In the standard table, EBCDIC 0232 (no graphic) + is used. + + EBCDIC 0241 ( '~' ) translates to/from ASCII 0176 ( '~' + ). In the standard table, EBCDIC 0137 ( 'not' ) is used. + + 0255 ( '[' ) and 0275 ( ']' ) appear twice, once in the + same place as for the standard table and once in place + of 0112 ( 'cent' ) and 0241 ( '~' ). + + In net result: EBCDIC 0275 ( ']' ) displaced EBCDIC 0241 + ( '~' ) in cell 0345. + + That displaced EBCDIC 0137 ( 'not' ) in cell 0176. + + That displaced EBCDIC 0232 (no graphic) in cell + 0136. + + That replaced EBCDIC 0152 (broken pipe) in cell + 0313. + + EBCDIC 0255 ( '[' ) replaced EBCDIC 0112 ( 'cent' ). + + This translation, however, reflects historical practice + that (ASCII) '~' and 'not' were often mapped to each + other, as were '[' and 'cent' ; and ']' and (EBCDIC) '~' + . + + The cbs operand is required if any of the ascii, ebcdic, + or ibm operands are specified. For the ascii operand, + the input is handled as described for the unblock oper- + and except that characters are converted to ASCII before + the trailing <space>s are deleted. For the ebcdic and + ibm operands, the input is handled as described for the + block operand except that the characters are converted + to EBCDIC or IBM EBCDIC after the trailing <space>s are + added. + + The block and unblock keywords are from historical BSD + practice. + + The consistent use of the word record in standard error + messages matches most historical practice. An earlier + version of System V used block, but this has been + updated in more recent releases. + + Early proposals only allowed two numbers separated by x + to be used in a product when specifying bs=, cbs=, ibs=, + and obs= sizes. This was changed to reflect the histori- + cal practice of allowing multiple numbers in the product + as provided by Version 7 and all releases of System V + and BSD. + + A change to the swab conversion is required to match + historical practice and is the result of IEEE PASC + Interpretations 1003.2 #03 and #04, submitted for the + ISO POSIX-2:1993 standard. + + A change to the handling of SIGINT is required to match + historical practice and is the result of IEEE PASC + Interpretation 1003.2 #06 submitted for the + ISO POSIX-2:1993 standard. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Utility Description Defaults , sed , tr + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 dd(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/df.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/df.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9b4c14f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/df.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,287 @@ +df(P) df(P) + + + + + +NAME + df - report free disk space + +SYNOPSIS + df [-k][-P|-t][file...]<img src="../images/opt-end.gif" + alt="[Option End]" border="0"> + +DESCRIPTION + The df utility shall write the amount of available space + <img src="../images/opt-start.gif" alt="[Option Start]" + border="0"> and file slots for file systems on which + the invoking user has appropriate read access. File sys- + tems shall be specified by the file operands; when none + are specified, information shall be written for all file + systems. The format of the default output from df is + unspecified, but all space figures are reported in + 512-byte units, unless the -k option is specified. This + output shall contain at least the file system names, + amount of available space on each of these file systems, + and the number of free file slots, or inodes, avail- + able; when -t is specified, the output shall contain the + total allocated space as well. + +OPTIONS + The df utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -k Use 1024-byte units, instead of the default + 512-byte units, when writing space figures. + + -P Produce output in the format described in the + STDOUT section. + + -t Include total allocated-space figures in the out- + put. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file within the hierarchy of the + desired file system. If a file other than a + FIFO, a regular file, a directory, or a special + file representing the device containing the file + system (for example, /dev/dsk/0s1) is specified, + the results are unspecified. Otherwise, df shall + write the amount of free space in the file system + containing the specified file operand. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of df: + + LANG Provide a default value for the + internationalization variables that are unset or + null. (See the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 8.2, International- + ization Variables for the precedence of interna- + tionalization variables used to determine the + values of locale categories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error and informative + messages written to standard output. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + When both the -k and -P options are specified, the fol- + lowing header line shall be written (in the POSIX + locale): + + + "Filesystem 1024-blocks Used Available Capacity Mounted on\n" + + When the -P option is specified without the -k option, + the following header line shall be written (in the POSIX + locale): + + + "Filesystem 512-blocks Used Available Capacity Mounted on\n" + + The implementation may adjust the spacing of the header + line and the individual data lines so that the informa- + tion is presented in orderly columns. + + The remaining output with -P shall consist of one line + of information for each specified file system. These + lines shall be formatted as follows: + + + "%s %d %d %d %d%% %s\n", <file system name>, <total space>, + <space used>, <space free>, <percentage used>, + <file system root> + + In the following list, all quantities expressed in + 512-byte units (1024-byte when -k is specified) shall be + rounded up to the next higher unit. The fields are: + + <file system name> + + The name of the file system, in an implementa- + tion-defined format. + + <total space> + The total size of the file system in 512-byte + units. The exact meaning of this figure is imple- + mentation-defined, but should include + <space used>, <space free>, plus any space + reserved by the system not normally available to + a user. + + <space used> + The total amount of space allocated to existing + files in the file system, in 512-byte units. + + <space free> + The total amount of space available within the + file system for the creation of new files by + unprivileged users, in 512-byte units. When this + figure is less than or equal to zero, it shall + not be possible to create any new files on the + file system without first deleting others, unless + the process has appropriate privileges. The fig- + ure written may be less than zero. + + <percentage used> + + The percentage of the normally available space + that is currently allocated to all files on the + file system. This shall be calculated using the + fraction: + + + <space used>/( <space used>+ <space free>) + + expressed as a percentage. This percentage may be + greater than 100 if <space free> is less than zero. The + percentage value shall be expressed as a positive inte- + ger, with any fractional result causing it to be rounded + to the next highest integer. + + <file system root> + + The directory below which the file system hierar- + chy appears. + + + The output format is unspecified when -t is used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + On most systems, the "name of the file system, in an + implementation-defined format" is the special file on + which the file system is mounted. + + On large file systems, the calculation specified for + percentage used can create huge rounding errors. + +EXAMPLES + The following example writes portable information about + the /usr file system: + + + df -P /usr + + Assuming that /usr/src is part of the /usr file system, + the following produces the same output as the previous + example: + + + df -P /usr/src + +RATIONALE + The behavior of df with the -P option is the default + action of the 4.2 BSD df utility. The uppercase -P was + selected to avoid collision with a known industry exten- + sion using -p. + + Historical df implementations vary considerably in their + default output. It was therefore necessary to describe + the default output in a loose manner to accommodate all + known historical implementations and to add a portable + option ( -P) to provide information in a portable for- + mat. + + The use of 512-byte units is historical practice and + maintains compatibility with ls and other utilities in + this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. This does not man- + date that the file system itself be based on 512-byte + blocks. The -k option was added as a compromise measure. + It was agreed by the standard developers that 512 bytes + was the best default unit because of its complete his- + torical consistency on System V (versus the mixed + 512/1024-byte usage on BSD systems), and that a -k + option to switch to 1024-byte units was a good compro- + mise. Users who prefer the more logical 1024-byte quan- + tity can easily alias df to df -k without breaking many + historical scripts relying on the 512-byte units. + + It was suggested that df and the various related utili- + ties be modified to access a BLOCKSIZE environment vari- + able to achieve consistency and user acceptance. Since + this is not historical practice on any system, it is + left as a possible area for system extensions and will + be re-evaluated in a future version if it is widely + implemented. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + find + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 df(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/dirname.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/dirname.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..79b188d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/dirname.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ +dirname(P) dirname(P) + + + + + +NAME + dirname - return the directory portion of a pathname + +SYNOPSIS + dirname string + +DESCRIPTION + The string operand shall be treated as a pathname, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 3.266, Pathname. The + string string shall be converted to the name of the + directory containing the filename corresponding to the + last pathname component in string, performing actions + equivalent to the following steps in order: + + If string is //, skip steps 2 to 5. + + If string consists entirely of slash characters, string + shall be set to a single slash character. In this case, + skip steps 3 to 8. + + If there are any trailing slash characters in string, + they shall be removed. + + If there are no slash characters remaining in string, + string shall be set to a single period character. In + this case, skip steps 5 to 8. + + If there are any trailing non-slash characters in + string, they shall be removed. + + If the remaining string is //, it is implementation- + defined whether steps 7 and 8 are skipped or processed. + + If there are any trailing slash characters in string, + they shall be removed. + + If the remaining string is empty, string shall be set to + a single slash character. + + The resulting string shall be written to standard out- + put. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + string A string. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of dirname: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The dirname utility shall write a line to the standard + output in the following format: + + + "%s\n", <resulting string> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The definition of pathname specifies implementation- + defined behavior for pathnames starting with two slash + characters. Therefore, applications shall not arbitrar- + ily add slashes to the beginning of a pathname unless + they can ensure that there are more or less than two or + are prepared to deal with the implementation-defined + consequences. + +EXAMPLES + Command Results + dirname / / + dirname // / or // + dirname /a/b/ /a + dirname //a//b// //a + dirname Unspecified + dirname a . ($? = 0) + dirname "" . ($? = 0) + dirname /a / + dirname /a/b /a + dirname a/b a + +RATIONALE + The dirname utility originated in System III. It has + evolved through the System V releases to a version that + matches the requirements specified in this description + in System V Release 3. 4.3 BSD and earlier versions did + not include dirname. + + The behaviors of basename and dirname in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 have been coordinated so that when + string is a valid pathname: + + + $(basename "string") + + would be a valid filename for the file in the directory: + + + $(dirname "string") + + This would not work for the versions of these utilities + in early proposals due to the way processing of trailing + slashes was specified. Consideration was given to leav- + ing processing unspecified if there were trailing + slashes, but this cannot be done; the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 3.266, Pathname + allows trailing slashes. The basename and dirname utili- + ties have to specify consistent handling for all valid + pathnames. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + basename() , Parameters and Variables + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 dirname(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/du.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/du.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..00a4f3f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/du.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +du(P) du(P) + + + + + +NAME + du - estimate file space usage + +SYNOPSIS + du [-a | -s][-kx][-H | -L][file ...] + +DESCRIPTION + By default, the du utility shall write to standard out- + put the size of the file space allocated to, and the + size of the file space allocated to each subdirectory + of, the file hierarchy rooted in each of the specified + files. By default, when a symbolic link is encountered + on the command line or in the file hierarchy, du shall + count the size of the symbolic link (rather than the + file referenced by the link), and shall not follow the + link to another portion of the file hierarchy. The size + of the file space allocated to a file of type directory + shall be defined as the sum total of space allocated to + all files in the file hierarchy rooted in the directory + plus the space allocated to the directory itself. + + When du cannot stat() files or stat() or read directo- + ries, it shall report an error condition and the final + exit status is affected. Files with multiple links shall + be counted and written for only one entry. The directory + entry that is selected in the report is unspecified. By + default, file sizes shall be written in 512-byte units, + rounded up to the next 512-byte unit. + +OPTIONS + The du utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a In addition to the default output, report the + size of each file not of type directory in the + file hierarchy rooted in the specified file. + Regardless of the presence of the -a option, non- + directories given as file operands shall always + be listed. + + -H If a symbolic link is specified on the command + line, du shall count the size of the file or file + hierarchy referenced by the link. + + -k Write the files sizes in units of 1024 bytes, + rather than the default 512-byte units. + + -L If a symbolic link is specified on the command + line or encountered during the traversal of a + file hierarchy, du shall count the size of the + file or file hierarchy referenced by the link. + + -s Instead of the default output, report only the + total sum for each of the specified files. + + -x When evaluating file sizes, evaluate only those + files that have the same device as the file spec- + ified by the file operand. + + + Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive + options -H and -L shall not be considered an error. The + last option specified shall determine the behavior of + the utility. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file The pathname of a file whose size is to be writ- + ten. If no file is specified, the current direc- + tory shall be used. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of du: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The output from du shall consist of the amount of space + allocated to a file and the name of the file, in the + following format: + + + "%d %s\n", <size>, <pathname> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The use of 512-byte units is historical practice and + maintains compatibility with ls and other utilities in + this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. This does not man- + date that the file system itself be based on 512-byte + blocks. The -k option was added as a compromise measure. + It was agreed by the standard developers that 512 bytes + was the best default unit because of its complete his- + torical consistency on System V (versus the mixed + 512/1024-byte usage on BSD systems), and that a -k + option to switch to 1024-byte units was a good compro- + mise. Users who prefer the 1024-byte quantity can easily + alias du to du -k without breaking the many historical + scripts relying on the 512-byte units. + + The -b option was added to an early proposal to provide + a resolution to the situation where System V and BSD + systems give figures for file sizes in blocks, which is + an implementation-defined concept. (In common usage, the + block size is 512 bytes for System V and 1024 bytes for + BSD systems.) However, -b was later deleted, since the + default was eventually decided as 512-byte units. + + Historical file systems provided no way to obtain exact + figures for the space allocation given to files. There + are two known areas of inaccuracies in historical file + systems: cases of indirect blocks being used by the file + system or sparse files yielding incorrectly high values. + An indirect block is space used by the file system in + the storage of the file, but that need not be counted in + the space allocated to the file. A sparse file is one in + which an lseek() call has been made to a position beyond + the end of the file and data has subsequently been writ- + ten at that point. A file system need not allocate all + the intervening zero-filled blocks to such a file. It is + up to the implementation to define exactly how accurate + its methods are. + + The -a and -s options were mutually-exclusive in the + original version of du. The POSIX Shell and Utilities + description is implied by the language in the SVID where + -s is described as causing "only the grand total" to be + reported. Some systems may produce output for -sa, but + a Strictly Conforming POSIX Shell and Utilities Applica- + tion cannot use that combination. + + The -a and -s options were adopted from the SVID except + that the System V behavior of not listing non-directo- + ries explicitly given as operands, unless the -a option + is specified, was considered a bug; the BSD-based + behavior (report for all operands) is mandated. The + default behavior of du in the SVID with regard to + reporting the failure to read files (it produces no mes- + sages) was considered counter-intuitive, and thus it was + specified that the POSIX Shell and Utilities default + behavior shall be to produce such messages. These mes- + sages can be turned off with shell redirection to + achieve the System V behavior. + + The -x option is historical practice on recent BSD sys- + tems. It has been adopted by this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 because there was no other histori- + cal method of limiting the du search to a single file + hierarchy. This limitation of the search is necessary to + make it possible to obtain file space usage information + about a file system on which other file systems are + mounted, without having to resort to a lengthy find and + awk script. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + ls , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, stat() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 du(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/echo.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/echo.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..acac3ff --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/echo.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ +echo(P) echo(P) + + + + + +NAME + echo - write arguments to standard output + +SYNOPSIS + echo [string ...] + +DESCRIPTION + The echo utility writes its arguments to standard out- + put, followed by a <newline>. If there are no arguments, + only the <newline> is written. + +OPTIONS + The echo utility shall not recognize the "--" argument + in the manner specified by Guideline 10 of the Base Def- + initions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, + Utility Syntax Guidelines; "--" shall be recognized as a + string operand. + + Implementations shall not support any options. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + string A string to be written to standard output. If the + first operand is -n, or if any of the operands + contain a backslash ( '\' ) character, the + results are implementation-defined. + + On XSI-conformant systems, if the first operand is -n, + it shall be treated as a string, not an option. The fol- + lowing character sequences shall be recognized on XSI- + conformant systems within any of the arguments: + + \a Write an <alert>. + + \b Write a <backspace>. + + \c Suppress the <newline> that otherwise follows the + final argument in the output. All characters fol- + lowing the '\c' in the arguments shall be + ignored. + + \f Write a <form-feed>. + + \n Write a <newline>. + + \r Write a <carriage-return>. + + \t Write a <tab>. + + \v Write a <vertical-tab>. + + \\ Write a backslash character. + + \0num Write an 8-bit value that is the zero, one, two, + or three-digit octal number num. + + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of echo: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The echo utility arguments shall be separated by single + <space>s and a <newline> shall follow the last argument. + Output transformations shall occur based on the escape + sequences in the input. See the OPERANDS section. <img + src="../images/opt-end.gif" alt="[Option End]" bor- + der="0"> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + It is not possible to use echo portably across all POSIX + systems unless both -n (as the first argument) and + escape sequences are omitted. + + The printf utility can be used portably to emulate any + of the traditional behaviors of the echo utility as fol- + lows (assuming that IFS has its standard value or is + unset): + + The historic System V echo and the requirements + on XSI implementations in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 are equivalent to: + + + printf "%b\n" "$*" + + The BSD echo is equivalent to: + + + if [ "X$1" = "X-n" ] + then + shift + printf "%s" "$*" + else + printf "%s\n" "$*" + fi + + New applications are encouraged to use printf instead of + echo. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The echo utility has not been made obsolescent because + of its extremely widespread use in historical applica- + tions. Conforming applications that wish to do prompt- + ing without <newline>s or that could possibly be expect- + ing to echo a -n, should use the printf utility derived + from the Ninth Edition system. + + As specified, echo writes its arguments in the simplest + of ways. The two different historical versions of echo + vary in fatally incompatible ways. + + The BSD echo checks the first argument for the string -n + which causes it to suppress the <newline> that would + otherwise follow the final argument in the output. + + The System V echo does not support any options, but + allows escape sequences within its operands, as + described for XSI implementations in the OPERANDS sec- + tion. + + The echo utility does not support Utility Syntax Guide- + line 10 because historical applications depend on echo + to echo all of its arguments, except for the -n option + in the BSD version. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + printf + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 echo(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/env.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/env.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..119f6c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/env.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +env(P) env(P) + + + + + +NAME + env - set the environment for command invocation + +SYNOPSIS + env [-i][name=value]... [utility [argument...]] + +DESCRIPTION + The env utility shall obtain the current environment, + modify it according to its arguments, then invoke the + utility named by the utility operand with the modified + environment. + + Optional arguments shall be passed to utility. + + If no utility operand is specified, the resulting envi- + ronment shall be written to the standard output, with + one name= value pair per line. + +OPTIONS + The env utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -i Invoke utility with exactly the environment spec- + ified by the arguments; the inherited environment + shall be ignored completely. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + name=value + Arguments of the form name= value shall modify + the execution environment, and shall be placed + into the inherited environment before the utility + is invoked. + + utility + The name of the utility to be invoked. If the + utility operand names any of the special built-in + utilities in Special Built-In Utilities , the + results are undefined. + + argument + A string to pass as an argument for the invoked + utility. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of env: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + PATH Determine the location of the utility, as + described in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 8, Environment + Variables. If PATH is specified as a name= value + operand to env, the value given shall be used in + the search for utility. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + If no utility operand is specified, each name= value + pair in the resulting environment shall be written in + the form: + + + "%s=%s\n", <name>, <value> + + If the utility operand is specified, the env utility + shall not write to standard output. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + If utility is invoked, the exit status of env shall be + the exit status of utility; otherwise, the env utility + shall exit with one of the following values: + + 0 The env utility completed successfully. + + 1-125 An error occurred in the env utility. + + 126 The utility specified by utility was found but + could not be invoked. + + 127 The utility specified by utility could not be + found. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The command, env, nice, nohup, time, and xargs utilities + have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error + occurs so that applications can distinguish "failure to + find a utility" from "invoked utility exited with an + error indication". The value 127 was chosen because it + is not commonly used for other meanings; most utilities + use small values for "normal error conditions" and the + values above 128 can be confused with termination due to + receipt of a signal. The value 126 was chosen in a simi- + lar manner to indicate that the utility could be found, + but not invoked. Some scripts produce meaningful error + messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The dis- + tinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on + KornShell practice that uses 127 when all attempts to + exec the utility fail with [ENOENT], and uses 126 when + any attempt to exec the utility fails for any other rea- + son. + + Historical implementations of the env utility use the + execvp() or execlp() functions defined in the System + Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 to invoke the + specified utility; this provides better performance and + keeps users from having to escape characters with spe- + cial meaning to the shell. Therefore, shell functions, + special built-ins, and built-ins that are only provided + by the shell are not found. + +EXAMPLES + The following command: + + + env -i PATH=/mybin mygrep xyz myfile + + invokes the command mygrep with a new PATH value as the + only entry in its environment. In this case, PATH is + used to locate mygrep, which then must reside in /mybin. + +RATIONALE + As with all other utilities that invoke other utilities, + this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 only specifies what + env does with standard input, standard output, standard + error, input files, and output files. If a utility is + executed, it is not constrained by the specification of + input and output by env. + + The -i option was added to allow the functionality of + the withdrawn - option in a manner compatible with the + Utility Syntax Guidelines. + + Some have suggested that env is redundant since the same + effect is achieved by: + + + name=value ... utility [ argument ... ] + + The example is equivalent to env when an environment + variable is being added to the environment of the com- + mand, but not when the environment is being set to the + given value. The env utility also writes out the current + environment if invoked without arguments. There is suf- + ficient functionality beyond what the example provides + to justify inclusion of env. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Parameters and Variables , Special Built-In Utilities + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 env(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/expand.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/expand.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..200921b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/expand.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +expand(P) expand(P) + + + + + +NAME + expand - convert tabs to spaces + +SYNOPSIS + expand [-t tablist][file ...] + +DESCRIPTION + The expand utility shall write files or the standard + input to the standard output with <tab>s replaced with + one or more <space>s needed to pad to the next tab stop. + Any <backspace>s shall be copied to the output and cause + the column position count for tab stop calculations to + be decremented; the column position count shall not be + decremented below zero. + +OPTIONS + The expand utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -t tablist + Specify the tab stops. The application shall + ensure that the argument tablist consists of + either a single positive decimal integer or a + list of tabstops. If a single number is given, + tabs shall be set that number of column positions + apart instead of the default 8. + + If a list of tabstops is given, the application shall + ensure that it consists of a list of two or more posi- + tive decimal integers, separated by <blank>s or commas, + in ascending order. The tabs shall be set at those spe- + cific column positions. Each tab stop N shall be an + integer value greater than zero, and the list is in + strictly ascending order. This is taken to mean that, + from the start of a line of output, tabbing to position + N shall cause the next character output to be in the ( + N+1)th column position on that line. + + In the event of expand having to process a <tab> at a + position beyond the last of those specified in a multi- + ple tab-stop list, the <tab> shall be replaced by a sin- + gle <space> in the output. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file The pathname of a text file to be used as input. + + +STDIN + See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + Input files shall be text files. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of expand: + + LANG Provide a default value for the + internationalization variables that are unset or + null. (See the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 8.2, International- + ization Variables for the precedence of interna- + tionalization variables used to determine the + values of locale categories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + the processing of <tab>s and <space>s, and for + the determination of the width in column posi- + tions each character would occupy on an output + device. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be equivalent to the input + files with <tab>s converted into the appropriate number + of <space>s. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + The expand utility shall terminate with an error message + and non-zero exit status upon encountering difficulties + accessing one of the file operands. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The expand utility is useful for preprocessing text + files (before sorting, looking at specific columns, and + so on) that contain <tab>s. + + See the Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 3.103, Column Position. + + The tablist option-argument consists of integers in + ascending order. Utility Syntax Guideline 8 mandates + that expand shall accept the integers (within the single + argument) separated using either commas or <blank>s. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + tabs , unexpand + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 expand(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/expr.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/expr.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c00ecb --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/expr.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,299 @@ +expr(P) expr(P) + + + + + +NAME + expr - evaluate arguments as an expression + +SYNOPSIS + expr operand + +DESCRIPTION + The expr utility shall evaluate an expression and write + the result to standard output. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The single expression evaluated by expr shall be formed + from the operands, as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIP- + TION section. The application shall ensure that each of + the expression operator symbols: + + + ( ) | & = > >= < <= != + - * / % : + + and the symbols integer and string in the table are pro- + vided as separate arguments to expr. + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of expr: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements within regular expressions and by + the string comparison operators. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments) and the behavior of + character classes within regular expressions. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic + messages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The expr utility shall evaluate the expression and write + the result, followed by a <newline>, to standard output. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + The formation of the expression to be evaluated is shown + in the following table. The symbols expr, expr1, and + expr2 represent expressions formed from integer and + string symbols and the expression operator symbols (all + separate arguments) by recursive application of the con- + structs described in the table. The expressions are + listed in order of increasing precedence, with equal- + precedence operators grouped between horizontal lines. + All of the operators shall be left-associative. +Expression Description +expr1 | expr2 Returns the evaluation of expr1 if it is neither null nor zero; otherwise, returns the evaluation of expr2 if it is not null; otherwise, zero. +expr1 & expr2 Returns the evaluation of expr1 if neither expression evaluates to null or zero; otherwise, returns zero. + Returns the result of a decimal integer comparison if both arguments are integers; otherwise, returns the result of a string comparison using the locale-specific collation sequence. The result of each comparison is 1 if the specified relationship is true, or 0 if the relationship is false. +expr1 = expr2 Equal. +expr1 > expr2 Greater than. +expr1 >= expr2 Greater than or equal. +expr1 < expr2 Less than. +expr1 <= expr2 Less than or equal. +expr1 != expr2 Not equal. +expr1 + expr2 Addition of decimal integer-valued arguments. +expr1 - expr2 Subtraction of decimal integer-valued arguments. +expr1 * expr2 Multiplication of decimal integer-valued arguments. +expr1 / expr2 Integer division of decimal integer-valued arguments, producing an integer result. +expr1 % expr2 Remainder of integer division of decimal integer-valued arguments. +expr1 : expr2 Matching expression; see below. +( expr ) Grouping symbols. Any expression can be placed within parentheses. Parentheses can be nested to a depth of {EXPR_NEST_MAX}. +integer An argument consisting only of an (optional) unary minus followed by digits. +string A string argument; see below. + + Matching Expression + The ':' matching operator shall compare the string + resulting from the evaluation of expr1 with the regular + expression pattern resulting from the evaluation of + expr2. Regular expression syntax shall be that defined + in the Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 9.3, Basic Regular Expressions, except that all + patterns are anchored to the beginning of the string + (that is, only sequences starting at the first character + of a string are matched by the regular expression) and, + therefore, it is unspecified whether '^' is a special + character in that context. Usually, the matching opera- + tor shall return a string representing the number of + characters matched ( '0' on failure). Alternatively, if + the pattern contains at least one regular expression + subexpression "[\(...\)]" , the string corresponding to + "\1" shall be returned. + + String Operand + A string argument is an argument that cannot be identi- + fied as an integer argument or as one of the expression + operator symbols shown in the OPERANDS section. + + The use of string arguments length, substr, index, or + match produces unspecified results. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The expression evaluates to neither null nor + zero. + + 1 The expression evaluates to null or zero. + + 2 Invalid expression. + + >2 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + After argument processing by the shell, expr is not + required to be able to tell the difference between an + operator and an operand except by the value. If "$a" is + '=' , the command: + + + expr $a = '=' + + looks like: + + + expr = = = + + as the arguments are passed to expr (and they all may be + taken as the '=' operator). The following works reli- + ably: + + + expr X$a = X= + + Also note that this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 per- + mits implementations to extend utilities. The expr util- + ity permits the integer arguments to be preceded with a + unary minus. This means that an integer argument could + look like an option. Therefore, the conforming applica- + tion must employ the "--" construct of Guideline 10 of + the Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 12.2, Utility Syntax Guidelines to protect its + operands if there is any chance the first operand might + be a negative integer (or any string with a leading + minus). + +EXAMPLES + The expr utility has a rather difficult syntax: + + Many of the operators are also shell control + operators or reserved words, so they have to be + escaped on the command line. + + Each part of the expression is composed of sepa- + rate arguments, so liberal usage of <blank>s is + required. For example: + Invalid Valid + + expr 1+2 expr 1 + 2 + expr "1 + 2" expr 1 + 2 + expr 1 + (2 * 3) expr 1 + \( 2 \* 3 \) + + In many cases, the arithmetic and string features pro- + vided as part of the shell command language are easier + to use than their equivalents in expr. Newly written + scripts should avoid expr in favor of the new features + within the shell; see Parameters and Variables and + Arithmetic Expansion . + + The following command: + + + a=$(expr $a + 1) + + adds 1 to the variable a. + + The following command, for "$a" equal to either + /usr/abc/file or just file: + + + expr $a : '.*/\(.*\)' \| $a + + returns the last segment of a pathname (that is, file). + Applications should avoid the character '/' used alone + as an argument; expr may interpret it as the division + operator. + + The following command: + + + expr "//$a" : '.*/\(.*\)' + + is a better representation of the previous example. The + addition of the "//" characters eliminates any ambiguity + about the division operator and simplifies the whole + expression. Also note that pathnames may contain charac- + ters contained in the IFS variable and should be quoted + to avoid having "$a" expand into multiple arguments. + + The following command: + + + expr "$VAR" : '.*' + + returns the number of characters in VAR. + +RATIONALE + In an early proposal, EREs were used in the matching + expression syntax. This was changed to BREs to avoid + breaking historical applications. + + The use of a leading circumflex in the BRE is unspeci- + fied because many historical implementations have + treated it as a special character, despite their system + documentation. For example: + + + expr foo : ^foo expr ^foo : ^foo + + return 3 and 0, respectively, on those systems; their + documentation would imply the reverse. Thus, the anchor- + ing condition is left unspecified to avoid breaking his- + torical scripts relying on this undocumented feature. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Parameters and Variables , Arithmetic Expansion + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 expr(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/false.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/false.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8c9945 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/false.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +false(P) false(P) + + + + + +NAME + false - return false value + +SYNOPSIS + false + +DESCRIPTION + The false utility shall return with a non-zero exit + code. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + None. + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + None. + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + Not used. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The false utility shall always exit with a value other + than zero. + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + true + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 false(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/fold.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/fold.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..240affe --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/fold.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ +fold(P) fold(P) + + + + + +NAME + fold - filter for folding lines + +SYNOPSIS + fold [-bs][-w width][file...] + +DESCRIPTION + The fold utility is a filter that shall fold lines from + its input files, breaking the lines to have a maximum of + width column positions (or bytes, if the -b option is + specified). Lines shall be broken by the insertion of a + <newline> such that each output line (referred to later + in this section as a segment) is the maximum width pos- + sible that does not exceed the specified number of col- + umn positions (or bytes). A line shall not be broken in + the middle of a character. The behavior is undefined if + width is less than the number of columns any single + character in the input would occupy. + + If the <carriage-return>s, <backspace>s, or <tab>s are + encountered in the input, and the -b option is not spec- + ified, they shall be treated specially: + + <backspace> + The current count of line width shall be decre- + mented by one, although the count never shall + become negative. The fold utility shall not + insert a <newline> immediately before or after + any <backspace>. + + <carriage-return> + + The current count of line width shall be set to + zero. The fold utility shall not insert a <new- + line> immediately before or after any <carriage- + return>. + + <tab> Each <tab> encountered shall advance the column + position pointer to the next tab stop. Tab stops + shall be at each column position n such that n + modulo 8 equals 1. + + +OPTIONS + The fold utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -b Count width in bytes rather than column posi- + tions. + + -s If a segment of a line contains a <blank> within + the first width column positions (or bytes), + break the line after the last such <blank> meet- + ing the width constraints. If there is no <blank> + meeting the requirements, the -s option shall + have no effect for that output segment of the + input line. + + -w width + Specify the maximum line length, in column posi- + tions (or bytes if -b is specified). The results + are unspecified if width is not a positive deci- + mal number. The default value shall be 80. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a text file to be folded. If no + file operands are specified, the standard input + shall be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + If the -b option is specified, the input files shall be + text files except that the lines are not limited to + {LINE_MAX} bytes in length. If the -b option is not + specified, the input files shall be text files. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of fold: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + and for the determination of the width in column + positions each character would occupy on a con- + stant-width font output device. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be a file containing a + sequence of characters whose order shall be preserved + from the input files, possibly with inserted <newline>s. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were processed successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The cut and fold utilities can be used to create text + files out of files with arbitrary line lengths. The cut + utility should be used when the number of lines (or + records) needs to remain constant. The fold utility + should be used when the contents of long lines need to + be kept contiguous. + + The fold utility is frequently used to send text files + to printers that truncate, rather than fold, lines wider + than the printer is able to print (usually 80 or 132 + column positions). + +EXAMPLES + An example invocation that submits a file of possibly + long lines to the printer (under the assumption that the + user knows the line width of the printer to be assigned + by lp): + + + fold -w 132 bigfile | lp + +RATIONALE + Although terminal input in canonical processing mode + requires the erase character (frequently set to + <backspace>) to erase the previous character (not byte + or column position), terminal output is not buffered and + is extremely difficult, if not impossible, to parse cor- + rectly; the interpretation depends entirely on the phys- + ical device that actually displays/prints/stores the + output. In all known internationalized implementations, + the utilities producing output for mixed column-width + output assume that a <backspace> backs up one column + position and outputs enough <backspace>s to return to + the start of the character when <backspace> is used to + provide local line motions to support underlining and + emboldening operations. Since fold without the -b option + is dealing with these same constraints, <backspace> is + always treated as backing up one column position rather + than backing up one character. + + Historical versions of the fold utility assumed 1 byte + was one character and occupied one column position when + written out. This is no longer always true. Since the + most common usage of fold is believed to be folding long + lines for output to limited-length output devices, this + capability was preserved as the default case. The -b + option was added so that applications could fold files + with arbitrary length lines into text files that could + then be processed by the standard utilities. Note that + although the width for the -b option is in bytes, a line + is never split in the middle of a character. (It is + unspecified what happens if a width is specified that is + too small to hold a single character found in the input + followed by a <newline>.) + + The tab stops are hardcoded to be every eighth column to + meet historical practice. No new method of specifying + other tab stops was invented. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + cut + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 fold(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/head.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/head.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..242ed76 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/head.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +head(P) head(P) + + + + + +NAME + head - copy the first part of files + +SYNOPSIS + head [-n number][file...] + +DESCRIPTION + The head utility shall copy its input files to the stan- + dard output, ending the output for each file at a desig- + nated point. + + Copying shall end at the point in each input file indi- + cated by the -n number option. The option-argument num- + ber shall be counted in units of lines. + +OPTIONS + The head utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -n number + The first number lines of each input file shall + be copied to standard output. The application + shall ensure that the number option-argument is a + positive decimal integer. + + + When a file contains less than number lines, it shall be + copied to standard output in its entirety. This shall + not be an error. + + If no options are specified, head shall act as if -n 10 + had been specified. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an input file. If no file operands + are specified, the standard input shall be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + Input files shall be text files, but the line length is + not restricted to {LINE_MAX} bytes. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of head: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall contain designated portions of + the input files. + + If multiple file operands are specified, head shall pre- + cede the output for each with the header: + + + "\n==> %s <==\n", <pathname> + + except that the first header written shall not include + the initial <newline>. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The obsolescent - number form is withdrawn in this ver- + sion. Applications should use the -n number option. + +EXAMPLES + To write the first ten lines of all files (except those + with a leading period) in the directory: + + + head * + +RATIONALE + Although it is possible to simulate head with sed 10q + for a single file, the standard developers decided that + the popularity of head on historical BSD systems war- + ranted its inclusion alongside tail. + + This standard version of head follows the Utility Syntax + Guidelines. The -n option was added to this new inter- + face so that head and tail would be more logically + related. + + There is no -c option (as there is in tail) because it + is not historical practice and because other utilities + in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 provide similar + functionality. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + sed , tail + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 head(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/id.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/id.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f581cf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/id.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,279 @@ +id(P) id(P) + + + + + +NAME + id - return user identity + +SYNOPSIS + id [user] + + id -G[-n] [user] + + id -g[-nr] [user] + + id -u[-nr] [user] + + +DESCRIPTION + If no user operand is provided, the id utility shall + write the user and group IDs and the corresponding user + and group names of the invoking process to standard out- + put. If the effective and real IDs do not match, both + shall be written. If multiple groups are supported by + the underlying system (see the description of + {NGROUPS_MAX} in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001), the supplementary group affilia- + tions of the invoking process shall also be written. + + If a user operand is provided and the process has the + appropriate privileges, the user and group IDs of the + selected user shall be written. In this case, effective + IDs shall be assumed to be identical to real IDs. If the + selected user has more than one allowable group member- + ship listed in the group database, these shall be writ- + ten in the same manner as the supplementary groups + described in the preceding paragraph. + +OPTIONS + The id utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -G Output all different group IDs (effective, real, + and supplementary) only, using the format "%u\n" + . If there is more than one distinct group affil- + iation, output each such affiliation, using the + format " %u" , before the <newline> is output. + + -g Output only the effective group ID, using the + format "%u\n" . + + -n Output the name in the format "%s" instead of the + numeric ID using the format "%u" . + + -r Output the real ID instead of the effective ID. + + -u Output only the effective user ID, using the for- + mat "%u\n" . + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + user The login name for which information is to be + written. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of id: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error and informative + messages written to standard output. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The following formats shall be used when the LC_MESSAGES + locale category specifies the POSIX locale. In other + locales, the strings uid, gid, euid, egid, and groups + may be replaced with more appropriate strings corre- + sponding to the locale. + + + "uid=%u(%s) gid=%u(%s)\n", <real user ID>, <user-name>, + <real group ID>, <group-name> + + If the effective and real user IDs do not match, the + following shall be inserted immediately before the '\n' + character in the previous format: + + + " euid=%u(%s)" + + with the following arguments added at the end of the + argument list: + + + <effective user ID>, <effective user-name> + + If the effective and real group IDs do not match, the + following shall be inserted directly before the '\n' + character in the format string (and after any addition + resulting from the effective and real user IDs not + matching): + + + " egid=%u(%s)" + + with the following arguments added at the end of the + argument list: + + + <effective group-ID>, <effective group name> + + If the process has supplementary group affiliations or + the selected user is allowed to belong to multiple + groups, the first shall be added directly before the + <newline> in the format string: + + + " groups=%u(%s)" + + with the following arguments added at the end of the + argument list: + + + <supplementary group ID>, <supplementary group name> + + and the necessary number of the following added after + that for any remaining supplementary group IDs: + + + ",%u(%s)" + + and the necessary number of the following arguments + added at the end of the argument list: + + + <supplementary group ID>, <supplementary group name> + + If any of the user ID, group ID, effective user ID, + effective group ID, or supplementary/multiple group IDs + cannot be mapped by the system into printable user or + group names, the corresponding "(%s)" and name argument + shall be omitted from the corresponding format string. + + When any of the options are specified, the output format + shall be as described in the OPTIONS section. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Output produced by the -G option and by the default case + could potentially produce very long lines on systems + that support large numbers of supplementary groups. (On + systems with user and group IDs that are 32-bit integers + and with group names with a maximum of 8 bytes per name, + 93 supplementary groups plus distinct effective and real + group and user IDs could theoretically overflow the + 2048-byte {LINE_MAX} text file line limit on the default + output case. It would take about 186 supplementary + groups to overflow the 2048-byte barrier using id -G). + This is not expected to be a problem in practice, but in + cases where it is a concern, applications should con- + sider using fold -s before postprocessing the output of + id. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The functionality provided by the 4 BSD groups utility + can be simulated using: + + + id -Gn [ user ] + + The 4 BSD command groups was considered, but it was not + included because it did not provide the functionality of + the id utility of the SVID. Also, it was thought that it + would be easier to modify id to provide the additional + functionality necessary to systems with multiple groups + than to invent another command. + + The options -u, -g, -n, and -r were added to ease the + use of id with shell commands substitution. Without + these options it is necessary to use some preprocessor + such as sed to select the desired piece of information. + Since output such as that produced by: + + + id -u -n + + is frequently wanted, it seemed desirable to add the + options. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + fold , logname , who , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, getgid(), getgroups(), getuid() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 id(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/join.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/join.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84257b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/join.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ +join(P) join(P) + + + + + +NAME + join - relational database operator + +SYNOPSIS + join [-a file_number | -v file_number][-e string][-o + list][-t char] + [-1 field][-2 field] file1 file2 + +DESCRIPTION + The join utility shall perform an equality join on the + files file1 and file2. The joined files shall be written + to the standard output. + + The join field is a field in each file on which the + files are compared. The join utility shall write one + line in the output for each pair of lines in file1 and + file2 that have identical join fields. The output line + by default shall consist of the join field, then the + remaining fields from file1, then the remaining fields + from file2. This format can be changed by using the -o + option (see below). The -a option can be used to add + unmatched lines to the output. The -v option can be + used to output only unmatched lines. + + The files file1 and file2 shall be ordered in the col- + lating sequence of sort -b on the fields on which they + shall be joined, by default the first in each line. All + selected output shall be written in the same collating + sequence. + + The default input field separators shall be <blank>s. In + this case, multiple separators shall count as one field + separator, and leading separators shall be ignored. The + default output field separator shall be a <space>. + + The field separator and collating sequence can be + changed by using the -t option (see below). + + If the same key appears more than once in either file, + all combinations of the set of remaining fields in file1 + and the set of remaining fields in file2 are output in + the order of the lines encountered. + + If the input files are not in the appropriate collating + sequence, the results are unspecified. + +OPTIONS + The join utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a file_number + + Produce a line for each unpairable line in file + file_number, where file_number is 1 or 2, in + addition to the default output. If both -a1 and + -a2 are specified, all unpairable lines shall be + output. + + -e string + Replace empty output fields in the list selected + by -o with the string string. + + -o list + Construct the output line to comprise the fields + specified in list, each element of which shall + have one of the following two forms: + + file_number.field, where file_number is a file number + and field is a decimal integer field number + + 0 (zero), representing the join field + + The elements of list shall be either comma-separated or + <blank>-separated, as specified in Guideline 8 of the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section + 12.2, Utility Syntax Guidelines. The fields specified by + list shall be written for all selected output lines. + Fields selected by list that do not appear in the input + shall be treated as empty output fields. (See the -e + option.) Only specifically requested fields shall be + written. The application shall ensure that list is a + single command line argument. + + -t char + Use character char as a separator, for both input + and output. Every appearance of char in a line + shall be significant. When this option is speci- + fied, the collating sequence shall be the same as + sort without the -b option. + + -v file_number + + Instead of the default output, produce a line + only for each unpairable line in file_number, + where file_number is 1 or 2. If both -v1 and -v2 + are specified, all unpairable lines shall be out- + put. + + -1 field + Join on the fieldth field of file 1. Fields are + decimal integers starting with 1. + + -2 field + Join on the fieldth field of file 2. Fields are + decimal integers starting with 1. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file1, file2 + A pathname of a file to be joined. If either of + the file1 or file2 operands is '-' , the standard + input shall be used in its place. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if the file1 or + file2 operand is '-' . See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of join: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale of the collating sequence + join expects to have been used when the input + files were sorted. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The join utility output shall be a concatenation of + selected character fields. When the -o option is not + specified, the output shall be: + + + "%s%s%s\n", <join field>, <other file1 fields>, + <other file2 fields> + + If the join field is not the first field in a file, the + <other file fields> for that file shall be: + + + <fields preceding join field>, <fields following join field> + + When the -o option is specified, the output format shall + be: + + + "%s\n", <concatenation of fields> + + where the concatenation of fields is described by the -o + option, above. + + For either format, each field (except the last) shall be + written with its trailing separator character. If the + separator is the default ( <blank>s), a single <space> + shall be written after each field (except the last). + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were output successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Pathnames consisting of numeric digits or of the form + string.string should not be specified directly following + the -o list. + +EXAMPLES + The -o 0 field essentially selects the union of the join + fields. For example, given file phone: + + + !Name Phone Number + Don +1 123-456-7890 + Hal +1 234-567-8901 + Yasushi +2 345-678-9012 + + and file fax: + + + !Name Fax Number + Don +1 123-456-7899 + Keith +1 456-789-0122 + Yasushi +2 345-678-9011 + + (where the large expanses of white space are meant to + each represent a single <tab>), the command: + + + join -t "<tab>" -a 1 -a 2 -e '(unknown)' -o 0,1.2,2.2 phone fax + + would produce: + + + !Name Phone Number Fax Number + Don +1 123-456-7890 +1 123-456-7899 + Hal +1 234-567-8901 (unknown) + Keith (unknown) +1 456-789-0122 + Yasushi +2 345-678-9012 +2 345-678-9011 + + Multiple instances of the same key will produce combina- + torial results. The following: + + + fa: + a x + a y + a z + fb: + a p + + will produce: + + + a x p + a y p + a z p + + And the following: + + + fa: + a b c + a d e + fb: + a w x + a y z + a o p + + will produce: + + + a b c w x + a b c y z + a b c o p + a d e w x + a d e y z + a d e o p + +RATIONALE + The -e option is only effective when used with -o + because, unless specific fields are identified using -o, + join is not aware of what fields might be empty. The + exception to this is the join field, but identifying an + empty join field with the -e string is not historical + practice and some scripts might break if this were + changed. + + The 0 field in the -o list was adopted from the Tenth + Edition version of join to satisfy international objec- + tions that the join in the base documents does not sup- + port the "full join" or "outer join" described in rela- + tional database literature. Although it has been possi- + ble to include a join field in the output (by default, + or by field number using -o), the join field could not + be included for an unpaired line selected by -a. The -o + 0 field essentially selects the union of the join + fields. + + This sort of outer join was not possible with the join + commands in the base documents. The -o 0 field was cho- + sen because it is an upwards-compatible change for + applications. An alternative was considered: have the + join field represent the union of the fields in the + files (where they are identical for matched lines, and + one or both are null for unmatched lines). This was not + adopted because it would break some historical applica- + tions. + + The ability to specify file2 as - is not historical + practice; it was added for completeness. + + The -v option is not historical practice, but was con- + sidered necessary because it permitted the writing of + only those lines that do not match on the join field, as + opposed to the -a option, which prints both lines that + do and do not match. This additional facility is paral- + lel with the -v option of grep. + + Some historical implementations have been encountered + where a blank line in one of the input files was consid- + ered to be the end of the file; the description in this + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does not cite this as an + allowable case. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + awk , comm , sort , uniq + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 join(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/kill.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/kill.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a26aec --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/kill.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ +kill(P) kill(P) + + + + + +NAME + kill - terminate or signal processes + +SYNOPSIS + kill -s signal_name pid ... + + kill -l [exit_status] + + + + kill [-signal_name] pid ... + + kill [-signal_number] pid ... + + +DESCRIPTION + The kill utility shall send a signal to the process or + processes specified by each pid operand. + + For each pid operand, the kill utility shall perform + actions equivalent to the kill() function defined in the + System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 called + with the following arguments: + + The value of the pid operand shall be used as the + pid argument. + + The sig argument is the value specified by the -s + option, - signal_number option, or the - sig- + nal_name option, or by SIGTERM, if none of these + options is specified. + +OPTIONS + The kill utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines, except that in the last two SYNOPSIS + forms, the - signal_number and - signal_name options are + usually more than a single character. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -l (The letter ell.) Write all values of signal_name + supported by the implementation, if no operand is + given. If an exit_status operand is given and it + is a value of the '?' shell special parameter + (see Special Parameters and wait() ) correspond- + ing to a process that was terminated by a signal, + the signal_name corresponding to the signal that + terminated the process shall be written. If an + exit_status operand is given and it is the + unsigned decimal integer value of a signal num- + ber, the signal_name (the symbolic constant name + without the SIG prefix defined in the Base Defi- + nitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001) corre- + sponding to that signal shall be written. Other- + wise, the results are unspecified. + + -s signal_name + + Specify the signal to send, using one of the sym- + bolic names defined in the <signal.h> header. + Values of signal_name shall be recognized in a + case-independent fashion, without the SIG prefix. + In addition, the symbolic name 0 shall be + recognized, representing the signal value zero. + The corresponding signal shall be sent instead of + SIGTERM. + + -signal_name + + Equivalent to -s signal_name. + + -signal_number + + Specify a non-negative decimal integer, sig- + nal_number, representing the signal to be used + instead of SIGTERM, as the sig argument in the + effective call to kill(). The correspondence + between integer values and the sig value used is + shown in the following table. + + The effects of specifying any signal_number other than + those listed in the table are undefined. + + + signal_number sig Value + 0 0 + 1 SIGHUP + 2 SIGINT + 3 SIGQUIT + 6 SIGABRT + 9 SIGKILL + 14 SIGALRM + 15 SIGTERM + + If the first argument is a negative integer, it shall be + interpreted as a - signal_number option, not as a nega- + tive pid operand specifying a process group. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + pid One of the following: + + A decimal integer specifying a process or process group + to be signaled. The process or processes selected by + positive, negative, and zero values of the pid operand + shall be as described for the kill() function. If + process number 0 is specified, all processes in the cur- + rent process group shall be signaled. For the effects of + negative pid numbers, see the kill() function defined in + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. If + the first pid operand is negative, it should be preceded + by "--" to keep it from being interpreted as an option. + + A job control job ID (see the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 3.203, Job Control Job ID) + that identifies a background process group to be sig- + naled. The job control job ID notation is applicable + only for invocations of kill in the current shell execu- + tion environment; see Shell Execution Environment . + + exit_status + A decimal integer specifying a signal number or + the exit status of a process terminated by a sig- + nal. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of kill: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + When the -l option is not specified, the standard output + shall not be used. + + When the -l option is specified, the symbolic name of + each signal shall be written in the following format: + + + "%s%c", <signal_name>, <separator> + + where the <signal_name> is in uppercase, without the SIG + prefix, and the <separator> shall be either a <newline> + or a <space>. For the last signal written, <separator> + shall be a <newline>. + + When both the -l option and exit_status operand are + specified, the symbolic name of the corresponding signal + shall be written in the following format: + + + "%s\n", <signal_name> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 At least one matching process was found for each + pid operand, and the specified signal was suc- + cessfully processed for at least one matching + process. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Process numbers can be found by using ps. + + The job control job ID notation is not required to work + as expected when kill is operating in its own utility + execution environment. In either of the following exam- + ples: + + + nohup kill %1 & + system("kill %1"); + + the kill operates in a different environment and does + not share the shell's understanding of job numbers. + +EXAMPLES + Any of the commands: + + + kill -9 100 -165 + kill -s kill 100 -165 + kill -s KILL 100 -165 + + sends the SIGKILL signal to the process whose process ID + is 100 and to all processes whose process group ID is + 165, assuming the sending process has permission to send + that signal to the specified processes, and that they + exist. + + The System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 and + this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 do not require spe- + cific signal numbers for any signal_names. Even the - + signal_number option provides symbolic (although + numeric) names for signals. If a process is terminated + by a signal, its exit status indicates the signal that + killed it, but the exact values are not specified. The + kill -l option, however, can be used to map decimal sig- + nal numbers and exit status values into the name of a + signal. The following example reports the status of a + terminated job: + + + job + stat=$? + if [ $stat -eq 0 ] + then + echo job completed successfully. + elif [ $stat -gt 128 ] + then + echo job terminated by signal SIG$(kill -l $stat). + else + echo job terminated with error code $stat. + fi + + To send the default signal to a process group (say 123), + an application should use a command similar to one of + the following: + + + kill -TERM -123 + kill -- -123 + +RATIONALE + The -l option originated from the C shell, and is also + implemented in the KornShell. The C shell output can + consist of multiple output lines because the signal + names do not always fit on a single line on some termi- + nal screens. The KornShell output also included the + implementation-defined signal numbers and was considered + by the standard developers to be too difficult for + scripts to parse conveniently. The specified output for- + mat is intended not only to accommodate the historical C + shell output, but also to permit an entirely vertical or + entirely horizontal listing on systems for which this is + appropriate. + + An early proposal invented the name SIGNULL as a sig- + nal_name for signal 0 (used by the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 to test for the existence + of a process without sending it a signal). Since the + signal_name 0 can be used in this case unambiguously, + SIGNULL has been removed. + + An early proposal also required symbolic signal_names to + be recognized with or without the SIG prefix. Historical + versions of kill have not written the SIG prefix for the + -l option and have not recognized the SIG prefix on sig- + nal_names. Since neither applications portability nor + ease-of-use would be improved by requiring this exten- + sion, it is no longer required. + + To avoid an ambiguity of an initial negative number + argument specifying either a signal number or a process + group, IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 mandates that it is always + considered the former by implementations that support + the XSI option. It also requires that conforming appli- + cations always use the "--" options terminator argument + when specifying a process group, unless an option is + also specified. + + The -s option was added in response to international + interest in providing some form of kill that meets the + Utility Syntax Guidelines. + + The job control job ID notation is not required to work + as expected when kill is operating in its own utility + execution environment. In either of the following exam- + ples: + + + nohup kill %1 & + system("kill %1"); + + the kill operates in a different environment and does + not understand how the shell has managed its job num- + bers. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Shell Command Language , ps , wait() , the System Inter- + faces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, kill(), the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, <signal.h> + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 kill(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/link.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/link.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17a5b94 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/link.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ +link(P) link(P) + + + + + +NAME + link - call link function + +SYNOPSIS + link file1 file2 + +DESCRIPTION + The link utility shall perform the function call: + + + link(file1, file2); + + A user may need appropriate privilege to invoke the link + utility. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file1 The pathname of an existing file. + + file2 The pathname of the new directory entry to be + created. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + Not used. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of link: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + None. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + ln , unlink() , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, link() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 link(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/ln.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/ln.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e32c61 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/ln.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,265 @@ +ln(P) ln(P) + + + + + +NAME + ln - link files + +SYNOPSIS + ln [-fs] source_file target_file + + ln [-fs] source_file ... target_dir + + +DESCRIPTION + In the first synopsis form, the ln utility shall create + a new directory entry (link) at the destination path + specified by the target_file operand. If the -s option + is specified, a symbolic link shall be created for the + file specified by the source_file operand. This first + synopsis form shall be assumed when the final operand + does not name an existing directory; if more than two + operands are specified and the final is not an existing + directory, an error shall result. + + In the second synopsis form, the ln utility shall create + a new directory entry (link), or if the -s option is + specified a symbolic link, for each file specified by a + source_file operand, at a destination path in the exist- + ing directory named by target_dir. + + If the last operand specifies an existing file of a type + not specified by the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, the behavior is implementation- + defined. + + The corresponding destination path for each source_file + shall be the concatenation of the target directory path- + name, a slash character, and the last pathname component + of the source_file. The second synopsis form shall be + assumed when the final operand names an existing direc- + tory. + + For each source_file: + + If the destination path exists: <ol type="a"> + + If the -f option is not specified, ln shall write a + diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more + with the current source_file, and go on to any remaining + source_files. + + Actions shall be performed equivalent to the unlink() + function defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, called using destination as the + path argument. If this fails for any reason, ln shall + write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing + more with the current source_file, and go on to any + remaining source_files. + + If the -s option is specified, ln shall create a sym- + bolic link named by the destination path and containing + as its pathname source_file. The ln utility shall do + nothing more with source_file and shall go on to any + remaining files. + + If source_file is a symbolic link, actions shall be per- + formed equivalent to the link() function using the + object that source_file references as the path1 argument + and the destination path as the path2 argument. The ln + utility shall do nothing more with source_file and shall + go on to any remaining files. + + Actions shall be performed equivalent to the link() + function defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 using source_file as the path1 + argument, and the destination path as the path2 argu- + ment. + +OPTIONS + The ln utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -f Force existing destination pathnames to be + removed to allow the link. + + -s Create symbolic links instead of hard links. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + source_file + A pathname of a file to be linked. If the -s + option is specified, no restrictions on the type + of file or on its existence shall be made. If the + -s option is not specified, whether a directory + can be linked is implementation-defined. + + target_file + The pathname of the new directory entry to be + created. + + target_dir + A pathname of an existing directory in which the + new directory entries are created. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of ln: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All the specified files were linked successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + Some historic versions of ln (including the one speci- + fied by the SVID) unlink the destination file, if it + exists, by default. If the mode does not permit writing, + these versions prompt for confirmation before attempting + the unlink. In these versions the -f option causes ln + not to attempt to prompt for confirmation. + + This allows ln to succeed in creating links when the + target file already exists, even if the file itself is + not writable (although the directory must be). Early + proposals specified this functionality. + + This volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does not allow the + ln utility to unlink existing destination paths by + default for the following reasons: + + The ln utility has historically been used to pro- + vide locking for shell applications, a usage that + is incompatible with ln unlinking the destination + path by default. There was no corresponding tech- + nical advantage to adding this functionality. + + This functionality gave ln the ability to destroy + the link structure of files, which changes the + historical behavior of ln. + + This functionality is easily replicated with a + combination of rm and ln. + + It is not historical practice in many systems; + BSD and BSD-derived systems do not support this + behavior. Unfortunately, whichever behavior is + selected can cause scripts written expecting the + other behavior to fail. + + It is preferable that ln perform in the same man- + ner as the link() function, which does not permit + the target to exist already. + + This volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 retains the -f + option to provide support for shell scripts depending on + the SVID semantics. It seems likely that shell scripts + would not be written to handle prompting by ln and would + therefore have specified the -f option. + + The -f option is an undocumented feature of many histor- + ical versions of the ln utility, allowing linking to + directories. These versions require modification. + + Early proposals of this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + also required a -i option, which behaved like the -i + options in cp and mv, prompting for confirmation before + unlinking existing files. This was not historical prac- + tice for the ln utility and has been omitted. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + chmod() , find , pax , rm , the System Interfaces volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, link(), unlink() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 ln(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/logname.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/logname.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fada853 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/logname.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +logname(P) logname(P) + + + + + +NAME + logname - return the user's login name + +SYNOPSIS + logname + +DESCRIPTION + The logname utility shall write the user's login name to + standard output. The login name shall be the string that + would be returned by the getlogin() function defined in + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + Under the conditions where the getlogin() function would + fail, the logname utility shall write a diagnostic mes- + sage to standard error and exit with a non-zero exit + status. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + None. + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of logname: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The logname utility output shall be a single line con- + sisting of the user's login name: + + + "%s\n", <login name> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The logname utility explicitly ignores the LOGNAME envi- + ronment variable because environment changes could pro- + duce erroneous results. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The passwd file is not listed as required because the + implementation may have other means of mapping login + names. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + id , who , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, getlogin() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 logname(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/ls.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/ls.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d42df4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/ls.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,675 @@ +ls(P) ls(P) + + + + + +NAME + ls - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS + ls [-CFRacdilqrtu1][-H | -L ][-fgmnopsx][file...] + +DESCRIPTION + For each operand that names a file of a type other than + directory or symbolic link to a directory, ls shall + write the name of the file as well as any requested, + associated information. For each operand that names a + file of type directory, ls shall write the names of + files contained within the directory as well as any + requested, associated information. If one of the -d, -F, + or -l options are specified, and one of the -H or -L + options are not specified, for each operand that names a + file of type symbolic link to a directory, ls shall + write the name of the file as well as any requested, + associated information. If none of the -d, -F, or -l + options are specified, or the -H or -L options are spec- + ified, for each operand that names a file of type sym- + bolic link to a directory, ls shall write the names of + files contained within the directory as well as any + requested, associated information. + + If no operands are specified, ls shall write the con- + tents of the current directory. If more than one operand + is specified, ls shall write non-directory operands + first; it shall sort directory and non-directory oper- + ands separately according to the collating sequence in + the current locale. + + The ls utility shall detect infinite loops; that is, + entering a previously visited directory that is an + ancestor of the last file encountered. When it detects + an infinite loop, ls shall write a diagnostic message to + standard error and shall either recover its position in + the hierarchy or terminate. + +OPTIONS + The ls utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -C Write multi-text-column output with entries + sorted down the columns, according to the collat- + ing sequence. The number of text columns and the + column separator characters are unspecified, but + should be adapted to the nature of the output + device. + + -F Do not follow symbolic links named as operands + unless the -H or -L options are specified. Write + a slash ( '/' ) immediately after each pathname + that is a directory, an asterisk ( '*' ) after + each that is executable, a vertical bar ( '|' ) + after each that is a FIFO, and an at sign ( '@' ) + after each that is a symbolic link. For other + file types, other symbols may be written. + + -H If a symbolic link referencing a file of type + directory is specified on the command line, ls + shall evaluate the file information and file type + to be those of the file referenced by the link, + and not the link itself; however, ls shall write + the name of the link itself and not the file ref- + erenced by the link. + + -L Evaluate the file information and file type for + all symbolic links (whether named on the command + line or encountered in a file hierarchy) to be + those of the file referenced by the link, and not + the link itself; however, ls shall write the name + of the link itself and not the file referenced by + the link. When -L is used with -l, write the con- + tents of symbolic links in the long format (see + the STDOUT section). + + -R Recursively list subdirectories encountered. + + -a Write out all directory entries, including those + whose names begin with a period ( '.' ). Entries + beginning with a period shall not be written out + unless explicitly referenced, the -a option is + supplied, or an implementation-defined condition + shall cause them to be written. + + -c Use time of last modification of the file status + information (see <sys/stat.h> in the System + Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001) + instead of last modification of the file itself + for sorting ( -t) or writing ( -l). + + -d Do not follow symbolic links named as operands + unless the -H or -L options are specified. Do not + treat directories differently than other types of + files. The use of -d with -R produces unspecified + results. + + -f Force each argument to be interpreted as a direc- + tory and list the name found in each slot. This + option shall turn off -l, -t, -s, and -r, and + shall turn on -a; the order is the order in which + entries appear in the directory. + + -g The same as -l, except that the owner shall not + be written. + + -i For each file, write the file's file serial num- + ber (see stat() in the System Interfaces volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001). + + -l (The letter ell.) Do not follow symbolic links + named as operands unless the -H or -L options are + specified. Write out in long format (see the STD- + OUT section). When -l (ell) is specified, -1 + (one) shall be assumed. + + -m Stream output format; list files across the page, + separated by commas. + + -n The same as -l, except that the owner's UID and + GID numbers shall be written, rather than the + associated character strings. + + -o The same as -l, except that the group shall not + be written. + + -p Write a slash ( '/' ) after each filename if that + file is a directory. + + -q Force each instance of non-printable filename + characters and <tab>s to be written as the ques- + tion-mark ( '?' ) character. Implementations may + provide this option by default if the output is + to a terminal device. + + -r Reverse the order of the sort to get reverse col- + lating sequence or oldest first. + + -s Indicate the total number of file system blocks + consumed by each file displayed. The block size + is implementation-defined. <img + src="../images/opt-end.gif" alt="[Option End]" + border="0"> + + -t Sort with the primary key being time modified + (most recently modified first) and the secondary + key being filename in the collating sequence. + + -u Use time of last access (see <sys/stat.h>) + instead of last modification of the file for + sorting ( -t) or writing ( -l). + + -x The same as -C, except that the multi-text-column + output is produced with entries sorted across, + rather than down, the columns. + + -1 (The numeric digit one.) Force output to be one + entry per line. + + + Specifying more than one of the options in the following + mutually-exclusive pairs shall not be considered an + error: -C and -l (ell), -m and -l (ell), -x and -l + (ell), -C and -1 (one), -H and -L, -c and -u. The last + option specified in each pair shall determine the output + format. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file to be written. If the file + specified is not found, a diagnostic message + shall be output on standard error. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of ls: + + COLUMNS + Determine the user's preferred column position + width for writing multiple text-column output. If + this variable contains a string representing a + decimal integer, the ls utility shall calculate + how many pathname text columns to write (see -C) + based on the width provided. If COLUMNS is not + set or invalid, an implementation-defined number + of column positions shall be assumed, based on + the implementation's knowledge of the output + device. The column width chosen to write the + names of files in any given directory shall be + constant. Filenames shall not be truncated to fit + into the multiple text-column output. + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for character collation + information in determining the pathname collation + sequence. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments) and which charac- + ters are defined as printable (character class + print). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_TIME + Determine the format and contents for date and + time strings written by ls. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + TZ Determine the timezone for date and time strings + written by ls. If TZ is unset or null, an + unspecified default timezone shall be used. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The default format shall be to list one entry per line + to standard output; the exceptions are to terminals or + when one of the -C, -m, or -x options is specified. + If the output is to a terminal, the format is implemen- + tation-defined. + + When -m is specified, the format used shall be: + + + "%s, %s, ...\n", <filename1>, <filename2> + + where the largest number of filenames shall be written + without exceeding the length of the line. + + If the -i option is specified, the file's file serial + number (see <sys/stat.h>) shall be written in the fol- + lowing format before any other output for the corre- + sponding entry: + + + %u ", <file serial number> + + If the -l option is specified without -L, the following + information shall be written: + + + "%s %u %s %s %u %s %s\n", <file mode>, <number of links>, + <owner name>, <group name>, <number of bytes in the file>, + <date and time>, <pathname> + + If the file is a symbolic link, this information shall + be about the link itself and the <pathname> field shall + be of the form: + + + "%s -> %s", <pathname of link>, <contents of link> + + If both -l and -L are specified, the following informa- + tion shall be written: + + + "%s %u %s %s %u %s %s\n", <file mode>, <number of links>, + <owner name>, <group name>, <number of bytes in the file>, + <date and time>, <pathname of link> + + where all fields except <pathname of link> shall be for + the file resolved from the symbolic link. + + The -g, -n, and -o options use the same format as -l, + but with omitted items and their associated <blank>s. + See the OPTIONS section. + + In both the preceding -l forms, if <owner name> or + <group name> cannot be determined, or if -n is given, + they shall be replaced with their associated numeric + values using the format %u . + + The <date and time> field shall contain the appropriate + date and timestamp of when the file was last modified. + In the POSIX locale, the field shall be the equivalent + of the output of the following date command: + + + date "+%b %e %H:%M" + + if the file has been modified in the last six months, + or: + + + date "+%b %e %Y" + + (where two <space>s are used between %e and %Y ) if the + file has not been modified in the last six months or if + the modification date is in the future, except that, in + both cases, the final <newline> produced by date shall + not be included and the output shall be as if the date + command were executed at the time of the last modifica- + tion date of the file rather than the current time. When + the LC_TIME locale category is not set to the POSIX + locale, a different format and order of presentation of + this field may be used. + + If the file is a character special or block special + file, the size of the file may be replaced with imple- + mentation-defined information associated with the device + in question. + + If the pathname was specified as a file operand, it + shall be written as specified. + + The file mode written under the -l, -g, -n, and -o + options shall consist of the following format: + + + "%c%s%s%s%c", <entry type>, <owner permissions>, + <group permissions>, <other permissions>, + <optional alternate access method flag> + + The <optional alternate access method flag> shall be a + single <space> if there is no alternate or additional + access control method associated with the file; other- + wise, a printable character shall be used. + + The <entry type> character shall describe the type of + file, as follows: + + d Directory. + + b Block special file. + + c Character special file. + + l (ell) + Symbolic link. + + p FIFO. + + - Regular file. + + + Implementations may add other characters to this list to + represent other implementation-defined file types. + + The next three fields shall be three characters each: + + <owner permissions> + + Permissions for the file owner class (see the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 4.4, File Access Permissions). + + <group permissions> + + Permissions for the file group class. + + <other permissions> + + Permissions for the file other class. + + + Each field shall have three character positions: + + If 'r' , the file is readable; if '-' , the file is not + readable. + + If 'w' , the file is writable; if '-' , the file is not + writable. + + The first of the following that applies: + + S If in <owner permissions>, the file is not exe- + cutable and set-user-ID mode is set. If in + <group permissions>, the file is not executable + and set-group-ID mode is set. + + s If in <owner permissions>, the file is executable + and set-user-ID mode is set. If in <group permis- + sions>, the file is executable and set-group-ID + mode is set. + + T If in <other permissions> and the file is a + directory, search permission is not granted to + others, and the restricted deletion flag is set. + + t If in <other permissions> and the file is a + directory, search permission is granted to oth- + ers, and the restricted deletion flag is set. + + x The file is executable or the directory is + searchable. + + - None of the attributes of 'S' , 's' , 'T' , 't' , + or 'x' applies. + + + Implementations may add other characters to this list + for the third character position. Such additions shall, + however, be written in lowercase if the file is exe- + cutable or searchable, and in uppercase if it is not. + + If any of the -l, -g, -n, -o, or -s options is speci- + fied, each list of files within the directory shall be + preceded by a status line indicating the number of file + system blocks occupied by files in the directory in + 512-byte units, rounded up to the next integral number + of units, if necessary. In the POSIX locale, the format + shall be: + + + "total %u\n", <number of units in the directory> + + If more than one directory, or a combination of non- + directory files and directories are written, either as a + result of specifying multiple operands, or the -R + option, each list of files within a directory shall be + preceded by: + + + "\n%s:\n", <directory name> + + If this string is the first thing to be written, the + first <newline> shall not be written. This output shall + precede the number of units in the directory. + + If the -s option is given, each file shall be written + with the number of blocks used by the file. Along with + -C, -1, -m, or -x, the number and a <space> shall pre- + cede the filename; with -g, -l, -n, or -o, they shall + precede each line describing a file. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Many implementations use the equal sign ( '=' ) to + denote sockets bound to the file system for the -F + option. Similarly, many historical implementations use + the 's' character to denote sockets as the entry type + characters for the -l option. + + It is difficult for an application to use every part of + the file modes field of ls -l in a portable manner. + Certain file types and executable bits are not guaran- + teed to be exactly as shown, as implementations may have + extensions. Applications can use this field to pass + directly to a user printout or prompt, but actions based + on its contents should generally be deferred, instead, + to the test utility. + + The output of ls (with the -l and related options) con- + tains information that logically could be used by utili- + ties such as chmod and touch to restore files to a known + state. However, this information is presented in a for- + mat that cannot be used directly by those utilities or + be easily translated into a format that can be used. A + character has been added to the end of the permissions + string so that applications at least have an indication + that they may be working in an area they do not under- + stand instead of assuming that they can translate the + permissions string into something that can be used. + Future issues or related documents may define one or + more specific characters to be used based on different + standard additional or alternative access control mecha- + nisms. + + As with many of the utilities that deal with filenames, + the output of ls for multiple files or in one of the + long listing formats must be used carefully on systems + where filenames can contain embedded white space. Sys- + tems and system administrators should institute policies + and user training to limit the use of such filenames. + + The number of disk blocks occupied by the file that it + reports varies depending on underlying file system type, + block size units reported, and the method of calculating + the number of blocks. On some file system types, the + number is the actual number of blocks occupied by the + file (counting indirect blocks and ignoring holes in the + file); on others it is calculated based on the file size + (usually making an allowance for indirect blocks, but + ignoring holes). + +EXAMPLES + An example of a small directory tree being fully listed + with ls -laRF a in the POSIX locale: + + + total 11 + drwxr-xr-x 3 hlj prog 64 Jul 4 12:07 ./ + drwxrwxrwx 4 hlj prog 3264 Jul 4 12:09 ../ + drwxr-xr-x 2 hlj prog 48 Jul 4 12:07 b/ + -rwxr--r-- 1 hlj prog 572 Jul 4 12:07 foo* + + + a/b: + total 4 + drwxr-xr-x 2 hlj prog 48 Jul 4 12:07 ./ + drwxr-xr-x 3 hlj prog 64 Jul 4 12:07 ../ + -rw-r--r-- 1 hlj prog 700 Jul 4 12:07 bar + +RATIONALE + Some historical implementations of the ls utility show + all entries in a directory except dot and dot-dot when a + superuser invokes ls without specifying the -a option. + When "normal" users invoke ls without specifying -a, + they should not see information about any files with + names beginning with a period unless they were named as + file operands. + + Implementations are expected to traverse arbitrary + depths when processing the -R option. The only limita- + tion on depth should be based on running out of physical + storage for keeping track of untraversed directories. + + The -1 (one) option was historically found in BSD and + BSD-derived implementations only. It is required in this + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 so that conforming appli- + cations might ensure that output is one entry per line, + even if the output is to a terminal. + + Generally, this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 is silent + about what happens when options are given multiple + times. In the cases of -C, -l, and -1, however, it does + specify the results of these overlapping options. Since + ls is one of the most aliased commands, it is important + that the implementation perform intuitively. For exam- + ple, if the alias were: + + + alias ls="ls -C" + + and the user typed ls -1, single-text-column output + should result, not an error. + + The BSD ls provides a -A option (like -a, but dot and + dot-dot are not written out). The small difference from + -a did not seem important enough to require both. + + Implementations may make -q the default for terminals to + prevent trojan horse attacks on terminals with special + escape sequences. This is not required because: + + Some control characters may be useful on some + terminals; for example, a system might write them + as "\001" or "^A" . + + Special behavior for terminals is not relevant to + applications portability. + + An early proposal specified that the optional alternate + access method flag had to be '+' if there was an alter- + nate access method used on the file or <space> if there + was not. This was changed to be <space> if there is not + and a single printable character if there is. This was + done for three reasons: + + There are historical implementations using characters + other than '+' . + + There are implementations that vary this character used + in that position to distinguish between various alter- + nate access methods in use. + + The standard developers did not want to preclude future + specifications that might need a way to specify more + than one alternate access method. + + Nonetheless, implementations providing a single alter- + nate access method are encouraged to use '+' . + + In an early proposal, the units used to specify the num- + ber of blocks occupied by files in a directory in an ls + -l listing were implementation-defined. This was because + BSD systems have historically used 1024-byte units and + System V systems have historically used 512-byte units. + It was pointed out by BSD developers that their system + has used 512-byte units in some places and 1024-byte + units in other places. (System V has consistently used + 512.) Therefore, this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + usually specifies 512. Future releases of BSD are + expected to consistently provide 512 bytes as a default + with a way of specifying 1024-byte units where appropri- + ate. + + The <date and time> field in the -l format is specified + only for the POSIX locale. As noted, the format can be + different in other locales. No mechanism for defining + this is present in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + as the appropriate vehicle is a messaging system; that + is, the format should be specified as a "message". + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + The -s uses implementation-defined units and cannot be + used portably; it may be withdrawn in a future version. + +SEE ALSO + chmod() , find , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, stat(), the Base Definitions vol- + ume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, <sys/stat.h> + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 ls(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mkdir.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mkdir.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c6b986 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mkdir.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,201 @@ +mkdir(P) mkdir(P) + + + + + +NAME + mkdir - make directories + +SYNOPSIS + mkdir [-p][-m mode] dir... + +DESCRIPTION + The mkdir utility shall create the directories specified + by the operands, in the order specified. + + For each dir operand, the mkdir utility shall perform + actions equivalent to the mkdir() function defined in + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + called with the following arguments: + + The dir operand is used as the path argument. + + The value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRWXU, + S_IRWXG, and S_IRWXO is used as the mode argument. (If + the -m option is specified, the mode option-argument + overrides this default.) + +OPTIONS + The mkdir utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -m mode + Set the file permission bits of the newly-created + directory to the specified mode value. The mode + option-argument shall be the same as the mode op- + erand defined for the chmod utility. In the sym- + bolic_mode strings, the op characters '+' and '-' + shall be interpreted relative to an assumed ini- + tial mode of a= rwx; '+' shall add permissions to + the default mode, '-' shall delete permissions + from the default mode. + + -p Create any missing intermediate pathname compo- + nents. + + For each dir operand that does not name an existing + directory, effects equivalent to those caused by the + following command shall occur: + + + mkdir -p -m $(umask -S),u+wx $(dirname dir) && + mkdir [-m mode] dir + + where the -m mode option represents that option supplied + to the original invocation of mkdir, if any. + + Each dir operand that names an existing directory shall + be ignored without error. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + dir A pathname of a directory to be created. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of mkdir: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All the specified directories were created suc- + cessfully or the -p option was specified and all + the specified directories now exist. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The default file mode for directories is a= rwx (777 on + most systems) with selected permissions removed in + accordance with the file mode creation mask. For inter- + mediate pathname components created by mkdir, the mode + is the default modified by u+ wx so that the subdirecto- + ries can always be created regardless of the file mode + creation mask; if different ultimate permissions are + desired for the intermediate directories, they can be + changed afterwards with chmod. + + Note that some of the requested directories may have + been created even if an error occurs. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The System V -m option was included to control the file + mode. + + The System V -p option was included to create any needed + intermediate directories and to complement the function- + ality provided by rmdir for removing directories in the + path prefix as they become empty. Because no error is + produced if any path component already exists, the -p + option is also useful to ensure that a particular direc- + tory exists. + + The functionality of mkdir is described substantially + through a reference to the mkdir() function in the Sys- + tem Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. For exam- + ple, by default, the mode of the directory is affected + by the file mode creation mask in accordance with the + specified behavior of the mkdir() function. In this way, + there is less duplication of effort required for + describing details of the directory creation. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + chmod() , rm , rmdir() , umask() , the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, mkdir() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 mkdir(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mkfifo.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mkfifo.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42442b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mkfifo.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +mkfifo(P) mkfifo(P) + + + + + +NAME + mkfifo - make FIFO special files + +SYNOPSIS + mkfifo [-m mode] file... + +DESCRIPTION + The mkfifo utility shall create the FIFO special files + specified by the operands, in the order specified. + + For each file operand, the mkfifo utility shall perform + actions equivalent to the mkfifo() function defined in + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + called with the following arguments: + + The file operand is used as the path argument. + + The value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRUSR, + S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and S_IWOTH is used + as the mode argument. (If the -m option is specified, + the value of the mkfifo() mode argument is unspecified, + but the FIFO shall at no time have permissions less + restrictive than the -m mode option-argument.) + +OPTIONS + The mkfifo utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -m mode + Set the file permission bits of the newly-created + FIFO to the specified mode value. The mode + option-argument shall be the same as the mode op- + erand defined for the chmod utility. In the sym- + bolic_mode strings, the op characters '+' and '-' + shall be interpreted relative to an assumed ini- + tial mode of a= rw. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of the FIFO special file to be cre- + ated. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of mkfifo: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale + categories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All the specified FIFO special files were created + successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + This utility was added to permit shell applications to + create FIFO special files. + + The -m option was added to control the file mode, for + consistency with the similar functionality provided by + the mkdir utility. + + Early proposals included a -p option similar to the + mkdir -p option that created intermediate directories + leading up to the FIFO specified by the final component. + This was removed because it is not commonly needed and + is not common practice with similar utilities. + + The functionality of mkfifo is described substantially + through a reference to the mkfifo() function in the Sys- + tem Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. For exam- + ple, by default, the mode of the FIFO file is affected + by the file mode creation mask in accordance with the + specified behavior of the mkfifo() function. In this + way, there is less duplication of effort required for + describing details of the file creation. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + chmod() , umask() , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, mkfifo() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 mkfifo(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mv.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mv.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ffde327 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/mv.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,373 @@ +mv(P) mv(P) + + + + + +NAME + mv - move files + +SYNOPSIS + mv [-fi] source_file target_file + + mv [-fi] source_file... target_file + + +DESCRIPTION + In the first synopsis form, the mv utility shall move + the file named by the source_file operand to the desti- + nation specified by the target_file. This first synopsis + form is assumed when the final operand does not name an + existing directory and is not a symbolic link referring + to an existing directory. + + In the second synopsis form, mv shall move each file + named by a source_file operand to a destination file in + the existing directory named by the target_dir operand, + or referenced if target_dir is a symbolic link referring + to an existing directory. The destination path for each + source_file shall be the concatenation of the target + directory, a single slash character, and the last path- + name component of the source_file. This second form is + assumed when the final operand names an existing direc- + tory. + + If any operand specifies an existing file of a type not + specified by the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, the behavior is implementation- + defined. + + For each source_file the following steps shall be taken: + + If the destination path exists, the -f option is not + specified, and either of the following conditions is + true: <ol type="a"> + + The permissions of the destination path do not permit + writing and the standard input is a terminal. + + The -i option is specified. + + the mv utility shall write a prompt to standard error + and read a line from standard input. If the response is + not affirmative, mv shall do nothing more with the cur- + rent source_file and go on to any remaining + source_files. + + The mv utility shall perform actions equivalent to the + rename() function defined in the System Interfaces vol- + ume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, called with the following + arguments: <ol type="a"> + + The source_file operand is used as the old argument. + + The destination path is used as the new argument. + + If this succeeds, mv shall do nothing more with the cur- + rent source_file and go on to any remaining + source_files. If this fails for any reasons other than + those described for the errno [EXDEV] in the System + Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, mv shall + write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing + more with the current source_file, and go on to any + remaining source_files. + + If the destination path exists, and it is a file of type + directory and source_file is not a file of type direc- + tory, or it is a file not of type directory and + source_file is a file of type directory, mv shall write + a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more + with the current source_file, and go on to any remaining + source_files. + + If the destination path exists, mv shall attempt to + remove it. If this fails for any reason, mv shall write + a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more + with the current source_file, and go on to any remaining + source_files. + + The file hierarchy rooted in source_file shall be dupli- + cated as a file hierarchy rooted in the destination + path. If source_file or any of the files below it in the + hierarchy are symbolic links, the links themselves shall + be duplicated, including their contents, rather than any + files to which they refer. The following characteris- + tics of each file in the file hierarchy shall be dupli- + cated: + + The time of last data modification and time of + last access + + The user ID and group ID + + The file mode + + If the user ID, group ID, or file mode of a regular file + cannot be duplicated, the file mode bits S_ISUID and + S_ISGID shall not be duplicated. + + When files are duplicated to another file system, the + implementation may require that the process invoking mv + has read access to each file being duplicated. + + If the duplication of the file hierarchy fails for any + reason, mv shall write a diagnostic message to standard + error, do nothing more with the current source_file, and + go on to any remaining source_files. + + If the duplication of the file characteristics fails for + any reason, mv shall write a diagnostic message to stan- + dard error, but this failure shall not cause mv to mod- + ify its exit status. + + The file hierarchy rooted in source_file shall be + removed. If this fails for any reason, mv shall write a + diagnostic message to the standard error, do nothing + more with the current source_file, and go on to any + remaining source_files. + +OPTIONS + The mv utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -f Do not prompt for confirmation if the destination + path exists. Any previous occurrence of the -i + option is ignored. + + -i Prompt for confirmation if the destination path + exists. Any previous occurrence of the -f option + is ignored. + + + Specifying more than one of the -f or -i options shall + not be considered an error. The last option specified + shall determine the behavior of mv. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + source_file + A pathname of a file or directory to be moved. + + target_file + A new pathname for the file or directory being + moved. + + target_dir + A pathname of an existing directory into which to + move the input files. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used to read an input line + in response to each prompt specified in the STDERR sec- + tion. Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used. + +INPUT FILES + The input files specified by each source_file operand + can be of any file type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of mv: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements used in the extended regular expres- + sion defined for the yesexpr locale keyword in + the LC_MESSAGES category. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + the behavior of character classes used in the + extended regular expression defined for the + yesexpr locale keyword in the LC_MESSAGES cate- + gory. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale for the processing of affir- + mative responses that should be used to affect + the format and contents of diagnostic messages + written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + Prompts shall be written to the standard error under the + conditions specified in the DESCRIPTION section. The + prompts shall contain the destination pathname, but + their format is otherwise unspecified. Otherwise, the + standard error shall be used only for diagnostic mes- + sages. + +OUTPUT FILES + The output files may be of any file type. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were moved successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + If the copying or removal of source_file is prematurely + terminated by a signal or error, mv may leave a partial + copy of source_file at the source or destination. The mv + utility shall not modify both source_file and the desti- + nation path simultaneously; termination at any point + shall leave either source_file or the destination path + complete. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Some implementations mark for update the st_ctime field + of renamed files and some do not. Applications which + make use of the st_ctime field may behave differently + with respect to renamed files unless they are designed + to allow for either behavior. + +EXAMPLES + If the current directory contains only files a (of any + type defined by the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001), b (also of any type), and a + directory c: + + + mv a b c + mv c d + + results with the original files a and b residing in the + directory d in the current directory. + +RATIONALE + Early proposals diverged from the SVID and BSD histori- + cal practice in that they required that when the desti- + nation path exists, the -f option is not specified, and + input is not a terminal, mv fails. This was done for + compatibility with cp. The current text returns to his- + torical practice. It should be noted that this is con- + sistent with the rename() function defined in the System + Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, which does + not require write permission on the target. + + For absolute clarity, paragraph (1), describing the + behavior of mv when prompting for confirmation, should + be interpreted in the following manner: + + + if (exists AND (NOT f_option) AND + ((not_writable AND input_is_terminal) OR i_option)) + + The -i option exists on BSD systems, giving applications + and users a way to avoid accidentally unlinking files + when moving others. When the standard input is not a + terminal, the 4.3 BSD mv deletes all existing destina- + tion paths without prompting, even when -i is specified; + this is inconsistent with the behavior of the 4.3 BSD cp + utility, which always generates an error when the file + is unwritable and the standard input is not a terminal. + The standard developers decided that use of -i is a + request for interaction, so when the destination path + exists, the utility takes instructions from whatever + responds to standard input. + + The rename() function is able to move directories within + the same file system. Some historical versions of mv + have been able to move directories, but not to a differ- + ent file system. The standard developers considered that + this was an annoying inconsistency, so this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 requires directories to be able to + be moved even across file systems. There is no -R option + to confirm that moving a directory is actually intended, + since such an option was not required for moving direc- + tories in historical practice. Requiring the application + to specify it sometimes, depending on the destination, + seemed just as inconsistent. The semantics of the + rename() function were preserved as much as possible. + For example, mv is not permitted to "rename" files to or + from directories, even though they might be empty and + removable. + + Historic implementations of mv did not exit with a non- + zero exit status if they were unable to duplicate any + file characteristics when moving a file across file sys- + tems, nor did they write a diagnostic message for the + user. The former behavior has been preserved to prevent + scripts from breaking; a diagnostic message is now + required, however, so that users are alerted that the + file characteristics have changed. + + The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspeci- + fied. Only the general nature of the contents of prompts + are specified because implementations may desire more + descriptive prompts than those used on historical imple- + mentations. Therefore, an application not using the -f + option or using the -i option relies on the system to + provide the most suitable dialog directly with the user, + based on the behavior specified. + + When mv is dealing with a single file system and + source_file is a symbolic link, the link itself is moved + as a consequence of the dependence on the rename() func- + tionality, per the DESCRIPTION. Across file systems, + this has to be made explicit. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + cp , ln , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, rename() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 mv(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nice.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nice.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bece1c --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nice.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,268 @@ +nice(P) nice(P) + + + + + +NAME + nice - invoke a utility with an altered nice value + +SYNOPSIS + nice [-n increment] utility [argument...] + +DESCRIPTION + The nice utility shall invoke a utility, requesting that + it be run with a different nice value (see the Base Def- + initions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 3.239, + Nice Value). With no options and only if the user has + appropriate privileges, the executed utility shall be + run with a nice value that is some implementation- + defined quantity less than or equal to the nice value of + the current process. If the user lacks appropriate priv- + ileges to affect the nice value in the requested manner, + the nice utility shall not affect the nice value; in + this case, a warning message may be written to standard + error, but this shall not prevent the invocation of + utility or affect the exit status. + +OPTIONS + The nice utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option is supported: + + -n increment + A positive or negative decimal integer which + shall have the same effect on the execution of + the utility as if the utility had called the + nice() function with the numeric value of the + increment option-argument. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + utility + The name of a utility that is to be invoked. If + the utility operand names any of the special + built-in utilities in Special Built-In Utilities + , the results are undefined. + + argument + Any string to be supplied as an argument when + invoking the utility named by the utility oper- + and. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of nice: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + PATH Determine the search path used to locate the + utility to be invoked. See the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 8, Envi- + ronment Variables. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + If utility is invoked, the exit status of nice shall be + the exit status of utility; otherwise, the nice utility + shall exit with one of the following values: + + 1-125 An error occurred in the nice utility. + + 126 The utility specified by utility was found but + could not be invoked. + + 127 The utility specified by utility could not be + found. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The only guaranteed portable uses of this utility are: + + nice utility + + Run utility with the default lower nice value. + + nice -n <positive integer> utility + + Run utility with a lower nice value. + + + On some implementations they have no discernible effect + on the invoked utility and on some others they are + exactly equivalent. + + Historical systems have frequently supported the <posi- + tive integer> up to 20. Since there is no error penalty + associated with guessing a number that is too high, + users without access to the system conformance document + (to see what limits are actually in place) could use the + historical 1 to 20 range or attempt to use very large + numbers if the job should be truly low priority. + + The nice value of a process can be displayed using the + command: + + + ps -o nice + + The command, env, nice, nohup, time, and xargs utilities + have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error + occurs so that applications can distinguish "failure to + find a utility" from "invoked utility exited with an + error indication". The value 127 was chosen because it + is not commonly used for other meanings; most utilities + use small values for "normal error conditions" and the + values above 128 can be confused with termination due to + receipt of a signal. The value 126 was chosen in a simi- + lar manner to indicate that the utility could be found, + but not invoked. Some scripts produce meaningful error + messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The dis- + tinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on + KornShell practice that uses 127 when all attempts to + exec the utility fail with [ENOENT], and uses 126 when + any attempt to exec the utility fails for any other rea- + son. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + Due to the text about the limits of the nice value being + implementation-defined, nice is not actually required to + change the nice value of the executed command; the lim- + its could be zero differences from the system default, + although the implementor is required to document this + fact in the conformance document. + + The 4.3 BSD version of nice does not check whether + increment is a valid decimal integer. The command nice + -x utility, for example, would be treated the same as + the command nice --1 utility. If the user does not have + appropriate privileges, this results in a "permission + denied" error. This is considered a bug. + + When a user without appropriate privileges gives a nega- + tive increment, System V treats it like the command nice + -0 utility, while 4.3 BSD writes a "permission denied" + message and does not run the utility. Neither was con- + sidered clearly superior, so the behavior was left + unspecified. + + The C shell has a built-in version of nice that has a + different interface from the one described in this + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + The term "utility" is used, rather than "command", to + highlight the fact that shell compound commands, pipe- + lines, and so on, cannot be used. Special built-ins also + cannot be used. However, "utility" includes user appli- + cation programs and shell scripts, not just utilities + defined in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + Historical implementations of nice provide a nice value + range of 40 or 41 discrete steps, with the default nice + value being the midpoint of that range. By default, they + lower the nice value of the executed utility by 10. + + Some historical documentation states that the increment + value must be within a fixed range. This is misleading; + the valid increment values on any invocation are deter- + mined by the current process nice value, which is not + always the default. + + The definition of nice value is not intended to suggest + that all processes in a system have priorities that are + comparable. Scheduling policy extensions such as the + realtime priorities in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 make the notion of a single under- + lying priority for all scheduling policies problematic. + Some implementations may implement the nice-related fea- + tures to affect all processes on the system, others to + affect just the general time-sharing activities implied + by this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, and others may + have no effect at all. Because of the use of "implemen- + tation-defined" in nice and renice, a wide range of + implementation strategies are possible. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Shell Command Language , renice , the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, nice() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 nice(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nl.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nl.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6bb51ac --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nl.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,269 @@ +nl(P) nl(P) + + + + + +NAME + nl - line numbering filter + +SYNOPSIS + nl [-p][-b type][-d delim][-f type][-h type][-i incr][-l + num][-n format] + [-s sep][-v startnum][-w width][file] + +DESCRIPTION + The nl utility shall read lines from the named file or + the standard input if no file is named and shall repro- + duce the lines to standard output. Lines shall be num- + bered on the left. Additional functionality may be pro- + vided in accordance with the command options in effect. + + The nl utility views the text it reads in terms of logi- + cal pages. Line numbering shall be reset at the start + of each logical page. A logical page consists of a + header, a body, and a footer section. Empty sections are + valid. Different line numbering options are indepen- + dently available for header, body, and footer (for exam- + ple, no numbering of header and footer lines while num- + bering blank lines only in the body). + + The starts of logical page sections shall be signaled by + input lines containing nothing but the following delim- + iter characters: + Line Start of + \:\:\: Header + \:\: Body + \: Footer + + Unless otherwise specified, nl shall assume the text + being read is in a single logical page body. + +OPTIONS + The nl utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. Only one file can be named. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -b type + Specify which logical page body lines shall be + numbered. Recognized types and their meaning are: + + a Number all lines. + + t Number only non-empty lines. + + n No line numbering. + + pstring + Number only lines that contain the basic regular + expression specified in string. + + + The default type for logical page body shall be t (text + lines numbered). + + -d delim + Specify the delimiter characters that indicate + the start of a logical page section. These can be + changed from the default characters "\:" to two + user-specified characters. If only one character + is entered, the second character shall remain the + default character ':' . + + -f type + Specify the same as b type except for footer. The + default for logical page footer shall be n (no + lines numbered). + + -h type + Specify the same as b type except for header. The + default type for logical page header shall be n + (no lines numbered). + + -i incr + Specify the increment value used to number logi- + cal page lines. The default shall be 1. + + -l num + Specify the number of blank lines to be consid- + ered as one. For example, -l 2 results in only + the second adjacent blank line being numbered (if + the appropriate -h a, -b a, or -f a option is + set). The default shall be 1. + + -n format + Specify the line numbering format. Recognized + values are: ln, left justified, leading zeros + suppressed; rn, right justified, leading zeros + suppressed; rz, right justified, leading zeros + kept. The default format shall be rn (right jus- + tified). + + -p Specify that numbering should not be restarted at + logical page delimiters. + + -s sep + Specify the characters used in separating the + line number and the corresponding text line. The + default sep shall be a <tab>. + + -v startnum + Specify the initial value used to number logical + page lines. The default shall be 1. + + -w width + Specify the number of characters to be used for + the line number. The default width shall be 6. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a text file to be line-numbered. + + +STDIN + The standard input is a text file that is used if no + file operand is given. + +INPUT FILES + The input file named by the file operand is a text file. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of nl: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements within regular expressions. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + the behavior of character classes within regular + expressions, and for deciding which characters + are in character class graph (for the -b t, -f t, + and -h t options). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be a text file in the follow- + ing format: + + + "%s%s%s", <line number>, <separator>, <input line> + + where <line number> is one of the following numeric for- + mats: + + %6d When the rn format is used (the default; see -n). + + %06d When the rz format is used. + + %-6d When the ln format is used. + + <empty> + When line numbers are suppressed for a portion of + the page; the <separator> is also suppressed. + + + In the preceding list, the number 6 is the default + width; the -w option can change this value. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + In using the -d delim option, care should be taken to + escape characters that have special meaning to the com- + mand interpreter. + +EXAMPLES + The command: + + + nl -v 10 -i 10 -d \!+ file1 + + numbers file1 starting at line number 10 with an incre- + ment of 10. The logical page delimiter is "!+" . Note + that the '!' has to be escaped when using csh as a com- + mand interpreter because of its history substitution + syntax. For ksh and sh the escape is not necessary, but + does not do any harm. + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + pr + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 nl(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nohup.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nohup.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10d1fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/nohup.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,229 @@ +nohup(P) nohup(P) + + + + + +NAME + nohup - invoke a utility immune to hangups + +SYNOPSIS + nohup utility [argument...] + +DESCRIPTION + The nohup utility shall invoke the utility named by the + utility operand with arguments supplied as the argument + operands. At the time the named utility is invoked, the + SIGHUP signal shall be set to be ignored. + + If the standard output is a terminal, all output written + by the named utility to its standard output shall be + appended to the end of the file nohup.out in the current + directory. If nohup.out cannot be created or opened for + appending, the output shall be appended to the end of + the file nohup.out in the directory specified by the + HOME environment variable. If neither file can be cre- + ated or opened for appending, utility shall not be + invoked. If a file is created, the file's permission + bits shall be set to S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR. + + If the standard error is a terminal, all output written + by the named utility to its standard error shall be + redirected to the same file descriptor as the standard + output. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + utility + The name of a utility that is to be invoked. If + the utility operand names any of the special + built-in utilities in Special Built-In Utilities + , the results are undefined. + + argument + Any string to be supplied as an argument when + invoking the utility named by the utility oper- + and. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of nohup: + + HOME Determine the pathname of the user's home direc- + tory: if the output file nohup.out cannot be cre- + ated in the current directory, the nohup utility + shall use the directory named by HOME to create + the file. + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + PATH Determine the search path that is used to locate + the utility to be invoked. See the Base Defini- + tions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 8, + Environment Variables. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + The nohup utility shall take the standard action for all + signals except that SIGHUP shall be ignored. + +STDOUT + If the standard output is not a terminal, the standard + output of nohup shall be the standard output generated + by the execution of the utility specified by the oper- + ands. Otherwise, nothing shall be written to the stan- + dard output. + +STDERR + If the standard output is a terminal, a message shall be + written to the standard error, indicating the name of + the file to which the output is being appended. The name + of the file shall be either nohup.out or + $HOME/nohup.out. + +OUTPUT FILES + If the standard output is a terminal, all output written + by the named utility to the standard output and standard + error is appended to the file nohup.out, which is cre- + ated if it does not already exist. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 126 The utility specified by utility was found but + could not be invoked. + + 127 An error occurred in the nohup utility or the + utility specified by utility could not be found. + + + Otherwise, the exit status of nohup shall be that of the + utility specified by the utility operand. + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The command, env, nice, nohup, time, and xargs utilities + have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error + occurs so that applications can distinguish "failure to + find a utility" from "invoked utility exited with an + error indication". The value 127 was chosen because it + is not commonly used for other meanings; most utilities + use small values for "normal error conditions" and the + values above 128 can be confused with termination due to + receipt of a signal. The value 126 was chosen in a simi- + lar manner to indicate that the utility could be found, + but not invoked. Some scripts produce meaningful error + messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The dis- + tinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on + KornShell practice that uses 127 when all attempts to + exec the utility fail with [ENOENT], and uses 126 when + any attempt to exec the utility fails for any other rea- + son. + +EXAMPLES + It is frequently desirable to apply nohup to pipelines + or lists of commands. This can be done by placing pipe- + lines and command lists in a single file; this file can + then be invoked as a utility, and the nohup applies to + everything in the file. + + Alternatively, the following command can be used to + apply nohup to a complex command: + + + nohup sh -c 'complex-command-line' + +RATIONALE + The 4.3 BSD version ignores SIGTERM and SIGHUP, and if + ./nohup.out cannot be used, it fails instead of trying + to use $HOME/nohup.out. + + The csh utility has a built-in version of nohup that + acts differently from the nohup defined in this volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + The term utility is used, rather than command, to high- + light the fact that shell compound commands, pipelines, + special built-ins, and so on, cannot be used directly. + However, utility includes user application programs and + shell scripts, not just the standard utilities. + + Historical versions of the nohup utility use default + file creation semantics. Some more recent versions use + the permissions specified here as an added security pre- + caution. + + Some historical implementations ignore SIGQUIT in addi- + tion to SIGHUP; others ignore SIGTERM. An early proposal + allowed, but did not require, SIGQUIT to be ignored. + Several reviewers objected that nohup should only modify + the handling of SIGHUP as required by this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Shell Command Language , sh , the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, signal() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 nohup(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/od.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/od.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c64c3ae --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/od.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,641 @@ +od(P) od(P) + + + + + +NAME + od - dump files in various formats + +SYNOPSIS + od [-v][-A address_base][-j skip][-N count][-t + type_string]... + [file...] + + + + od [-bcdosx][file] [[+]offset[.][b]] + + +DESCRIPTION + The od utility shall write the contents of its input + files to standard output in a user-specified format. + +OPTIONS + The od utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines, except that the order of presentation + of the -t options and the -bcdosx options is signifi- + cant. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -A address_base + + Specify the input offset base. See the EXTENDED + DESCRIPTION section. The application shall + ensure that the address_base option-argument is a + character. The characters 'd' , 'o' , and 'x' + specify that the offset base shall be written in + decimal, octal, or hexadecimal, respectively. The + character 'n' specifies that the offset shall not + be written. + + -b Interpret bytes in octal. This shall be equiva- + lent to -t o1. + + -c Interpret bytes as characters specified by the + current setting of the LC_CTYPE category. Certain + non-graphic characters appear as C escapes: + "NUL=\0" , "BS=\b" , "FF=\f" , "NL=\n" , "CR=\r" + , "HT=\t" ; others appear as 3-digit octal num- + bers. + + -d Interpret words (two-byte units) in unsigned dec- + imal. This shall be equivalent to -t u2. + + -j skip + Jump over skip bytes from the beginning of the + input. The od utility shall read or seek past the + first skip bytes in the concatenated input files. + If the combined input is not at least skip bytes + long, the od utility shall write a diagnostic + message to standard error and exit with a non- + zero exit status. + + By default, the skip option-argument shall be inter- + preted as a decimal number. With a leading 0x or 0X, the + offset shall be interpreted as a hexadecimal number; + otherwise, with a leading '0' , the offset shall be + interpreted as an octal number. Appending the character + 'b' , 'k' , or 'm' to offset shall cause it to be inter- + preted as a multiple of 512, 1024, or 1048576 bytes, + respectively. If the skip number is hexadecimal, any + appended 'b' shall be considered to be the final hexa- + decimal digit. + + -N count + Format no more than count bytes of input. By + default, count shall be interpreted as a decimal + number. With a leading 0x or 0X, count shall be + interpreted as a hexadecimal number; otherwise, + with a leading '0' , it shall be interpreted as + an octal number. If count bytes of input (after + successfully skipping, if -j skip is specified) + are not available, it shall not be considered an + error; the od utility shall format the input that + is available. + + -o Interpret words (two-byte units) in octal. This + shall be equivalent to -t o2. + + -s Interpret words (two-byte units) in signed deci- + mal. This shall be equivalent to -t d2. + + -t type_string + + Specify one or more output types. See the + EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. The application + shall ensure that the type_string option-argument + is a string specifying the types to be used when + writing the input data. The string shall consist + of the type specification characters a , c , d , + f , o , u , and x , specifying named character, + character, signed decimal, floating point, octal, + unsigned decimal, and hexadecimal, respectively. + The type specification characters d , f , o , u , + and x can be followed by an optional unsigned + decimal integer that specifies the number of + bytes to be transformed by each instance of the + output type. The type specification character f + can be followed by an optional F , D , or L indi- + cating that the conversion should be applied to + an item of type float, double, or long double, + respectively. The type specification characters d + , o , u , and x can be followed by an optional C + , S , I , or L indicating that the conversion + should be applied to an item of type char, short, + int, or long, respectively. Multiple types can be + concatenated within the same type_string and mul- + tiple -t options can be specified. Output lines + shall be written for each type specified in the + order in which the type specification characters + are specified. + + -v Write all input data. Without the -v option, any + number of groups of output lines, which would be + identical to the immediately preceding group of + output lines (except for the byte offsets), shall + be replaced with a line containing only an aster- + isk ( '*' ). + + -x Interpret words (two-byte units) in hexadecimal. + This shall be equivalent to -t x2. + + + Multiple types can be specified by using multiple + -bcdostx options. Output lines are written for each + type specified in the order in which the types are spec- + ified. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file to be read. If no file oper- + ands are specified, the standard input shall be + used. + + If there are no more than two operands, none of the -A, + -j, -N, or -t options is specified, and either of the + following is true: the first character of the last oper- + and is a plus sign ( '+' ), or there are two operands + and the first character of the last operand is numeric; + the last operand shall be interpreted as an offset op- + erand on XSI-conformant systems. Under these condi- + tions, the results are unspecified on systems that are + not XSI-conformant systems. + + [+]offset[.][b] + The offset operand specifies the offset in the + file where dumping is to commence. This operand + is normally interpreted as octal bytes. If '.' is + appended, the offset shall be interpreted in dec- + imal. If 'b' is appended, the offset shall be + interpreted in units of 512 bytes. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files can be any file type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of od: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_NUMERIC + + Determine the locale for selecting the radix + character used when writing floating-point for- + matted output. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + The od utility shall copy sequentially each input file + to standard output, transforming the input data accord- + ing to the output types specified by the -t option or + the -bcdosx options. If no output type is specified, + the default output shall be as if -t oS had been speci- + fied. + + The number of bytes transformed by the output type spec- + ifier c may be variable depending on the LC_CTYPE cate- + gory. + + The default number of bytes transformed by output type + specifiers d , f , o , u , and x corresponds to the var- + ious C-language types as follows. If the c99 compiler is + present on the system, these specifiers shall correspond + to the sizes used by default in that compiler. Other- + wise, these sizes may vary among systems that conform to + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + For the type specifier characters d , o , u , and + x , the default number of bytes shall correspond + to the size of the underlying implementation's + basic integer type. For these specifier charac- + ters, the implementation shall support values of + the optional number of bytes to be converted cor- + responding to the number of bytes in the C-lan- + guage types char, short, int, and long. These + numbers can also be specified by an application + as the characters 'C' , 'S' , 'I' , and 'L' , + respectively. The implementation shall also sup- + port the values 1, 2, 4, and 8, even if it pro- + vides no C-Language types of those sizes. The + implementation shall support the decimal value + corresponding to the C-language type long long. + The byte order used when interpreting numeric + values is implementation-defined, but shall cor- + respond to the order in which a constant of the + corresponding type is stored in memory on the + system. + + For the type specifier character f , the default + number of bytes shall correspond to the number of + bytes in the underlying implementation's basic + double precision floating-point data type. The + implementation shall support values of the + optional number of bytes to be converted corre- + sponding to the number of bytes in the C-language + types float, double, and long double. These num- + bers can also be specified by an application as + the characters 'F' , 'D' , and 'L' , respec- + tively. + + The type specifier character a specifies that bytes + shall be interpreted as named characters from the Inter- + national Reference Version (IRV) of the ISO/IEC 646:1991 + standard. Only the least significant seven bits of each + byte shall be used for this type specification. Bytes + with the values listed in the following table shall be + written using the corresponding names for those charac- + ters. + Table: Named Characters in od +Value Name Value Name Value Name Value Name +\000 nul \001 soh \002 stx \003 etx +\004 eot \005 enq \006 ack \007 bel +\010 bs \011 ht \012 lf or nl \013 vt +\014 ff \015 cr \016 so \017 si +\020 dle \021 dc1 \022 dc2 \023 dc3 +\024 dc4 \025 nak \026 syn \027 etb +\030 can \031 em \032 sub \033 esc +\034 fs \035 gs \036 rs \037 us +\040 sp \177 del + + Note: The "\012" value may be written either as lf or + nl. + + + The type specifier character c specifies that bytes + shall be interpreted as characters specified by the cur- + rent setting of the LC_CTYPE locale category. Characters + listed in the table in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 5, File Format Notation ( + '\\' , '\a' , '\b' , '\f' , '\n' , '\r' , '\t' , '\v' ) + shall be written as the corresponding escape sequences, + except that backslash shall be written as a single back- + slash and a NUL shall be written as '\0' . Other non- + printable characters shall be written as one three-digit + octal number for each byte in the character. If the size + of a byte on the system is greater than nine bits, the + format used for non-printable characters is implementa- + tion-defined. Printable multi-byte characters shall be + written in the area corresponding to the first byte of + the character; the two-character sequence "**" shall be + written in the area corresponding to each remaining byte + in the character, as an indication that the character is + continued. When either the -j skip or -N count option is + specified along with the c type specifier, and this + results in an attempt to start or finish in the middle + of a multi-byte character, the result is implementation- + defined. + + The input data shall be manipulated in blocks, where a + block is defined as a multiple of the least common mul- + tiple of the number of bytes transformed by the speci- + fied output types. If the least common multiple is + greater than 16, the results are unspecified. Each + input block shall be written as transformed by each out- + put type, one per written line, in the order that the + output types were specified. If the input block size is + larger than the number of bytes transformed by the out- + put type, the output type shall sequentially transform + the parts of the input block, and the output from each + of the transformations shall be separated by one or more + <blank>s. + + If, as a result of the specification of the -N option or + end-of-file being reached on the last input file, input + data only partially satisfies an output type, the input + shall be extended sufficiently with null bytes to write + the last byte of the input. + + Unless -A n is specified, the first output line produced + for each input block shall be preceded by the input off- + set, cumulative across input files, of the next byte to + be written. The format of the input offset is unspeci- + fied; however, it shall not contain any <blank>s, shall + start at the first character of the output line, and + shall be followed by one or more <blank>s. In addition, + the offset of the byte following the last byte written + shall be written after all the input data has been pro- + cessed, but shall not be followed by any <blank>s. + + If no -A option is specified, the input offset base is + unspecified. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were processed successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + XSI-conformant applications are warned not to use file- + names starting with '+' or a first operand starting with + a numeric character so that the old functionality can be + maintained by implementations, unless they specify one + of the -A, -j, or -N options. To guarantee that one of + these filenames is always interpreted as a filename, an + application could always specify the address base format + with the -A option. + +EXAMPLES + If a file containing 128 bytes with decimal values zero + to 127, in increasing order, is supplied as standard + input to the command: + + + od -A d -t a + + on an implementation using an input block size of 16 + bytes, the standard output, independent of the current + locale setting, would be similar to: + + + 0000000 nul soh stx etx eot enq ack bel bs ht nl vt ff cr so si + 0000016 dle dc1 dc2 dc3 dc4 nak syn etb can em sub esc fs gs rs us + 0000032 sp ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / + 0000048 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? + 0000064 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O + 0000080 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ + 0000096 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o + 0000112 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ del + 0000128 + + Note that this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 allows nl + or lf to be used as the name for the ISO/IEC 646:1991 + standard IRV character with decimal value 10. The IRV + names this character lf (line feed), but traditional + implementations have referred to this character as new- + line ( nl) and the POSIX locale character set symbolic + name for the corresponding character is a <newline>. + + The command: + + + od -A o -t o2x2x -N 18 + + on a system with 32-bit words and an implementation + using an input block size of 16 bytes could write 18 + bytes in approximately the following format: + + + 0000000 032056 031440 041123 042040 052516 044530 020043 031464 + 342e 3320 4253 4420 554e 4958 2023 3334 + 342e3320 42534420 554e4958 20233334 + 0000020 032472 + 353a + 353a0000 + 0000022 + + The command: + + + od -A d -t f -t o4 -t x4 -N 24 -j 0x15 + + on a system with 64-bit doubles (for example, + IEEE Std 754-1985 double precision floating-point for- + mat) would skip 21 bytes of input data and then write 24 + bytes in approximately the following format: + + + 0000000 1.00000000000000e+00 1.57350000000000e+01 + 07774000000 00000000000 10013674121 35341217270 + 3ff00000 00000000 402f3851 eb851eb8 + 0000016 1.40668230000000e+02 + 10030312542 04370303230 + 40619562 23e18698 + 0000024 + +RATIONALE + The od utility went through several names in early pro- + posals, including hd, xd, and most recently hexdump. + There were several objections to all of these based on + the following reasons: + + The hd and xd names conflicted with historical + utilities that behaved differently. + + The hexdump description was much more complex + than needed for a simple dump utility. + + The od utility has been available on all histori- + cal implementations and there was no need to cre- + ate a new name for a utility so similar to the + historical od utility. + + The original reasons for not standardizing historical od + were also fairly widespread. Those reasons are given + below along with rationale explaining why the standard + developers believe that this version does not suffer + from the indicated problem: + + The BSD and System V versions of od have + diverged, and the intersection of features pro- + vided by both does not meet the needs of the user + community. In fact, the System V version only + provides a mechanism for dumping octal bytes and + shorts, signed and unsigned decimal shorts, hexa- + decimal shorts, and ASCII characters. BSD added + the ability to dump floats, doubles, named ASCII + characters, and octal, signed decimal, unsigned + decimal, and hexadecimal longs. The version pre- + sented here provides more normalized forms for + dumping bytes, shorts, ints, and longs in octal, + signed decimal, unsigned decimal, and hexadeci- + mal; float, double, and long double; and named + ASCII as well as current locale characters. + + It would not be possible to come up with a + compatible superset of the BSD and System V flags + that met the requirements of the standard devel- + opers. The historical default od output is the + specified default output of this utility. None of + the option letters chosen for this version of od + conflict with any of the options to historical + versions of od. + + On systems with different sizes for short, int, + and long, there was no way to ask for dumps of + ints, even in the BSD version. Because of the way + options are named, the name space could not be + extended to solve these problems. This is why the + -t option was added (with type specifiers more + closely matched to the printf() formats used in + the rest of this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001) + and the optional field sizes were added to the d + , f , o , u , and x type specifiers. It is also + one of the reasons why the historical practice + was not mandated as a required obsolescent form + of od. (Although the old versions of od are not + listed as an obsolescent form, implementations + are urged to continue to recognize the older + forms for several more years.) The a , c , f , o + , and x types match the meaning of the corre- + sponding format characters in the historical + implementations of od except for the default + sizes of the fields converted. The d format is + signed in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 to + match the printf() notation. (Historical versions + of od used d as a synonym for u in this version. + The System V implementation uses s for signed + decimal; BSD uses i for signed decimal and s for + null-terminated strings.) Other than d and u , + all of the type specifiers match format charac- + ters in the historical BSD version of od. + + The sizes of the C-language types char, short, + int, long, float, double, and long double are + used even though it is recognized that there may + be zero or more than one compiler for the C lan- + guage on an implementation and that they may use + different sizes for some of these types. (For + example, one compiler might use 2 bytes shorts, 2 + bytes ints, and 4 bytes longs, while another com- + piler (or an option to the same compiler) uses 2 + bytes shorts, 4 bytes ints, and 4 bytes longs.) + Nonetheless, there has to be a basic size known + by the implementation for these types, corre- + sponding to the values reported by invocations of + the getconf utility when called with system_var + operands {UCHAR_MAX}, {USHORT_MAX}, {UINT_MAX}, + and {ULONG_MAX} for the types char, short, int, + and long, respectively. There are similar con- + stants required by the ISO C standard, but not + required by the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 or this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. They are {FLT_MANT_DIG}, + {DBL_MANT_DIG}, and {LDBL_MANT_DIG} for the types + float, double, and long double, respectively. If + the optional c99 utility is provided by the + implementation and used as specified by this vol- + ume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, these are the sizes + that would be provided. If an option is used that + specifies different sizes for these types, there + is no guarantee that the od utility is able to + interpret binary data output by such a program + correctly. + + This volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 requires that + the numeric values of these lengths be recognized + by the od utility and that symbolic forms also be + recognized. Thus, a conforming application can + always look at an array of unsigned long data + elements using od -t uL. + + The method of specifying the format for the + address field based on specifying a starting off- + set in a file unnecessarily tied the two + together. The -A option now specifies the address + base and the -S option specifies a starting off- + set. + + It would be difficult to break the dependence on + U.S. ASCII to achieve an internationalized util- + ity. It does not seem to be any harder for od to + dump characters in the current locale than it is + for the ed or sed l commands. The c type speci- + fier does this without difficulty and is com- + pletely compatible with the historical implemen- + tations of the c format character when the cur- + rent locale uses a superset of the + ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard as a codeset. The a + type specifier (from the BSD a format character) + was left as a portable means to dump ASCII (or + more correctly ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard (IRV)) + so that headers produced by pax could be deci- + phered even on systems that do not use the + ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard as a subset of their + base codeset. + + The use of "**" as an indication of continuation of a + multi-byte character in c specifier output was chosen + based on seeing an implementation that uses this method. + The continuation bytes have to be marked in a way that + is not ambiguous with another single-byte or multi-byte + character. + + An early proposal used -S and -n, respectively, for the + -j and -N options eventually selected. These were + changed to avoid conflicts with historical implementa- + tions. + + The original standard specified -t o2 as the default + when no output type was given. This was changed to -t oS + (the length of a short) to accommodate a supercomputer + implementation that historically used 64 bits as its + default (and that defined shorts as 64 bits). This + change should not affect conforming applications. The + requirement to support lengths of 1, 2, and 4 was added + at the same time to address an historical implementation + that had no two-byte data types in its C compiler. + + The use of a basic integer data type is intended to + allow the implementation to choose a word size commonly + used by applications on that architecture. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + All option and operand interfaces marked as extensions + may be withdrawn in a future version. + +SEE ALSO + c99 , sed + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the + Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc + and The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy + between this version and the original IEEE and The Open + Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard is the referee document. The original Standard + can be obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 od(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/paste.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/paste.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6f0ba0 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/paste.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,268 @@ +paste(P) paste(P) + + + + + +NAME + paste - merge corresponding or subsequent lines of files + +SYNOPSIS + paste [-s][-d list] file... + +DESCRIPTION + The paste utility shall concatenate the corresponding + lines of the given input files, and write the resulting + lines to standard output. + + The default operation of paste shall concatenate the + corresponding lines of the input files. The <newline> of + every line except the line from the last input file + shall be replaced with a <tab>. + + If an end-of-file condition is detected on one or more + input files, but not all input files, paste shall behave + as though empty lines were read from the files on which + end-of-file was detected, unless the -s option is speci- + fied. + +OPTIONS + The paste utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -d list + Unless a backslash character appears in list, + each character in list is an element specifying a + delimiter character. If a backslash character + appears in list, the backslash character and one + or more characters following it are an element + specifying a delimiter character as described + below. These elements specify one or more delim- + iters to use, instead of the default <tab>, to + replace the <newline> of the input lines. The + elements in list shall be used circularly; that + is, when the list is exhausted the first element + from the list is reused. When the -s option is + specified: + + The last <newline> in a file shall not be modi- + fied. + + The delimiter shall be reset to the first element + of list after each file operand is processed. + + When the -s option is not specified: + + The <newline>s in the file specified by the last + file operand shall not be modified. + + The delimiter shall be reset to the first element + of list each time a line is processed from each + file. + + If a backslash character appears in list, it and the + character following it shall be used to represent the + following delimiter characters: + + \n <newline>. + + \t <tab>. + + \\ Backslash character. + + \0 Empty string (not a null character). If '\0' is + immediately followed by the character 'x' , the + character 'X' , or any character defined by the + LC_CTYPE digit keyword (see the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 7, + Locale), the results are unspecified. + + + If any other characters follow the backslash, the + results are unspecified. + + -s Concatenate all of the lines of each separate + input file in command line order. The <newline> + of every line except the last line in each input + file shall be replaced with the <tab>, unless + otherwise specified by the -d option. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an input file. If '-' is specified + for one or more of the files, the standard input + shall be used; the standard input shall be read + one line at a time, circularly, for each instance + of '-' . Implementations shall support pasting of + at least 12 file operands. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if one or more + file operands is '-' . See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files, except that line + lengths shall be unlimited. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of paste: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Concatenated lines of input files shall be separated by + the <tab> (or other characters under the control of the + -d option) and terminated by a <newline>. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + If one or more input files cannot be opened when the -s + option is not specified, a diagnostic message shall be + written to standard error, but no output is written to + standard output. If the -s option is specified, the + paste utility shall provide the default behavior + described in Utility Description Defaults . + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + When the escape sequences of the list option-argument + are used in a shell script, they must be quoted; other- + wise, the shell treats the '\' as a special character. + + Conforming applications should only use the specific + backslash escaped delimiters presented in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. Historical implementations treat + '\x' , where 'x' is not in this list, as 'x' , but + future implementations are free to expand this list to + recognize other common escapes similar to those accepted + by printf and other standard utilities. + + Most of the standard utilities work on text files. The + cut utility can be used to turn files with arbitrary + line lengths into a set of text files containing the + same data. The paste utility can be used to create (or + recreate) files with arbitrary line lengths. For exam- + ple, if file contains long lines: + + + cut -b 1-500 -n file > file1 + cut -b 501- -n file > file2 + + creates file1 (a text file) with lines no longer than + 500 bytes (plus the <newline>) and file2 that contains + the remainder of the data from file. Note that file2 is + not a text file if there are lines in file that are + longer than 500 + {LINE_MAX} bytes. The original file + can be recreated from file1 and file2 using the command: + + + paste -d "\0" file1 file2 > file + + The commands: + + + paste -d "\0" ... + paste -d "" ... + + are not necessarily equivalent; the latter is not speci- + fied by this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 and may + result in an error. The construct '\0' is used to mean + "no separator" because historical versions of paste did + not follow the syntax guidelines, and the command: + + + paste -d"" ... + + could not be handled properly by getopt(). + +EXAMPLES + Write out a directory in four columns: + + + ls | paste - - - - + + Combine pairs of lines from a file into single lines: + + + paste -s -d "\t\n" file + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Utility Description Defaults , cut , grep , pr + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 paste(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pathchk.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pathchk.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14e1ad4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pathchk.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,328 @@ +pathchk(P) pathchk(P) + + + + + +NAME + pathchk - check pathnames + +SYNOPSIS + pathchk [-p] pathname... + +DESCRIPTION + The pathchk utility shall check that one or more path- + names are valid (that is, they could be used to access + or create a file without causing syntax errors) and por- + table (that is, no filename truncation results). More + extensive portability checks are provided by the -p + option. + + By default, the pathchk utility shall check each compo- + nent of each pathname operand based on the underlying + file system. A diagnostic shall be written for each + pathname operand that: + + Is longer than {PATH_MAX} bytes (see Pathname + Variable Values in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 13, Headers, <lim- + its.h>) + + Contains any component longer than {NAME_MAX} + bytes in its containing directory + + Contains any component in a directory that is not + searchable + + Contains any character in any component that is + not valid in its containing directory + + The format of the diagnostic message is not specified, + but shall indicate the error detected and the corre- + sponding pathname operand. + + It shall not be considered an error if one or more com- + ponents of a pathname operand do not exist as long as a + file matching the pathname specified by the missing com- + ponents could be created that does not violate any of + the checks specified above. + +OPTIONS + The pathchk utility shall conform to the Base Defini- + tions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, + Utility Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -p Instead of performing checks based on the under- + lying file system, write a diagnostic for each + pathname operand that: + + Is longer than {_POSIX_PATH_MAX} bytes (see Mini- + mum Values in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 13, Headers, <lim- + its.h>) + + Contains any component longer than + {_POSIX_NAME_MAX} bytes + + Contains any character in any component that is + not in the portable filename character set + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + pathname + A pathname to be checked. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of pathchk: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All pathname operands passed all of the checks. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The test utility can be used to determine whether a + given pathname names an existing file; it does not, how- + ever, give any indication of whether or not any compo- + nent of the pathname was truncated in a directory where + the _POSIX_NO_TRUNC feature is not in effect. The + pathchk utility does not check for file existence; it + performs checks to determine whether a pathname does + exist or could be created with no pathname component + truncation. + + The noclobber option in the shell (see the set special + built-in) can be used to atomically create a file. As + with all file creation semantics in the System Inter- + faces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, it guarantees + atomic creation, but still depends on applications to + agree on conventions and cooperate on the use of files + after they have been created. + +EXAMPLES + To verify that all pathnames in an imported data inter- + change archive are legitimate and unambiguous on the + current system: + + + pax -f archive | sed -e '/ == .*/s///' | xargs pathchk + if [ $? -eq 0 ] + then + pax -r -f archive + else + echo Investigate problems before importing files. + exit 1 + fi + + To verify that all files in the current directory hier- + archy could be moved to any system conforming to the + System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 that + also supports the pax utility: + + + find . -print | xargs pathchk -p + if [ $? -eq 0 ] + then + pax -w -f archive . + else + echo Portable archive cannot be created. + exit 1 + fi + + To verify that a user-supplied pathname names a readable + file and that the application can create a file extend- + ing the given path without truncation and without over- + writing any existing file: + + + case $- in + *C*) reset="";; + *) reset="set +C" + set -C;; + esac + test -r "$path" && pathchk "$path.out" && + rm "$path.out" > "$path.out" + if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then + printf "%s: %s not found or %s.out fails \ + creation checks.\n" $0 "$path" "$path" + $reset # Reset the noclobber option in case a trap + # on EXIT depends on it. + exit 1 + fi + $reset + PROCESSING < "$path" > "$path.out" + + The following assumptions are made in this example: + + PROCESSING represents the code that is used by the + application to use $path once it is verified that + $path.out works as intended. + + The state of the noclobber option is unknown when this + code is invoked and should be set on exit to the state + it was in when this code was invoked. (The reset vari- + able is used in this example to restore the initial + state.) + + Note the usage of: + + + rm "$path.out" > "$path.out" + <ol type="a"> + + The pathchk command has already verified, at this point, + that $path.out is not truncated. + + With the noclobber option set, the shell verifies that + $path.out does not already exist before invoking rm. + + If the shell succeeded in creating $path.out, rm removes + it so that the application can create the file again in + the PROCESSING step. + + If the PROCESSING step wants the file to exist already + when it is invoked, the: + + + rm "$path.out" > "$path.out" + + should be replaced with: + + + > "$path.out" + + which verifies that the file did not already exist, but + leaves $path.out in place for use by PROCESSING. + +RATIONALE + The pathchk utility was new for the ISO POSIX-2:1993 + standard. It, along with the set -C( noclobber) option + added to the shell, replaces the mktemp, validfnam, and + create utilities that appeared in early proposals. All + of these utilities were attempts to solve several common + problems: + + Verify the validity (for several different defi- + nitions of "valid") of a pathname supplied by a + user, generated by an application, or imported + from an external source. + + Atomically create a file. + + Perform various string handling functions to gen- + erate a temporary filename. + + The create utility, included in an early proposal, pro- + vided checking and atomic creation in a single + invocation of the utility; these are orthogonal issues + and need not be grouped into a single utility. Note that + the noclobber option also provides a way of creating a + lock for process synchronization; since it provides an + atomic create, there is no race between a test for exis- + tence and the following creation if it did not exist. + + Having a function like tmpnam() in the ISO C standard is + important in many high-level languages. The shell pro- + gramming language, however, has built-in string manipu- + lation facilities, making it very easy to construct tem- + porary filenames. The names needed obviously depend on + the application, but are frequently of a form similar + to: + + + $TMPDIR/application_abbreviation$$.suffix + + In cases where there is likely to be contention for a + given suffix, a simple shell for or while loop can be + used with the shell noclobber option to create a file + without risk of collisions, as long as applications try- + ing to use the same filename name space are cooperating + on the use of files after they have been created. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Redirection , set , test + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 pathchk(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pr.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pr.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b395933 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pr.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,410 @@ +pr(P) pr(P) + + + + + +NAME + pr - print files + +SYNOPSIS + pr [+page][-column][-adFmrt][-e[char][ gap]][-h + header][-i[char][gap]] + + [-l lines][-n[char][width]][-o off- + set][-s[char]][-w width][-fp] + [file...] + +DESCRIPTION + The pr utility is a printing and pagination filter. If + multiple input files are specified, each shall be read, + formatted, and written to standard output. By default, + the input shall be separated into 66-line pages, each + with: + + A 5-line header that includes the page number, + date, time, and the pathname of the file + + A 5-line trailer consisting of blank lines + + If standard output is associated with a terminal, diag- + nostic messages shall be deferred until the pr utility + has completed processing. + + When options specifying multi-column output are speci- + fied, output text columns shall be of equal width; input + lines that do not fit into a text column shall be trun- + cated. By default, text columns shall be separated with + at least one <blank>. + +OPTIONS + The pr utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines, except that: the page option has a + '+' delimiter; page and column can be multi-digit num- + bers; some of the option-arguments are optional; and + some of the option-arguments cannot be specified as sep- + arate arguments from the preceding option letter. In + particular, the -s option does not allow the option let- + ter to be separated from its argument, and the options + -e, -i, and -n require that both arguments, if present, + not be separated from the option letter. + + The following options shall be supported. In the follow- + ing option descriptions, column, lines, offset, page, + and width are positive decimal integers; gap is a non- + negative decimal integer. + + +page Begin output at page number page of the formatted + input. + + -column + Produce multi-column output that is arranged in + column columns (the default shall be 1) and is + written down each column in the order in which + the text is received from the input file. This + option should not be used with -m. The options -e + and -i shall be assumed for multiple text-column + output. Whether or not text columns are produced + with identical vertical lengths is unspecified, + but a text column shall never exceed the length + of the page (see the -l option). When used with + -t, use the minimum number of lines to write the + output. + + -a Modify the effect of the - column option so that + the columns are filled across the page in a + round-robin order (for example, when column is 2, + the first input line heads column 1, the second + heads column 2, the third is the second line in + column 1, and so on). + + -d Produce output that is double-spaced; append an + extra <newline> following every <newline> found + in the input. + + -e[char][gap] + + Expand each input <tab> to the next greater col- + umn position specified by the formula n* gap+1, + where n is an integer > 0. If gap is zero or is + omitted, it shall default to 8. All <tab>s in the + input shall be expanded into the appropriate num- + ber of <space>s. If any non-digit character, + char, is specified, it shall be used as the input + <tab>. + + -f Use a <form-feed> for new pages, instead of the + default behavior that uses a sequence of <new- + line>s. Pause before beginning the first page if + the standard output is associated with a termi- + nal. + + -F Use a <form-feed> for new pages, instead of the + default behavior that uses a sequence of <new- + line>s. + + -h header + Use the string header to replace the contents of + the file operand in the page header. + + -i[char][gap] + In output, replace multiple <space>s with <tab>s + wherever two or more adjacent <space>s reach col- + umn positions gap+1, 2* gap+1, 3* gap+1, and so + on. If gap is zero or is omitted, default tab + settings at every eighth column position shall be + assumed. If any non-digit character, char, is + specified, it shall be used as the output <tab>. + + -l lines + Override the 66-line default and reset the page + length to lines. If lines is not greater than + the sum of both the header and trailer depths (in + lines), the pr utility shall suppress both the + header and trailer, as if the -t option were in + effect. + + -m Merge files. Standard output shall be formatted + so the pr utility writes one line from each file + specified by a file operand, side by side into + text columns of equal fixed widths, in terms of + the number of column positions. Implementations + shall support merging of at least nine file oper- + ands. + + -n[char][width] + + Provide width-digit line numbering (default for + width shall be 5). The number shall occupy the + first width column positions of each text column + of default output or each line of -m output. If + char (any non-digit character) is given, it shall + be appended to the line number to separate it + from whatever follows (default for char is a + <tab>). + + -o offset + Each line of output shall be preceded by offset + <space>s. If the -o option is not specified, the + default offset shall be zero. The space taken is + in addition to the output line width (see the -w + option below). + + -p Pause before beginning each page if the standard + output is directed to a terminal ( pr shall write + an <alert> to standard error and wait for a <car- + riage-return> to be read on /dev/tty). + + -r Write no diagnostic reports on failure to open + files. + + -s[char] + Separate text columns by the single character + char instead of by the appropriate number of + <space>s (default for char shall be <tab>). + + -t Write neither the five-line identifying header + nor the five-line trailer usually supplied for + each page. Quit writing after the last line of + each file without spacing to the end of the page. + + -w width + Set the width of the line to width column posi- + tions for multiple text-column output only. If + the -w option is not specified and the -s option + is not specified, the default width shall be 72. + If the -w option is not specified and the -s + option is specified, the default width shall be + 512. + + For single column output, input lines shall not be trun- + cated. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file to be written. If no file + operands are specified, or if a file operand is + '-' , the standard input shall be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified, or if a file operand is '-' . See + the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files. + + The file /dev/tty shall be used to read responses + required by the -p option. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of pr: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files) and + which characters are defined as printable (char- + acter class print). Non-printable characters are + still written to standard output, but are not + counted for the purpose for column-width and + line-length calculations. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_TIME + Determine the format of the date and time for use + in writing header lines. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + TZ Determine the timezone used to calculate date and + time strings written in header lines. If TZ is + unset or null, an unspecified default timezone + shall be used. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + If pr receives an interrupt while writing to a terminal, + it shall flush all accumulated error messages to the + screen before terminating. + +STDOUT + The pr utility output shall be a paginated version of + the original file (or files). This pagination shall be + accomplished using either <form-feed>s or a sequence of + <newline>s, as controlled by the -F or -f option. + Page headers shall be generated unless the -t option is + specified. The page headers shall be of the form: + + + "\n\n%s %s Page %d\n\n\n", <output of date>, <file>, <page number> + + In the POSIX locale, the <output of date> field, repre- + senting the date and time of last modification of the + input file (or the current date and time if the input + file is standard input), shall be equivalent to the out- + put of the following command as it would appear if exe- + cuted at the given time: + + + date "+%b %e %H:%M %Y" + + without the trailing <newline>, if the page being writ- + ten is from standard input. If the page being written is + not from standard input, in the POSIX locale, the same + format shall be used, but the time used shall be the + modification time of the file corresponding to file + instead of the current time. When the LC_TIME locale + category is not set to the POSIX locale, a different + format and order of presentation of this field may be + used. + + If the standard input is used instead of a file operand, + the <file> field shall be replaced by a null string. + + If the -h option is specified, the <file> field shall be + replaced by the header argument. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages + and for alerting the terminal when -p is specified. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + Print a numbered list of all files in the current direc- + tory: + + + ls -a | pr -n -h "Files in $(pwd)." + + Print file1 and file2 as a double-spaced, three-column + listing headed by "file list'': + + + pr -3d -h "file list" file1 file2 + + Write file1 on file2, expanding tabs to columns 10, 19, + 28, ...: + + + pr -e9 -t <file1 >file2 + +RATIONALE + This utility is one of those that does not follow the + Utility Syntax Guidelines because of its historical ori- + gins. The standard developers could have added new + options that obeyed the guidelines (and marked the old + options obsolescent) or devised an entirely new utility; + there are examples of both actions in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. Because of its widespread use by + historical applications, the standard developers decided + to exempt this version of pr from many of the guide- + lines. + + Implementations are required to accept option-arguments + to the -h, -l, -o, and -w options whether presented as + part of the same argument or as a separate argument to + pr, as suggested by the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The + -n and -s options, however, are specified as in histori- + cal practice because they are frequently specified with- + out their optional arguments. If a <blank> were allowed + before the option-argument in these cases, a file oper- + and could mistakenly be interpreted as an option-argu- + ment in historical applications. + + The text about the minimum number of lines in multi-col- + umn output was included to ensure that a best effort is + made in balancing the length of the columns. There are + known historical implementations in which, for example, + 60-line files are listed by pr -2 as one column of 56 + lines and a second of 4. Although this is not a problem + when a full page with headers and trailers is produced, + it would be relatively useless when used with -t. + + Historical implementations of the pr utility have dif- + fered in the action taken for the -f option. BSD uses it + as described here for the -F option; System V uses it to + change trailing <newline>s on each page to a <form-feed> + and, if standard output is a TTY device, sends an + <alert> to standard error and reads a line from /dev/tty + before the first page. There were strong arguments from + both sides of this issue concerning historical practice + and as a result the -F option was added. XSI-conformant + systems support the System V historical actions for the + -f option. + + The <output of date> field in the -l format is specified + only for the POSIX locale. As noted, the format can be + different in other locales. No mechanism for defining + this is present in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + as the appropriate vehicle is a message catalog; that + is, the format should be specified as a "message". + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + expand , lp + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 pr(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/printf.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/printf.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b68a7cd --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/printf.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,401 @@ +printf(P) printf(P) + + + + + +NAME + printf - write formatted output + +SYNOPSIS + printf format[argument...] + +DESCRIPTION + The printf utility shall write formatted operands to the + standard output. The argument operands shall be format- + ted under control of the format operand. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + format A string describing the format to use to write + the remaining operands. See the EXTENDED + DESCRIPTION section. + + argument + The strings to be written to standard output, + under the control of format. See the EXTENDED + DESCRIPTION section. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of printf: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_NUMERIC + + Determine the locale for numeric formatting. It + shall affect the format of numbers written using + the e , E , f , g , and G conversion specifier + characters (if supported). + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + The format operand shall be used as the format string + described in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 5, File Format Notation + with the following exceptions: + + A <space> in the format string, in any context other + than a flag of a conversion specification, shall be + treated as an ordinary character that is copied to the + output. + + A '' character in the format string shall be treated as + a '' character, not as a <space>. + + In addition to the escape sequences shown in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 5, + File Format Notation ( '\\' , '\a' , '\b' , '\f' , '\n' + , '\r' , '\t' , '\v' ), "\ddd" , where ddd is a one, + two, or three-digit octal number, shall be written as a + byte with the numeric value specified by the octal num- + ber. + + The implementation shall not precede or follow output + from the d or u conversion specifiers with <blank>s not + specified by the format operand. + + The implementation shall not precede output from the o + conversion specifier with zeros not specified by the + format operand. + + The e , E , f , g , and G conversion specifiers need not + be supported. + + An additional conversion specifier character, b , shall + be supported as follows. The argument shall be taken to + be a string that may contain backslash-escape sequences. + The following backslash-escape sequences shall be sup- + ported: + + The escape sequences listed in the Base Defini- + tions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 5, + File Format Notation ( '\\' , '\a' , '\b' , '\f' + , '\n' , '\r' , '\t' , '\v' ), which shall be + converted to the characters they represent + + "\0ddd" , where ddd is a zero, one, two, or + three-digit octal number that shall be converted + to a byte with the numeric value specified by the + octal number + + '\c' , which shall not be written and shall cause + printf to ignore any remaining characters in the + string operand containing it, any remaining + string operands, and any additional characters in + the format operand + + The interpretation of a backslash followed by any other + sequence of characters is unspecified. + + Bytes from the converted string shall be written until + the end of the string or the number of bytes indicated + by the precision specification is reached. If the preci- + sion is omitted, it shall be taken to be infinite, so + all bytes up to the end of the converted string shall be + written. + + For each conversion specification that consumes an argu- + ment, the next argument operand shall be evaluated and + converted to the appropriate type for the conversion as + specified below. + + The format operand shall be reused as often as necessary + to satisfy the argument operands. Any extra c or s con- + version specifiers shall be evaluated as if a null + string argument were supplied; other extra conversion + specifications shall be evaluated as if a zero argument + were supplied. If the format operand contains no con- + version specifications and argument operands are + present, the results are unspecified. + + If a character sequence in the format operand begins + with a '%' character, but does not form a valid conver- + sion specification, the behavior is unspecified. + + The argument operands shall be treated as strings if the + corresponding conversion specifier is b , c , or s ; + otherwise, it shall be evaluated as a C constant, as + described by the ISO C standard, with the following + extensions: + + A leading plus or minus sign shall be allowed. + + If the leading character is a single-quote or + double-quote, the value shall be the numeric + value in the underlying codeset of the character + following the single-quote or double-quote. + + If an argument operand cannot be completely converted + into an internal value appropriate to the corresponding + conversion specification, a diagnostic message shall be + written to standard error and the utility shall not exit + with a zero exit status, but shall continue processing + any remaining operands and shall write the value accumu- + lated at the time the error was detected to standard + output. + + It is not considered an error if an argument operand is + not completely used for a c or s conversion or if a + string operand's first or second character is used to + get the numeric value of a character. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The floating-point formatting conversion specifications + of printf() are not required because all arithmetic in + the shell is integer arithmetic. The awk utility per- + forms floating-point calculations and provides its own + printf function. The bc utility can perform arbitrary- + precision floating-point arithmetic, but does not pro- + vide extensive formatting capabilities. (This printf + utility cannot really be used to format bc output; it + does not support arbitrary precision.) Implementations + are encouraged to support the floating-point conversions + as an extension. + + Note that this printf utility, like the printf() func- + tion defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 on which it is based, makes no spe- + cial provision for dealing with multi-byte characters + when using the %c conversion specification or when a + precision is specified in a %b or %s conversion specifi- + cation. Applications should be extremely cautious using + either of these features when there are multi-byte char- + acters in the character set. + + No provision is made in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 which allows field widths and pre- + cisions to be specified as '*' since the '*' can be + replaced directly in the format operand using shell + variable substitution. Implementations can also provide + this feature as an extension if they so choose. + + Hexadecimal character constants as defined in the ISO C + standard are not recognized in the format operand + because there is no consistent way to detect the end of + the constant. Octal character constants are limited to, + at most, three octal digits, but hexadecimal character + constants are only terminated by a non-hex-digit charac- + ter. In the ISO C standard, the "##" concatenation oper- + ator can be used to terminate a constant and follow it + with a hexadecimal character to be written. In the + shell, concatenation occurs before the printf utility + has a chance to parse the end of the hexadecimal con- + stant. + + The %b conversion specification is not part of the ISO C + standard; it has been added here as a portable way to + process backslash escapes expanded in string operands as + provided by the echo utility. See also the APPLICATION + USAGE section of echo for ways to use printf as a + replacement for all of the traditional versions of the + echo utility. + + If an argument cannot be parsed correctly for the corre- + sponding conversion specification, the printf utility is + required to report an error. Thus, overflow and extrane- + ous characters at the end of an argument being used for + a numeric conversion shall be reported as errors. + +EXAMPLES + To alert the user and then print and read a series of + prompts: + + + printf "\aPlease fill in the following: \nName: " + read name + printf "Phone number: " + read phone + + To read out a list of right and wrong answers from a + file, calculate the percentage correctly, and print them + out. The numbers are right-justified and separated by a + single <tab>. The percentage is written to one decimal + place of accuracy: + + + while read right wrong ; do + percent=$(echo "scale=1;($right*100)/($right+$wrong)" | bc) + printf "%2d right\t%2d wrong\t(%s%%)\n" \ + $right $wrong $percent + done < database_file + The command: + + + printf "%5d%4d\n" 1 21 321 4321 54321 + + produces: + + + 1 21 + 3214321 + 54321 0 + + Note that the format operand is used three times to + print all of the given strings and that a '0' was sup- + plied by printf to satisfy the last %4d conversion spec- + ification. + + The printf utility is required to notify the user when + conversion errors are detected while producing numeric + output; thus, the following results would be expected on + an implementation with 32-bit twos-complement integers + when %d is specified as the format operand: + Standard +Argument Output Diagnostic Output +5a 5 printf: "5a" not completely converted +9999999999 2147483647 printf: "9999999999" arithmetic overflow +-9999999999 -2147483648 printf: "-9999999999" arithmetic overflow +ABC 0 printf: "ABC" expected numeric value + + The diagnostic message format is not specified, but + these examples convey the type of information that + should be reported. Note that the value shown on stan- + dard output is what would be expected as the return + value from the strtol() function as defined in the Sys- + tem Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. A similar + correspondence exists between %u and strtoul() and %e , + %f , and %g (if the implementation supports floating- + point conversions) and strtod(). + + In a locale using the ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard as the + underlying codeset, the command: + + + printf "%d\n" 3 +3 -3 \'3 \"+3 "'-3" + + produces: + + 3 Numeric value of constant 3 + + 3 Numeric value of constant 3 + + -3 Numeric value of constant -3 + + 51 Numeric value of the character '3' in the + ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard codeset + + 43 Numeric value of the character '+' in the + ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard codeset + + 45 Numeric value of the character '-' in the + ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard codeset + + + Note that in a locale with multi-byte characters, the + value of a character is intended to be the value of the + equivalent of the wchar_t representation of the charac- + ter as described in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +RATIONALE + The printf utility was added to provide functionality + that has historically been provided by echo. However, + due to irreconcilable differences in the various ver- + sions of echo extant, the version has few special fea- + tures, leaving those to this new printf utility, which + is based on one in the Ninth Edition system. + + The EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section almost exactly matches + the printf() function in the ISO C standard, although it + is described in terms of the file format notation in the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter + 5, File Format Notation. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + awk , bc , echo , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, printf() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 printf(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pwd.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pwd.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8913cb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/pwd.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +pwd(P) pwd(P) + + + + + +NAME + pwd - return working directory name + +SYNOPSIS + pwd [-L | -P ] + +DESCRIPTION + The pwd utility shall write to standard output an abso- + lute pathname of the current working directory, which + does not contain the filenames dot or dot-dot. + +OPTIONS + The pwd utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported by the imple- + mentation: + + -L If the PWD environment variable contains an abso- + lute pathname of the current directory that does + not contain the filenames dot or dot-dot, pwd + shall write this pathname to standard output. + Otherwise, the -L option shall behave as the -P + option. + + -P The absolute pathname written shall not contain + filenames that, in the context of the pathname, + refer to files of type symbolic link. + + + If both -L and -P are specified, the last one shall + apply. If neither -L nor -P is specified, the pwd util- + ity shall behave as if -L had been specified. + +OPERANDS + None. + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of pwd: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + PWD If the -P option is in effect, this variable + shall be set to an absolute pathname of the cur- + rent working directory that does not contain any + components that specify symbolic links, does not + contain any components that are dot, and does not + contain any components that are dot-dot. If an + application sets or unsets the value of PWD , the + behavior of pwd is unspecified. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The pwd utility output is an absolute pathname of the + current working directory: + + + "%s\n", <directory pathname> + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + If an error is detected, output shall not be written to + standard output, a diagnostic message shall be written + to standard error, and the exit status is not zero. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + Some implementations have historically provided pwd as a + shell special built-in command. + + In most utilities, if an error occurs, partial output + may be written to standard output. This does not happen + in historical implementations of pwd. Because pwd is + frequently used in historical shell scripts without + checking the exit status, it is important that the his- + torical behavior is required here; therefore, the CONSE- + QUENCES OF ERRORS section specifically disallows any + partial output being written to standard output. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + cd , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, getcwd() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 pwd(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/rm.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/rm.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64ce1a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/rm.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ +rm(P) rm(P) + + + + + +NAME + rm - remove directory entries + +SYNOPSIS + rm [-fiRr] file... + +DESCRIPTION + The rm utility shall remove the directory entry speci- + fied by each file argument. + + If either of the files dot or dot-dot are specified as + the basename portion of an operand (that is, the final + pathname component), rm shall write a diagnostic message + to standard error and do nothing more with such oper- + ands. + + For each file the following steps shall be taken: + + If the file does not exist: <ol type="a"> + + If the -f option is not specified, rm shall write a + diagnostic message to standard error. + + Go on to any remaining files. + + If file is of type directory, the following steps shall + be taken: <ol type="a"> + + If neither the -R option nor the -r option is specified, + rm shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, + do nothing more with file, and go on to any remaining + files. + + If the -f option is not specified, and either the per- + missions of file do not permit writing and the standard + input is a terminal or the -i option is specified, rm + shall write a prompt to standard error and read a line + from the standard input. If the response is not affirma- + tive, rm shall do nothing more with the current file and + go on to any remaining files. + + For each entry contained in file, other than dot or dot- + dot, the four steps listed here (1 to 4) shall be taken + with the entry as if it were a file operand. The rm + utility shall not traverse directories by following sym- + bolic links into other parts of the hierarchy, but shall + remove the links themselves. + + If the -i option is specified, rm shall write a prompt + to standard error and read a line from the standard + input. If the response is not affirmative, rm shall do + nothing more with the current file, and go on to any + remaining files. + + If file is not of type directory, the -f option is not + specified, and either the permissions of file do not + permit writing and the standard input is a terminal or + the -i option is specified, rm shall write a prompt to + the standard error and read a line from the standard + input. If the response is not affirmative, rm shall do + nothing more with the current file and go on to any + remaining files. + + If the current file is a directory, rm shall perform + actions equivalent to the rmdir() function defined in + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + called with a pathname of the current file used as the + path argument. If the current file is not a directory, + rm shall perform actions equivalent to the unlink() + function defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 called with a pathname of the cur- + rent file used as the path argument. + + If this fails for any reason, rm shall write a diagnos- + tic message to standard error, do nothing more with the + current file, and go on to any remaining files. + + The rm utility shall be able to descend to arbitrary + depths in a file hierarchy, and shall not fail due to + path length limitations (unless an operand specified by + the user exceeds system limitations). + +OPTIONS + The rm utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -f Do not prompt for confirmation. Do not write + diagnostic messages or modify the exit status in + the case of nonexistent operands. Any previous + occurrences of the -i option shall be ignored. + + -i Prompt for confirmation as described previously. + Any previous occurrences of the -f option shall + be ignored. + + -R Remove file hierarchies. See the DESCRIPTION. + + -r Equivalent to -R. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a directory entry to be removed. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used to read an input line + in response to each prompt specified in the STDOUT sec- + tion. Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of rm: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, + equivalence classes, and multi-character collat- + ing elements used in the extended regular expres- + sion defined for the yesexpr locale keyword in + the LC_MESSAGES category. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments) and the behavior of + character classes within regular expressions used + in the extended regular expression defined for + the yesexpr locale keyword in the LC_MESSAGES + category. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale for the processing of affir- + mative responses that should be used to affect + the format and contents of diagnostic messages + written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + Prompts shall be written to standard error under the + conditions specified in the DESCRIPTION and OPTIONS sec- + tions. The prompts shall contain the file pathname, but + their format is otherwise unspecified. The standard + error also shall be used for diagnostic messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All of the named directory entries for which rm + performed actions equivalent to the rmdir() or + unlink() functions were removed. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The rm utility is forbidden to remove the names dot and + dot-dot in order to avoid the consequences of inadver- + tently doing something like: + + + rm -r .* + + Some implementations do not permit the removal of the + last link to an executable binary file that is being + executed; see the [EBUSY] error in the unlink() function + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. Thus, the rm utility can fail to + remove such files. + + The -i option causes rm to prompt and read the standard + input even if the standard input is not a terminal, but + in the absence of -i the mode prompting is not done when + the standard input is not a terminal. + +EXAMPLES + The following command: + + + rm a.out core + + removes the directory entries: a.out and core. + + The following command: + + + rm -Rf junk + + removes the directory junk and all its contents, without + prompting. + +RATIONALE + For absolute clarity, paragraphs (2b) and (3) in the + DESCRIPTION of rm describing the behavior when prompting + for confirmation, should be interpreted in the following + manner: + + + if ((NOT f_option) AND + ((not_writable AND input_is_terminal) OR i_option)) + + The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspeci- + fied. Only the general nature of the contents of prompts + are specified because implementations may desire more + descriptive prompts than those used on historical imple- + mentations. Therefore, an application not using the -f + option, or using the -i option, relies on the system to + provide the most suitable dialog directly with the user, + based on the behavior specified. + + The -r option is historical practice on all known sys- + tems. The synonym -R option is provided for consistency + with the other utilities in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 that provide options requesting + recursive descent through the file hierarchy. + + The behavior of the -f option in historical versions of + rm is inconsistent. In general, along with "forcing" the + unlink without prompting for permission, it always + causes diagnostic messages to be suppressed and the exit + status to be unmodified for nonexistent operands and + files that cannot be unlinked. In some versions, how- + ever, the -f option suppresses usage messages and system + errors as well. Suppressing such messages is not a ser- + vice to either shell scripts or users. + + It is less clear that error messages regarding files + that cannot be unlinked (removed) should be suppressed. + Although this is historical practice, this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does not permit the -f option to + suppress such messages. + + When given the -r and -i options, historical versions of + rm prompt the user twice for each directory, once before + removing its contents and once before actually attempt- + ing to delete the directory entry that names it. This + allows the user to "prune" the file hierarchy walk. His- + torical versions of rm were inconsistent in that some + did not do the former prompt for directories named on + the command line and others had obscure prompting behav- + ior when the -i option was specified and the permissions + of the file did not permit writing. The POSIX Shell and + Utilities rm differs little from historic practice, but + does require that prompts be consistent. Historical ver- + sions of rm were also inconsistent in that prompts were + done to both standard output and standard error. This + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 requires that prompts be + done to standard error, for consistency with cp and mv, + and to allow historical extensions to rm that provide an + option to list deleted files on standard output. + + The rm utility is required to descend to arbitrary + depths so that any file hierarchy may be deleted. This + means, for example, that the rm utility cannot run out + of file descriptors during its descent (that is, if the + number of file descriptors is limited, rm cannot be + implemented in the historical fashion where one file + descriptor is used per directory level). Also, rm is not + permitted to fail because of path length restrictions, + unless an operand specified by the user is longer than + {PATH_MAX}. + + The rm utility removes symbolic links themselves, not + the files they refer to, as a consequence of the depen- + dence on the unlink() functionality, per the DESCRIP- + TION. When removing hierarchies with -r or -R, the pro- + hibition on following symbolic links has to be made + explicit. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + rmdir() , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, remove(), rmdir(), unlink() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 rm(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/rmdir.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/rmdir.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..354e4e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/rmdir.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +rmdir(P) rmdir(P) + + + + + +NAME + rmdir - remove directories + +SYNOPSIS + rmdir [-p] dir... + +DESCRIPTION + The rmdir utility shall remove the directory entry spec- + ified by each dir operand. + + For each dir operand, the rmdir utility shall perform + actions equivalent to the rmdir() function called with + the dir operand as its only argument. + + Directories shall be processed in the order specified. + If a directory and a subdirectory of that directory are + specified in a single invocation of the rmdir utility, + the application shall specify the subdirectory before + the parent directory so that the parent directory will + be empty when the rmdir utility tries to remove it. + +OPTIONS + The rmdir utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following option shall be supported: + + -p Remove all directories in a pathname. For each + dir operand: + + The directory entry it names shall be removed. + + If the dir operand includes more than one pathname com- + ponent, effects equivalent to the following command + shall occur: + + + rmdir -p $(dirname dir) + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + dir A pathname of an empty directory to be removed. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of rmdir: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Each directory entry specified by a dir operand + was removed successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The definition of an empty directory is one that con- + tains, at most, directory entries for dot and dot-dot. + +EXAMPLES + If a directory a in the current directory is empty + except it contains a directory b and a/b is empty except + it contains a directory c: + + + rmdir -p a/b/c + + removes all three directories. + +RATIONALE + On historical System V systems, the -p option also + caused a message to be written to the standard output. + The message indicated whether the whole path was removed + or whether part of the path remained for some reason. + The STDERR section requires this diagnostic when the + entire path specified by a dir operand is not removed, + but does not allow the status message reporting success + to be written as a diagnostic. + + The rmdir utility on System V also included a -s option + that suppressed the informational message output by the + -p option. This option has been omitted because the + informational message is not specified by this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + rm , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, remove(), rmdir(), unlink() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 rmdir(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/sleep.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/sleep.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ed2ece --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/sleep.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +sleep(P) sleep(P) + + + + + +NAME + sleep - suspend execution for an interval + +SYNOPSIS + sleep time + +DESCRIPTION + The sleep utility shall suspend execution for at least + the integral number of seconds specified by the time op- + erand. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + time A non-negative decimal integer specifying the + number of seconds for which to suspend execution. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of sleep: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + If the sleep utility receives a SIGALRM signal, one of + the following actions shall be taken: + + Terminate normally with a zero exit status. + + Effectively ignore the signal. + + Provide the default behavior for signals described in + the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section of Utility Description + Defaults . This could include terminating with a non- + zero exit status. + + The sleep utility shall take the standard action for all + other signals. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The execution was successfully suspended for at + least time seconds, or a SIGALRM signal was + received. See the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + The sleep utility can be used to execute a command after + a certain amount of time, as in: + + + (sleep 105; command) & + + or to execute a command every so often, as in: + + + while true + do + command sleep 37 + done + +RATIONALE + The exit status is allowed to be zero when sleep is + interrupted by the SIGALRM signal because most implemen- + tations of this utility rely on the arrival of that sig- + nal to notify them that the requested finishing time has + been successfully attained. Such implementations thus + do not distinguish this situation from the successful + completion case. Other implementations are allowed to + catch the signal and go back to sleep until the + requested time expires or to provide the normal signal + termination procedures. + + As with all other utilities that take integral operands + and do not specify subranges of allowed values, sleep is + required by this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 to deal + with time requests of up to 2147483647 seconds. This may + mean that some implementations have to make multiple + calls to the delay mechanism of the underlying operating + system if its argument range is less than this. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + wait , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, alarm(), sleep() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 sleep(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/sort.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/sort.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..82582e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/sort.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,465 @@ +sort(P) sort(P) + + + + + +NAME + sort - sort, merge, or sequence check text files + +SYNOPSIS + sort [-m][-o output][-bdfinru][-t char][-k keydef]... + [file...] + + sort -c [-bdfinru][-t char][-k keydef][file] + + +DESCRIPTION + The sort utility shall perform one of the following + functions: + + Sort lines of all the named files together and write the + result to the specified output. + + Merge lines of all the named (presorted) files together + and write the result to the specified output. + + Check that a single input file is correctly presorted. + + Comparisons shall be based on one or more sort keys + extracted from each line of input (or, if no sort keys + are specified, the entire line up to, but not including, + the terminating <newline>), and shall be performed using + the collating sequence of the current locale. + +OPTIONS + The sort utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines, and the -k keydef option should fol- + low the -b, -d, -f, -i, -n, and -r options. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -c Check that the single input file is ordered as + specified by the arguments and the collating + sequence of the current locale. No output shall + be produced; only the exit code shall be + affected. + + -m Merge only; the input file shall be assumed to be + already sorted. + + -o output + Specify the name of an output file to be used + instead of the standard output. This file can be + the same as one of the input files. + + -u Unique: suppress all but one in each set of lines + having equal keys. If used with the -c option, + check that there are no lines with duplicate + keys, in addition to checking that the input file + is sorted. + + + The following options shall override the default order- + ing rules. When ordering options appear independent of + any key field specifications, the requested field order- + ing rules shall be applied globally to all sort keys. + When attached to a specific key (see -k), the specified + ordering options shall override all global ordering + options for that key. + + -d Specify that only <blank>s and alphanumeric char- + acters, according to the current setting of + LC_CTYPE , shall be significant in comparisons. + The behavior is undefined for a sort key to which + -i or -n also applies. + + -f Consider all lowercase characters that have + uppercase equivalents, according to the current + setting of LC_CTYPE , to be the uppercase equiva- + lent for the purposes of comparison. + + -i Ignore all characters that are non-printable, + according to the current setting of LC_CTYPE . + + -n Restrict the sort key to an initial numeric + string, consisting of optional <blank>s, optional + minus sign, and zero or more digits with an + optional radix character and thousands separators + (as defined in the current locale), which shall + be sorted by arithmetic value. An empty digit + string shall be treated as zero. Leading zeros + and signs on zeros shall not affect ordering. + + -r Reverse the sense of comparisons. + + + The treatment of field separators can be altered using + the options: + + -b Ignore leading <blank>s when determining the + starting and ending positions of a restricted + sort key. If the -b option is specified before + the first -k option, it shall be applied to all + -k options. Otherwise, the -b option can be + attached independently to each -k field_start or + field_end option-argument (see below). + + -t char + Use char as the field separator character; char + shall not be considered to be part of a field + (although it can be included in a sort key). Each + occurrence of char shall be significant (for + example, <char><char> delimits an empty field). + If -t is not specified, <blank>s shall be used as + default field separators; each maximal non-empty + sequence of <blank>s that follows a non- <blank> + shall be a field separator. + + + Sort keys can be specified using the options: + + -k keydef + The keydef argument is a restricted sort key + field definition. The format of this definition + is: + + + field_start[type][,field_end[type]] + + where field_start and field_end define a key field + restricted to a portion of the line (see the EXTENDED + DESCRIPTION section), and type is a modifier from the + list of characters 'b' , 'd' , 'f' , 'i' , 'n' , 'r' . + The 'b' modifier shall behave like the -b option, but + shall apply only to the field_start or field_end to + which it is attached. The other modifiers shall behave + like the corresponding options, but shall apply only to + the key field to which they are attached; they shall + have this effect if specified with field_start, + field_end, or both. If any modifier is attached to a + field_start or to a field_end, no option shall apply to + either. Implementations shall support at least nine + occurrences of the -k option, which shall be significant + in command line order. If no -k option is specified, a + default sort key of the entire line shall be used. + + When there are multiple key fields, later keys shall be + compared only after all earlier keys compare equal. + Except when the -u option is specified, lines that oth- + erwise compare equal shall be ordered as if none of the + options -d, -f, -i, -n, or -k were present (but with -r + still in effect, if it was specified) and with all bytes + in the lines significant to the comparison. The order in + which lines that still compare equal are written is + unspecified. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file to be sorted, merged, or + checked. If no file operands are specified, or if + a file operand is '-' , the standard input shall + be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified, or if a file operand is '-' . See + the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files, except that the + sort utility shall add a <newline> to the end of a file + ending with an incomplete last line. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of sort: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for ordering rules. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files) and + the behavior of character classification for the + -b, -d, -f, -i, and -n options. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_NUMERIC + + Determine the locale for the definition of the + radix character and thousands separator for the + -n option. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Unless the -o or -c options are in effect, the standard + output shall contain the sorted input. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used for diagnostic mes- + sages. A warning message about correcting an incomplete + last line of an input file may be generated, but need + not affect the final exit status. + +OUTPUT FILES + If the -o option is in effect, the sorted input shall be + written to the file output. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + The notation: + + + -k field_start[type][,field_end[type]] + + shall define a key field that begins at field_start and + ends at field_end inclusive, unless field_start falls + beyond the end of the line or after field_end, in which + case the key field is empty. A missing field_end shall + mean the last character of the line. + + A field comprises a maximal sequence of non-separating + characters and, in the absence of option -t, any preced- + ing field separator. + + The field_start portion of the keydef option-argument + shall have the form: + + + field_number[.first_character] + + Fields and characters within fields shall be numbered + starting with 1. The field_number and first_character + pieces, interpreted as positive decimal integers, shall + specify the first character to be used as part of a sort + key. If .first_character is omitted, it shall refer to + the first character of the field. + + The field_end portion of the keydef option-argument + shall have the form: + + + field_number[.last_character] + + The field_number shall be as described above for + field_start. The last_character piece, interpreted as a + non-negative decimal integer, shall specify the last + character to be used as part of the sort key. If + last_character evaluates to zero or .last_character is + omitted, it shall refer to the last character of the + field specified by field_number. + + If the -b option or b type modifier is in effect, char- + acters within a field shall be counted from the first + non- <blank> in the field. (This shall apply separately + to first_character and last_character.) + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input files were output successfully, or -c + was specified and the input file was correctly + sorted. + + 1 Under the -c option, the file was not ordered as + specified, or if the -c and -u options were both + specified, two input lines were found with equal + keys. + + >1 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The default value for -t, <blank>, has different proper- + ties from, for example, -t "<space>". If a line con- + tains: + + + <space><space>foo + + the following treatment would occur with default separa- + tion as opposed to specifically selecting a <space>: + Field Default -t "<space>" + 1 <space><space>foo empty + 2 empty empty + 3 empty foo + + The leading field separator itself is included in a + field when -t is not used. For example, this command + returns an exit status of zero, meaning the input was + already sorted: + + + sort -c -k 2 <<eof + y<tab>b + x<space>a + eof + + (assuming that a <tab> precedes the <space> in the cur- + rent collating sequence). The field separator is not + included in a field when it is explicitly set via -t. + This is historical practice and allows usage such as: + + + sort -t "|" -k 2n <<eof + Atlanta|425022|Georgia + Birmingham|284413|Alabama + Columbia|100385|South Carolina + eof + + where the second field can be correctly sorted numeri- + cally without regard to the non-numeric field separator. + + The wording in the OPTIONS section clarifies that the + -b, -d, -f, -i, -n, and -r options have to come before + the first sort key specified if they are intended to + apply to all specified keys. The way it is described in + this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 matches historical + practice, not historical documentation. The results are + unspecified if these options are specified after a -k + option. + + The -f option might not work as expected in locales + where there is not a one-to-one mapping between an + uppercase and a lowercase letter. + +EXAMPLES + The following command sorts the contents of infile with + the second field as the sort key: + + + sort -k 2,2 infile + + The following command sorts, in reverse order, the con- + tents of infile1 and infile2, placing the output in out- + file and using the second character of the second field + as the sort key (assuming that the first character of + the second field is the field separator): + + + sort -r -o outfile -k 2.2,2.2 infile1 infile2 + + The following command sorts the contents of infile1 and + infile2 using the second non- <blank> of the second + field as the sort key: + + + sort -k 2.2b,2.2b infile1 infile2 + + The following command prints the System V password file + (user database) sorted by the numeric user ID (the third + colon-separated field): + + + sort -t : -k 3,3n /etc/passwd + + The following command prints the lines of the already + sorted file infile, suppressing all but one occurrence + of lines having the same third field: + + + sort -um -k 3.1,3.0 infile + +RATIONALE + Examples in some historical documentation state that + options -um with one input file keep the first in each + set of lines with equal keys. This behavior was deemed + to be an implementation artifact and was not standard- + ized. + + The -z option was omitted; it is not standard practice + on most systems and is inconsistent with using sort to + sort several files individually and then merge them + together. The text concerning -z in historical documen- + tation appeared to require implementations to determine + the proper buffer length during the sort phase of opera- + tion, but not during the merge. + + The -y option was omitted because of non-portability. + The -M option, present in System V, was omitted because + of non-portability in international usage. + + An undocumented -T option exists in some implementa- + tions. It is used to specify a directory for intermedi- + ate files. Implementations are encouraged to support + the use of the TMPDIR environment variable instead of + adding an option to support this functionality. + + The -k option was added to satisfy two objections. + First, the zero-based counting used by sort is not con- + sistent with other utility conventions. Second, it did + not meet syntax guideline requirements. + + Historical documentation indicates that "setting -n + implies -b". The description of -n already states that + optional leading <blank>s are tolerated in doing the + comparison. If -b is enabled, rather than implied, by + -n, this has unusual side effects. When a character off- + set is used in a column of numbers (for example, to sort + modulo 100), that offset is measured relative to the + most significant digit, not to the column. Based upon a + recommendation from the author of the original sort + utility, the -b implication has been omitted from this + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, and an application wish- + ing to achieve the previously mentioned side effects has + to code the -b flag explicitly. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + comm , join , uniq , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, toupper() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 sort(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/split.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/split.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eec7782 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/split.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ +split(P) split(P) + + + + + +NAME + split - split files into pieces + +SYNOPSIS + split [-l line_count][-a suffix_length][file[name]] + + split -b n[k|m][-a suffix_length][file[name]] + + +DESCRIPTION + The split utility shall read an input file and write one + or more output files. The default size of each output + file shall be 1000 lines. The size of the output files + can be modified by specification of the -b or -l + options. Each output file shall be created with a unique + suffix. The suffix shall consist of exactly suf- + fix_length lowercase letters from the POSIX locale. The + letters of the suffix shall be used as if they were a + base-26 digit system, with the first suffix to be cre- + ated consisting of all 'a' characters, the second with a + 'b' replacing the last 'a' , and so on, until a name of + all 'z' characters is created. By default, the names of + the output files shall be 'x' , followed by a two-char- + acter suffix from the character set as described above, + starting with "aa" , "ab" , "ac" , and so on, and con- + tinuing until the suffix "zz" , for a maximum of 676 + files. + + If the number of files required exceeds the maximum + allowed by the suffix length provided, such that the + last allowable file would be larger than the requested + size, the split utility shall fail after creating the + last file with a valid suffix; split shall not delete + the files it created with valid suffixes. If the file + limit is not exceeded, the last file created shall con- + tain the remainder of the input file, and may be smaller + than the requested size. + +OPTIONS + The split utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a suffix_length + + Use suffix_length letters to form the suffix por- + tion of the filenames of the split file. If -a is + not specified, the default suffix length shall be + two. If the sum of the name operand and the suf- + fix_length option-argument would create a file- + name exceeding {NAME_MAX} bytes, an error shall + result; split shall exit with a diagnostic mes- + sage and no files shall be created. + + -b n Split a file into pieces n bytes in size. + + -b nk Split a file into pieces n*1024 bytes in size. + + -b nm Split a file into pieces n*1048576 bytes in size. + + -l line_count + Specify the number of lines in each resulting + file piece. The line_count argument is an + unsigned decimal integer. The default is 1000. If + the input does not end with a <newline>, the par- + tial line shall be included in the last output + file. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file The pathname of the ordinary file to be split. If + no input file is given or file is '-' , the stan- + dard input shall be used. + + name The prefix to be used for each of the files + resulting from the split operation. If no name + argument is given, 'x' shall be used as the pre- + fix of the output files. The combined length of + the basename of prefix and suffix_length cannot + exceed {NAME_MAX} bytes. See the OPTIONS section. + + +STDIN + See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + Any file can be used as input. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of split: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + The output files contain portions of the original input + file; otherwise, unchanged. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + In the following examples foo is a text file that con- + tains 5000 lines. + + Create five files, xaa, xab, xac, xad, and xae: + + + split foo + + Create five files, but the suffixed portion of the cre- + ated files consists of three letters, xaaa, xaab, xaac, + xaad, and xaae: + + + split -a 3 foo + + Create three files with four-letter suffixes and a sup- + plied prefix, bar_aaaa, bar_aaab, and bar_aaac: + + + split -a 4 -l 2000 foo bar_ + + Create as many files as are necessary to contain at most + 20*1024 bytes, each with the default prefix of x and a + five-letter suffix: + + + split -a 5 -b 20k foo + +RATIONALE + The -b option was added to provide a mechanism for + splitting files other than by lines. While most uses of + the -b option are for transmitting files over networks, + some believed it would have additional uses. + + The -a option was added to overcome the limitation of + being able to create only 676 files. + + Consideration was given to deleting this utility, using + the rationale that the functionality provided by this + utility is available via the csplit utility (see csplit + ). Upon reconsideration of the purpose of the User + Portability Extension, it was decided to retain both + this utility and the csplit utility because users use + both utilities and have historical expectations of their + behavior. Furthermore, the splitting on byte boundaries + in split cannot be duplicated with the historical + csplit. + + The text " split shall not delete the files it created + with valid suffixes" would normally be assumed, but + since the related utility, csplit, does delete files + under some circumstances, the historical behavior of + split is made explicit to avoid misinterpretation. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + csplit + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 split(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/stty.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/stty.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a15366 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/stty.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,751 @@ +stty(P) stty(P) + + + + + +NAME + stty - set the options for a terminal + +SYNOPSIS + stty [ -a| -g] + + stty operands + + +DESCRIPTION + The stty utility shall set or report on terminal I/O + characteristics for the device that is its standard + input. Without options or operands specified, it shall + report the settings of certain characteristics, usually + those that differ from implementation-defined defaults. + Otherwise, it shall modify the terminal state according + to the specified operands. Detailed information about + the modes listed in the first five groups below are + described in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Terminal + Interface. Operands in the Combination Modes group (see + Combination Modes ) are implemented using operands in + the previous groups. Some combinations of operands are + mutually-exclusive on some terminal types; the results + of using such combinations are unspecified. + + Typical implementations of this utility require a commu- + nications line configured to use the termios interface + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. On systems where none of these + lines are available, and on lines not currently config- + ured to support the termios interface, some of the oper- + ands need not affect terminal characteristics. + +OPTIONS + The stty utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a Write to standard output all the current settings + for the terminal. + + -g Write to standard output all the current settings + in an unspecified form that can be used as argu- + ments to another invocation of the stty utility + on the same system. The form used shall not con- + tain any characters that would require quoting to + avoid word expansion by the shell; see Word + Expansions . + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported to set the + terminal characteristics. + + Control Modes + parenb (-parenb) + Enable (disable) parity generation and detection. + This shall have the effect of setting (not set- + ting) PARENB in the termios c_cflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General + Terminal Interface. + + parodd (-parodd) + + Select odd (even) parity. This shall have the + effect of setting (not setting) PARODD in the + termios c_cflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + cs5 cs6 cs7 cs8 + Select character size, if possible. This shall + have the effect of setting CS5, CS6, CS7, and + CS8, respectively, in the termios c_cflag field, + as defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + number Set terminal baud rate to the number given, if + possible. If the baud rate is set to zero, the + modem control lines shall no longer be asserted. + This shall have the effect of setting the input + and output termios baud rate values as defined in + the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + ispeed number + Set terminal input baud rate to the number given, + if possible. If the input baud rate is set to + zero, the input baud rate shall be specified by + the value of the output baud rate. This shall + have the effect of setting the input termios baud + rate values as defined in the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, Gen- + eral Terminal Interface. + + ospeed number + Set terminal output baud rate to the number + given, if possible. If the output baud rate is + set to zero, the modem control lines shall no + longer be asserted. This shall have the effect of + setting the output termios baud rate values as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + hupcl (-hupcl) + Stop asserting modem control lines (do not stop + asserting modem control lines) on last close. + This shall have the effect of setting (not set- + ting) HUPCL in the termios c_cflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + hup (-hup) + Equivalent to hupcl( -hupcl). + + cstopb (-cstopb) + Use two (one) stop bits per character. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) CSTOPB + in the termios c_cflag field, as defined in the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Chapter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + cread (-cread) + Enable (disable) the receiver. This shall have + the effect of setting (not setting) CREAD in the + termios c_cflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + clocal (-clocal) + Assume a line without (with) modem control. This + shall have the effect of setting (not setting) + CLOCAL in the termios c_cflag field, as defined + in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + + It is unspecified whether stty shall report an error if + an attempt to set a Control Mode fails. + + Input Modes + ignbrk (-ignbrk) + Ignore (do not ignore) break on input. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) IGNBRK + in the termios c_iflag field, as defined in the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Chapter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + brkint (-brkint) + Signal (do not signal) INTR on break. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) BRKINT + in the termios c_iflag field, as defined in the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Chapter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + ignpar (-ignpar) + Ignore (do not ignore) bytes with parity errors. + This shall have the effect of setting (not set- + ting) IGNPAR in the termios c_iflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + parmrk (-parmrk) + + Mark (do not mark) parity errors. This shall have + the effect of setting (not setting) PARMRK in the + termios c_iflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + inpck (-inpck) + Enable (disable) input parity checking. This + shall have the effect of setting (not setting) + INPCK in the termios c_iflag field, as defined in + the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + istrip (-istrip) + Strip (do not strip) input characters to seven + bits. This shall have the effect of setting (not + setting) ISTRIP in the termios c_iflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + inlcr (-inlcr) + Map (do not map) NL to CR on input. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) INLCR in + the termios c_iflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + igncr (-igncr) + Ignore (do not ignore) CR on input. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) IGNCR in + the termios c_iflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + icrnl (-icrnl) + Map (do not map) CR to NL on input. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) ICRNL in + the termios c_iflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + ixon (-ixon) + Enable (disable) START/STOP output control. Out- + put from the system is stopped when the system + receives STOP and started when the system + receives START. This shall have the effect of + setting (not setting) IXON in the termios c_iflag + field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Ter- + minal Interface. + + ixany (-ixany) + Allow any character to restart output. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) IXANY in + the termios c_iflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + ixoff (-ixoff) + Request that the system send (not send) STOP + characters when the input queue is nearly full + and START characters to resume data transmission. + This shall have the effect of setting (not set- + ting) IXOFF in the termios c_iflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + + Output Modes + opost (-opost) + Post-process output (do not post-process output; + ignore all other output modes). This shall have + the effect of setting (not setting) OPOST in the + termios c_oflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + ocrnl (-ocrnl) + Map (do not map) CR to NL on output This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) OCRNL in + the termios c_oflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + onocr (-onocr) + Do not (do) output CR at column zero. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) ONOCR in + the termios c_oflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + onlret (-onlret) + The terminal newline key performs (does not per- + form) the CR function. This shall have the + effect of setting (not setting) ONLRET in the + termios c_oflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Chapter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + ofill (-ofill) + Use fill characters (use timing) for delays. This + shall have the effect of setting (not setting) + OFILL in the termios c_oflag field, as defined in + the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + ofdel (-ofdel) + Fill characters are DELs (NULs). This shall have + the effect of setting (not setting) OFDEL in the + termios c_oflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + cr0 cr1 cr2 cr3 + Select the style of delay for CRs. This shall + have the effect of setting CRDLY to CR0, CR1, + CR2, or CR3, respectively, in the termios c_oflag + field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Ter- + minal Interface. + + nl0 nl1 + Select the style of delay for NL. This shall have + the effect of setting NLDLY to NL0 or NL1, + respectively, in the termios c_oflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + tab0 tab1 tab2 tab3 + + Select the style of delay for horizontal tabs. + This shall have the effect of setting TABDLY to + TAB0, TAB1, TAB2, or TAB3, respectively, in the + termios c_oflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. Note that + TAB3 has the effect of expanding <tab>s to + <space>s. + + tabs (-tabs) + Synonym for tab0 ( tab3). + + bs0 bs1 + Select the style of delay for backspaces. This + shall have the effect of setting BSDLY to BS0 or + BS1, respectively, in the termios c_oflag field, + as defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + ff0 ff1 + Select the style of delay for form-feeds. This + shall have the effect of setting FFDLY to FF0 or + FF1, respectively, in the termios c_oflag field, + as defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + vt0 vt1 + Select the style of delay for vertical-tabs. This + shall have the effect of setting VTDLY to VT0 or + VT1, respectively, in the termios c_oflag field, + as defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + + Local Modes + isig (-isig) + Enable (disable) the checking of characters + against the special control characters INTR, + QUIT, and SUSP. This shall have the effect of + setting (not setting) ISIG in the termios c_lflag + field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Ter- + minal Interface. + + icanon (-icanon) + Enable (disable) canonical input (ERASE and KILL + processing). This shall have the effect of set- + ting (not setting) ICANON in the termios c_lflag + field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Ter- + minal Interface. + + iexten (-iexten) + Enable (disable) any implementation-defined spe- + cial control characters not currently controlled + by icanon, isig, ixon, or ixoff. This shall have + the effect of setting (not setting) IEXTEN in the + termios c_lflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + echo (-echo) + Echo back (do not echo back) every character + typed. This shall have the effect of setting (not + setting) ECHO in the termios c_lflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + echoe (-echoe) + The ERASE character visually erases (does not + erase) the last character in the current line + from the display, if possible. This shall have + the effect of setting (not setting) ECHOE in the + termios c_lflag field, as defined in the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chap- + ter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + echok (-echok) + Echo (do not echo) NL after KILL character. This + shall have the effect of setting (not setting) + ECHOK in the termios c_lflag field, as defined in + the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + echonl (-echonl) + Echo (do not echo) NL, even if echo is disabled. + This shall have the effect of setting (not set- + ting) ECHONL in the termios c_lflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + noflsh (-noflsh) + Disable (enable) flush after INTR, QUIT, SUSP. + This shall have the effect of setting (not set- + ting) NOFLSH in the termios c_lflag field, as + defined in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface. + + tostop (-tostop) + Send SIGTTOU for background output. This shall + have the effect of setting (not setting) TOSTOP + in the termios c_lflag field, as defined in the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Chapter 11, General Terminal Interface. + + + Special Control Character Assignments + <control>-character string + + Set <control>-character to string. If <con- + trol>-character is one of the character sequences + in the first column of the following table, the + corresponding Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Termi- + nal Interface control character from the second + column shall be recognized. This has the effect + of setting the corresponding element of the + termios c_cc array (see the Base Definitions vol- + ume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 13, Headers, + <termios.h>). + Table: Control Character Names in stty +Control Character c_cc Subscript Description +eof VEOF EOF character +eol VEOL EOL character +erase VERASE ERASE character +intr VINTR INTR character +kill VKILL KILL character +quit VQUIT QUIT character +susp VSUSP SUSP character +start VSTART START character +stop VSTOP STOP character + + If string is a single character, the control character + shall be set to that character. If string is the two- + character sequence "^-" or the string undef, the control + character shall be set to _POSIX_VDISABLE , if it is in + effect for the device; if _POSIX_VDISABLE is not in + effect for the device, it shall be treated as an error. + In the POSIX locale, if string is a two-character + sequence beginning with circumflex ( '^' ), and the sec- + ond character is one of those listed in the "^c" column + of the following table, the control character shall be + set to the corresponding character value in the Value + column of the table. Table: Circumflex Control Charac- + ters in stty + ^c Value ^c Value ^c Value + a, A <SOH> l, L <FF> w, W <ETB> + b, B <STX> m, M <CR> x, X <CAN> + c, C <ETX> n, N <SO> y, Y <EM> + d, D <EOT> o, O <SI> z, Z <SUB> + e, E <ENQ> p, P <DLE> [ <ESC> + f, F <ACK> q, Q <DC1> \ <FS> + g, G <BEL> r, R <DC2> ] <GS> + h, H <BS> s, S <DC3> ^ <RS> + i, I <HT> t, T <DC4> _ <US> + j, J <LF> u, U <NAK> ? <DEL> + k, K <VT> v, V <SYN> + + min number + + Set the value of MIN to number. MIN is used in + non-canonical mode input processing ( icanon). + + time number + + Set the value of TIME to number. TIME is used in + non-canonical mode input processing ( icanon). + + + Combination Modes + saved settings + + Set the current terminal characteristics to the + saved settings produced by the -g option. + + evenp or parity + + Enable parenb and cs7; disable parodd. + + oddp + + Enable parenb, cs7, and parodd. + + -parity, -evenp, or -oddp + + Disable parenb, and set cs8. + + raw (-raw or cooked) + + Enable (disable) raw input and output. Raw mode + shall be equivalent to setting: + + + stty cs8 erase ^- kill ^- intr ^- \ + quit ^- eof ^- eol ^- -post -inpck + + nl (-nl) + + Disable (enable) icrnl. In addition, -nl unsets + inlcr and igncr. + + ek Reset ERASE and KILL characters back to system + defaults. + + sane + + Reset all modes to some reasonable, unspecified, + values. + + +STDIN + Although no input is read from standard input, standard + input shall be used to get the current terminal I/O + characteristics and to set new terminal I/O characteris- + tics. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of stty: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + This variable determines the locale for the + interpretation of sequences of bytes of text data + as characters (for example, single-byte as + opposed to multi-byte characters in arguments) + and which characters are in the class print. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + If operands are specified, no output shall be produced. + + If the -g option is specified, stty shall write to stan- + dard output the current settings in a form that can be + used as arguments to another instance of stty on the + same system. + + If the -a option is specified, all of the information as + described in the OPERANDS section shall be written to + standard output. Unless otherwise specified, this infor- + mation shall be written as <space>-separated tokens in + an unspecified format, on one or more lines, with an + unspecified number of tokens per line. Additional + information may be written. + + If no options or operands are specified, an unspecified + subset of the information written for the -a option + shall be written. + + If speed information is written as part of the default + output, or if the -a option is specified and if the ter- + minal input speed and output speed are the same, the + speed information shall be written as follows: + + + "speed %d baud;", <speed> + + Otherwise, speeds shall be written as: + + + "ispeed %d baud; ospeed %d baud;", <ispeed>, <ospeed> + + In locales other than the POSIX locale, the word baud + may be changed to something more appropriate in those + locales. + + If control characters are written as part of the default + output, or if the -a option is specified, control char- + acters shall be written as: + + + "%s = %s;", <control-character name>, <value> + + where <value> is either the character, or some visual + representation of the character if it is non-printable, + or the string undef if the character is disabled. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The terminal options were read or set success- + fully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The -g flag is designed to facilitate the saving and + restoring of terminal state from the shell level. For + example, a program may: + + + saveterm="$(stty -g)" # save terminal state + stty (new settings) # set new state + ... # ... + stty $saveterm # restore terminal state + + Since the format is unspecified, the saved value is not + portable across systems. + + Since the -a format is so loosely specified, scripts + that save and restore terminal settings should use the + -g option. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The original stty description was taken directly from + System V and reflected the System V terminal driver + termio. It has been modified to correspond to the ter- + minal driver termios. + + Output modes are specified only for XSI-conformant sys- + tems. All implementations are expected to provide stty + operands corresponding to all of the output modes they + support. + + The stty utility is primarily used to tailor the user + interface of the terminal, such as selecting the pre- + ferred ERASE and KILL characters. As an application pro- + gramming utility, stty can be used within shell scripts + to alter the terminal settings for the duration of the + script. + + The termios section states that individual disabling of + control characters is possible through the option + _POSIX_VDISABLE. If enabled, two conventions currently + exist for specifying this: System V uses "^-" , and BSD + uses undef. Both are accepted by stty in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. The other BSD convention of using + the letter 'u' was rejected because it conflicts with + the actual letter 'u' , which is an acceptable value for + a control character. + + Early proposals did not specify the mapping of "^c" to + control characters because the control characters were + not specified in the POSIX locale character set descrip- + tion file requirements. The control character set is + now specified in the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 3, Definitions so the his- + torical mapping is specified. Note that although the + mapping corresponds to control-character key assignments + on many terminals that use the ISO/IEC 646:1991 standard + (or ASCII) character encodings, the mapping specified + here is to the control characters, not their keyboard + encodings. + + Since termios supports separate speeds for input and + output, two new options were added to specify each dis- + tinctly. + + Some historical implementations use standard input to + get and set terminal characteristics; others use stan- + dard output. Since input from a login TTY is usually + restricted to the owner while output to a TTY is fre- + quently open to anyone, using standard input provides + fewer chances of accidentally (or maliciously) altering + the terminal settings of other users. Using standard + input also allows stty -a and stty -g output to be redi- + rected for later use. Therefore, usage of standard input + is required by this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Shell Command Language , the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Chapter 11, General Terminal + Interface, <termios.h> + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 stty(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tail.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tail.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..30b5852 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tail.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +tail(P) tail(P) + + + + + +NAME + tail - copy the last part of a file + +SYNOPSIS + tail [-f][ -c number| -n number][file] + +DESCRIPTION + The tail utility shall copy its input file to the stan- + dard output beginning at a designated place. + + Copying shall begin at the point in the file indicated + by the -c number or -n number options. The option-argu- + ment number shall be counted in units of lines or bytes, + according to the options -n and -c. Both line and byte + counts start from 1. + + Tails relative to the end of the file may be saved in an + internal buffer, and thus may be limited in length. Such + a buffer, if any, shall be no smaller than {LINE_MAX}*10 + bytes. + +OPTIONS + The tail utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -c number + The application shall ensure that the number + option-argument is a decimal integer whose sign + affects the location in the file, measured in + bytes, to begin the copying: + Sign Copying Starts + + Relative to the beginning of the file. + - Relative to the end of the file. + none Relative to the end of the file. + + The origin for counting shall be 1; that is, -c +1 rep- + resents the first byte of the file, -c -1 the last. + + -f If the input file is a regular file or if the + file operand specifies a FIFO, do not terminate + after the last line of the input file has been + copied, but read and copy further bytes from the + input file when they become available. If no file + operand is specified and standard input is a + pipe, the -f option shall be ignored. If the + input file is not a FIFO, pipe, or regular file, + it is unspecified whether or not the -f option + shall be ignored. + + -n number + This option shall be equivalent to -c number, + except the starting location in the file shall be + measured in lines instead of bytes. The origin + for counting shall be 1; that is, -n +1 repre- + sents the first line of the file, -n -1 the last. + + + If neither -c nor -n is specified, -n 10 shall be + assumed. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an input file. If no file operands + are specified, the standard input shall be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + If the -c option is specified, the input file can con- + tain arbitrary data; otherwise, the input file shall be + a text file. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of tail: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The designated portion of the input file shall be writ- + ten to standard output. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The -c option should be used with caution when the input + is a text file containing multi-byte characters; it may + produce output that does not start on a character bound- + ary. + + Although the input file to tail can be any type, the + results might not be what would be expected on some + character special device files or on file types not + described by the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. Since this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 does not specify the block size + used when doing input, tail need not read all of the + data from devices that only perform block transfers. + +EXAMPLES + The -f option can be used to monitor the growth of a + file that is being written by some other process. For + example, the command: + + + tail -f fred + + prints the last ten lines of the file fred, followed by + any lines that are appended to fred between the time + tail is initiated and killed. As another example, the + command: + + + tail -f -c 15 fred + + prints the last 15 bytes of the file fred, followed by + any bytes that are appended to fred between the time + tail is initiated and killed. + +RATIONALE + This version of tail was created to allow conformance to + the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The historical -b option + was omitted because of the general non-portability of + block-sized units of text. The -c option historically + meant "characters", but this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 indicates that it means "bytes". + This was selected to allow reasonable implementations + when multi-byte characters are possible; it was not + named -b to avoid confusion with the historical -b. + + The origin of counting both lines and bytes is 1, match- + ing all widespread historical implementations. + + The restriction on the internal buffer is a compromise + between the historical System V implementation of 4096 + bytes and the BSD 32768 bytes. + + The -f option has been implemented as a loop that sleeps + for 1 second and copies any bytes that are available. + This is sufficient, but if more efficient methods of + determining when new data are available are developed, + implementations are encouraged to use them. + + Historical documentation indicates that tail ignores the + -f option if the input file is a pipe (pipe and FIFO on + systems that support FIFOs). On BSD-based systems, this + has been true; on System V-based systems, this was true + when input was taken from standard input, but it did not + ignore the -f flag if a FIFO was named as the file oper- + and. Since the -f option is not useful on pipes and all + historical implementations ignore -f if no file operand + is specified and standard input is a pipe, this volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 requires this behavior. However, + since the -f option is useful on a FIFO, this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 also requires that if standard + input is a FIFO or a FIFO is named, the -f option shall + not be ignored. Although historical behavior does not + ignore the -f option for other file types, this is + unspecified so that implementations are allowed to + ignore the -f option if it is known that the file cannot + be extended. + + This was changed to the current form based on comments + noting that -c was almost never used without specifying + a number and that there was no need to specify -l if -n + number was given. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + head + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 tail(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tee.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tee.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a41a60f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tee.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ +tee(P) tee(P) + + + + + +NAME + tee - duplicate standard input + +SYNOPSIS + tee [-ai][file...] + +DESCRIPTION + The tee utility shall copy standard input to standard + output, making a copy in zero or more files. The tee + utility shall not buffer output. + + If the -a option is not specified, output files shall be + written (see File Read, Write, and Creation . + +OPTIONS + The tee utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a Append the output to the files. + + -i Ignore the SIGINT signal. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an output file. Processing of at + least 13 file operands shall be supported. + + +STDIN + The standard input can be of any type. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of tee: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic + messages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default, except that if the -i option was specified, + SIGINT shall be ignored. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be a copy of the standard + input. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + If any file operands are specified, the standard input + shall be copied to each named file. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The standard input was successfully copied to all + output files. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + If a write to any successfully opened file operand + fails, writes to other successfully opened file operands + and standard output shall continue, but the exit status + shall be non-zero. Otherwise, the default actions spec- + ified in Utility Description Defaults apply. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The tee utility is usually used in a pipeline, to make a + copy of the output of some utility. + + The file operand is technically optional, but tee is no + more useful than cat when none is specified. + +EXAMPLES + Save an unsorted intermediate form of the data in a + pipeline: + + + ... | tee unsorted | sort > sorted + +RATIONALE + The buffering requirement means that tee is not allowed + to use ISO C standard fully buffered or line-buffered + writes. It does not mean that tee has to do 1-byte reads + followed by 1-byte writes. + + It should be noted that early versions of BSD ignore any + invalid options and accept a single '-' as an alterna- + tive to -i. They also print a message if unable to open + a file: + + + "tee: cannot access %s\n", <pathname> + + Historical implementations ignore write errors. This is + explicitly not permitted by this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + + Some historical implementations use O_APPEND when pro- + viding append mode; others use the lseek() function to + seek to the end-of-file after opening the file without + O_APPEND. This volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 requires + functionality equivalent to using O_APPEND; see File + Read, Write, and Creation . + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + Introduction , cat , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, lseek() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 tee(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/test.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/test.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2dc80a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/test.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,648 @@ +test(P) test(P) + + + + + +NAME + test - evaluate expression + +SYNOPSIS + test [expression] + + [ [expression] ] + + +DESCRIPTION + The test utility shall evaluate the expression and indi- + cate the result of the evaluation by its exit status. An + exit status of zero indicates that the expression evalu- + ated as true and an exit status of 1 indicates that the + expression evaluated as false. + + In the second form of the utility, which uses "[]" + rather than test, the application shall ensure that the + square brackets are separate arguments. + +OPTIONS + The test utility shall not recognize the "--" argument + in the manner specified by guideline 10 in the Base Def- + initions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, + Utility Syntax Guidelines. + + No options shall be supported. + +OPERANDS + The application shall ensure that all operators and ele- + ments of primaries are presented as separate arguments + to the test utility. + + The following primaries can be used to construct expres- + sion: + + -b file + True if file exists and is a block special file. + + -c file + True if file exists and is a character special + file. + + -d file + True if file exists and is a directory. + + -e file + True if file exists. + + -f file + True if file exists and is a regular file. + + -g file + True if file exists and its set-group-ID flag is + set. + + -h file + True if file exists and is a symbolic link. + + -L file + True if file exists and is a symbolic link. + + -n string + True if the length of string is non-zero. + + -p file + True if file is a FIFO. + + -r file + True if file exists and is readable. True shall + indicate that permission to read from file will + be granted, as defined in File Read, Write, and + Creation . + + -S file + True if file exists and is a socket. + + -s file + True if file exists and has a size greater than + zero. + + -t file_descriptor + + True if the file whose file descriptor number is + file_descriptor is open and is associated with a + terminal. + + -u file + True if file exists and its set-user-ID flag is + set. + + -w file + True if file exists and is writable. True shall + indicate that permission to write from file will + be granted, as defined in File Read, Write, and + Creation . + + -x file + True if file exists and is executable. True shall + indicate that permission to execute file will be + granted, as defined in File Read, Write, and Cre- + ation . If file is a directory, true shall indi- + cate that permission to search file will be + granted. + + -z string + True if the length of string string is zero. + + string True if the string string is not the null string. + + s1 = s2 + True if the strings s1 and s2 are identical. + + s1 != s2 + True if the strings s1 and s2 are not identical. + + n1 -eq n2 + True if the integers n1 and n2 are algebraically + equal. + + n1 -ne n2 + True if the integers n1 and n2 are not algebrai- + cally equal. + + n1 -gt n2 + True if the integer n1 is algebraically greater + than the integer n2. + + n1 -ge n2 + True if the integer n1 is algebraically greater + than or equal to the integer n2. + + n1 -lt n2 + True if the integer n1 is algebraically less than + the integer n2. + + n1 -le n2 + True if the integer n1 is algebraically less than + or equal to the integer n2. + + expression1 -a expression2 + + True if both expression1 and expression2 are + true. The -a binary primary is left associative. + It has a higher precedence than -o. + + expression1 -o expression2 + + True if either expression1 or expression2 is + true. The -o binary primary is left associative. + + + With the exception of the -h file and -L file primaries, + if a file argument is a symbolic link, test shall evalu- + ate the expression by resolving the symbolic link and + using the file referenced by the link. + + These primaries can be combined with the following oper- + ators: + + ! expression + True if expression is false. + + ( expression ) + True if expression is true. The parentheses can + be used to alter the normal precedence and asso- + ciativity. + + + The primaries with two elements of the form: + + + -primary_operator primary_operand + + are known as unary primaries. The primaries with three + elements in either of the two forms: + + + primary_operand -primary_operator primary_operand + + + primary_operand primary_operator primary_operand + + are known as binary primaries. Additional implementa- + tion-defined operators and primary_operators may be pro- + vided by implementations. They shall be of the form - + operator where the first character of operator is not a + digit. + + The algorithm for determining the precedence of the + operators and the return value that shall be generated + is based on the number of arguments presented to test. + (However, when using the "[...]" form, the right-bracket + final argument shall not be counted in this algorithm.) + + In the following list, $1, $2, $3, and $4 represent the + arguments presented to test: + + 0 arguments: + Exit false (1). + + 1 argument: + Exit true (0) if $1 is not null; otherwise, exit + false. + + 2 arguments: + + If $1 is '!' , exit true if $2 is null, false if + $2 is not null. + + If $1 is a unary primary, exit true if the unary + test is true, false if the unary test is false. + + Otherwise, produce unspecified results. + + 3 arguments: + + If $2 is a binary primary, perform the binary + test of $1 and $3. + + If $1 is '!' , negate the two-argument test of $2 + and $3. + + If $1 is '(' and $3 is ')' , perform the unary + test of $2. + + Otherwise, produce unspecified results. + + 4 arguments: + + If $1 is '!' , negate the three-argument test of + $2, $3, and $4. + + If $1 is '(' and $4 is ')' , perform the two- + argument test of $2 and $3. + + Otherwise, the results are unspecified. + + >4 arguments: + The results are unspecified. + + On XSI-conformant systems, combinations of primaries and + operators shall be evaluated using the precedence and + associativity rules described previously. In addition, + the string comparison binary primaries '=' and "!=" + shall have a higher precedence than any unary primary. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of test: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 expression evaluated to true. + + 1 expression evaluated to false or expression was + missing. + + >1 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Scripts should be careful when dealing with user-sup- + plied input that could be confused with primaries and + operators. Unless the application writer knows all the + cases that produce input to the script, invocations + like: + + + test "$1" -a "$2" + + should be written as: + + + test "$1" && test "$2" + + to avoid problems if a user supplied values such as $1 + set to '!' and $2 set to the null string. That is, in + cases where maximal portability is of concern, replace: + + + test expr1 -a expr2 + + with: + + + test expr1 && test expr2 + + and replace: + + + test expr1 -o expr2 + + with: + + + test expr1 || test expr2 + + but note that, in test, -a has higher precedence than -o + while "&&" and "||" have equal precedence in the shell. + + Parentheses or braces can be used in the shell command + language to effect grouping. + + Parentheses must be escaped when using sh; for example: + + + test \( expr1 -a expr2 \) -o expr3 + + This command is not always portable outside XSI-confor- + mant systems. The following form can be used instead: + + + ( test expr1 && test expr2 ) || test expr3 + + The two commands: + + + test "$1" + test ! "$1" + + could not be used reliably on some historical systems. + Unexpected results would occur if such a string expres- + sion were used and $1 expanded to '!' , '(' , or a known + unary primary. Better constructs are: + + + test -n "$1" + test -z "$1" + respectively. + + Historical systems have also been unreliable given the + common construct: + + + test "$response" = "expected string" + + One of the following is a more reliable form: + + + test "X$response" = "Xexpected string" + test "expected string" = "$response" + + Note that the second form assumes that expected string + could not be confused with any unary primary. If + expected string starts with '-' , '(' , '!' , or even + '=' , the first form should be used instead. Using the + preceding rules without the XSI marked extensions, any + of the three comparison forms is reliable, given any + input. (However, note that the strings are quoted in + all cases.) + + Because the string comparison binary primaries, '=' and + "!=" , have a higher precedence than any unary primary + in the greater than 4 argument case, unexpected results + can occur if arguments are not properly prepared. For + example, in: + + + test -d $1 -o -d $2 + + If $1 evaluates to a possible directory name of '=' , + the first three arguments are considered a string com- + parison, which shall cause a syntax error when the sec- + ond -d is encountered. One of the following forms pre- + vents this; the second is preferred: + + + test \( -d "$1" \) -o \( -d "$2" \) + test -d "$1" || test -d "$2" + + Also in the greater than 4 argument case: + + + test "$1" = "bat" -a "$2" = "ball" + + syntax errors occur if $1 evaluates to '(' or '!' . One + of the following forms prevents this; the third is pre- + ferred: + + + test "X$1" = "Xbat" -a "X$2" = "Xball" + test "$1" = "bat" && test "$2" = "ball" + test "X$1" = "Xbat" && test "X$2" = "Xball" + +EXAMPLES + Exit if there are not two or three arguments (two varia- + tions): + + + if [ $# -ne 2 -a $# -ne 3 ]; then exit 1; fi + if [ $# -lt 2 -o $# -gt 3 ]; then exit 1; fi + + Perform a mkdir if a directory does not exist: + + + test ! -d tempdir && mkdir tempdir + + Wait for a file to become non-readable: + + + while test -r thefile + do + sleep 30 + done + echo '"thefile" is no longer readable' + + Perform a command if the argument is one of three + strings (two variations): + + + if [ "$1" = "pear" ] || [ "$1" = "grape" ] || [ "$1" = "apple" ] + then + command + fi + + + case "$1" in + pear|grape|apple) command ;; + esac + +RATIONALE + The KornShell-derived conditional command (double + bracket [[]]) was removed from the shell command lan- + guage description in an early proposal. Objections were + raised that the real problem is misuse of the test com- + mand ( [), and putting it into the shell is the wrong + way to fix the problem. Instead, proper documentation + and a new shell reserved word ( !) are sufficient. + + Tests that require multiple test operations can be done + at the shell level using individual invocations of the + test command and shell logicals, rather than using the + error-prone -o flag of test. + + XSI-conformant systems support more than four arguments. + + XSI-conformant systems support the combining of pri- + maries with the following constructs: + + expression1 -a expression2 + + True if both expression1 and expression2 are + true. + + expression1 -o expression2 + + True if at least one of expression1 and expres- + sion2 are true. + + ( expression ) + + True if expression is true. + + + In evaluating these more complex combined expressions, + the following precedence rules are used: + + The unary primaries have higher precedence than + the algebraic binary primaries. + + The unary primaries have lower precedence than + the string binary primaries. + + The unary and binary primaries have higher prece- + dence than the unary string primary. + + The ! operator has higher precedence than the -a + operator, and the -a operator has higher prece- + dence than the -o operator. + + The -a and -o operators are left associative. + + The parentheses can be used to alter the normal + precedence and associativity. + + The BSD and System V versions of -f are not the same. + The BSD definition was: + + -f file + True if file exists and is not a directory. + + + The SVID version (true if the file exists and is a regu- + lar file) was chosen for this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 because its use is consistent with + the -b, -c, -d, and -p operands ( file exists and is a + specific file type). + + The -e primary, possessing similar functionality to that + provided by the C shell, was added because it provides + the only way for a shell script to find out if a file + exists without trying to open the file. Since implemen- + tations are allowed to add additional file types, a por- + table script cannot use: + + + test -b foo -o -c foo -o -d foo -o -f foo -o -p foo + + to find out if foo is an existing file. On historical + BSD systems, the existence of a file could be determined + by: + + + test -f foo -o -d foo + + but there was no easy way to determine that an existing + file was a regular file. An early proposal used the + KornShell -a primary (with the same meaning), but this + was changed to -e because there were concerns about the + high probability of humans confusing the -a primary with + the -a binary operator. + + The following options were not included in this volume + of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, although they are provided by + some implementations. These operands should not be used + by new implementations for other purposes: + + -k file + True if file exists and its sticky bit is set. + + -C file + True if file is a contiguous file. + + -V file + True if file is a version file. + + + The following option was not included because it was + undocumented in most implementations, has been removed + from some implementations (including System V), and the + functionality is provided by the shell (see Parameter + Expansion . + + -l string + The length of the string string. + + + The -b, -c, -g, -p, -u, and -x operands are derived from + the SVID; historical BSD does not provide them. The -k + operand is derived from System V; historical BSD does + not provide it. + + On historical BSD systems, test -w directory always + returned false because test tried to open the directory + for writing, which always fails. + + Some additional primaries newly invented or from the + KornShell appeared in an early proposal as part of the + conditional command ( [[]]): s1 > s2, s1 < s2, str = + pattern, str != pattern, f1 -nt f2, f1 -ot f2, and f1 + -ef f2. They were not carried forward into the test + utility when the conditional command was removed from + the shell because they have not been included in the + test utility built into historical implementations of + the sh utility. + + The -t file_descriptor primary is shown with a mandatory + argument because the grammar is ambiguous if it can be + omitted. Historical implementations have allowed it to + be omitted, providing a default of 1. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + File Read, Write, and Creation , find + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 test(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/touch.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/touch.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..151c8a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/touch.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +touch(P) touch(P) + + + + + +NAME + touch - change file access and modification times + +SYNOPSIS + touch [-acm][ -r ref_file| -t time] file... + +DESCRIPTION + The touch utility shall change the modification times, + access times, or both of files. The modification time + shall be equivalent to the value of the st_mtime member + of the stat structure for a file, as described in the + System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001; the + access time shall be equivalent to the value of + st_atime. + + The time used can be specified by the -t time option- + argument, the corresponding time fields of the file ref- + erenced by the -r ref_file option-argument, or the + date_time operand, as specified in the following sec- + tions. If none of these are specified, touch shall use + the current time (the value returned by the equivalent + of the time() function defined in the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001). + + For each file operand, touch shall perform actions + equivalent to the following functions defined in the + System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001: + + If file does not exist, a creat() function call is made + with the file operand used as the path argument and the + value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, + S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and S_IWOTH used as the mode + argument. + + The utime() function is called with the following argu- + ments: <ol type="a"> + + The file operand is used as the path argument. + + The utimbuf structure members actime and modtime are + determined as described in the OPTIONS section. + +OPTIONS + The touch utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a Change the access time of file. Do not change the + modification time unless -m is also specified. + + -c Do not create a specified file if it does not + exist. Do not write any diagnostic messages con- + cerning this condition. + + -m Change the modification time of file. Do not + change the access time unless -a is also speci- + fied. + + -r ref_file + Use the corresponding time of the file named by + the pathname ref_file instead of the current + time. + + -t time + Use the specified time instead of the current + time. The option-argument shall be a decimal num- + ber of the form: + + + [[CC]YY]MMDDhhmm[.SS] + + where each two digits represents the following: + + MM The month of the year [01,12]. + + DD The day of the month [01,31]. + + hh The hour of the day [00,23]. + + mm The minute of the hour [00,59]. + + CC The first two digits of the year (the century). + + YY The second two digits of the year. + + SS The second of the minute [00,60]. + + + Both CC and YY shall be optional. If neither is given, + the current year shall be assumed. If YY is specified, + but CC is not, CC shall be derived as follows: + If YY is: CC becomes: + [69,99] 19 + [00,68] 20 + + Note: It is expected that in a future version of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 the default century inferred + from a 2-digit year will change. (This would + apply to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as + input.) + + + The resulting time shall be affected by the value of the + TZ environment variable. If the resulting time value + precedes the Epoch, touch shall exit immediately with an + error status. The range of valid times past the Epoch + is implementation-defined, but it shall extend to at + least the time 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds, January 1, + 2038, Coordinated Universal Time. Some implementations + may not be able to represent dates beyond January 18, + 2038, because they use signed int as a time holder. + + The range for SS is [00,60] rather than [00,59] because + of leap seconds. If SS is 60, and the resulting time, as + affected by the TZ environment variable, does not refer + to a leap second, the resulting time shall be one second + after a time where SS is 59. If SS is not given a value, + it is assumed to be zero. + + + If neither the -a nor -m options were specified, touch + shall behave as if both the -a and -m options were spec- + ified. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a file whose times shall be modi- + fied. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of touch: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + TZ Determine the timezone to be used for interpret- + ing the time option-argument. If TZ is unset or + null, an unspecified default timezone shall be + used. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The utility executed successfully and all + requested changes were made. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The interpretation of time is taken to be seconds since + the Epoch (see the Base Definitions volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 4.14, Seconds Since the + Epoch). It should be noted that implementations conform- + ing to the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 do not take leap seconds into + account when computing seconds since the Epoch. When + SS=60 is used, the resulting time always refers to 1 + plus seconds since the Epoch for a time when SS=59. + + Although the -t time option-argument specifies values in + 1969, the access time and modification time fields are + defined in terms of seconds since the Epoch (00:00:00 on + 1 January 1970 UTC). Therefore, depending on the value + of TZ when touch is run, there is never more than a few + valid hours in 1969 and there need not be any valid + times in 1969. + + One ambiguous situation occurs if -t time is not speci- + fied, -r ref_file is not specified, and the first oper- + and is an eight or ten-digit decimal number. A portable + script can avoid this problem by using: + + + touch -- file + + or: + + + touch ./file + + in this case. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The functionality of touch is described almost entirely + through references to functions in the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. In this way, there is no + duplication of effort required for describing such side + effects as the relationship of user IDs to the user + database, permissions, and so on. + + There are some significant differences between the touch + utility in this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 and those + in System V and BSD systems. They are upwards-compatible + for historical applications from both implementations: + + In System V, an ambiguity exists when a pathname that is + a decimal number leads the operands; it is treated as a + time value. In BSD, no time value is allowed; files may + only be touched to the current time. The -t time con- + struct solves these problems for future conforming + applications (note that the -t option is not historical + practice). + + The inclusion of the century digits, CC, is also new. + Note that a ten-digit time value is treated as if YY, + and not CC, were specified. The caveat about the range + of dates following the Epoch was included as recognition + that some implementations are not able to represent + dates beyond 18 January 2038 because they use signed int + as a time holder. + + The -r option was added because several comments + requested this capability. This option was named -f in + an early proposal, but was changed because the -f option + is used in the BSD version of touch with a different + meaning. + + At least one historical implementation of touch incre- + mented the exit code if -c was specified and the file + did not exist. This volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 + requires exit status zero if no errors occur. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + Applications should use the -r or -t options. + +SEE ALSO + date , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, creat(), time(), utime(), the Base + Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, <sys/stat.h> + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 touch(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tr.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tr.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01e5f20 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tr.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,504 @@ +tr(P) tr(P) + + + + + +NAME + tr - translate characters + +SYNOPSIS + tr [-c | -C][-s] string1 string2 + + tr -s [-c | -C] string1 + + tr -d [-c | -C] string1 + + tr -ds [-c | -C] string1 string2 + + +DESCRIPTION + The tr utility shall copy the standard input to the + standard output with substitution or deletion of + selected characters. The options specified and the + string1 and string2 operands shall control translations + that occur while copying characters and single-character + collating elements. + +OPTIONS + The tr utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -c Complement the set of values specified by + string1. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. + + -C Complement the set of characters specified by + string1. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. + + -d Delete all occurrences of input characters that + are specified by string1. + + -s Replace instances of repeated characters with a + single character, as described in the EXTENDED + DESCRIPTION section. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + string1, string2 + + Translation control strings. Each string shall + represent a set of characters to be converted + into an array of characters used for the transla- + tion. For a detailed description of how the + strings are interpreted, see the EXTENDED + DESCRIPTION section. + + +STDIN + The standard input can be any type of file. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of tr: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for the behavior of range + expressions and equivalence classes. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments) and the behavior of + character classes. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The tr output shall be identical to the input, with the + exception of the specified transformations. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + The operands string1 and string2 (if specified) define + two arrays of characters. The constructs in the follow- + ing list can be used to specify characters or single- + character collating elements. If any of the constructs + result in multi-character collating elements, tr shall + exclude, without a diagnostic, those multi-character + elements from the resulting array. + + character + Any character not described by one of the conven- + tions below shall represent itself. + + \octal Octal sequences can be used to represent charac- + ters with specific coded values. An octal + sequence shall consist of a backslash followed by + the longest sequence of one, two, or three-octal- + digit characters (01234567). The sequence shall + cause the value whose encoding is represented by + the one, two, or three-digit octal integer to be + placed into the array. If the size of a byte on + the system is greater than nine bits, the valid + escape sequence used to represent a byte is + implementation-defined. Multi-byte characters + require multiple, concatenated escape sequences + of this type, including the leading '\' for each + byte. + + \character + The backslash-escape sequences in the Base Defi- + nitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Table + 5-1, Escape Sequences and Associated Actions ( + '\\' , '\a' , '\b' , '\f' , '\n' , '\r' , '\t' , + '\v' ) shall be supported. The results of using + any other character, other than an octal digit, + following the backslash are unspecified. + + c-c In the POSIX locale, this construct shall repre- + sent the range of collating elements between the + range endpoints (as long as neither endpoint is + an octal sequence of the form \octal), inclusive, + as defined by the collation sequence. The charac- + ters or collating elements in the range shall be + placed in the array in ascending collation + sequence. If the second endpoint precedes the + starting endpoint in the collation sequence, it + is unspecified whether the range of collating + elements is empty, or this construct is treated + as invalid. In locales other than the POSIX + locale, this construct has unspecified behavior. + + If either or both of the range endpoints are octal + sequences of the form \octal, this shall represent the + range of specific coded values between the two range + endpoints, inclusive. + + :class: + Represents all characters belonging to the + defined character class, as defined by the cur- + rent setting of the LC_CTYPE locale category. The + following character class names shall be accepted + when specified in string1: + alnum blank digit lower punct upper + alpha cntrl graph print space xdigit + + In addition, character class expressions of the form [: + name:] shall be recognized in those locales where the + name keyword has been given a charclass definition in + the LC_CTYPE category. + + When both the -d and -s options are specified, any of + the character class names shall be accepted in string2. + Otherwise, only character class names lower or upper are + valid in string2 and then only if the corresponding + character class ( upper and lower, respectively) is + specified in the same relative position in string1. Such + a specification shall be interpreted as a request for + case conversion. When [: lower:] appears in string1 and + [: upper:] appears in string2, the arrays shall contain + the characters from the toupper mapping in the LC_CTYPE + category of the current locale. When [: upper:] appears + in string1 and [: lower:] appears in string2, the arrays + shall contain the characters from the tolower mapping in + the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale. The first + character from each mapping pair shall be in the array + for string1 and the second character from each mapping + pair shall be in the array for string2 in the same rela- + tive position. + + Except for case conversion, the characters specified by + a character class expression shall be placed in the + array in an unspecified order. + + If the name specified for class does not define a valid + character class in the current locale, the behavior is + undefined. + + =equiv= + Represents all characters or collating elements + belonging to the same equivalence class as equiv, + as defined by the current setting of the LC_COL- + LATE locale category. An equivalence class + expression shall be allowed only in string1, or + in string2 when it is being used by the combined + -d and -s options. The characters belonging to + the equivalence class shall be placed in the + array in an unspecified order. + + x*n Represents n repeated occurrences of the charac- + ter x. Because this expression is used to map + multiple characters to one, it is only valid when + it occurs in string2. If n is omitted or is zero, + it shall be interpreted as large enough to extend + the string2-based sequence to the length of the + string1-based sequence. If n has a leading zero, + it shall be interpreted as an octal value. Other- + wise, it shall be interpreted as a decimal value. + + + When the -d option is not specified: + + Each input character found in the array specified + by string1 shall be replaced by the character in + the same relative position in the array specified + by string2. When the array specified by string2 + is shorter that the one specified by string1, the + results are unspecified. + + If the -C option is specified, the complements of + the characters specified by string1 (the set of + all characters in the current character set, as + defined by the current setting of LC_CTYPE , + except for those actually specified in the + string1 operand) shall be placed in the array in + ascending collation sequence, as defined by the + current setting of LC_COLLATE . + + If the -c option is specified, the complement of + the values specified by string1 shall be placed + in the array in ascending order by binary value. + + Because the order in which characters specified + by character class expressions or equivalence + class expressions is undefined, such expressions + should only be used if the intent is to map sev- + eral characters into one. An exception is case + conversion, as described previously. + + When the -d option is specified: + + Input characters found in the array specified by + string1 shall be deleted. + + When the -C option is specified with -d, all + characters except those specified by string1 + shall be deleted. The contents of string2 are + ignored, unless the -s option is also specified. + + When the -c option is specified with -d, all val- + ues except those specified by string1 shall be + deleted. The contents of string2 shall be + ignored, unless the -s option is also specified. + + The same string cannot be used for both the -d + and the -s option; when both options are speci- + fied, both string1 (used for deletion) and + string2 (used for squeezing) shall be required. + + When the -s option is specified, after any deletions or + translations have taken place, repeated sequences of the + same character shall be replaced by one occurrence of + the same character, if the character is found in the + array specified by the last operand. If the last operand + contains a character class, such as the following exam- + ple: + + + tr -s '[:space:]' + + the last operand's array shall contain all of the char- + acters in that character class. However, in a case con- + version, as described previously, such as: + + + tr -s '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]' + + the last operand's array shall contain only those char- + acters defined as the second characters in each of the + toupper or tolower character pairs, as appropriate. + + An empty string used for string1 or string2 produces + undefined results. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 All input was processed successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + If necessary, string1 and string2 can be quoted to avoid + pattern matching by the shell. + + If an ordinary digit (representing itself) is to follow + an octal sequence, the octal sequence must use the full + three digits to avoid ambiguity. + + When string2 is shorter than string1, a difference + results between historical System V and BSD systems. A + BSD system pads string2 with the last character found in + string2. Thus, it is possible to do the following: + + + tr 0123456789 d + + which would translate all digits to the letter 'd' . + Since this area is specifically unspecified in this vol- + ume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, both the BSD and System V + behaviors are allowed, but a conforming application can- + not rely on the BSD behavior. It would have to code the + example in the following way: + + + tr 0123456789 '[d*]' + + It should be noted that, despite similarities in appear- + ance, the string operands used by tr are not regular + expressions. + + Unlike some historical implementations, this definition + of the tr utility correctly processes NUL characters in + its input stream. NUL characters can be stripped by + using: + + + tr -d '\000' + +EXAMPLES + The following example creates a list of all words in + file1 one per line in file2, where a word is taken to be + a maximal string of letters. + + + tr -cs "[:alpha:]" "[\n*]" <file1 >file2 + + The next example translates all lowercase characters in + file1 to uppercase and writes the results to standard + output. + + + tr "[:lower:]" "[:upper:]" <file1 + + This example uses an equivalence class to identify + accented variants of the base character 'e' in file1, + which are stripped of diacritical marks and written to + file2. + + + tr "[=e=]" e <file1 >file2 + +RATIONALE + In some early proposals, an explicit option -n was added + to disable the historical behavior of stripping NUL + characters from the input. It was considered that auto- + matically stripping NUL characters from the input was + not correct functionality. However, the removal of -n + in a later proposal does not remove the requirement that + tr correctly process NUL characters in its input stream. + NUL characters can be stripped by using tr -d '\000'. + + Historical implementations of tr differ widely in syntax + and behavior. For example, the BSD version has not + needed the bracket characters for the repetition + sequence. The tr utility syntax is based more closely on + the System V and XPG3 model while attempting to accommo- + date historical BSD implementations. In the case of the + short string2 padding, the decision was to unspecify the + behavior and preserve System V and XPG3 scripts, which + might find difficulty with the BSD method. The assump- + tion was made that BSD users of tr have to make accommo- + dations to meet the syntax defined here. Since it is + possible to use the repetition sequence to duplicate the + desired behavior, whereas there is no simple way to + achieve the System V method, this was the correct, if + not desirable, approach. + + The use of octal values to specify control characters, + while having historical precedents, is not portable. The + introduction of escape sequences for control characters + should provide the necessary portability. It is recog- + nized that this may cause some historical scripts to + break. + + An early proposal included support for multi-character + collating elements. It was pointed out that, while tr + does employ some syntactical elements from REs, the aim + of tr is quite different; ranges, for example, do not + have a similar meaning (``any of the chars in the range + matches", versus "translate each character in the range + to the output counterpart"). As a result, the previously + included support for multi-character collating elements + has been removed. What remains are ranges in current + collation order (to support, for example, accented char- + acters), character classes, and equivalence classes. + + In XPG3 the [: class:] and [= equiv=] conventions are + shown with double brackets, as in RE syntax. However, tr + does not implement RE principles; it just borrows part + of the syntax. Consequently, [: class:] and [= equiv=] + should be regarded as syntactical elements on a par with + [ x* n], which is not an RE bracket expression. + + The standard developers will consider changes to tr that + allow it to translate characters between different char- + acter encodings, or they will consider providing a new + utility to accomplish this. + + On historical System V systems, a range expression + requires enclosing square-brackets, such as: + + + tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]' + + However, BSD-based systems did not require the brackets, + and this convention is used here to avoid breaking large + numbers of BSD scripts: + + + tr a-z A-Z + + The preceding System V script will continue to work + because the brackets, treated as regular characters, are + translated to themselves. However, any System V script + that relied on "a-z" representing the three characters + 'a' , '-' , and 'z' have to be rewritten as "az-" . + + The ISO POSIX-2:1993 standard had a -c option that + behaved similarly to the -C option, but did not supply + functionality equivalent to the -c option specified in + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. This meant that historical prac- + tice of being able to specify tr -d\200-\377 (which + would delete all bytes with the top bit set) would have + no effect because, in the C locale, bytes with the val- + ues octal 200 to octal 377 are not characters. + + The earlier version also said that octal sequences + referred to collating elements and could be placed adja- + cent to each other to specify multi-byte characters. + However, it was noted that this caused ambiguities + because tr would not be able to tell whether adjacent + octal sequences were intending to specify multi-byte + characters or multiple single byte characters. + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 specifies that octal sequences + always refer to single byte binary values. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + sed + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 tr(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/true.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/true.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0f67bb --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/true.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +true(P) true(P) + + + + + +NAME + true - return true value + +SYNOPSIS + true + +DESCRIPTION + The true utility shall return with exit code zero. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + None. + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + None. + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + Not used. + +STDERR + Not used. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + Zero. + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + None. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + This utility is typically used in shell scripts, as + shown in the EXAMPLES section. The special built-in + utility : is sometimes more efficient than true. + +EXAMPLES + This command is executed forever: + + + while true + do + command + done + +RATIONALE + The true utility has been retained in this volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, even though the shell special + built-in : provides similar functionality, because true + is widely used in historical scripts and is less cryptic + to novice script readers. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + false , Shell Commands + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 true(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tsort.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tsort.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed3eee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tsort.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +tsort(P) tsort(P) + + + + + +NAME + tsort - topological sort + +SYNOPSIS + tsort [file] + +DESCRIPTION + The tsort utility shall write to standard output a + totally ordered list of items consistent with a partial + ordering of items contained in the input. + + The application shall ensure that the input consists of + pairs of items (non-empty strings) separated by + <blank>s. Pairs of different items indicate ordering. + Pairs of identical items indicate presence, but not + ordering. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a text file to order. If no file + operand is given, the standard input shall be + used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be a text file that is used if + no file operand is given. + +INPUT FILES + The input file named by the file operand is a text file. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of tsort: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be a text file consisting of + the order list produced from the partially ordered + input. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The LC_COLLATE variable need not affect the actions of + tsort. The output ordering is not lexicographic, but + depends on the pairs of items given as input. + +EXAMPLES + The command: + + + tsort <<EOF + a b c c d e + g g + f g e f + h h + EOF + + produces the output: + + + a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + None. + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 tsort(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tty.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tty.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21dcb4a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/tty.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +tty(P) tty(P) + + + + + +NAME + tty - return user's terminal name + +SYNOPSIS + tty + +DESCRIPTION + The tty utility shall write to the standard output the + name of the terminal that is open as standard input. The + name that is used shall be equivalent to the string that + would be returned by the ttyname() function defined in + the System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +OPTIONS + The tty utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + +OPERANDS + None. + +STDIN + While no input is read from standard input, standard + input shall be examined to determine whether or not it + is a terminal, and, if so, to determine the name of the + terminal. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of tty: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error and informative + messages written to standard output. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + If standard input is a terminal device, a pathname of + the terminal as specified by the ttyname() function + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 shall be written in the following + format: + + + "%s\n", <terminal name> + + Otherwise, a message shall be written indicating that + standard input is not connected to a terminal. In the + POSIX locale, the tty utility shall use the format: + + + "not a tty\n" + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Standard input is a terminal. + + 1 Standard input is not a terminal. + + >1 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + This utility checks the status of the file open as stan- + dard input against that of an implementation-defined set + of files. It is possible that no match can be found, or + that the match found need not be the same file as that + which was opened for standard input (although they are + the same device). + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + The System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + isatty(), ttyname() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base + Specifications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the + Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc + and The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy + between this version and the original IEEE and The Open + Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard is the referee document. The original Standard + can be obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 tty(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/uname.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/uname.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b98e5a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/uname.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,200 @@ +uname(P) uname(P) + + + + + +NAME + uname - return system name + +SYNOPSIS + uname [-snrvma] + +DESCRIPTION + By default, the uname utility shall write the operating + system name to standard output. When options are speci- + fied, symbols representing one or more system character- + istics shall be written to the standard output. The for- + mat and contents of the symbols are implementation- + defined. On systems conforming to the System Interfaces + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, the symbols written + shall be those supported by the uname() function as + defined in the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001. + +OPTIONS + The uname utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a Behave as though all of the options -mnrsv were + specified. + + -m Write the name of the hardware type on which the + system is running to standard output. + + -n Write the name of this node within an implementa- + tion-defined communications network. + + -r Write the current release level of the operating + system implementation. + + -s Write the name of the implementation of the oper- + ating system. + + -v Write the current version level of this release + of the operating system implementation. + + + If no options are specified, the uname utility shall + write the operating system name, as if the -s option had + been specified. + +OPERANDS + None. + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of uname: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + By default, the output shall be a single line of the + following form: + + + "%s\n", <sysname> + + If the -a option is specified, the output shall be a + single line of the following form: + + + "%s %s %s %s %s\n", <sysname>, <nodename>, <release>, + <version>, <machine> + + Additional implementation-defined symbols may be writ- + ten; all such symbols shall be written at the end of the + line of output before the <newline>. + + If options are specified to select different combina- + tions of the symbols, only those symbols shall be writ- + ten, in the order shown above for the -a option. If a + symbol is not selected for writing, its corresponding + trailing <blank>s also shall not be written. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The requested information was successfully writ- + ten. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + Note that any of the symbols could include embedded + <space>s, which may affect parsing algorithms if multi- + ple options are selected for output. + + The node name is typically a name that the system uses + to identify itself for inter-system communication + addressing. + +EXAMPLES + The following command: + + + uname -sr + + writes the operating system name and release level, sep- + arated by one or more <blank>s. + +RATIONALE + It was suggested that this utility cannot be used + portably since the format of the symbols is implementa- + tion-defined. The POSIX.1 working group could not + achieve consensus on defining these formats in the + underlying uname() function, and there was no expecta- + tion that this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 would be + any more successful. Some applications may still find + this historical utility of value. For example, the sym- + bols could be used for system log entries or for compar- + ison with operator or user input. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + The System Interfaces volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + uname() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 uname(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/unexpand.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/unexpand.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..33b5f9e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/unexpand.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,200 @@ +unexpand(P) unexpand(P) + + + + + +NAME + unexpand - convert spaces to tabs + +SYNOPSIS + unexpand [ -a| -t tablist][file...]<img + src="../images/opt-end.gif" alt="[Option End]" bor- + der="0"> + +DESCRIPTION + The unexpand utility shall copy files or standard input + to standard output, converting <blank>s at the beginning + of each line into the maximum number of <tab>s followed + by the minimum number of <space>s needed to fill the + same column positions originally filled by the trans- + lated <blank>s. By default, tabstops shall be set at + every eighth column position. Each <backspace> shall be + copied to the output, and shall cause the column posi- + tion count for tab calculations to be decremented; the + count shall never be decremented to a value less than + one. + +OPTIONS + The unexpand utility shall conform to the Base Defini- + tions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, + Utility Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -a In addition to translating <blank>s at the begin- + ning of each line, translate all sequences of two + or more <blank>s immediately preceding a tab stop + to the maximum number of <tab>s followed by the + minimum number of <space>s needed to fill the + same column positions originally filled by the + translated <blank>s. + + -t tablist + Specify the tab stops. The application shall + ensure that the tablist option-argument is a sin- + gle argument consisting of a single positive dec- + imal integer or multiple positive decimal inte- + gers, separated by <blank>s or commas, in ascend- + ing order. If a single number is given, tabs + shall be set tablist column positions apart + instead of the default 8. If multiple numbers are + given, the tabs shall be set at those specific + column positions. + + The application shall ensure that each tab-stop position + N is an integer value greater than zero, and the list + shall be in strictly ascending order. This is taken to + mean that, from the start of a line of output, tabbing + to position N shall cause the next character output to + be in the ( N+1)th column position on that line. When + the -t option is not specified, the default shall be the + equivalent of specifying -t 8 (except for the interac- + tion with -a, described below). + + No <space>-to- <tab> conversions shall occur for charac- + ters at positions beyond the last of those specified in + a multiple tab-stop list. + + When -t is specified, the presence or absence of the -a + option shall be ignored; conversion shall not be limited + to the processing of leading <blank>s. + + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of a text file to be used as input. + + +STDIN + See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files shall be text files. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of unexpand: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files), + the processing of <tab>s and <space>s, and for + the determination of the width in column posi- + tions each character would occupy on an output + device. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be equivalent to the input + files with the specified <space>-to- <tab> conversions. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + One non-intuitive aspect of unexpand is its restriction + to leading spaces when neither -a nor -t is specified. + Users who always want to convert all spaces in a file + can easily alias unexpand to use the -a or -t 8 option. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + On several occasions, consideration was given to adding + a -t option to the unexpand utility to complement the -t + in expand (see expand ). The historical intent of unex- + pand was to translate multiple <blank>s into tab stops, + where tab stops were a multiple of eight column posi- + tions on most UNIX systems. An early proposal omitted -t + because it seemed outside the scope of the User Porta- + bility Utilities option; it was not described in any of + the base documents. However, hard-coding tab stops + every eight columns was not suitable for the interna- + tional community and broke historical precedents for + some vendors in the FORTRAN community, so -t was + restored in conjunction with the list of valid extension + categories considered by the standard developers. Thus, + unexpand is now the logical converse of expand. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + expand , tabs + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 unexpand(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/uniq.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/uniq.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7edbe50 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/uniq.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ +uniq(P) uniq(P) + + + + + +NAME + uniq - report or filter out repeated lines in a file + +SYNOPSIS + uniq [-c|-d|-u][-f fields][-s char][input_file [out- + put_file]] + +DESCRIPTION + The uniq utility shall read an input file comparing + adjacent lines, and write one copy of each input line on + the output. The second and succeeding copies of + repeated adjacent input lines shall not be written. + + Repeated lines in the input shall not be detected if + they are not adjacent. + +OPTIONS + The uniq utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -c Precede each output line with a count of the num- + ber of times the line occurred in the input. + + -d Suppress the writing of lines that are not + repeated in the input. + + -f fields + Ignore the first fields fields on each input line + when doing comparisons, where fields is a posi- + tive decimal integer. A field is the maximal + string matched by the basic regular expression: + + + [[:blank:]]*[^[:blank:]]* + + If the fields option-argument specifies more fields than + appear on an input line, a null string shall be used for + comparison. + + -s chars + Ignore the first chars characters when doing com- + parisons, where chars shall be a positive decimal + integer. If specified in conjunction with the -f + option, the first chars characters after the + first fields fields shall be ignored. If the + chars option-argument specifies more characters + than remain on an input line, a null string shall + be used for comparison. + + -u Suppress the writing of lines that are repeated + in the input. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + input_file + A pathname of the input file. If the input_file + operand is not specified, or if the input_file is + '-' , the standard input shall be used. + + output_file + A pathname of the output file. If the output_file + operand is not specified, the standard output + shall be used. The results are unspecified if the + file named by output_file is the file named by + input_file. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no input_file + operand is specified or if input_file is '-' . See the + INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input file shall be a text file. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of uniq: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_COLLATE + + Determine the locale for ordering rules. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files) and + which characters constitute a <blank> in the cur- + rent locale. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The standard output shall be used only if no output_file + operand is specified. See the OUTPUT FILES section. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + If the -c option is specified, the output file shall be + empty or each line shall be of the form: + + + "%d %s", <number of duplicates>, <line> + + otherwise, the output file shall be empty or each line + shall be of the form: + + + "%s", <line> + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 The utility executed successfully. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The sort utility can be used to cause repeated lines to + be adjacent in the input file. + +EXAMPLES + The following input file data (but flushed left) was + used for a test series on uniq: + + + #01 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + #02 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo1 + #03 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + #04 + #05 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + #06 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + #07 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0 + + What follows is a series of test invocations of the uniq + utility that use a mixture of uniq options against the + input file data. These tests verify the meaning of adja- + cent. The uniq utility views the input data as a + sequence of strings delimited by '\n' . Accordingly, for + the fieldsth member of the sequence, uniq interprets + unique or repeated adjacent lines strictly relative to + the fields+1th member. + + This first example tests the line counting option, com- + paring each line of the input file data starting from + the second field: + + + uniq -c -f 1 uniq_0I.t + 1 #01 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + 1 #02 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0 + 1 #03 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + 1 #04 + 2 #05 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + 1 #07 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0 + + The number '2' , prefixing the fifth line of output, + signifies that the uniq utility detected a pair of + repeated lines. Given the input data, this can only be + true when uniq is run using the -f 1 option (which shall + cause uniq to ignore the first field on each input + line). + + The second example tests the option to suppress unique + lines, comparing each line of the input file data start- + ing from the second field: + + + uniq -d -f 1 uniq_0I.t + #05 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + + This test suppresses repeated lines, comparing each line + of the input file data starting from the second field: + + + uniq -u -f 1 uniq_0I.t + #01 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + #02 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo1 + #03 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1 + #04 + #07 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0 + + This suppresses unique lines, comparing each line of the + input file data starting from the third character: + + + uniq -d -s 2 uniq_0I.t + + In the last example, the uniq utility found no input + matching the above criteria. + +RATIONALE + Some historical implementations have limited lines to be + 1080 bytes in length, which does not meet the implied + {LINE_MAX} limit. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + comm , sort + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 uniq(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/unlink.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/unlink.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4408f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/unlink.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +unlink(P) unlink(P) + + + + + +NAME + unlink - call the unlink function + +SYNOPSIS + unlink file + +DESCRIPTION + The unlink utility shall perform the function call: + + + unlink(file); + + A user may need appropriate privilege to invoke the + unlink utility. + +OPTIONS + None. + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + file The pathname of an existing file. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + Not used. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of unlink: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + None. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + None. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + None. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + link() , rm , the System Interfaces volume of + IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, unlink() + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 unlink(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/wc.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/wc.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..abe1c51 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/wc.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +wc(P) wc(P) + + + + + +NAME + wc - word, line, and byte or character count + +SYNOPSIS + wc [-c|-m][-lw][file...] + +DESCRIPTION + The wc utility shall read one or more input files and, + by default, write the number of <newline>s, words, and + bytes contained in each input file to the standard out- + put. + + The utility also shall write a total count for all named + files, if more than one input file is specified. + + The wc utility shall consider a word to be a non-zero- + length string of characters delimited by white space. + +OPTIONS + The wc utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported: + + -c Write to the standard output the number of bytes + in each input file. + + -l Write to the standard output the number of <new- + line>s in each input file. + + -m Write to the standard output the number of char- + acters in each input file. + + -w Write to the standard output the number of words + in each input file. + + + When any option is specified, wc shall report only the + information requested by the specified options. + +OPERANDS + The following operand shall be supported: + + file A pathname of an input file. If no file operands + are specified, the standard input shall be used. + + +STDIN + The standard input shall be used only if no file oper- + ands are specified. See the INPUT FILES section. + +INPUT FILES + The input files may be of any type. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of wc: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments and input files) and + which characters are defined as white space char- + acters. + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error and informative + messages written to standard output. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + By default, the standard output shall contain an entry + for each input file of the form: + + + "%d %d %d %s\n", <newlines>, <words>, <bytes>, <file> + + If the -m option is specified, the number of characters + shall replace the <bytes> field in this format. + + If any options are specified and the -l option is not + specified, the number of <newline>s shall not be writ- + ten. + + If any options are specified and the -w option is not + specified, the number of words shall not be written. + + If any options are specified and neither -c nor -m is + specified, the number of bytes or characters shall not + be written. + + If no input file operands are specified, no name shall + be written and no <blank>s preceding the pathname shall + be written. + + If more than one input file operand is specified, an + additional line shall be written, of the same format as + the other lines, except that the word total (in the + POSIX locale) shall be written instead of a pathname and + the total of each column shall be written as appropri- + ate. Such an additional line, if any, is written at the + end of the output. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The -m option is not a switch, but an option at the same + level as -c. Thus, to produce the full default output + with character counts instead of bytes, the command + required is: + + + wc -mlw + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + The output file format pseudo- printf() string differs + from the System V version of wc: + + + "%7d%7d%7d %s\n" + + which produces possibly ambiguous and unparsable results + for very large files, as it assumes no number shall + exceed six digits. + + Some historical implementations use only <space>, <tab>, + and <newline> as word separators. The equivalent of the + ISO C standard isspace() function is more appropriate. + + The -c option stands for "character" count, even though + it counts bytes. This stems from the sometimes erroneous + historical view that bytes and characters are the same + size. Due to international requirements, the -m option + (reminiscent of "multi-byte") was added to obtain actual + character counts. + + Early proposals only specified the results when input + files were text files. The current specification more + closely matches historical practice. (Bytes, words, and + <newline>s are counted separately and the results are + written when an end-of-file is detected.) + + Historical implementations of the wc utility only + accepted one argument to specify the options -c, -l, and + -w. Some of them also had multiple occurrences of an + option cause the corresponding count to be written mul- + tiple times and had the order of specification of the + options affect the order of the fields on output, but + did not document either of these. Because common usage + either specifies no options or only one option, and + because none of this was documented, the changes + required by this volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001 should + not break many historical applications (and do not break + any historical conforming applications). + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + cksum + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 wc(P) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/who.1p.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/who.1p.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e57b93a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1p/who.1p.txt @@ -0,0 +1,296 @@ +who(P) who(P) + + + + + +NAME + who - display who is on the system + +SYNOPSIS + who [-mTu] + + + + who [-mu]-s[-bHlprt][file] + + who [-mTu][-abdHlprt][file] + + who -q [file] + + who am i + + who am I + + +DESCRIPTION + The who utility shall list various pieces of information + about accessible users. The domain of accessibility is + implementation-defined. + + Based on the options given, who can also list the user's + name, terminal line, login time, elapsed time since + activity occurred on the line, and the process ID of the + command interpreter for each current system user. + +OPTIONS + The who utility shall conform to the Base Definitions + volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, Section 12.2, Utility + Syntax Guidelines. + + The following options shall be supported. The metavari- + ables, such as <line>, refer to fields described in the + STDOUT section. + + -a Process the implementation-defined database or + named file with the -b, -d, -l, -p, -r, -t, -T + and -u options turned on. + + -b Write the time and date of the last reboot. + + -d Write a list of all processes that have expired + and not been respawned by the init system + process. The <exit> field shall appear for dead + processes and contain the termination and exit + values of the dead process. This can be useful in + determining why a process terminated. + + -H Write column headings above the regular output. + + -l (The letter ell.) List only those lines on which + the system is waiting for someone to login. The + <name> field shall be LOGIN in such cases. Other + fields shall be the same as for user entries + except that the <state> field does not exist. + + -m Output only information about the current termi- + nal. + + -p List any other process that is currently active + and has been previously spawned by init. + + -q (Quick.) List only the names and the number of + users currently logged on. When this option is + used, all other options shall be ignored. + + -r Write the current run-level of the init process. + + -s List only the <name>, <line>, and <time> fields. + This is the default case. + + -t Indicate the last change to the system clock. + + -T Show the state of each terminal, as described in + the STDOUT section. + + -u Write "idle time" for each displayed user in + addition to any other information. The idle time + is the time since any activity occurred on the + user's terminal. The method of determining this + is unspecified. This option shall list only + those users who are currently logged in. The + <name> is the user's login name. The <line> is + the name of the line as found in the directory + /dev. The <time> is the time that the user logged + in. The <activity> is the number of hours and + minutes since activity last occurred on that par- + ticular line. A dot indicates that the terminal + has seen activity in the last minute and is + therefore "current". If more than twenty-four + hours have elapsed or the line has not been used + since boot time, the entry shall be marked <old>. + This field is useful when trying to determine + whether a person is working at the terminal or + not. The <pid> is the process ID of the user's + login process. + + +OPERANDS + The following operands shall be supported: + + am i, am I + In the POSIX locale, limit the output to describ- + ing the invoking user, equivalent to the -m + option. The am and i or I must be separate argu- + ments. + + file Specify a pathname of a file to substitute for + the implementation-defined database of logged-on + users that who uses by default. + + +STDIN + Not used. + +INPUT FILES + None. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + The following environment variables shall affect the + execution of who: + + LANG Provide a default value for the internationaliza- + tion variables that are unset or null. (See the + Base Definitions volume of IEEE Std 1003.1-2001, + Section 8.2, Internationalization Variables for + the precedence of internationalization variables + used to determine the values of locale cate- + gories.) + + LC_ALL If set to a non-empty string value, override the + values of all the other internationalization + variables. + + LC_CTYPE + Determine the locale for the interpretation of + sequences of bytes of text data as characters + (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi- + byte characters in arguments). + + LC_MESSAGES + Determine the locale that should be used to + affect the format and contents of diagnostic mes- + sages written to standard error. + + LC_TIME + Determine the locale used for the format and con- + tents of the date and time strings. + + NLSPATH + Determine the location of message catalogs for + the processing of LC_MESSAGES . + + TZ Determine the timezone used when writing date and + time information. If TZ is unset or null, an + unspecified default timezone shall be used. + + +ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS + Default. + +STDOUT + The who utility shall write its default format to the + standard output in an implementation-defined format, + subject only to the requirement of containing the infor- + mation described above. + + XSI-conformant systems shall write the default informa- + tion to the standard output in the following general + format: + + + <name>[<state>]<line><time>[<activity>][<pid>][<comment>][<exit>] <img + src="../images/opt-end.gif" border="0"> + + The following format shall be used for the -T option: + + + "%s %c %s %s\n" <name>, <terminal state>, <terminal name>, + <time of login> + + where <terminal state> is one of the following charac- + ters: + + + The terminal allows write access to other users. + + - The terminal denies write access to other users. + + ? The terminal write-access state cannot be deter- + mined. + + + In the POSIX locale, the <time of login> shall be equiv- + alent in format to the output of: + + + date +"%b %e %H:%M" + + If the -u option is used with -T, the idle time shall be + added to the end of the previous format in an unspeci- + fied format. + +STDERR + The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic + messages. + +OUTPUT FILES + None. + +EXTENDED DESCRIPTION + None. + +EXIT STATUS + The following exit values shall be returned: + + 0 Successful completion. + + >0 An error occurred. + + +CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS + Default. + + The following sections are informative. + +APPLICATION USAGE + The name init used for the system process is the most + commonly used on historical systems, but it may vary. + + The "domain of accessibility" referred to is a broad + concept that permits interpretation either on a very + secure basis or even to allow a network-wide implementa- + tion like the historical rwho. + +EXAMPLES + None. + +RATIONALE + Due to differences between historical implementations, + the base options provided were a compromise to allow + users to work with those functions. The standard devel- + opers also considered removing all the options, but felt + that these options offered users valuable functionality. + Additional options to match historical systems are + available on XSI-conformant systems. + + It is recognized that the who command may be of limited + usefulness, especially in a multi-level secure environ- + ment. The standard developers considered, however, that + having some standard method of determining the "accessi- + bility" of other users would aid user portability. + + No format was specified for the default who output for + systems not supporting the XSI Extension. In such a + user-oriented command, designed only for human use, this + was not considered to be a deficiency. + + The format of the terminal name is unspecified, but the + descriptions of ps, talk, and write require that they + use the same format. + + It is acceptable for an implementation to produce no + output for an invocation of who mil. + +FUTURE DIRECTIONS + None. + +SEE ALSO + mesg + +COPYRIGHT + Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in + electronic form from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2003 Edition, + Standard for Information Technology -- Portable Operat- + ing System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base Speci- + fications Issue 6, Copyright (C) 2001-2003 by the Insti- + tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and + The Open Group. In the event of any discrepancy between + this version and the original IEEE and The Open Group + Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard + is the referee document. The original Standard can be + obtained online at http://www.open- + group.org/unix/online.html . + + + +POSIX 2003 who(P) |